Garmin | G1000 NXi: Mooney M20U | Garmin G1000 NXi: Mooney M20U Pilot's Guide, G1000 NXi Mooney M20U & M20V

Garmin G1000 NXi: Mooney M20U Pilot's Guide, G1000 NXi Mooney M20U & M20V
®
G1000
Pilot’s Guide
Garmin (Europe) Ltd.
Liberty House, Hounsdown Business Park
Southampton, Hampshire SO40 9LR U.K.
Garmin AT, Inc.
2345 Turner Road SE
Salem, OR 97302, U.S.A.
Garmin Corporation
No. 68, Zhangshu 2nd Road
Xizhi District, New Taipei City, Taiwan
www.flygarmin.com
Mooney M20U & M20V
Garmin International, Inc.
1200 East 151st Street
Olathe, Kansas 66062, U.S.A.
190-02284-00
Revision A
®
Pilot’s Guide
Mooney M20U & M20V
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL & CNS
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Copyright © 2017 Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
This manual reflects the operation of System Software version 2871.01 or later for the G1000 NXi Mooney M20U & M20V. Some
differences in operation may be observed when comparing the information in this manual to earlier or later software versions.
Garmin International, Inc.
1200 East 151st Street
Olathe, Kansas 66062, U.S.A.
Garmin (Europe) Ltd.
Liberty House, Hounsdown Business Park
Southampton, Hampshire SO40 9LR U.K.
Garmin AT, Inc.
2345 Turner Road SE
Salem, OR 97302, U.S.A.
Garmin Corporation
No. 68, Zhangshu 2nd Road
Xizhi District, New Taipei City, Taiwan
Contact Garmin Product Support at www.flygarmin.com.
For warranty information refer to www.flygarmin.com.
Except as expressly provided herein, no part of this manual may be reproduced, copied, transmitted, disseminated, downloaded or stored
in any storage medium, for any purpose without the express written permission of Garmin. Garmin hereby grants permission to download
a single copy of this manual and of any revision to this manual onto a hard drive or other electronic storage medium to be viewed for
personal use, provided that such electronic or printed copy of this manual or revision must contain the complete text of this copyright notice
and provided further that any unauthorized commercial distribution of this manual or any revision hereto is strictly prohibited.
Garmin®, G1000® NXi, WATCH®, and SafeTaxi® are registered trademarks of Garmin International, Inc. or its subsidiaries. Garmin SVT™
and Connext™ are trademarks of Garmin International, Inc. or its subsidiaries. These trademarks may not be used without the express
permission of Garmin.
Stormscope® is a registered trademarks of L-3 Communications. Ryan®, TCAD® and Avidyne® are registered trademarks of Avidyne
Corporation. AC-U-KWIK® is a registered trademark of Penton Business Media Inc. Bendix/King® and Honeywell® are registered trademarks
of Honeywell International, Inc. Becker® is a registered trademark of Becker Flugfunkwerk GmbH. NavData® is a registered trademark
of Jeppesen, Inc. Wi-Fi® is a registered trademark of the Wi-Fi Alliance. SiriusXM Weather and SiriusXM Satellite Radio are provided by
SiriusXM Satellite Radio, Inc. The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by
Garmin is under license.
AOPA Membership Publications, Inc. and its related organizations (hereinafter collectively “AOPA”) expressly disclaim all warranties,
with respect to the AOPA information included in this data, express or implied, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties
of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. The information is provided “as is” and AOPA does not warrant or make any
representations regarding its accuracy, reliability, or otherwise. Under no circumstances including negligence, shall AOPA be liable for any
incidental, special or consequential damages that result from the use or inability to use the software or related documentation, even if
AOPA or an AOPA authorized representative has been advised of the possibility of such damages. User agrees not to sue AOPA and, to
the maximum extent allowed by law, to release and hold harmless AOPA from any causes of action, claims or losses related to any actual
or alleged inaccuracies in the information. Some jurisdictions do not allow the limitation or exclusion of implied warranties or liability for
incidental or consequential damages so the above limitations or exclusions may not apply to you.
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
AC-U-KWIK and its related organizations (hereafter collectively “AC-U-KWIK Organizations”) expressly disclaim all warranties with
respect to the AC-U-KWIK information included in this data, express or implied, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties of
merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. The information is provided “as is” and AC-U-KWIK Organizations do not warrant or
make any representations regarding its accuracy, reliability, or otherwise. Licensee agrees not to sue AC-U-KWIK Organizations and, to the
maximum extent allowed by law, to release and hold harmless AC-U-KWIK Organizations from any cause of action, claims or losses related
to any actual or alleged inaccuracies in the information arising out of Garmin’s use of the information in the datasets. Some jurisdictions
do not allow the limitation or exclusion of implied warranties or liability for incidental or consequential damages so the above limitations
or exclusions may not apply to licensee.
Printed in the U.S.A.
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES
WARNING: Do not use terrain avoidance displays as the sole source of information for maintaining separation
from terrain and obstacles. Garmin obtains terrain and obstacle data from third party sources and cannot
independently verify the accuracy of the information.
WARNING: Always refer to current aeronautical charts and NOTAMs for verification of displayed aeronautical
information. Displayed aeronautical data may not incorporate the latest NOTAM information.
WARNING: Do not use geometric altitude for compliance with air traffic control altitude requirements. The
primary barometric altimeter must be used for compliance with all air traffic control altitude regulations,
requirements, instructions, and clearances.
WARNING: Do not use basemap information (land and water data) as the sole means of navigation. Basemap
data is intended only to supplement other approved navigation data sources and should be considered only
an aid to enhance situational awareness.
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information to accurately depict all of the traffic
within range of the aircraft. Due to lack of equipment, poor signal reception, and/or inaccurate information
from aircraft or ground stations, traffic may be present that is not represented on the display.
WARNING: Do not use data link weather information for maneuvering in, near, or around areas of hazardous
weather. Information contained within data link weather products may not accurately depict current
weather conditions.
WARNING: Do not use the indicated data link weather product age to determine the age of the weather
information shown by the data link weather product. Due to time delays inherent in gathering and processing
weather data for data link transmission, the weather information shown by the data link weather product
may be older than the indicated weather product age.
WARNING: The displayed minimum safe altitude (MSAs) are only advisory in nature and should not be relied
upon as the sole source of obstacle and terrain avoidance information. Always refer to current aeronautical
charts for appropriate minimum clearance altitudes.
WARNING: Always obtain qualified instruction prior to operational use of this equipment.
WARNING: Do not use a QFE altimeter setting with this system. System functions will not operate properly
with a QFE altimeter setting. Use only a QNH altimeter setting for height above mean sea level, or the
standard pressure setting, as applicable.
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
v
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES
WARNING: Do not use GPS to navigate to any active waypoint identified as a ‘NON WGS84 WPT’ by a
system message. ‘NON WGS84 WPT’ waypoints are derived from an unknown map reference datum that
may be incompatible with the map reference datum used by GPS (known as WGS84) and may be positioned
in error as displayed.
WARNING: When using the autopilot to fly an approach with vertical guidance, the autopilot will not level
the aircraft at the MDA/DH even if the MDA/DH is set in the altitude preselect.
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information for collision avoidance maneuvering.
The traffic display does not provide collision avoidance resolution advisories and does not under any
circumstances or conditions relieve the pilot’s responsibility to see and avoid other aircraft.
WARNING: Because of variation in the earth’s magnetic field, do not rely on the accuracy of attitude and
heading indications in the following geographic areas: North of 72° North latitude at all longitudes; South
of 70° South latitude at all longitudes; North of 65° North latitude between longitude 75° W and 120° W.
(Northern Canada); North of 70° North latitude between longitude 70° W and 128° W. (Northern Canada);
North of 70° North latitude between longitude 85° E and 114° E. (Northern Russia); South of 55° South
latitude between longitude 120° E and 165° E. (Region south of Australia and New Zealand).
WARNING: Do not rely on information from a lightning detection system display as the sole basis for hazardous
weather avoidance. Range limitations and interference may cause the system to display inaccurate or
incomplete information. Refer to documentation from the lightning detection system manufacturer for
detailed information about the system.
WARNING: Use appropriate primary systems for navigation, and for terrain, obstacle, and traffic avoidance.
Garmin SVT is intended as an aid to situational awareness only and may not provide either the accuracy or
reliability upon which to solely base decisions and/or plan maneuvers to avoid terrain, obstacles, or traffic.
WARNING: Intruder aircraft at or below 500 ft. AGL may not appear on the Garmin SVT display or may
appear as a partial symbol.
WARNING: Do not use the Garmin SVT runway depiction as the sole means for determining the proximity of
the aircraft to the runway or for maintaining the proper approach path angle during landing.
WARNING: Do not use TAWS information for primary terrain or obstacle avoidance. TAWS is intended only
to enhance situational awareness.
vi
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES
CAUTION: Do not clean display surfaces with abrasive cloths or cleaners containing ammonia. They will
harm the anti-reflective coating.
CAUTION: Repairs should only be made by an authorized Garmin service center. Unauthorized repairs or
modifications could void both the warranty and affect the airworthiness of the aircraft.
NOTE: Do not rely solely upon data link services to provide Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR) information.
Always confirm TFR information through official sources such as Flight Service Stations or Air Traffic Control.
NOTE: All visual depictions contained within this document, including screen images of the system panel
and displays, are subject to change and may not reflect the most current system and aviation databases.
Depictions of equipment may differ slightly from the actual equipment.
NOTE: The United States government operates the Global Positioning System and is solely responsible for
its accuracy and maintenance. The GPS system is subject to changes which could affect the accuracy and
performance of all GPS equipment. Portions of the system utilize GPS as a precision electronic NAVigation
AID (NAVAID). Therefore, as with all NAVAIDs, information presented by the system can be misused or
misinterpreted and, therefore, become unsafe.
NOTE: This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Interference from GPS repeaters operating inside nearby hangars can cause an intermittent loss of
attitude and heading displays while the aircraft is on the ground. Moving the aircraft more than 100 yards
away from the source of the interference should alleviate the condition.
NOTE: Use of polarized eyewear may cause the flight displays to appear dim or blank.
NOTE: This product, its packaging, and its components contain chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer, birth defects, or reproductive harm. This notice is being provided in accordance with
California’s Proposition 65. If you have any questions or would like additional information, please refer to
our web site at www.garmin.com/prop65.
NOTE: Operating the system in the vicinity of metal buildings, metal structures, or electromagnetic fields
can cause sensor differences that may result in nuisance miscompare annunciations during start up, shut
down, or while taxiing. If one or more of the sensed values are unavailable, the annunciation indicates no
comparison is possible.
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
vii
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES
NOTE: The system responds to a terminal procedure based on data coded within that procedure in the
Navigation Database. Differences in system operation may be observed among similar types of procedures
due to differences in the Navigation Database coding specific to each procedure.
NOTE: The FAA has asked Garmin to remind pilots who fly with Garmin database-dependent avionics of the
following:
• It is the pilot’s responsibility to remain familiar with all FAA regulatory and advisory guidance and information
related to the use of databases in the National Airspace System.
• Garmin equipment will only recognize and use databases that are obtained from Garmin or Jeppesen. Databases
obtained from Garmin or Jeppesen that have a Type 2 Letter of Authorization (LOA) from the FAA are assured
compliance with all data quality requirements (DQRs). A copy of the Type 2 LOA is available for each applicable
database and can be viewed at http://fly.garmin.com by selecting ‘Aviation Database Declarations.’
• Use of a current Garmin or Jeppesen database in your Garmin equipment is required for compliance with
established FAA regulatory guidance, but does not constitute authorization to fly any and all terminal procedures
that may be presented by the system. It is the pilot’s responsibility to operate in accordance with established
AFM(S) and regulatory guidance or limitations as applicable to the pilot, the aircraft, and installed equipment.
NOTE: The pilot/operator must review and be familiar with Garmin’s database exclusion list as discussed in
SAIB CE-14-04 to determine what data may be incomplete. The database exclusion list can be viewed at
www.flygarmin.com by selecting ‘Database Exclusions List.’
NOTE: The pilot/operator must have access to Garmin and Jeppesen database alerts and consider their
impact on the intended aircraft operation. The database alerts can be viewed at www.flygarmin.com by
selecting ‘Aviation Database Alerts.’
NOTE: If the pilot/operator wants or needs to adjust the database, contact Garmin Product Support.
NOTE: Garmin requests the flight crew report any observed discrepancies related to database information.
These discrepancies could come in the form of an incorrect procedure; incorrectly identified terrain, obstacles
and fixes; or any other displayed item used for navigation or communication in the air or on the ground. Go
to FlyGarmin.com and select ‘Aviation Data Error Report’.
NOTE: The system supports approval of AC 120-76C Hardware Class 3, Software Type B Electronic Flight Bag
(EFB) electronic aeronautical chart applications. Possible additional requirements may make a secondary
source (traditional paper or additional electronic display) necessary onboard the aircraft. If the secondary
source is a Portable Electronic Device (PED), its use must be consistent with guidance in AC 120-76C.
viii
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES
NOTE: When using Stormscope, there are several atmospheric phenomena in addition to nearby thunderstorms
that can cause isolated discharge points in the strike display mode. However, clusters of two or more
discharge points in the strike display mode do indicate thunderstorm activity if these points reappear after
the screen has been cleared.
NOTE: Operate the G1000 NXi system power through at least one cycle in a period of four days of continuous
operation to avoid an autonomous system reboot.
NOTE: The navigation databases used in Garmin navigation systems contain Special Procedures. Prior
to flying these procedures, pilots must have specific FAA authorization, training, and possession of the
corresponding current, and legitimately-sourced chart (approach plate, etc.). Inclusion of the Special
Procedure in the navigation database DOES NOT imply specific FAA authorization to fly the procedure.
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
ix
REVISION INFORMATION
Record of Revisions
Part Number
190-02284-00
x
Revision
A
Date
8/7/17
Page Range
Description
i – I-6
Initial Release at GDU 20.11
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
SECTION 1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW
System Description.................................................... 1
Line Replaceable Units (LRU).......................................... 1
System Controls......................................................... 4
PFD/MFD Controls......................................................... 4
MFD/PFD Control Unit.................................................... 7
Secure Digital Cards....................................................... 9
System Operation.................................................... 10
System Power-up......................................................... 10
Normal Operation........................................................ 11
Reversionary Mode...................................................... 11
System Annunciations.................................................. 12
System Status.............................................................. 14
AHRS Operation.......................................................... 15
GPS Receiver Operation............................................... 16
Accessing System Functionality............................. 21
Softkey Function.......................................................... 21
Menus........................................................................ 26
MFD Page Groups........................................................ 27
System Settings........................................................... 30
System Utilities............................................................ 38
Display Backlighting................................................ 42
SECTION 2 FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
2.1 Flight Instruments.................................................... 46
Attitude Indicator........................................................ 46
Airspeed Indicator....................................................... 47
Altimeter.................................................................... 49
Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI)........................................ 51
Vertical Deviation........................................................ 51
Vertical Navigation (VNV) Indications............................ 53
Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI)............................... 54
Course Deviation Indicator (CDI)................................... 57
2.2 Supplemental Flight Data....................................... 66
Generic Timer.............................................................. 66
Temperature Displays................................................... 66
Wind Data.................................................................. 67
2.3 PFD Annunciations and Alerting Functions........... 68
Altitude Alerting.......................................................... 68
Low Altitude Annunciation........................................... 68
Marker Beacon Annunciations...................................... 69
Minimum Descent Altitude/Decision Height Alerting....... 69
190-02284-00 Rev. A
2.4 Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT)......................... 71
SVT Operation............................................................. 72
SVT Features............................................................... 74
Field of View............................................................... 82
2.5 Abnormal Operations.............................................. 84
Abnormal GPS Conditions............................................ 84
Unusual Attitudes........................................................ 85
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
SECTION 3 ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
EIS Display................................................................ 88
Engine Page.............................................................. 90
Fuel Calculations......................................................... 92
Leaning Assist Mode................................................ 93
EIS Display in Reversionary Mode......................... 94
Lean Display............................................................... 95
System Display............................................................ 96
SECTION 4 AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
Overview................................................................... 97
Audio Panel Volume Control......................................... 97
PFD Controls and Frequency Display.............................. 98
Audio Panel Controls................................................. 100
MFD/PFD Control Unit................................................ 102
COM Operation...................................................... 104
COM Transceiver Manual Tuning................................. 105
Auto-Tuning the COM Frequency................................. 105
Frequency Spacing.................................................... 108
NAV Operation....................................................... 110
NAV Tuning Boxes..................................................... 110
NAV Radio Selection and Activation............................ 111
NAV Receiver Manual Tuning...................................... 111
Auto-Tuning a NAV Frequency from the MFD............... 112
Marker Beacon Receiver............................................. 114
ADF/DME Tuning....................................................... 115
Mode S Transponder.............................................. 118
Transponder Controls................................................. 118
Transponder Mode Selection....................................... 119
Entering a Transponder Code...................................... 120
IDENT Function......................................................... 121
Flight ID Reporting.................................................... 122
Additional Audio Panel Functions........................ 123
Power-Up.................................................................. 123
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
xi
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Mono/Stereo Headsets............................................... 123
Speaker.................................................................... 123
Intercom................................................................... 123
Passenger Address (PA) System................................... 125
Clearance Recorder and Player.................................... 125
Split COM................................................................. 126
Entertainment Inputs................................................. 126
Along Track Offsets.................................................... 212
Parallel Track............................................................. 213
Activating a Flight Plan Leg........................................ 215
Inverting a Flight Plan................................................ 215
Flight Plan Views....................................................... 216
Closest Point of FPL................................................... 217
User-Defined Holding Patterns.................................... 218
4.6 Audio Panel Preflight Procedure.......................... 128
4.7 Abnormal Operation.............................................. 129
Stuck Microphone...................................................... 129
COM Tuning Failure.................................................... 129
Audio Panel Fail-Safe Operation.................................. 129
Reversionary Mode.................................................... 129
5.7 Vertical Navigation................................................ 223
Altitude Constraints................................................... 225
Vertical Situation Display (VSD)................................... 228
5.8 Procedures.............................................................. 232
Departures................................................................ 234
Arrivals .................................................................... 236
Approaches .............................................................. 238
5.9 Trip Planning........................................................... 248
Trip Planning............................................................. 248
5.10 Abnormal Operation.............................................. 252
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
xii
SECTION 5 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Introduction............................................................ 131
Navigation Status Box and Data Bar............................ 133
Using Map Displays............................................... 135
Map Orientation........................................................ 135
Map Range............................................................... 137
Map Panning............................................................. 139
Measuring Bearing and Distance................................. 142
Topography............................................................... 143
Map Symbols............................................................ 145
Airways.................................................................... 150
Additional Navigation Map Items................................ 152
Waypoints............................................................... 155
Airports.................................................................... 156
Intersections............................................................. 163
NDBs........................................................................ 165
VORs........................................................................ 167
VRPs........................................................................ 169
User Waypoints......................................................... 171
Airspaces................................................................. 176
Direct-to Navigation ............................................. 180
Flight Planning....................................................... 185
Flight Plan Creation................................................... 186
Flight Plan Import/Export........................................... 190
Adding Waypoints to an Existing Flight Plan................. 195
Adding Airways to a Flight Plan.................................. 197
Adding Procedures to a Stored Flight Plan................... 199
Flight Plan Storage.................................................... 206
Flight Plan Editing..................................................... 208
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
SECTION 6 HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Data Link Weather................................................. 256
Activating Data Link Weather Services......................... 256
Weather Product Age................................................. 258
Displaying Data Link Weather Products........................ 260
Weather Product Overview......................................... 268
FIS-B Weather Status................................................. 298
Stormscope Lightning Detection System............ 300
Using the Stormscope Page........................................ 300
Stormscope Map Overlays.......................................... 302
Terrain Displays...................................................... 304
Relative Terrain Symbology......................................... 305
Terrain Page.............................................................. 309
Vertical Situation Display (VSD) Terrain........................ 310
Terrain-SVT and TAWS-B Alerting Displays.................... 312
Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance............................. 315
Additional TAWS-B Alerting........................................ 316
Inhibiting Alerting...................................................... 319
System Status............................................................ 319
TAS Traffic................................................................ 322
Theory of Operation................................................... 322
TAS Alerts................................................................. 325
System Test............................................................... 326
Operation................................................................. 327
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
TABLE OF CONTENTS
6.5 ADS-B Traffic........................................................... 333
ADS-B System Overview............................................. 333
ADS-B with TAS......................................................... 335
Conflict Situational Awareness & Alerting.................... 335
Airborne and Surface Applications............................... 336
Traffic Description...................................................... 338
Operation................................................................. 338
ADS-B System Status................................................. 343
SECTION 7 AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
7.1 AFCS Overview....................................................... 347
7.2 Flight Director Operation...................................... 351
Activating the Flight Director...................................... 351
AFCS Status Box........................................................ 352
Flight Director Modes................................................. 353
Command Bars.......................................................... 353
7.3 AFCS Modes............................................................ 354
Vertical Modes.......................................................... 354
Lateral Modes........................................................... 360
Combination modes (VNV, APR, NAV, BC, GA).............. 364
7.4 Autopilot................................................................. 377
Flight Control............................................................ 377
Engagement.............................................................. 378
Control Wheel Steering.............................................. 378
Disengagement......................................................... 379
7.5 AFCS Annunciations and Alerts............................ 380
Overspeed Protection................................................. 381
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
8.6
8.7
8.8 Connext Setup........................................................ 414
8.9 Electronic Checklists.............................................. 416
8.10 Abnormal Operation.............................................. 418
Siriusxm Data Link Receiver Troubleshooting................ 418
APPENDICES
Annunciations and Alerts................................................ 419
CAS Message Prioritization......................................... 420
CAS Messages........................................................... 421
System Message Advisories........................................ 423
Database Management................................................... 435
Loading Updated Databases....................................... 435
Magnetic Field Variation Database Update................... 442
Garmin Aviation Glossary............................................... 443
Map Symbols.................................................................... 457
Miscellaneous Map Symbols.......................................... 457
INDEX
Index ................................................................................... I-1
SECTION 8 ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SafeTaxi................................................................... 384
Charts...................................................................... 386
FliteCharts................................................................ 395
IFR/VFR Charts.......................................................... 400
Airport Directory.................................................... 403
Database Cycle Number And Revisions............... 404
Cycle Number and Revision........................................ 404
SiriusXM Radio Entertainment............................. 406
Activating SiriusXM Satellite Radio Services................. 406
Using SiriusXM Radio................................................. 407
Scheduler................................................................ 410
Flight Data Logging............................................... 412
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
xiii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Blank Page
xiv
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
This section provides an overview of the G1000 NXi Integrated Avionics System as installed in the Mooney M20U
and M20V. The system presents flight instrumentation, position, navigation, communication, and identification
information to the pilot through large-format displays.
EIS
LINE REPLACEABLE UNITS (LRU)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• GDU 1054 (2) – The system features two 10 inch, high resolution LED backlit display units. The left display
is configured as a Primary Flight Display (PFD). The right display is configured as an Multi Function Display
(MFD). The displays communicate with each other through a High-speed Data Bus (HSDB) Ethernet connection.
Each display is also paired with an Ethernet connection to the Garmin Integrated Avionics unit (GIA).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• GMA 1347 – The Audio Panel integrates navigation/communication radio (NAV/COM) digital audio, intercom,
and marker beacon controls, and is installed between the displays. This unit also provides manual control of
display Reversionary Mode (red DISPLAY BACKUP button) and communicates with both GIAs using an RS-232
digital interface.
• GCU 476 – The Control Unit provides MFD/PFD and radio tuning control through an RS-232 digital interface.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• GIA 63W (2) – Functions as the main communication hub, linking all LRUs with the on-side PFD. Each
GIA 63W contains a GPS WAAS receiver, VHF COM/NAV/GS receivers, a flight director (FD) and system
integration microprocessors. Each GIA 63W is paired with the on-side PFD via HSDB connection. The GIA
63Ws are not paired together and do not communicate with each other directly.
AFCS
• GDC 72 – The Air Data Computer (ADC) processes data from the pitot/static system and outside air temperature
(OAT) sensor. The ADC provides pressure altitude, airspeed, vertical speed, and OAT information to the
system, and it communicates with the primary GIA, displays, and AHRS using an ARINC 429 digital interface.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• GRS 79 – The Attitude and Heading Reference System (AHRS) provides aircraft attitude and heading information via
ARINC 429 to both the PFD and the primary GIA. The AHRS contains advanced sensors (including accelerometers
and rate sensors) and interfaces with the Magnetometer (GMU) to obtain magnetic field information, with the Air
Data Computer (ADC) to obtain air data, and with both GIAs to obtain GPS information.
• GEA 71 – The Engine Airframe Unit receives and processes signals from the engine and airframe sensors. This
unit communicates with both GIAs using an RS-485 digital interface.
APPENDICES
• GTX 345R – The solid-state transponder provides Modes A, C, and S capability and communicates with both
GIAs through an RS-232 digital interface. The optional GTX 345R also provides ADS-B In/Out.
• GMU 44 – The magnetometer measures local magnetic field and sends data to the AHRS for processing to
determine aircraft magnetic heading. This unit receives power directly from the AHRS and communicates with
it via an RS-485 digital interface.
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
1
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• GDL 69A SXM – The Data Link Satellite Radio Receiver provides real-time weather information to MFD maps and
the PFD Inset Map, as well as digital audio entertainment. The Data Link Receiver communicates with the MFD
via an HSDB connection. A subscription to XM Satellite Radio Service is required to enable Data Link Receiver
capability.
• GSA 81 (3) and GSM 86 – The GSA 81 servos are used for automatic control of pitch, pitch trim, and roll. These
units interface with each GIA.
The GSM 86 servo gearboxes are responsible for transferring the output torque of the servo actuators to the
mechanical flight-control surface linkages.
EIS
• GTS 800 (optional) – The GTS 800 Traffic Advisory System (TAS) uses active interrogations of Mode S and
Mode C transponders to provide traffic information to the pilot independent of the air traffic control system.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 1-1 shows interactions between the LRUs. Additional/optional equipment are also shown in Figure 1-1.
The system is capable of interfacing with the following optional equipment:
• GTS 800 Traffic Advisory System
• Becker 3250 ADF
• Flight Stream 510 WiFi and Bluetooth® connectivity
• L3 Stormscope WX 500
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• KN 63 DME
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The optional Flight Stream 510 device (SD Card) provides a Bluetooth® connection between the system and a
mobile device. GPS, AHRS, ADS-B, traffic, Sirius XM audio, and FIS-B weather data can then be shared with the
mobile device, and flight plans can be transferred to or from the mobile device. Also, database updates may also
be performed using the Flight Stream 510 WiFi link.
2
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
GCU 476
(Control Unit)
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
GDU 1054
(PFD)
GDU 1054
(MFD)
GTS 800
(TAS)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
GDL 69A SXM
(XM Weather/
Audio Datalink)
FS 510
(SD Card
Bluetooth Link)
#2 GIA 63W
(Integrated
Avionics
Unit)
GMA 1347
(Audio
Panel)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
#1 GIA 63W
(Integrated
Avionics
Unit)
EIS
GTX 345R
(Transponder)
GMU 44
(Magnetometer)
GPS/SBAS
GRS 79
(Attitude &
Heading)
AFCS Mode
Logic
Servo Logic
GPS/SBAS
GDC 72
(Air Data
Computer)
G/S
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Flight
Director
VHF COM
VOR/LOC
VOR/LOC
G/S
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
VHF COM
Flight
Director
GEA 71 (Engine &
Airframe I/F)
AFCS Mode
Logic
Servo Logic
AFCS
GSA 81 (3)
(Garmin AFCS
Servos)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Honeywell KN-63
(DME)
Becker 3250
(ADF)
APPENDICES
L3 Stormscope
(Wx-500)
Garmin Equipment
Non-Garmin Equipment
Optional
Garmin Equipment
Optional
Non-Garmin Equipment
INDEX
Figure 1-1 System (LRU Configuration)
NOTE: For information on non-Garmin equipment, consult the applicable optional interface user’s guide.
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
3
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.2 SYSTEM CONTROLS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: The Audio Panel (GMA 1347) is described in the Audio Panel & CNS section.
The system controls are located on the PFD and MFD bezels and audio panel. The controls for the PFD and
MFD are discussed within the following pages of this section.
EIS
PFD/MFD CONTROLS
2
5
4
3
6
7
8
9
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
17
APPENDICES
18
10
13
19
24
11
14
20
25
12
15
21
26
22
27
23
28
16
INDEX
Figure 1-2 PFD/MFD Controls
4
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1 NAV VOL/ID Knob
Turn to control NAV audio volume (shown in the NAV Frequency Box as a percentage).
Press to toggle Morse code identifier audio ON/OFF.
Transfers the standby and active NAV frequencies.
2 NAV Frequency
3 NAV Knob
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Transfer Key
Turn to tune NAV receiver standby frequencies (large knob for MHz; small for kHz).
Press to toggle light blue tuning box between NAV1 and NAV2.
4 Heading Knob
9
12 CLR Key
(DFLT MAP)
13 MENU Key
15 ENT Key
Erases information, cancels entries, or removes menus.
Press and hold to display the MFD Navigation Map Page (MFD only).
Displays a context-sensitive list of options for accessing additional features or making setting
changes.
Gives access to IFR departure procedures (DPs), arrival procedures (STARs), and approach
procedures (IAPs) for a flight plan or selected airport.
Validates/confirms menu selection or data entry.
APPENDICES
14 PROC Key
Activates the direct-to function and allows the user to enter a destination waypoint and establish a direct course to the selected destination (specified by identifier, chosen from the
active route).
Displays flight plan information.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
11 FPL Key
)
AFCS
10 Direct-to Key (
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
8
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
7
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
6
EIS
5
Turn to manually select a heading. When operating in Heading Select mode, this knob provides the heading reference to the flight director.
Press to display a digital heading momentarily to the left of the HSI and synchronize the Selected Heading to the current heading.
Turn to change map range.
Joystick
Press to activate Map Pointer for map panning.
Turn large knob for altimeter barometric pressure setting.
CRS/BARO Knob
Turn the small knob to set the pilot-selected course on the HSI when the VOR1, VOR2, or
OBS/SUSP mode is selected. Pressing this knob centers the CDI on the currently selected
VOR. The pilot-selected course provides course reference to the pilot-side flight director
when operating in Navigation and Approach modes.
Press to re-center the CDI and return course pointer directly TO bearing of active waypoint/
station.
Turn to tune COM transceiver standby frequencies (large knob for MHz; small for kHz).
COM Knob
Press to toggle light blue tuning box between COM1 and COM2.
The selected COM (green) is controlled with the COM MIC Key (Audio Panel).
Transfers the standby and active COM frequencies.
COM Frequency
Transfer Key (EMERG) Press and hold two seconds to tune the emergency frequency (121.5 MHz) automatically into
the active frequency field.
COM VOL/SQ Knob Turn to control COM audio volume level (shown as a percentage in the COM Frequency Box)
Press to turn the COM automatic squelch ON/OFF.
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
5
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
16 FMS Knob
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
(Flight Management
System Knob)
18
AP Key
19
FD Key
20
NAV Key
21
ALT Key
Selects/deselects the Altitude Hold mode.
22
VS Key
Selects/deselects the Vertical Speed mode.
23
FLC Key
Selects/deselects the Flight Level Change mode.
24
HDG Key
Selects/deselects the Heading Select mode.
25
APR Key
Selects/deselects the Approach mode.
26
Selects/deselects Vertical Navigation mode.
27
VNV Key
(if equipped)
NOSE UP Key
28
NOSE DN Key
Controls the active pitch reference for the Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed, and Flight Level
Change modes.
Controls the active pitch reference for the Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed, and Flight Level
Change modes.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
17 ALT Knob
Press to turn the selection cursor ON/OFF.
Data Entry: With cursor ON, turn to enter data in the highlighted field (large knob moves
cursor location; small knob selects character for highlighted cursor location).
Scrolling: When a list of information is too long for the window/box, a scroll bar appears,
indicating more items to view. With cursor ON, turn large knob to scroll through the list.
Page Selection: Turn knob on MFD to select the page to view (large knob selects a page
group; small knob selects a specific page from the group).
Sets the selected altitude in the Selected Altitude Box (the large knob selects the thousands,
the small knob selects the hundreds). In addition to providing the standard system altitude
alerter function, selected altitude provides an altitude setting for the Altitude Capture/Hold
mode of the AFCS.
Engages/disengages the Autopilot and Flight Director in the default vertical and lateral
modes.
Activates/deactivates the Flight Director only. Pressing the FD key turns on the Flight Director in the default vertical and lateral modes. Pressing the FD key again deactivates the Flight
Director and removes the command bars, unless the Autopilot is engaged. If the Autopilot
is engaged, the FD key is disabled.
Selects/deselects the Navigation mode.
6
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
MFD/PFD CONTROL UNIT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The MFD/PFD Control Unit is a pedestal-mounted user interface allowing for ease of data entry, MFD/PFD
operation, and NAV/COM tuning. Many procedures in this Pilot’s Guide can be performed using the MFD/PFD
Control Unit rather than the display bezel controls. Indicators above the PFD, MFD, NAV, and COM keys are
illuminated when their respective control mode(s) are selected. The unit is in MFD control mode by default on
system power-up.
1
2
3
EIS
NAV/COM radio tuning can be accomplished in either PFD or MFD control mode. The appropriate frequency
box on the selected display is outlined by a cyan selection box, which flashes for a few seconds to indicate
Control Unit activity (refer to the Audio Panel and CNS Section for more information about NAV/COM tuning).
Selection of a different display control or radio tuning mode results in cancelation of the previous radio tuning
mode.
4
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5
19
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
18
17
16
15
6
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
14
7
12
8
10
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
11
AFCS
13
9
Figure 1-3 GCU 476 MFD/PFD Control Unit
2
Direct-to Key (
3
MENU Key
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Displays flight plan information.
) Activates the direct-to function and allows the user to enter a destination waypoint
and establish a direct course to the selected destination (specified by identifier,
chosen from the active route).
Displays a context-sensitive list of options for accessing additional features or
making setting changes.
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
INDEX
FPL Key
APPENDICES
1
7
4
PROC Key
7
BKSP Key
Moves cursor back one character space and removes last character entered.
8
SPC Key
Adds a space character.
9
ENT Key
Validates or confirms a menu selection or data entry.
10
CLR Key
11
SEL Key
Erases information, cancels entries, or removes menus.
Press and hold to display the MFD Navigation Map Page (MFD only).
Arrows move cyan Softkey Selection Box (Figure 1-10) on selected display.
Press the center to activate the selected softkey.
12
Decimal Key
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
13
Plus-Minus (±) Key Toggles entry between the + and - characters.
14
NAV Key
Selects/deselects NAV radio tuning mode on the MFD/PFD Control Unit.
15
COM Key
Selects/deselects COM radio tuning mode on the MFD/PFD Control Unit
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
16
Frequency Transfer Transfers between active and standby selected COM or NAV tuning frequencies.
Key
Press and hold 2 seconds to tune the emergency frequency (121.5 MHz) automatically
(EMERG)
into the active frequency field.
17
PFD Key
When selected, the MFD/PFD Control Unit can be used to access PFD functions.
18
MFD Key
19
FMS/NAV-COM
Knob
When selected, the MFD/PFD Control Unit can be used to access MFD functions
(default display control mode).
NAV/COM Tuning Modes: Acts as the NAV or COM Knob.
PFD/MFD Control Modes: Acts as the FMS Knob.
Enters a decimal point character.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Gives access to IFR departure procedures (DPs), arrival procedures (STARs), and
approach procedures (IAPs) for a flight plan or selected airport.
5 Joystick
Turn to change map range.
Push to activate Map Pointer for map panning.
6 Alphanumeric Keys Allow data entry (rather than using the FMS Knob to select characters/numbers).
8
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECURE DIGITAL CARDS
NOTE: Refer to the Appendices for instructions on updating the aviation databases.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Ensure that the system is powered off before inserting the SD card.
The GDU 1054 data card slots use Secure Digital (SD) cards and are located on the top right portion of the
display bezels. Each display bezel is equipped with two SD card slots.
EIS
Inserting and Removing an SD card:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Insert the SD card in the SD card slot, pushing the card in until the spring latch engages. The front of the card
should remain flush with the face of the display bezel. To remove, gently press on the SD card to release the
spring latch and eject the card.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
SD Card Slots
AFCS
Figure 1-4 PFD/MFD Display Bezel SD Card Slots
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
9
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.3 SYSTEM OPERATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
This section discusses powering up the system, normal and reversionary display operation, system status and
annunciations, AHRS modes of operation, and GPS receiver operation.
SYSTEM POWER-UP
NOTE: See the Appendices for additional information regarding system-specific annunciations and alerts.
EIS
NOTE: See the Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH) for specific procedures concerning avionics power
application and emergency power supply operation.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The system is integrated with the aircraft electrical system and receives power directly from electrical busses.
The PFD, MFD, and supporting sub-systems include both power-on and continuous built-in test features that
exercise the processor, RAM, ROM, external inputs and outputs to provide safe operation.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
When powering up the system, test annunciations are displayed and key annunciator lights also become
momentarily illuminated on the audio panel and the display bezels. On the PFD, the AHRS begins to initialize
and displays ‘AHRS ALIGN: Remain Stationary’. All system annunciations should disappear typically within
one minute of power-up.
When the MFD powers up, the MFD Power-up Page displays the following information:
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• System version
• Land database name and version
• Safe Taxi database name and effective dates
• Terrain database name and version
• Obstacle database name and effective dates
• Navigation database name and effective dates
• Airport Directory name and effective dates
• FliteCharts/ChartView database information
• IFR/VFR charts database information
• Crew Profile
• Checklist Name (if present on SD Card)
• Copyright
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Current database information includes the valid operating dates, cycle number and database type. When this
information has been reviewed for currency (to ensure that no databases have expired), the pilot is prompted to
continue. Pressing the ENT Key acknowledges this information and displays the Weight Planning Page.
10
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NORMAL OPERATION
NOTE: In normal operating mode, backlighting can only be adjusted from the PFD (see Section 1.5). In
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
reversionary mode, it can be adjusted from the remaining display.
In normal operating mode, the PFD presents graphical flight instrumentation (attitude, heading, airspeed,
altitude, vertical speed), replacing the traditional flight instrument cluster (see the Flight Instruments Section
for more information). The MFD normally displays a full-color moving map with navigation information (see
the Flight Management Section), while the left portion of the MFD is dedicated to the Engine Indication System
(see the EIS Section). Both displays offer control for COM and NAV frequency selection.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 1-5 System Normal Operation
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
REVERSIONARY MODE
NOTE: The system alerts the pilot when backup paths are utilized by the LRUs. Refer to the Appendices for
further information regarding system-specific alerts.
AFCS
In the event of an MFD failure, the system automatically switches to reversionary (backup) mode. In
reversionary mode, all important flight information is presented on the remaining display in the same format
as in normal operating mode.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• PFD failure – MFD remains in normal mode.
• MFD failure – PFD automatically switches to reversionary mode.
APPENDICES
If a display fails, the appropriate GIA Ethernet interface is cut off. Thus, the GIA 63W can no longer
communicate with the remaining display (refer to Figure 1-1), and the NAV and COM functions provided to
the failed display by the GIA 63W are flagged as invalid on the remaining display. The system reverts to backup
paths for the AHRS, ADC, Engine/Airframe Unit, and Transponder, as required. The change to backup paths is
completely automated for all LRUs and no pilot action is required.
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
11
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
DISPLAY BACKUP Button
Manually Activates/Deactivates Reversionary Mode on All Displays
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 1-6 Reversionary Mode
Reversionary mode may also be manually activated by pressing the Audio Panel’s red DISPLAY BACKUP
Button. Pressing this button again deactivates reversionary mode.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM ANNUNCIATIONS
NOTE: Upon power-up, certain windows remain invalid as system equipment begins to initialize. All windows
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
should be operational within one minute of power-up. If any window continues to remain flagged, the
system should be serviced by a Garmin-authorized repair facility.
When an LRU or an LRU function fails, a large amber or red ‘X’ is typically displayed on windows associated
with the failed data (refer to Table 1-1 for all possible flags and the responsible LRUs). Refer to the Pilot’s
Operating Handbook (POH) for additional information regarding pilot responses to these annunciations.
AFCS
The status of detected LRUs can be checked on the Aux - System Status Page. Active LRUs are indicated by
green check marks; failed by red ‘X’s. Failed LRUs should be noted and a service center or Garmin-authorized
dealer informed.
Viewing LRU information:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - System Status’ Page.
2) To place the cursor in the ‘LRU Info’ Box,
Press the LRU Softkey.
APPENDICES
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) With ‘Select LRU Window’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
3) Use the FMS Knob to scroll through the box to view LRU status information.
INDEX
NOTE: Refer to the POH for additional information regarding pilot responses to these annunciations.
12
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Comment
System Annunciation
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
System Annunciation
Comment
Display system is not receiving
attitude information from the
AHRS.
Display system is not receiving
valid heading input from the
AHRS or magnetometer.
EIS
Display system is not receiving
vertical speed input from the
air data computer.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Air Data, Attitude and Heading
Reference System is aligning.
AHRS calibration incomplete or
configuration module failure.
Display system is not receiving
valid groundspeed information.
Display system is not receiving
valid OAT information from the
air data computer.
Display system is not receiving
valid transponder information.
A red or amber ‘X’ through
any other display field (such as
engine instrumentation fields)
indicates that the field is not
receiving valid data.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Other Various Red X
Indications
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
GPS information is either
not present or is invalid for
navigation use. Note that
AHRS utilizes GPS inputs
during normal operation.
AHRS operation may be
degraded if GPS signals are not
present (see POH).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Display system is not receiving
altitude input from the air data
computer.
AFCS
Display system is not receiving
airspeed input from the air
data computer.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Table 1-1 System Annunciations
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
13
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM STATUS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The System Status Page displays the status and software version numbers for all detected system LRUs.
Pertinent information on all system databases is also displayed. Active LRUs are indicated by green check marks
and failed LRUs are indicated by red “X”s. Failed LRUs should be noted and a service center or Garmin dealer
informed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 1-7 Example System Status Page
The LRU and ARFRM Softkeys on the System Status Page select the applicable list (LRU Information or
Airframe window) through which the FMS Knob can be used to scroll information within the selected window.
AFCS
Pressing the MFD1 DB Softkey (label annunciator turns green indicting the softkey is selected) places the
cursor in the database window. Use the FMS Knob to scroll through database information for the MFD.
Pressing the softkey again will change the softkey label to PFD1 DB. PFD 1 database information is now
displayed in the database window. Pressing the softkey a third time will change the softkey label back to MFD1
DB. MFD database information is displayed again in the database window.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The ANN Test Softkey, when pressed, causes an annunciation test tone to be played.
14
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AHRS OPERATION
NOTE: Refer to the Appendices for specific AHRS alert information.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Aggressive maneuvering while AHRS is not operating normally may degrade AHRS accuracy.
EIS
In addition to using internal sensors, the AHRS uses GPS information, magnetic field data and air data
to assist in attitude/heading calculations. In normal mode, the AHRS relies upon GPS and magnetic field
measurements. If either of these external measurements is unavailable or invalid, the AHRS uses air data
information for attitude determination. Four AHRS modes of operation are available and depend upon the
combination of available sensor inputs. Loss of air data, GPS, or magnetometer sensor inputs is communicated
to the pilot by message advisory alerts.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Mag Data AND Air Data
Available and Reliable?
NO
YES
NO
YES
Mag Data Available and Reliable?
NO
YES
GPS Data Available and Reliable?
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The AHRS corrects for shifts and variations in the Earth’s magnetic field by applying the Magnetic Field
Variation Database. The Magnetic Field Variation Database is derived from the International Geomagnetic
Reference Field (IGRF). The IGRF is a mathematical model that describes the Earth’s main magnetic field and its
annual rate of change. The database is updated approximately every 5 years. See the Appendices for information
on updating the Magnetic Field Variation Database. The system will prompt you on startup when an update is
available. Failure to update this database could lead to erroneous heading information being displayed to the
pilot.
AFCS
AHRS no-Mag/
no-Air Mode
Heading
HeadingInvalid
Invalid
Attitude/Heading
Invalid
Heading Invalid
AHRS no-GPS
Mode
AHRS coast-on-gyros
until invalid
APPENDICES
AHRS no-Mag
Mode
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AHRS Normal
Mode
NO
YES
Air Data Available and Reliable?
Attitude/Heading
Invalid
Attitude/Heading Invalid
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
INDEX
Figure 1-8 AHRS Operation
15
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
GPS INPUT FAILURE
NOTE: In-flight initialization of AHRS, when operating without any valid source of GPS data and at true
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
air speed values greater than approximately 200 knots, is not guaranteed. Under these rare conditions, it
is possible for in-flight AHRS initialization to take an indefinite amount of time which would result in an
extended period of time where valid AHRS outputs are unavailable.
EIS
The system provides two sources of GPS information. If a single GPS receiver fails, or if the information
provided from one of the GPS receivers is unreliable, the AHRS seamlessly transitions to using the other GPS
receiver. An alert message informs the pilot of the use of the backup GPS path. If both GPS inputs fail, the
AHRS continues to operate in reversionary No-GPS mode so long as the air data and magnetometer inputs
are available and valid.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
AIR DATA INPUT FAILURE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
A failure of the air data input has no effect on AHRS output while AHRS is operating in normal mode. A
failure of the air data input while the AHRS is operating in reversionary No-GPS mode results in invalid
attitude and heading information on the PFD (as indicated by red “X” flags).
MAGNETOMETER FAILURE
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
If the magnetometer input fails, the AHRS transitions to one of the reversionary No-Magnetometer modes
and continues to output valid attitude information. However, if the aircraft is airborne, the heading output
on the PFD does become invalid (as indicated by a red “X”).
GPS RECEIVER OPERATION
Each GIA 63W Integrated Avionics Unit (IAU) contains a GPS receiver. Information collected by the specified
receiver (GPS1 for the #1 GIA or GPS2 for the #2 GIA) may be viewed on the Aux - GPS Status Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
These GPS sensor annunciations are most often seen after system power-up when one GPS receiver has
acquired satellites before the other, or one of the GPS receivers has not yet acquired a SBAS signal. While
the aircraft is on the ground, the SBAS signal may be blocked by obstructions causing one GPS receiver to
have difficulty acquiring a good signal. Also, while airborne, turning the aircraft may result in one of the GPS
receivers temporarily losing the SBAS signal.
INDEX
APPENDICES
If the sensor annunciation persists, check for a system failure message in the Alerts Window on the PFD.
If no failure message exists, check the GPS Status Page and compare the information for GPS1 and GPS2.
Discrepancies may indicate a problem.
16
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Satellite Signal
Information Status
GPS Receiver
Status
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Satellite Constellation
Diagram
RAIM
Availability
Prediction
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
EGNOS, MSAS
and WAAS
Selected
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Satellite Signal
Strength Bars
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
GPS Selection
Softkeys
RAIM Softkey
Selected
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
SBAS Softkey Selected
Figure 1-9 GPS Status Page (RAIM or SBAS Selected)
The GPS Status Page provides the following information:
• Constellation
AFCS
Satellites currently in view are shown at their respective positions on a sky view diagram. The sky view is
always in a north-up orientation, with the outer circle representing the horizon, the inner circle representing
45° above the horizon, and the center point showing the position directly overhead.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Each satellite is represented by an oval containing the Pseudo-random noise (PRN) number (i.e., satellite
identification number). Satellites whose signals are currently being used are represented by solid ovals.
• Satellite Status
APPENDICES
This box provides information regarding signal status. The accuracy of the aircraft’s GPS fix is calculated
using Estimated Position Uncertainty (EPU), Dilution of Precision (DOP), and horizontal and vertical figures
of merit (HFOM and VFOM). EPU is the radius of a circle centered on an estimated horizontal position in
which actual position has 95% probability of laying. EPU is a statistical error indication and not an actual
error measurement.
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
17
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
DOP measures satellite geometry quality (i.e., number of satellites received and where they are relative to
each other) on a range from 0.0 to 9.9, with lower numbers denoting better accuracy. HFOM and VFOM,
measures of horizontal and vertical position uncertainty, are the current 95% confidence horizontal and
vertical accuracy values reported by the GPS receiver.
The current calculated GPS position, time, altitude, ground speed, and track for the aircraft are displayed
below the satellite signal accuracy measurements.
• GPS Status
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
The GPS solution type (ACQUIRING, 2D NAV, 2D DIFF NAV, 3D NAV, 3D DIFF NAV) for the active GPS
receiver (GPS1 or GPS2) is shown in the upper right of the GPS Status Page. When the receiver is in the
process of acquiring enough satellite signals for navigation, the receiver uses satellite orbital data (collected
continuously from the satellites) and last known position to determine the satellites that should be in view.
‘Acquiring’ is indicated as the solution until a sufficient number of satellites have been acquired for computing
a solution.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
When the receiver is in the process of acquiring a 3D differential GPS solution, 3D NAV is indicated as the
solution until the 3D differential fix has finished acquisition. SBAS (Satellite-Based Augmentation System)
indicates ‘Inactive’. When acquisition is complete, the solution status indicates 3D DIFF NAV and SBAS
indicates ‘Active’.
Viewing GPS receiver status information:
1) Use the large FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux’ Page Group (see Section 1.4 for information on navigating MFD
page groups).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Use the small FMS Knob to select the ‘GPS Status’ Page.
Selecting the GPS receiver for which data may be reviewed:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - GPS Status’ Page.
2) To change the selected GPS receiver:
AFCS
Press the desired GPS Softkey.
Or:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Use the FMS Knob to highlight the receiver which is not selected and press the ENT Key.
• RAIM (Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring) Prediction (RAIM Softkey is selected)
APPENDICES
In most cases performing a RAIM prediction is not necessary. However, in some cases, the selected approach may
be outside the SBAS coverage area and it may be necessary to perform a RAIM prediction for the intended approach.
INDEX
Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring (RAIM) is a GPS receiver function that performs a consistency
check on all tracked satellites. RAIM ensures that the available satellite geometry allows the receiver to
calculate a position within a specified RAIM protection limit (2.0 nautical miles for oceanic and enroute, 1.0
nm for terminal, and 0.3 nm for non-precision approaches). During oceanic, enroute, and terminal phases of
flight, RAIM is available nearly 100% of the time.
The RAIM prediction function also indicates whether RAIM is available at a specified date and time. RAIM
computations predict satellite coverage within ±15 min of the specified arrival date and time.
18
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Because of the tighter protection limit on approaches, there may be times when RAIM is not available. The
system automatically monitors RAIM and warns with an alert message when it is not available. If RAIM is
not predicted to be available for the final approach course, the approach does not become active, as indicated
by the messages ‘Approach is not active and ‘RAIM not available from FAF to MAP’. If RAIM is not available
when crossing the FAF, the missed approach procedure must be flown.
NOTE: The system RAIM prediction capability does not meet all RAIM prediction requirements. Reverence
the RAIM/ Fault Detection and Exclusion (FDE) Prediction Tool at flygarmin.com as required. Predicting
RAIM availability at a selected waypoint:
EIS
1) Select the ‘Aux - GPS Status’ Page.
2) If necessary, press the RAIM Softkey.
3) Press the FMS Knob. The ‘Waypoint’ Field is highlighted.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the ‘Waypoint Information’ Window.
5) Enter the desired waypoint:
Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired waypoint by identifier, facility, or city name and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Or:
a) Turn the small FMS Knob counter-clockwise to display a list of flight plan waypoints (the FPL list is populated
only when navigating a flight plan).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
b) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to display the Flight Plan, Nearest, Recent, or User waypoints, if
required.
c) Turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to select the desired waypoint. The system automatically fills in the
identifier, facility, and city fields with the information for the selected waypoint.
d) Press the ENT Key to accept the waypoint entry.
6) Use the FMS Knob to enter an arrival time and press the ENT Key.
AFCS
7) Use the FMS Knob to enter an arrival date and press the ENT Key.
8) With the cursor highlighting ‘Compute RAIM?’, press the ENT Key. Once RAIM availability is computed, one of
the following is displayed:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• ‘Compute RAIM?’—RAIM has not been computed for the current waypoint, time, and date combination
• ‘Computing Availability’—RAIM calculation in progress
• ‘RAIM Available’—RAIM is predicted to be available for the specified waypoint, time, and date
APPENDICES
• ‘RAIM not Available’—RAIM is predicted to be unavailable for the specified waypoint, time, and date
Predicting RAIM availability at present position:
1) Select the ‘Aux - GPS Status’ Page.
2) If necessary, press the RAIM Softkey.
INDEX
3) Press the FMS Knob. The ‘Waypoint’ Field is highlighted.
4) Press the MENU Key.
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
19
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
5) With ‘Set WPT to Present Position’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
6) Press the ENT Key to accept the waypoint entry.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
7) Use the FMS Knob to enter an arrival time and press the ENT Key.
8) Use the FMS Knob to enter an arrival date and press the ENT Key.
9) With the cursor highlighting ‘Compute RAIM?’, press the ENT Key. Once RAIM availability is computed, one of
the following is displayed:
• ‘Compute RAIM?’—RAIM has not been computed for the current waypoint, time, and date combination
EIS
• ‘Computing Availability’—RAIM calculation in progress
• ‘RAIM Available’—RAIM is predicted to be available for the specified waypoint, time, and date
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• ‘RAIM not Available’—RAIM is predicted to be unavailable for the specified waypoint, time, and date
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
SBAS Selection (SBAS Softkey is selected)
In certain situations, such as when the aircraft is outside or on the fringe of the SBAS coverage area, it may
be desirable to disable EGNOS, WAAS or MSAS (although it is not recommended). When disabled, the
SBAS field in the GPS Status box indicates Disabled. There may be a small delay for the GPS Status box to be
updated upon WAAS and MSAS enabling/disabling.
Disabling SBAS:
1) Select the ‘Aux - GPS Status’ Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) If necessary, press the SBAS Softkey.
3) Press the FMS Knob, and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘EGNOS’, ‘MSAS’ or ‘WAAS’.
4) Press the ENT Key to uncheck the box.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
• GPS Satellite Signal Strengths
The GPS Status Page can be helpful in troubleshooting weak (or missing) signal levels due to poor satellite
coverage or installation problems. As the GPS receiver locks onto satellites, a signal strength bar is displayed
for each satellite in view, with the appropriate satellite PRN number (01-32 or 120-138 for WAAS) below
each bar. The progress of satellite acquisition is shown in three stages, as indicated by signal bar appearance:
APPENDICES
- No bar—Receiver is looking for the indicated satellite
- Hollow bar—Receiver has found the satellite and is collecting data
- Cyan bar—Receiver has collected the necessary data and the satellite signal can be used
- Green bar—Satellite is being used for the GPS solution
- Checkered bar—Receiver has excluded the satellite (Fault Detection and Exclusion)
- “D” indication—Denotes the satellite is being used as part of the differential computations
INDEX
Each satellite has a 30-second data transmission that must be collected (signal strength bar is hollow) before
the satellite may be used for navigation (signal strength bar becomes solid).
20
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1.4 ACCESSING SYSTEM FUNCTIONALITY
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SOFTKEY FUNCTION
EIS
Selection softkeys are located along the bottom of the displays. The softkeys shown depend on the softkey
level previously selected. The bezel keys below the softkey labels can be used to select the appropriate softkey.
There are three types of softkeys. One selects a simple on/off state, indicated by an annunciator on the softkey
label displayed as green (on) or gray (off). The next type of softkey selects several options, indicated by the
softkey label changing (with the exception of the Map Range keys) to reflect the name of the chosen option.
The last type of softkey, when pressed displays another set of softkeys available for the selected function. Also,
these softkeys revert to the previous level after 45 seconds of inactivity. When a softkey function is disabled,
the softkey label is subdued (dimmed).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Softkey On Softkey Subdued
Softkey Names
(displayed)
Bezel-Mounted
Softkeys (press)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 1-10 Softkeys (First-Level PFD Configuration)
PFD SOFTKEYS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The PFD softkeys provide control over the PFD display and some flight management functions, including
GPS, NAV, terrain, traffic, and weather (optional). Each softkey sublevel has a Back Softkey which can be
pressed to return to the previous level. The Alerts(Message) Softkey is visible in all softkey levels. For the
top level softkeys and the transponder (XPDR) levels, the Ident Softkey remains visible.
Level 2
Level 3
Map/HSI
Layout
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Description
Displays the PFD Map display settings softkeys.
Displays the PFD Map selection softkeys.
Removes the PFD map from display (Inset or Traffic).
Displays the Inset Map.
Displays the HSI Map.
Replaces the PFD Map with a dedicated traffic display.
Displays/removes the name of the selected data link weather provider
(SiriusXM) and the weather product icon and age box (for enabled
weather products) (optional).
APPENDICES
Map Off
Inset Map
HSI Map
TFC Map
WX LGND
Level 4
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Level 1
AFCS
The following table describes PFD Softkey functions. Softkeys which display another set of softkeys are
indicated in the table by showing the given set as an increased level. For example, the Map/HSI softkey is
shown in the Level 1 column. When pressed, the Map/HSI softkey will display another set of softkeys and
these softkeys are explained in the Level 2 column. If a softkey on Level 2 provides yet another set of softkey
functions, those new available softkeys are then explained in the Level 3 column, etc.
21
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Detail
Traffic
Topo
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Rel Ter
NEXRAD
METAR
Lightning
LTNG Off
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Datalink
STRMSCP
TFC Map
PFD Opt
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
SVT
AFCS
Pathways
Terrain
HDG LBL
APT Sign
Wind
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Option 1
Option 2
Option 3
Off
APPENDICES
DME
Bearing 1
INDEX
Bearing 2
ALT Units
Meters
22
Level 4
Description
Selects desired amount of map detail:
All (No Declutter): All map features visible
Detail 1: Declutters land data
Detail 2: Declutters land and SUA data
Detail 3: Removes everything except for the active flight plan
Displays traffic information on PFD Map.
Displays topographical data (e.g., coastlines, terrain, rivers, lakes) and
elevation scale on PFD Map.
Displays relative terrain information on the PFD Map.
Displays XM NEXRAD weather and coverage on PFD Map (optional).
Displays METAR information on Inset Map (optional).
Adds/removes the display of SiriusXM lightning information on PFD Map
(optional).
Disables lightning function on PFD Map. The softkey annunciator is green
when the lightning function is off.
Selects the data link weather source for the PFD Map (optional).
Displays Stormscope information on Inset Map (optional).
Replaces the PFD Map with a dedicated traffic display.
Displays second-level softkeys for additional PFD options.
Displays additional SVT overlay softkeys.
Displays Pathway Boxes on the Synthetic Vision Display.
Enables synthetic terrain depiction.
Displays compass heading along the Zero-Pitch line.
Displays position markers for airports within approximately 15 nm of the
current aircraft position. Airport identifiers are displayed when the airport
is within approximately 9 nm.
Displays the wind option softkeys.
Headwind/Tailwind and crosswind components.
Wind direction arrow and speed.
Wind direction arrow and headwind/tailwind components.
Wind information not displayed.
Displays DME Information Window (optional) next to the HSI.
Cycles the Bearing 1 Information Window through NAV1, NAV2, FMS/
waypoint identifier and GPS-derived distance information, ADF/frequency,
and Off.
Cycles the Bearing 2 Information Window through NAV1, NAV2, FMS/
waypoint identifier and GPS-derived distance information, ADF/frequency,
and Off.
Displays softkeys to select altitude unit parameters.
When enabled, displays altimeter in meters.
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Level 2
Level 3
IN
HPA
OBS
CDI
ADF/DME
On
ALT
Activates transponder (transponder replies to identification interrogations).
Altitude Reporting Mode (transponder replies to identification and altitude
interrogations).
0-7
Ident
Displays the Alerts Window when pressed. System generated messages
cause the Alerts Softkey label to change to a flashing ‘Message’ label.
Pressing the Message Softkey opens the Alerts Window, acknowledges the
message, and the softkey reverts to the ‘Alerts’ label.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Alerts
or
Message
AFCS
Tmr/Ref
Nearest
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
BKSP
Automatically enters the VFR code (1200 in the U.S.A. only).
Displays transponder code selection softkeys 0-7.
Use numbers to enter code.
Activates the Special Position Identification (SPI) pulse for 18 seconds,
identifying the transponder return on the ATC screen.
Removes numbers entered, one at a time.
Activates the Special Position Identification (SPI) pulse for 18 seconds,
identifying the transponder return on the ATC screen.
Activates the Special Position Identification (SPI) pulse for 18 seconds,
identifying the transponder return on the ATC screen.
Displays Timer/References Window.
Displays Nearest Airports Window.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
VFR
Code
Ident
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Displays the transponder selection softkeys.
Selects transponder Standby Mode (transponder does not reply to any
interrogations).
Standby
Ident
EIS
XPDR
Description
Press to display the BARO setting as inches of mercury.
Press to display the BARO setting as hectopascals.
Sets barometric pressure to 29.92 in Hg (1013 hPa if metric units are
selected).
Selects OBS mode on the CDI when navigating by GPS (only available with
active leg). When OBS is on, the softkey annunciator is green.
Cycles through FMS, NAV1, and NAV2 navigation modes on the CDI.
Displays/removes ADF/DME Tuning Window (optional; may appear as
blank, ADF, DME, or ADF/DME depending on installation).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
STD Baro
Level 4
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Level 1
Table 1-2 PFD Softkeys
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
23
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
MFD SOFTKEYS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The MFD softkeys provide control over flight management functions, including GPS, NAV, terrain, traffic,
and weather (optional). There are many softkey functions available on the MFD depending on the page group
and screen selected.
EIS
The following table provides an example of the MFD Softkey functions accessed from the Navigation Map
screen. Further information concerning softkeys providing more navigation and flight planning functions
may be found in the Flight Management Section. Terrain, traffic, and weather softkey descriptions may
be found in the Hazard Avoidance section. Further description of optional equipment and corresponding
softkey functions may be found in the Additional Features Section.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Level 1
Engine
Level 2
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Lean
DEC Fuel
INC Fuel
RST Fuel
Map Opt
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Traffic
Inset
Description
Displays EIS - Engine Page and second-level engine softkeys; press again to
exit page (see the EIS Section for more information).
Displays the EIS Lean Display.
Decreases displayed fuel remaining in 1-gal increments.
Increases displayed fuel remaining in 1-gal increments.
Resets displayed fuel remaining to maximum fuel capacity for aircraft and
fuel used to zero.
Displays the second level map options softkeys.
Displays traffic information on Navigation Map Page.
Displays inset window second level softkeys.
Removes inset from Navigation Map Page.
Off
FPL PROG Displays the Flight Plan Progress inset on the Navigation Map Page.
Displays VSD profile information of terrain/obstacles along the current track,
VSD
vertical track vector, and selected altitude.
Auto: Automatically displays either VSD profile information for
active flight plan information or along current track with no
active flight plan.
FPL: Displays VSD profile information for active flight plan.
TRK: Displays VSD profile information along current track.
Displays terrain on the map; cycles through the following:
Off: No terrain information shown on MFD Map.
Topo: Displays topographical data (e.g., coastlines, terrain, rivers,
lakes) and elevation scale on MFD Map.
REL: Displays relative terrain information on the MFD Map.
INDEX
APPENDICES
TER
Level 3
24
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Checklist
Description
Displays airways on the map; cycles through the following:
AWY
Off: No airways are displayed.
On: All airways are displayed.
LO: Only low altitude airways are displayed.
HI: Only high altitude airways are displayed.
Displays/removes Stormscope information on Navigation Map (optional).
STRMSCP
Displays XM NEXRAD weather and coverage on Navigation Map Page
NEXRAD
(optional).
Displays XM lightning information on Navigation Map Page (optional).
XM LTNG
Displays METAR information on Inset Map (subscription optional).
METAR
Displays legends for the displayed XM Weather products (optional).
Legend
Selects desired amount of map detail; cycles through the following levels:
Detail All: All map features visible.
Detail-1: Declutters land data.
Detail-2: Declutters land and SUA data.
Detail-3: Removes everything except for the active flight plan.
When available, displays optional airport and terminal procedure charts.
Displays chart display settings softkeys.
CHRT Opt
Fit WDTH Changes the chart size to fit the available screen width.
Full SCN Removes data window to display chart on screen.
Displays the WPT–Airport Information page with the procedure for the
Show Map
airport selected.
or
Chart
Displays the chart with the procedure for the airport selected.
Displays airport information:
Info
Info 1: Displays Airport Information Page
Info 2: Displays Airport Directory Page
Displays departure procedure chart.
DP
Displays standard terminal arrival procedure chart.
STAR
Displays approach procedure chart.
APR
Displays airport weather information chart.
WX
Displays NOTAM information for selected airport, when available.
NOTAM
When available, displays optional checklists.
EIS
Charts
Level 3
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Detail
Level 2
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Level 1
Table 1-3 MFD Navigation Map Page Softkeys
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
25
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
MENUS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The system has a MENU Key that, when pressed, displays a context-sensitive list of options. This options list
allows the user to access additional features or make settings changes which specifically relate to the currently
displayed window/page. There is no all-encompassing menu. Some menus provide access to additional
submenus that are used to view, edit, select, and review options. Menus display ‘No Options’ when there are
no options for the window/page selected. The main controls used in association with all window/page group
operations are described in Section 1.2. Softkey selection does not display menus or submenus.
Navigating the Page Menu Window:
EIS
1) Press the MENU Key to display the ‘Page Menu’.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to scroll through a list of available options (a scroll bar appears to the right of the window
when the option list is longer than the window).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Press the ENT Key to select the desired option.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) The CLR Key may be pressed to remove the menu and cancel the operation. Pressing the FMS Knob also
removes the displayed menu.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
No Options with
NRST Window
Displayed on PFD
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Options with
FPL Window
Displayed on MFD
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 1-11 Page Menu Examples
26
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
MFD PAGE GROUPS
NOTE: Refer to other supporting sections in this Pilot’s Guide for details on specific pages.
EIS
Page Group
MFD
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Information on the MFD is presented on pages grouped according to function. The page group and active
page title are displayed in the upper center of the screen, below the Navigation Data Bar. In the bottom right
corner of the screen, a page group window is displayed by turning either FMS Knob. The page group tabs are
displayed along the bottom of the window. The page titles are displayed in a list above the page group tabs.
The current page group and current page within the group are shown in cyan.
Active Page Title
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Pages in
Current
Group
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Page Groups
Figure 1-12 Page Title and Page Groups
AFCS
The main page groups are navigated using the FMS Knob; specific pages within each group can vary depending
on the configuration of optional equipment.
Selecting a page using the FMS Knob:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to display the list of page groups; continue turning the large FMS Knob until the
desired page group is selected
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the desired page within a specific page group.
APPENDICES
There are several pages which may be selected by selecting the appropriate softkey at the bottom of the page
(or from the page menu). In this case, the active page title will change when a different page softkey is selected,
but the page will remain the same (i.e. the Radio and Info softkeys show different active page titles (‘Aux - XM
Radio’ and ‘Aux - XM Information’ respective) within the same page, ‘XM Radio’.
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
27
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Page Group
Map (Map Page Group)
Pages within Page Group
• Navigation Map
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• IFR/VFR Charts
• Traffic Map
• Stormscope (optional)
• Weather Data Link (optional)
EIS
WPT (Waypoint Page Group)
• Terrain Proximity/Terrain-SVT (optional)/ TAWS-B (optional)
• Airport/Procedures/Weather Information Pages
- Airport Information (Info 1 Softkey)
- Airport Directory Information (Info 2 Softkey)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
- Departure Information (DP Softkey)
- Arrival Information (STAR Softkey)
- Approach Information (APR Softkey)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
- Weather Information (optional) (WX Softkey)
• Intersection Information
• NDB Information
• VOR Information
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• VRP Information
Aux (Auxiliary Page Group)
• User Waypoint Information
• Trip Planning
• Utility
• GPS Status
AFCS
• System Setup 1/2
• XM Radio Pages (SiriusXM optional)
- XM Radio (Radio Softkey)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
- XM Information (Info Softkey)
• System Status
• ADS-B Status
APPENDICES
• Connext Setup
INDEX
• Databases
28
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Pages within Page Group
• Active Flight Plan
- Wide View, Narrow View (View Softkey)
• Flight Plan Catalog
- Stored Flight Plan (New Softkey)
• Nearest Airports
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NRST (Nearest Page Group)
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Page Group
FPL (Flight Plan Page Group)
• Nearest Intersections
• Nearest NDB
EIS
• Nearest VOR
• Nearest VRP
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Nearest User WPTS
• Nearest Frequencies
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
CHKLST (Checklist Page Group)
EIS (Engine Instruments Page
Group)
• Nearest Airspaces
• Checklist (only available with SD Card inserted)
• Engine
Table 1-4 Page Group and Pages
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
PROCEDURE PAGES (PROC)
The Procedure Pages may be accessed at any time on the MFD by pressing the PROC Key. A menu is
initialized, and when a departure, approach, or arrival is selected, the appropriate Procedure Loading Page is
opened. Turning the FMS Knob does not scroll through the Procedure pages
• Departure Loading
AFCS
• Arrival Loading
• Approach Loading
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
29
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM SETTINGS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
System settings and crew profiles are managed from the System Setup Pages. Fields shown in cyan text may
be edited. Managing crew profiles and editing the system time format, display units, arrival alerts, and audio
voice format settings are discussed in this section. For other system settings, see the reference given to their
respective sections.
If desired, the default system settings may be restored at any time.
Restoring system setup defaults:
EIS
1) Select the ‘Aux - System Setup 1’ Page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the Defaults Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Restore Page Defaults’, and press the ENT Key.
The message ‘Restore Setup X Page Defaults?’ is displayed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
Configure System
Time
Fields shown in Cyan may
be edited
Change Display
Unit Settings
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Configure arrival alert settings
- Enable / disable alert
- Set arrival alert trigger distance
AFCS
Restore System Defaults
Crew Profile
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
- Choose active profile
- Create new profile
- Edit, rename, and delete
existing profile (other than
default profile)
- Import / Export profile to
SD Card
Select System Setup Page
INDEX
Figure 1-13 System Setup 1/2 Pages
30
- Setup 1
- Setup 2
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
CREW PROFILES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
System settings may be saved under a crew profile. When the system is powered on, the last selected crew
profile is shown on the MFD Power-up Splash Screen. The system can store up to 25 profiles; the currently
active profile, the amount of memory used, and the amount of memory available are shown at the top of
the System Setup Page in the box labeled ‘Crew Profile’. From here, crew profiles may be created, selected,
renamed, or deleted. Crew profiles may also be imported and exported via SD card.
EIS
Creating a profile:
1) Select the ‘Aux - System Setup 1’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Create’ in the ‘Crew Profile’ Box.
4) Press the ENT Key. A ‘Create Profile’ window is displayed.
5) Use the FMS Knob to enter a profile name up to 16 characters long and press the ENT Key. Crew profile names
cannot begin with a blank as the first letter.
6) In the next field, use the small FMS Knob to select the desired settings upon which to base the new profile.
Profiles can be created based on Garmin factory defaults, default profile settings (initially based on Garmin
factory defaults unless edited by the pilot), or other previously created profile settings.
7) Press the ENT Key.
8) With ‘Create’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to create the profile
Or:
Use the large FMS Knob to select ‘Create & Activate’ and press the ENT Key to activate the new profile.
9) To cancel the process, select ‘Cancel’ with the large FMS Knob and press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Selecting an active profile:
1) Select the ‘Aux - System Setup’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the active profile field in the ‘Crew Profile’ Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the crew profile list and highlight the desired profile.
5) Press the ENT Key. The system loads and displays the system settings for the selected profile.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
APPENDICES
Renaming a profile:
1) Select the ‘Aux - System Setup’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Rename’ in the ‘Crew Profile’ Box.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) In the ‘Rename Profile’ Window, turn the FMS Knob to select the profile to rename.
6) Press the ENT Key.
7) Use the FMS Knob to enter a new profile name up to 16 characters long and press the ENT Key.
8) With ‘Rename’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
9) To cancel the process, use the large FMS Knob to select ‘Cancel’ and press the ENT Key.
31
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Deleting a profile:
1) Select the ‘Aux - System Setup’ Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Delete’ in the ‘Crew Profile’ Box.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) In the ‘Delete Profile’ window, turn the FMS Knob to select the profile to delete.
6) Press the ENT Key.
EIS
7) With ‘Delete’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
8) To cancel the process, use the large FMS Knob to select ‘Cancel’ and press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Importing a profile from an SD card:
1) Insert an SD card containing the crew profile(s) into the top card slot on the MFD.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - System Setup’ Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Press the Import Softkey.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Import Crew Profile’ and press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) The system displays the ‘Crew Profile Importing’ Window with ‘Import’ highlighted. Turn the large FMS Knob
to highlight the ‘Profile Name’ field, then scroll to the desired profile name with the large and small FMS Knobs,
then press the ENT Key. Then press the ENT Key with ‘Import’ highlighted.
AFCS
5) If the imported profile name is the same as an existing profile on the system, the system displays an ‘Overwrite
existing profile? OK or CANCEL’ prompt. Press the ENT Key to replace profile on the system with the profile
imported from the SD card, or turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key to return to the
Crew Profile Importing window.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
6) If successful, the system displays ‘Crew profile import succeeded.’ in the window below. With ‘OK’ highlighted,
press the ENT or CLR Keys or press the FMS Knob to return to the ‘Aux - System Setup’ Page. The imported
profile becomes the active profile.
INDEX
Crew Profile Importing and Import
Results Window
Crew Profiles Available for Import
from SD Card
Import Successful
Figure 1-14 Crew Profile Import (Aux - System Setup Page)
32
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Exporting a profile to an SD card:
1) Insert the SD card for storing the Crew Profile into the top card slot on the MFD.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - System Setup’ Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the Export Softkey. The system displays the ‘Crew Profile Exporting’ Window.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Export Crew Profile’ and press the ENT Key.
EIS
4) To export the crew profile using the current selected profile, press the ENT Key with ‘Export’ highlighted. To
change the selected profile, turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Profile Name’ field, then scroll to the
desired profile name with the large and small FMS Knobs, then press the ENT Key. Then press the ENT Key with
‘Export’ highlighted.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) If the selected profile to be exported is the same as an existing profile file name on the SD card, the system
displays an ‘Overwrite existing profile? OK or CANCEL’ prompt. Press the ENT Key to replace the profile on
the SD card with the profile to be exported, or turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key
to return to the Crew profile Exporting window without exporting the profile.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
6) If successful, the window displays ‘Crew profile export succeeded.’ With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT or CLR
Keys, or press the FMS Knob to return to the ‘Aux - System Setup’ Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Export Successful
AFCS
Crew Profile Exporting Window, Enter
a Name to Use for Exported Profile
Figure 1-15 Crew Profile Export on the Aux - System Setup Page
CREW PROFILE IMPORT/EXPORT MESSAGES
Displayed if the SD card does not have one or more valid crew profile filenames.
Displayed if the profile name matches the name of existing profile.
Displayed if the profile name is invalid.
APPENDICES
Displayed if the maximum number for crew profiles has been reached.
Displayed if the importing operation fails for any other reason.
Displayed if the importing operation succeeds.
Displayed if the filename matches the name of an existing file on the SD card.
Displayed if the export operation fails.
Displayed if the export operation succeeds.
INDEX
‘No crew profile files found.’
‘Overwrite existing profile?’
‘Profile name invalid. Enter a different
profile name.’
‘All available crew profiles in use. Delete a
profile before importing another.’
‘Crew profile import failed.’
‘Crew profile import succeeded.’
‘Overwrite existing file?’
‘Crew profile export failed.’
‘Crew profile export succeeded.’
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
In some circumstances, some messages may appear in conjunction with others:
Table 1-5 Crew profile Import/Export Messages
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
33
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
DATE/TIME
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The system obtains the current Universal Coordinated Time (UTC) date and time directly from the GPS
satellite signals (shown on the Aux - GPS Status Page). System time (displayed in the lower right corner of
the PFD) can be displayed in three formats: local 12-hr, local 24-hr, or UTC. Local time is set by adding/
subtracting an offset (hours:minutes) to/from UTC.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 1-16 System Time (UTC Format)
Configuring the system time:
1) Select the ‘Aux - System Setup 1’ Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Time Format’ field.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired format and press the ENT Key to confirm selection. If local time
format is selected, the ‘Time Offset’ field is highlighted.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
5) If necessary, use the FMS Knob to enter the desired time offset (±HH:MM) and press the ENT Key to confirm
selection.
INDEX
Figure 1-17 Date/Time Settings (System Setup 1 Page)
34
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
DISPLAY UNITS
Units in which various quantities are displayed on the system screens are listed on the System Setup 1 Page.
The Navigation Angle reference, the Temperature units, and the Position units can be set from here.
N/A
N/A
All positions
N/A
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Position**
Engine Indication System (EIS)
AFCS
Weight
All temperatures on PFD
Total Air Temperature (Trip Planning Page)
Fuel parameters (Trip Planning Page)
Altimeter
Vertical Speed Indicator
VNV altitudes (Active Flight Plan)
Engine Indication System (EIS)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Fuel and Fuel Flow
Celsius*
Fahrenheit
Gallons*
IMP
Kilograms
Liters
Pounds
Pounds*
Kilograms
HDDD°MM.MM’*
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Temperature
Airspeed Indicator
True Airspeed (PFD)
Wind speed vector
Map range (Traffic Page, Terrain
Proximity/TAWS Page)
CDI scaling (System Setup)
Fuel range calculation (EIS)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Altitude and Vertical
Speed
Exceptions
EIS
Distance and Speed
Settings
Affected Quantities
Magnetic (North)* Heading
True (North)
Course
Bearing
Track
Desired Track
Wind direction (Trip Planning Page)
Metric
Crosstrack error (HSI)
Nautical*
Bearing distances (information windows)
DME distance (information window)
Flight plan distances
Map ranges
DIS, GS, TAS, XTK fields (Navigation Status Box)
All distances on MFD
Altitude buffer distance (System Setup)
Arrival Alert trigger distance (System Setup)
All speeds on MFD
Feet*
All altitudes on MFD
Meters
All elevations on MFD
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Category
Navigation Angle
* Default setting
** Contact a Garmin-authorized service center to change this setting
*** Not configurable
APPENDICES
Table 1-6 Display Units Settings (System Setup Page)
Changing a display unit setting:
1) While on the ‘Aux - System Setup 1’ Page, press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
INDEX
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired field in the ‘Display Units’ Box.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired units.
4) Press the ENT Key. Press the CLR Key to cancel the action without changing the units.
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
35
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
BARO TRANSITION ALERT
See the Flight Instruments section for a discussion on setting the Baro Transition Alert.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
AIRSPACE ALERTS
See the Flight Management section for a discussion on Airspace Alerts settings.
ARRIVAL ALERTS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
The ‘Arrival Alert’ Box on the ‘Aux - System Setup 1’ Page allows the arrival alerts in the PFD ‘Messages’
Window to be turned ‘On/Off’ and the alert trigger distance (up to 99.9 units) set for alerts in the ‘Messages’
Window and Navigation Status Box on the PFD. An arrival alert can be set to notify the pilot with a message
upon reaching a user-specified distance from the final destination (the direct-to waypoint or the last waypoint
in a flight plan). When Arrival Alerts is set to ‘On’, and the set distance is reached, an “Arrival at waypoint”
message is displayed in the PFD Navigation Status Box, and a “WPT ARRIVAL - Arriving at waypoint - [xxxx]”
is displayed in the ‘Alerts’ Window. When Arrival Alerts is set to ‘Off’, only the PFD Navigation Status Box
message “Arriving at waypoint” is displayed, and it is displayed when the time to the final destination is
approximately ten seconds.
Figure 1-18 Arrival Alert Settings (System Setup 1 Page)
AFCS
Enabling/disabling the arrival alert:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - System Setup 1’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘On/Off’ field in the ‘Arrival Alert’ Box.
INDEX
APPENDICES
4) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to turn the airspace alert On or counterclockwise to turn the alert Off.
36
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Changing the arrival alert trigger distance:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - System Setup 1’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the distance field in the ‘Arrival Alert’ Box.
4) Use the FMS Knob to enter a trigger distance and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT DIRECTOR
See the Flight Instruments section for a discussion setting the Flight Director format.
EIS
MFD DATA BAR FIELDS
See the Flight Management section for a discussion on the MFD Data Bar Fields settings.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
GPS CDI
See the Flight Instruments section for a discussion on setting the GPS CDI format.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
COM CONFIGURATION
See the Audio Panel & CNS section for a discussion on the COM Configuration for channel spacing.
NEAREST AIRPORT
See the Flight Management section for a discussion on the Nearest Airport settings.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AUDIO ALERTS
The audio alert voice setting is set to female and is not editable.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
37
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM UTILITIES
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
For flight planning purposes, timers, trip statistics, and a scheduler feature are provided on the ‘Aux - Utility’
Page. The timers available include a stopwatch-like generic timer, a total time in flight timer, and a record of the
time of departure. Trip statistics—odometer, trip odometer, and average trip and maximum groundspeeds—are
displayed from the time of the last reset.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 1-19 Utility Page
TIMERS
The system timers available on the ‘Aux - Utility’ Page include:
AFCS
• Stopwatch-like generic timers
• Total-time-in-flight timer
• Time since departure
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The generic timer can be set to count up or down from a specified time (HH:MM:SS). When the countdown
on the timer reaches zero the digits begin to count up from zero. If the timer is reset before reaching zero on
a countdown, the digits are reset to the initial value. If the timer is counting up when reset, the digits return
to zero.
APPENDICES
Setting the generic timer:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - Utility’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
INDEX
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the timer counting direction (Up/Dn) and press the ENT Key.
38
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
4) If a desired starting time is desired:
a) Use the large FMS Knob to highlight the HH:MM:SS field.
b) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired time and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Start?’ and press the ENT Key to start the timer. The field changes to
‘Stop?’.
6) To stop the timer, press the ENT Key with ‘Stop?’ highlighted. The field changes to ‘Reset?’.
7) To reset the timer, press the ENT Key with ‘Reset?’ highlighted. The field changes back to ‘Start?’ and the digits
are reset.
EIS
The flight timer can be set to count up from zero starting at system power-up or from the time that the
aircraft lifts off; the timer can also be reset to zero at any time.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Setting the flight timer starting criterion:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - Utility’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the field next to the flight timer.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the starting criterion (Pwr-On or In-Air) and press the ENT Key.
Resetting the flight timer:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - Utility’ Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Reset Flight Timer’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
AFCS
The system records the time at which departure occurs, depending on whether the pilot prefers the time
to be recorded from system power-up or from aircraft lift off. The displayed departure time can also be reset
to display the current time at the point of reset. The format in which the time is displayed is controlled from
the System Setup 1 Page.
Setting the departure timer starting criterion:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - Utility’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the field next to the departure time.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the starting criterion (Pwr-On or In-Air) and press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
Resetting the departure time:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - Utility’ Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Use the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Reset Departure Time’ and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
39
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
TRIP STATISTICS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The odometer and trip odometer record the total mileage traveled from the last reset; these odometers can
be reset independently. Resetting the trip odometer also resets the average trip groundspeed. Maximum
groundspeed for the period of time since the last reset is also displayed.
Resetting trip statistics readouts:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - Utility’ Page.
2) Press the MENU Key. The following reset options for trip statistics are displayed:
EIS
• Reset Trip ODOM/AVG GS—Resets trip average ground speed readout and odometer
• Reset Odometer—Resets odometer readout only
• Reset Maximum Speed—Resets maximum speed readout only
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Reset All—Resets flight timer, departure timer, odometers, and groundspeed readouts
3) Use the FMS Knob to highlight the desired reset option and press the ENT Key. The selected parameters are
reset to zero and begin to display data from the point of reset.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
SCHEDULER
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The system Scheduler feature can be used to enter and display reminder messages (e.g., “Change oil”,
“Switch fuel tanks”, “Overhaul”) in the Alerts Window on the PFD. Messages can be set to display based on a
specific date and time (event), once the message timer reaches zero (one-time; default setting), or recurrently
whenever the message timer reaches zero (periodic). Message timers set to periodic alerting automatically
reset to the original timer value once the message is displayed. When power is cycled, messages are retained
until deleted, and message timer countdown is restarted.
Entering a scheduler message:
1) Select the ‘Aux - Utility’ Page.
AFCS
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the first empty scheduler message naming field.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Use the FMS Knob to enter the message text to be displayed in the PFD ‘Messages’ Window and press the ENT Key.
5) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the field next to ‘Type’.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select set the message alert type:
• Event—Message issued at the specified date/time
APPENDICES
• One-time—Message issued when the message timer reaches zero (default setting)
• Periodic—Message issued each time the message timer reaches zero
INDEX
7) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next field.
40
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
8) For periodic and one-time message, use the FMS Knob to enter the timer value (HHH:MM:SS) from which to
countdown and press the ENT Key.
9) For event-based messages:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
a) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired date (DD-MMM-YY) and press the ENT Key.
b) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next field.
c) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired time (HH:MM) and press the ENT Key.
10) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to enter the next message.
EIS
Deleting a scheduler message:
1) Select the ‘Aux - Utility’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the name field of the scheduler message to be deleted.
4) Press the CLR Key to clear the message text. If the CLR Key is pressed again, the message is restored.
5) Press the ENT Key to confirm message deletion.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Scheduler messages appear in the ‘Alerts’ Window on the PFD and cause the Alerts Softkey label to
change to a flashing white “Message” label. Pressing the Message Softkey opens the ‘Alerts’ Window and
acknowledges the scheduler message. The softkey reverts to the “Alerts” label. Pressing the Alerts Softkey
again removes the ‘Alerts’ Window from the display and the scheduler message is deleted from the message
queue.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 1-20 PFD Alerts Window
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
41
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.5 DISPLAY BACKLIGHTING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The PFD and MFD display backlighting, the PFD and MFD bezel, and the Audio Panel keys can be adjusted
manually in one of two ways:
• Using the individual dimmer bus control for the desired display, or
• Using the PFD Setup Menu and the following procedures. In normal operating mode, backlighting can only be
adjusted from the PFD. In reversionary mode, adjustments can be made from any remaining displays.
Adjusting display backlighting:
EIS
1) Press the PFD MENU Key to display the ‘PFD Setup Menu’. ‘Auto’ is now highlighted next to ‘PFD Display’. If
desired, turn the large FMS Knob to select ‘Auto’ next to ‘MFD Display’.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired backlighting then press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Manual’ and press the ENT Key. The intensity value is now highlighted.
1) Press the PFD MENU Key to display the ‘PFD Setup Menu’. ‘Auto’ is now highlighted next to ‘PFD Display’.
4) To remove the menu, press the CLR or MENU Key.
Adjusting key backlighting:
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘PFD Display’ or ‘MFD Display’, as desired.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob in the direction of the green arrowhead to display ‘PFD Key’ or ‘MFD Key’.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Auto’.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Manual’ and press the ENT Key. The intensity value is now highlighted.
6) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired backlighting and press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
7) To remove the menu, press the CLR or MENU Key.
INDEX
Figure 1-21 PFD Setup Menu
42
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 2 FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: The Automatic Flight Control System (AFCS) provides additional readouts and bugs on selected flight
instruments. Refer to the AFCS Section for details on these bugs and readouts, as they appear on the display
during certain AFCS flight director modes.
EIS
The system includes an easy-to-scan Primary Flight Display (PFD) that features a large horizon, airspeed, attitude,
altitude, vertical speed, and course deviation information. In addition to the flight instruments, navigation,
communication, terrain, traffic, and weather information are also presented on the PFD and explained in other
sections of this Pilot’s Guide.
The following flight instruments and supplemental flight data pertaining to flight instruments are displayed on
the PFD:
• Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI), showing
– Turn Rate Indicator
– True Airspeed
– Bearing pointers and information windows
– Ground Speed
– Navigation source
– Airspeed awareness ranges
– Course Deviation Indicator (CDI)
– Vspeed Reference Bugs
– DME Information Window (optional)
• ADF/DME Tuning Window
• Altimeter, showing
• References Window, showing
– Generic timer
– Barometric Setting
– Vspeed values
– Selected Altitude
– Barometric or temperature compensated
minimum descent altitude (MDA) or decision
height (DH)
• Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI)
AFCS
– Trend Vector
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Attitude Indicator with Slip/Skid Indication
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
– Indicated Airspeed
• Vertical Deviation, Glideslope, and Glidepath
Indicators
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Airspeed Indicator, showing
• Wind data
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Vertical Navigation (VNV) indications
• Outside Air Temperature (OAT)
APPENDICES
The PFD also displays various alerts and annunciations discussed throughout this Pilot’s Guide.
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
43
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
16
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
17
15
14
1
EIS
13
12
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2
3
11
4
10
5
9
8
6
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
7
1
Airspeed Indicator
10
Turn Rate Indicator
2
True Airspeed
11
Barometric Altimeter Setting
3
Ground Speed
12
Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI)
4
Current Heading
13
Selected Altitude Bug
5
Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI)
14
Altimeter
6
Outside Air Temperature (OAT)
15
Selected Altitude
7
Softkeys
16
Slip/Skid Indicator
8
Generic Timer
17
Attitude Indicator
9
Heading Bug
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 2-1 Primary Flight Display
44
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
11
1
2
3
EIS
10
9
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4
5
6
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
7
8
Marker Beacon Annunciation
7
Bearing Information
2
Vertical Deviation Indication
8
3
Selected Heading
4
Wind Data Box
Minimum Descent Altitude/
Decision Height
Selected Course
5
HSI Map
6
DME Information Window
9
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1
Required Vertical Speed
Indicator
11 VNV Target Altitude
10
AFCS
Figure 2-2 Additional PFD Information
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
45
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
2.1 FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ATTITUDE INDICATOR
Attitude information is displayed over a virtual blue sky and brown ground with a white horizon line. The
Attitude Indicator displays the pitch, roll, and slip/skid information.
EIS
9
8
1
7
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2
6
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3
4
5
1
Roll Pointer
2
Roll Scale
3
Horizon Line
4
Aircraft Symbol
5
Land Representation
6
Pitch Scale
7
Slip/Skid Indicator
8
Sky Representation
9
Roll Scale Zero
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 2-3 Attitude Indicator
AFCS
The horizon line is part of the pitch scale. Above and below the horizon line, major pitch marks and numeric
labels are shown for every 10˚, up to 90˚. Minor pitch marks are shown for intervening 5˚ increments, up
to 25˚ below and 45˚ above the horizon line. Between 20˚ below to 20˚ above the horizon line, minor pitch
marks occur every 2.5˚. When the optional Garmin Synthetic Vision System (Garmin SVT™) is activated, the
pitch scale is reduced to 10˚ up and 7.5˚ down; refer to the Synthetic Vision Technology discussion later in this
section for more information.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The inverted white triangle indicates zero on the roll scale. Major tick marks at 30˚ and 60˚ and minor tick
marks at 10˚, 20˚, and 45˚ are shown to the left and right of the zero. Angle of bank is indicated by the position
of the pointer on the roll scale.
INDEX
APPENDICES
The Slip/Skid Indicator is the bar beneath the roll pointer. One bar displacement is equal to one ball
displacement on a traditional inclinometer. The indicator bar moves with the roll pointer and moves laterally
away from the pointer to indicate uncoordinated flight. Slip (inside the turn) or skid (outside the turn) is
indicated by the location of the bar relative to the pointer.
Figure 2-4 Slip/Skid Indication
46
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AIRSPEED INDICATOR
NOTE: Refer to the approved aircraft documentation for airframe-specific airspeed criteria and Vspeed
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
values.
Operating Ranges
Low Speed Range
EIS
The Airspeed Indicator displays airspeed on a moving tape rolling number gauge. The true airspeed (TAS)
is displayed in knots below the Airspeed Indicator. The numeric labels and major tick marks on the moving
tape are marked at intervals of 10 knots. The minor tick marks on the moving tape are marked at intervals of
five knots. Speed indication starts at 20 knots, with 60 knots of airspeed viewable at any time. The Indicated
Airspeed is displayed inside the black pointer. The pointer remains black until reaching maximum operating
speed (VMO), at which point it is red.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Red Pointer at
and above VNE
Airspeed
Trend
Vector
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Vspeed
References
Indicated
Airspeed
True
Airspeed
AFCS
Ground
Speed
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Speed
Ranges
Figure 2-5 Airspeed Indicator
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Color-coded stripes appear on the Airspeed Indicator to show the operating ranges. The low speed range
stripes are red and amber. Normal operating range is green, caution range is amber, and the never exceed speed
(VNE) begins with a red and white barber pole. The flap operating range is indicated by a white stripe.
APPENDICES
The Airspeed Trend Vector is a vertical magenta line, extending up or down the airspeed scale to the right of
the speed range. The end of the trend vector indicates the predicted airspeed in six seconds if the current rate
of acceleration is maintained. If the trend vector crosses VNE, the number in the indicated airspeed pointer
changes to amber. The trend vector is absent if the speed remains constant or if any data needed to calculate
airspeed is not available due to a system failure.
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
INDEX
Vspeeds (Glide, VR, VX, and VY) can be changed and their bugs enabled/disabled from the References
Window. When active (on), the Vspeeds are displayed to the right of the airspeed scale. All Vspeed values are
reset and all bugs turned off during power up. Black reference bugs with cyan letters appear along the right
side of the airspeed scale denote GLIDE, VX, and VY. The pilot can enable/disable the display of these bugs, as
47
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Vspeed
Bug
Vx
X
Vy
Y
GLIDE
G
Vr
R
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
well as change their values. When the indicated airspeed is below 20 knots, enabled Vspeeds Reference Bugs
and their numeric values appear in a list at the bottom of the airspeed tape, ordered from highest to lowest.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Table 2-1 Vspeed Bug
Labels
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 2-6 VSpeed References
Enabling/disabling or modifying individual Vspeed Reference Bugs:
1) Press the Tmr/Ref Softkey.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired Vspeed value.
3) Use the small FMS Knob to change the Vspeed in 1-kt increments (when a speed has been changed from a
default value, an asterisk appears next to the speed).
4) Press the ENT Key or turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the On/Off field
5) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to On or counterclockwise to Off.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
6) To remove the window, press the CLR Key or the Tmr/Ref Softkey.
References Window
References Window Menu
Figure 2-7 References Window and Menu
The pilot can also enable/disable all Vspeed Reference Bugs as a group.
INDEX
Enabling/disabling Vspeed Reference Bugs as a group:
1) Press the Tmr/Ref Softkey.
2) Press the MENU Key.
48
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
3) Turn the FMS Knob to scroll as needed to highlight the desired selection.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) To remove the References Window, press the CLR Key or the Tmr/Ref Softkey.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ALTIMETER
The Altimeter displays 600 feet of barometric altitude values at a time on a moving tape rolling number gauge.
Numeric labels and major tick marks are shown at intervals of 100 feet. Minor tick marks are at intervals of 20
feet. The Indicated Altitude is displayed inside the black pointer.
EIS
The Selected Altitude is displayed above the Altimeter in the box indicated by a selection bug symbol. A bug
corresponding to this altitude is shown on the tape. If the Selected Altitude exceeds the range shown on the
tape, the bug appears at the upper or lower edge of the tape. When the metric overlay is enabled it is displayed
in a separate box above the Selected Altitude.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
A magenta Altitude Trend Vector extends up or down the left of the altitude tape, the end resting at the
approximate altitude to be reached in six seconds at the current vertical speed. The trend vector is not shown
if altitude remains constant or if data needed for calculation is not available due to a system failure.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Setting the Selected Altitude:
T urn the ALT Knob to set the Selected Altitude. Turn the large knob for 1000-ft increments, small knob for
100-ft increments. If the Metric overlays are enabled, the large knob adjusts the Selected Altitude in 500-meter
increments; the small knob adjusts the Selected Altitude in 50-meter increments.
Selected
Altitude
Indicated
Altitude
Indicated
Altitude
(Meters)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Altitude
Trend
Vector
Selected
Altitude
(Meters)
AFCS
Selected
Altitude
Bug
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
If a Minimum Descent Altitude/Decision Height (MDA/DH) value has been set, this altitude is also available for
the Selected Altitude.
MDA/DH
Altitude
Bug
APPENDICES
Barometric
Setting Box
(Hectopascals)
Barometric
Setting
Figure 2-8 Altimeter
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
INDEX
Altitudes can also be displayed in meters as an overlay (Figure 2-8). Note that the altitude tape does not
change scale.
49
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Enabling/displaying metric altitude overlays:
1) Press the PFD Opt Softkey to display the second-level softkeys.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the ALT Units Softkey.
3) Press the Meters Softkey to enable/disable metric altitude overlays.
4) Press the Back Softkey twice to return to the top-level softkeys.
EIS
The barometric pressure setting is displayed below the Altimeter in inches of mercury (in Hg) or hectopascals
(hPa) when metric units are selected. Adjusting the altimeter barometric pressure setting creates discontinuities
in VNV vertical deviation, moving the descent path. For large adjustments, it may take several minutes for the
aircraft to re-establish on the descent patch. If the change is made while nearing a waypoint with a VNV Target
Altitude, the aircraft may not re-establish on the descent path in time to meet the vertical constraint.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
WARNING: Do not use a QFE altimeter setting with this system. System functions will not operate properly
with a QFE altimeter setting. Use only a QHN altimeter setting for the height above mean sea level, or the
standard pressure setting, as applicable.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selecting the altimeter barometric pressure setting:
Turn the BARO Knob to select the desired setting.
Selecting standard barometric pressure (29.92 in Hg):
1) Press the PFD Opt Softkey to display the second-level softkeys.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the STD Baro Softkey.
3) Press the Back Softkey to return to the top-level softkeys.
AFCS
Figure 2-9 Standard Barometric Setting
Changing altimeter barometric pressure setting units:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Press the PFD Opt Softkey to display the second-level softkeys.
2) Press the ALT Units Softkey.
3) Press the IN Softkey to display the barometric pressure setting in inches of mercury (in Hg).
APPENDICES
Or, press the HPA Softkey to display the barometric pressure setting in hectopascals (hPa).
4) Press the Back Softkey twice to return to the top-level softkeys.
INDEX
The Baro Transition Alerts flash the barometric pressure setting to remind the pilot to change the barometric
pressure setting to or from standard. Two alerts are available. The altitude Baro Transition Alert occurs when
climbing through the transition altitude beginning at 200 feet below this altitude. The flight level Baro Transition
Alert occurs when descending through the transition flight level beginning at 200 feet above this flight level.
The barometric pressure setting stops flashing after the pilot changes the barometric pressure setting. The pilot
can enable/disable either Baro Transition Alert, and choose the altitude or flight level used to trigger the alerts.
50
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Setting the Baro Transition Alerts:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - System Setup 1’ Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) To enable/disable the Baro Transition Alert based on altitude, turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘On’ or
‘Off’ field for the BARO Transition Alert Altitude in the ‘BARO Transition Alert’ Box.
4) If desired, turn the small FMS Knob to set the BARO Transition Alert Altitude On or Off.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Altitude field.
EIS
6) Use the FMS Knobs to change the altitude and press the ENT Key to accept or press the CLR Key to return to
the previous altitude selection.
7) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘On’ or ‘Off’ field for the BARO Transition Alert Level.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
8) If desired, turn the small FMS Knob to set the BARO Transition Alert Flight Level On or Off.
9) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Flight Level ‘On’ or ‘Off’ field.
10) Use the FMS Knobs to change the Flight Level for the alert and press the ENT Key to accept or press the CLR
Key to return to the previous altitude selection.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
11) Push the FMS Knob to deactivate the cursor.
VERTICAL SPEED INDICATOR (VSI)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NOTE: The Glidepath Indicator is only available on GPS approaches supporting SBAS vertical guidance when
SBAS is available.
AFCS
The Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI; Figure 2-10) displays the aircraft vertical speed on a fixed scale with labels
at 1000 and 2000 fpm and minor tick marks every 500 fpm. Digits appear in the pointer when the climb or
descent rate is greater than 100 fpm. If the rate of ascent/descent exceeds 2000 fpm, the pointer appears at the
edge of the tape and the rate appears inside the pointer.
A magenta chevron is displayed on the VSI to indicate the Required Vertical Speed for reaching a VNV target
altitude once the “TOD [Top of Descent] within 1 minute” alert has generated.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
VERTICAL DEVIATION
APPENDICES
When Vertical Navigation (VNV) is being used (Figure 2-10), the Vertical Deviation Indicator (VDI) appears
to the left of the altimeter and is displayed with a magenta ‘V’ at the top of the scale and a magenta chevron
indicating the baro-VNAV vertical deviation. The VDI appears in conjunction with the “TOD within 1 minute”
alert. The VDI is removed from the display if vertical deviation becomes invalid. See the Flight Management
Section for details on VNV features, and refer to the Supplemental Flight Data discussion later in this section for
more information about VNV indications on the PFD.
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
INDEX
The Glideslope Indicator (Figure 2-11) appears to the left of the Altimeter whenever an ILS frequency is
tuned in the active NAV field. A green diamond acts as the Glideslope Indicator, like a glideslope needle on
a conventional indicator. The Glideslope Preview, a hollow gray diamond, is displayed when the navigation
source is set to GPS, in addition to a localizer frequency being tuned on the navigation receiver and receiving
glideslope information. When the system auto-switches the active navigation source to the localizer frequency
51
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
the Glideslope Indicator is displayed as a solid green diamond. If a localizer frequency is tuned and there is no
glideslope, “NO GS” is displayed in place of the diamond.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
VNV Target
Altitude
Vertical
Speed
Scale
Vertical
Speed
Indicator
Glideslope
Indicator
Glideslope
Preview
Indicator
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Vertical
Deviation
Indicator
Required
Vertical
Speed
Marker
Beacon
Annunciation
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 2-10 Vertical Speed and
Deviation Indicator (VSI and VDI)
Figure 2-11 Glideslope Indicator
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Glidepath Indicator is a vertical deviation scale for GPS approach service levels supporting SBAS vertical
guidance (LNAV+V, L/VNAV, LPV, LP+V) or advisory vertical guidance (LNAV+V, LP+V, Visual). The Glidepath
Indicator, a magenta diamond (Figure 2-12) appears on the display as soon as the Final Approach Fix (FAF)
becomes the active waypoint, and GPS is the selected navigation source. Full-scale deflection (two dots) is
angular with upper and lower limits. The upper limit is +/-492 feet (150 meters) and lower limit depends on
approach service level as follows:
• LNAV/VNAV, LNAV+V, LP+V, Visual is +/- 148 feet (45 meters).
AFCS
• LPV is +/- 49 feet (15 meters).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
A hollow gray diamond represents a preview of the glidepath indicator. This is shown while inbound to the
FAF waypoint, but before the FAF waypoint is the next active waypoint. The preview is also shown when the
AFCS is coupled to the Vertical Path Tracking Mode (VPTH) while inbound to the FAF waypoint, until the
AFCS captures the glidepath; refer to the AFCS section for more information about Vertical Path Tracking Mode.
The hollow gray preview diamond changes to a solid magenta diamond to indicate the glidepath indicator is
active.
APPENDICES
If the approach downgrades past the final approach fix (FAF), “NO GP” is displayed in place of the diamond.
NOTE: The Glidepath Indicator appears on the display as soon as the Final Approach Fix (FAF) becomes the
active waypoint. Depending on procedure design, pilot action, and/or ATC clearance, the aircraft may be
centered on or above the glidepath when the Glidepath Indicator appears.
INDEX
While executing an SBAS approach with an LNAV/VNAV approach service level, and between the FAF and
MAP, the Vertical Deviation Limit Indicators appear as vertical white lines (Figure 2-13) indicating the area
where deviation exceeds allowable limits for the glidepath. The Vertical Deviation Limit Indicator provides
a scaled representation of +/- 75 feet of the calculated glidepath. The “window” between the lines represents
52
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
the area of acceptable deviation. The length of the lines change while progressing through the final approach.
When the Glidepath Indicator enters an excessive deviation area, the Glidepath and Vertical Deviation Limit
Indicators become amber.
Glidepath
in area of
excessive
vertical
deviation
with
amber
indicators
EIS
Glidepath
Indicator
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Vertical
Deviation
Limit
Indicators
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Glidepath
Preview
Indicator
Figure 2-12 Glidepath Indicator
Figure 2-13 Glidepath Indicator and Vertical Deviation Limit Indicators
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
VERTICAL NAVIGATION (VNV) INDICATIONS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
When a VNV flight plan has been activated, VNV indications (VNV Target Altitude, RVSI, VDI) appear on
the PFD in conjunction with the “TOD within 1 minute” message and “Vertical track” voice alert. See the
Flight Management and AFCS sections for details on VNV features. VNV indications are removed from the
PFD according to the criteria listed in the table. Refer to the Flight Management section for additional VNAV
indications.
Top of Descent Message
AFCS
VNV Target
Altitude
Vertical
Deviation
Indicator
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Required
Vertical
Speed Bug
APPENDICES
Phase of
Flight
GPS is
Selected
Navigation
Source
INDEX
Figure 2-14 Vertical Navigation Indications (PFD)
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
53
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
VNV Indication Removed
Required Vertical
Vertical
VNV Target
Speed (RVSI)
Deviation (VDI)
Altitude*
Aircraft > 1 min before the next TOD due to flight plan change
X
X
X
VNV cancelled (CNCL VNV Softkey pressed on MFD)
X
X
X
Distance to active waypoint cannot be computed due to
unsupported flight plan leg type (see Flight Management
X
X
X
Section)
Aircraft > 250 feet below active VNV Target Altitude
X
X
X
Current crosstrack or track angle error has exceeded limit
X
X
X
Active altitude-constrained waypoint can not be reached within
X
X
maximum allowed flight path angle and vertical speed
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Criteria
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Table 2-2 VNV Indication Removal Criteria
HORIZONTAL SITUATION INDICATOR (HSI)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI) displays a rotating compass card in a heading-up orientation. Letters
indicate the cardinal points with numeric labels every 30˚. Major tick marks are at 10˚ intervals and minor
tick marks are at 5˚ intervals. A digital reading of the current heading appears on top of the HSI. The HSI also
presents turn rate, course deviation, bearing, and selected navigation source information. The HSI is available
in two formats: a 360˚ compass rose and a 210˚ HSI Map. The HSI Map is mutually exclusive with the Inset
Maps.
Enabling/disabling the HSI Map on the PFD:
1) Press the Map/HSI Softkey.
2) Press the Layout Softkey.
AFCS
3) Press the HSI Map Softkey to enable the HSI Map.
Or:
Press the Map Off Softkey to disable the HSI Map.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The HSI with the HSI map disabled presents a Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) with a Course Pointer, To/
From Indicator, and a sliding deviation bar and scale. The Course Pointer is a single line arrow (GPS, VOR1,
and LOC) or a double line arrow (VOR2 and LOC2) which points in the direction of the set course. The To/
From Indicator rotates with the Course Pointer and appears when the system is receiving the active NAVAID.
54
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
14
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
15
13
1
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
12
2
3
11
4
10
6
9
7
8
9
To/From Indicator
2
Current Track Indicator
10
Flight Phase
3
Course Pointer
11
4
Navigation Source
Course Deviation Indicator
(CDI)
12 Heading Bug
5
Aircraft Symbol
13
6
Lateral Deviation Scale
Turn Rate and Heading
Trend Vector
14 Current Heading
7
Rotating Compass Card
15
8
OBS Mode Active
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Turn Rate Indicator
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1
EIS
5
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Lubber Line
Figure 2-15 Horizontal Situation Indicator (360˚ HSI)
AFCS
The HSI Map is a 210 ˚ expanded compass rose which also includes a navigation map with overlay capabilities
such as topographical, weather, and land information. The HSI Map contains a Course Pointer, a combined To/
From Indicator with a sliding deviation indicator, and a lateral deviation scale. Upon passing a station, the To/
From Indicator points to the tail of the aircraft. Depending on the navigation source, the CDI on the HSI Map
can appear either as an arrowhead (GPS, VOR, OBS) as a diamond (LOC). Refer to the Flight Management
Section for information about using HSI Map overlays.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
55
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Lateral Deviation Scale
Flight Phase
Annunciation
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Navigation Source
Course Deviation
Indicator and To/
From Indicator
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Course Pointer
Figure 2-16 HSI Map
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
A digital reading of the current heading appears above the rotating compass card. A magenta diamond on
the HSI represents the current track over the ground the aircraft is flying. To the upper left of the HSI, the
Selected Heading is shown in cyan, which corresponds to the cyan heading bug on the compass rose. The
Desired Track (DTK) is shown in magenta to the upper right of the HSI when the selected navigation source is
GPS and OBS Mode is not active. The Selected Course (CRS) is shown to the upper right of the HSI when the
selected navigation source is VOR or LOC and in magenta when the selected navigation source is GPS with OBS
Mode active. Upon station passage, the To/From Indicator flips and points to the tail of the aircraft, just like
a conventional To/From flag. Depending on the navigation source, the CDI on the can appear in two different
ways: an arrowhead (GPS, VOR, OBS) or a diamond (LOC).
Adjusting the Selected Heading:
AFCS
Turn the HDG Knob to set the Selected Heading.
Press the HDG Knob to synchronize the bug to the current heading.
Adjusting the Selected Course:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Turn the CRS Knob to set the Selected Course.
Press the CRS Knob to re-center the CDI and return the course pointer to the bearing of the active waypoint or
navigation station.
APPENDICES
Current Track Indicator
Current Heading
Selected Heading
Selected Course
Selected Heading Bug
INDEX
Figure 2-17 Heading and Course Indications
Navigation angles (track, heading, course, bearing) are corrected to the computed magnetic variation (‘Mag
Var’) or referenced to true north (denoted ‘T’), set on the Aux - System Setup 1 Page. When an approach
56
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
referenced to true north has been loaded into the flight plan, the system generates a message to change the
navigation angle setting to ‘True’ at the appropriate time.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Figure 2-18 Heading and Course Indications (True)
EIS
Changing the navigation angle true/magnetic setting:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the Aux - System Setup 1 Page on the MFD.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight NAV Angle setting in the Display Units box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired setting and press the ENT Key.
• Magnetic - Angles corrected to the computed magnetic variation (Mag Var)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• True - References angles to true north (T)
COURSE DEVIATION INDICATOR (CDI)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) moves left or right from the course pointer along a lateral deviation
scale to display aircraft position relative to the course. If the course deviation data is not valid, the CDI is not
displayed.
Navigation
Source
AFCS
Flight
Phase
Scale
Crosstrack
Error
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
CDI
Figure 2-19 Course Deviation Indicator
APPENDICES
The CDI can display two sources of navigation, GPS or VOR/LOC. The color indicates the current navigation
source, magenta for GPS and green for VOR and LOC. The full scale limits for the CDI are defined by an GPSderived distance when coupled to the GPS. If the CDI exceeds the maximum deviation on the scale (two dots)
while navigating with GPS, the crosstrack error (XTK) is displayed below the white aircraft symbol. When
navigating using a VOR or localizer (LOC), the CDI uses the same angular deviation as a mechanical CDI.
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
57
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When navigating with GPS and an ILS or localizer approach is activated, a preview of the approach course is
indicated by the dashed gray pointer and CDI on the HSI. As the aircraft approaches the final approach course,
the two course pointers converge. When the system auto-switches to the localizer NAV source, the pointer and
CDI will change to green.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Preview Localizer and
Course Pointer
Figure 2-20 Navigation Sources
Changing navigation sources:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the CDI Softkey to change from GPS to VOR1 or LOC1. This places the cyan tuning box over the NAV1
standby frequency in the upper left corner of the PFD.
2) Press the CDI Softkey again to change from VOR1 or LOC1 to VOR2 or LOC2. This places the cyan tuning box
over the NAV2 standby frequency.
AFCS
3) Press the CDI Softkey a third time to return to GPS.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NAV1 Selected for Tuning
APPENDICES
GPS
Selected
LOC1
Selected
NAV2 Selected for Tuning
VOR2
Selected
Pressing the CDI Softkey
Cycles through
Navigation Sources
INDEX
Figure 2-21 Selecting a Navigation Source
The system automatically changes from GPS to LOC navigation source and changes the CDI scaling accordingly
when all of the following occur:
58
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
• A localizer or ILS approach has been loaded into the active flight plan
• The final approach fix (FAF) is the active leg, the FAF is less than 15 nm away, and the aircraft is moving
toward the FAF
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• A valid localizer frequency has been tuned
• The GPS CDI deviation is less than 1.2 times full-scale deflection
EIS
GPS steering guidance is still provided after the CDI automatically changes to LOC until LOC capture, up
to the Final Approach Fix (FAF) for an ILS approach, or until GPS information becomes invalid. Activating a
Vector-to-Final (VTF) also causes the CDI to switch to LOC navigation source. GPS steering guidance is not
provided after the change.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
On some ILS approaches where the glideslope intercept point is at or in close proximity to the fix prior to
the FAF (see Figure 2-22), it is possible to be above the glideslope when the navigation source automatically
changes from GPS to LOC. The probability of this occurring varies based on air temperature.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Fix Prior to the FAF
Glideslope Intercept Point
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 2-22 ILS Approach with Glideslope Intercept Point at Fix Prior to the FAF
AFCS
GPS CDI SCALING
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
When GPS is the selected navigation source, the flight plan legs are sequenced automatically and
annunciations appear on the HSI for the flight phase. Flight phase annunciations are normally shown in
magenta, but when cautionary conditions exist the color changes to amber. If the current leg in the flight plan
is a heading leg, HDG LEG is annunciated in magenta beneath the aircraft symbol.
APPENDICES
The current GPS CDI scale setting is displayed as System CDI on the Aux - System Setup 1 Page and the
full-scale deflection setting may also be selected (2.0 nm, 1.0 nm, 0.3 nm, or Auto) from this page. If the
selected scaling is smaller than the automatic setting for enroute and terminal phases, the CDI is scaled
accordingly and the selected setting is displayed rather than the flight phase annunciation.
Changing the selected GPS CDI setting:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the Aux - System Setup 1 Page on the MFD.
INDEX
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Format Allowed selection in the GPS CDI box.
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
59
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired setting and press the ENT Key.
5) To cancel the selection, press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Departure
Terminal
Enroute
(Oceanic if >200 nm
from nearest airport)
Terminal
Refer to accompanying
approach CDI scaling figures
Approach
0.3 nm
1.0 nm
1.0 nm
2.0 nm
1.0 nm
0.3 nm
CDI Full-scale Deflection
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When set to Auto (default), the GPS CDI scale automatically adjusts to the desired limits based upon the
current phase of flight (Figure 2-23, Table 2-3).
Missed
Approach
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 2-23 Automatic CDI Scaling
• Once a departure procedure is activated, the CDI is scaled for departure (0.3 nm).
• The system switches from departure to terminal CDI scaling (1.0 nm) under the following conditions:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- The next leg in the departure procedure is not aligned with the departure runway
- The next leg in the departure procedure is not a CA, CD, CF, CI, CR, DF, FA, FC, FD, FM, IF, or TF (see
Glossary for leg type definitions)
- After any leg in the departure procedure that is not a CA or FA
AFCS
• At 30 nm from the departure airport, the enroute phase of flight is automatically entered and CDI scaling
changes to 2.0 nm over a distance of 1.0 nm, except under the following conditions:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
- When navigating with an active departure procedure, the flight phase and CDI scale does not change
until the aircraft arrives at the last departure waypoint (if more than 30 nm from the departure airport) or
the leg after the last departure waypoint has been activated or a direct-to waypoint is activated.
• If after completing the departure procedure the nearest airport is more than 200 nm away from the aircraft
and the approach procedure has not yet commenced, the CDI is scaled for oceanic flight (2.0 nm).
APPENDICES
• Within 31 nm of the destination airport (terminal area), the CDI scale gradually decreases from 2.0 nm to
1.0 nm over a distance of 1.0 nm, except under the following conditions:
- Upon reaching the first waypoint of an arrival route that is more than 31 nm from the destination airport,
the flight phase changes to terminal and the CDI scale begins to decrease from 2.0 nm to 1.0 nm over a
distance of 1.0 nm.
INDEX
• During approach, the CDI scale decreases even further (Figures 2-26 and 2-27). This transition normally
occurs within 2.0 nm of the final approach fix (FAF). The CDI changes to approach scaling automatically
once the approach procedure is activated or if Vectors-To-Final (VTF) are selected.
60
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
- If the active waypoint is the FAF, the ground track and the bearing to the FAF must be within 45° of the
final approach segment course.
2 nm
2 nm
FAF
FAF
Figure 2-24 Typical LNAV, LNAV+V, and Visual Approach CDI Scaling
0.3 nm
Landing
Threshold
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
CDI scale varies if VTF is activated
angle based
on database
information
course width
1.0 nm
CDI Full-scale Deflection
350 ft
1.0 nm
0.3 nm
angle set
by system
EIS
CDI Full-scale Deflection
CDI scale is set to the smaller of 0.3 nm
or an angle set by the system
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
- If the active waypoint is part of the missed approach procedure, the active leg and the preceding missed
approach legs must be aligned with the final approach segment course and the aircraft must not have
passed the turn initiation point.
CDI scale varies if VTF is activated
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 2-25 Typical LNAV/VNAV, LPV, LP+V, and LP Approach
CDI Scaling
• When a missed approach is activated, the CDI scale changes to 0.3 nm.
• The system automatically switches back to terminal mode under the following conditions:
- The next leg in the missed approach procedure is not aligned with the final approach path
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- The next leg in the missed approach procedure is not a CA, CD, CF, CI, CR, DF, FA, FC, FD, FM, IF, or TF
- After any leg in the missed approach procedure that is not a CA or FA
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
61
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Flight Phase
Annunciation*
DPRT
TERM
ENR
OCN
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Departure
Terminal
Enroute
Oceanic
Approach
(Non-precision)
LNAV
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Approach
(Non-precision with Advisory Vertical
Guidance)
Approach
(Non-precision with Advisory Vertical
Guidance)
Approach
(LNAV/VNAV)
Approach
(LPV)
Approach
(Non-precision with Advisory Vertical
Guidance)
Approach
(LP)
Missed Approach
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Automatic CDI Full-scale Deflection
0.3 nm
1.0 nm
2.0 nm
4.0 nm
LNAV + V
1.0 nm decreasing to 350 feet depending on
variables (Figure 2-24)
VISUAL
L/VNAV
LPV
LP+V
1.0 nm decreasing to a specified course
width, then 0.3 nm, depending on variables
(Figure 2-25)
LP
MAPR
0.3 nm
* Flight phase annunciations are normally shown in magenta, but when cautionary conditions exist
the color changes to amber.
AFCS
Table 2-3 Automatic GPS CDI Scaling
OBS MODE
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NOTE: VNV is inhibited while automatic waypoint sequencing has been suspended.
APPENDICES
Enabling Omni-bearing Selector (OBS) Mode suspends the automatic sequencing of waypoints in a GPS
flight plan (GPS must be the selected navigation source), but retains the current Active-to waypoint as the
navigation reference even after passing the waypoint. OBS is annunciated to the lower right of the aircraft
symbol when OBS Mode is selected.
INDEX
While OBS Mode is enabled, a course line is drawn through the Active-to waypoint on the moving map. If
desired, the course to/from the waypoint can now be adjusted. When OBS Mode is disabled, the GPS flight
plan returns to normal operation, with automatic sequencing of waypoints, following the course set in OBS
Mode. The flight plan on the moving map retains the modified course line.
62
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
GPS
Selected
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Extended
Course
Line
OBS Mode
Enabled
Pressing the OBS
Softkey Enables
OBS Mode
EIS
Pressing the OBS
Softkey Again
Disables OBS Mode
Figure 2-26 Omni-bearing Selector (OBS) Mode
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Enabling/disabling OBS Mode while navigating a GPS flight plan:
1) Press the OBS Softkey to select OBS Mode.
2) Turn the CRS Knob to select the desired course to/from the waypoint. Press the CRS Knob to synchronize the
Selected Course with the bearing to the next waypoint.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Press the OBS Softkey again to return to automatic waypoint sequencing.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
As the aircraft crosses the missed approach point (MAP), automatic approach waypoint sequencing is
suspended. SUSP appears on the HSI to the lower right of the aircraft symbol. The OBS Softkey annunciator
changes from gray to green to indicate the suspension is active as shown in Figure 2-27. Pressing the SUSP
Softkey deactivates the suspension and resumes automatic sequencing of approach waypoints.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
SUSP
Softkey
SUSP
Annunciation
APPENDICES
Figure 2-27 Suspending Automatic Waypoint Sequencing
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
63
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
TURN RATE INDICATOR
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Turn Rate Indicator is located directly above the rotating compass card. Tick marks to the left and right
of the lubber line denote half-standard and standard turn rates. A magenta Turn Rate Trend Vector shows the
current turn rate. The end of the trend vector gives the heading predicted in six seconds, based on the present
turn rate. A standard-rate turn is shown on the indicator by the trend vector stopping at the standard turn
rate tick mark, corresponding to a predicted heading of 18˚ from the current heading. At rates greater than
4 deg/sec, an arrowhead appears at the end of the magenta trend vector and the prediction is no longer valid.
EIS
Standard
Turn Rate
Arrow Shown
for Turn Rate
> 4 Degrees
per Second
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Half Standard
Turn Rate
Figure 2-28 Turn Rate Indicator and Trend Vector
BEARING POINTERS AND INFORMATION WINDOWS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Two bearing pointers and associated information can be displayed on the HSI for NAV and GPS sources by
pressing the PFD Opt Softkey then either the Bearing 1 or Bearing 2 Softkey. The bearing pointers are cyan
and are single-line (BRG1) or double-line (BRG2). A pointer symbol is shown in the information window to
indicate the navigation source. The bearing pointers never override the CDI and are visually separated from
the CDI by a white ring. Bearing pointers may be selected but not necessarily visible due to data unavailability.
Tuning Mode
Frequency
Bearing 1
Pointer
Bearing 2
Pointer
AFCS
Distance
DME Information Window
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Distance to
Bearing Source
Bearing
Source
Pointer
Icon
APPENDICES
Station
Pointer
Identifier
Icon
Bearing 1 Information Window
Bearing
Source
Bearing 2 Information Window
INDEX
Figure 2-29 HSI with Bearing and DME Information
64
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
When a bearing pointer is displayed, the associated information window is also displayed. The Bearing
Information windows (Figure 2-29) are displayed at the lower sides of the HSI and give the following
information:
• Station/waypoint identifier (NAV, GPS)
• Frequency (NAV, ADF)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Pointer icon (BRG1 = single line, BRG2 = double line)
• GPS-derived great circle distance to bearing
source
• Bearing source (NAV, GPS, ADF)
EIS
When the NAV radio is tuned to an ILS frequency the bearing source and the bearing pointer is removed
from the HSI. When NAV1 or NAV2 is the selected bearing source, the frequency is replaced by the station
identifier when the station is within range. If GPS is the bearing source, the active waypoint identifier is
displayed instead of a frequency.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The bearing pointer is removed from the HSI and dashes are displayed in the information window if the
NAV radio is not receiving a VOR station or if GPS is the bearing source and an active waypoint is not selected.
Selecting bearing display and changing sources:
1) Press the PFD Opt Softkey.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Press either Bearing 1 or Bearing 2 Softkey to display the desired bearing pointer and information window
with the NAV 1 source.
3) Press the bearing softkey again to display the bearing pointer with the NAV 2 source.
4) Press the bearing softkey again to display the bearing pointer with GPS as the source.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
5) Press the bearing softkey again to display the bearing pointer with optional ADF as the source .
6) To remove the bearing pointer and information window, press either Bearing 1 or Bearing 2 Softkey again.
DME INFORMATION WINDOW
AFCS
NOTE: DME radio installation is optional.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The DME Information Window is displayed above the Bearing 1 Information Window and shows the DME
label, tuning mode (NAV1, NAV2, or HOLD), frequency, and distance. When a signal is invalid, the distance
is replaced by “–.– – NM”. Refer to the Audio Panel and CNS Section for information on tuning the radios.
Displaying the DME Information Window:
1) Press the PFD Opt Softkey.
APPENDICES
2) Press the DME Softkey to display the DME Information Window above the Bearing 1 Information Window.
3) To remove the DME Information Window, press the DME Softkey again.
4) To return to the top-level PFD softkeys, press the Back Softkey.
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
65
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
2.2 SUPPLEMENTAL FLIGHT DATA
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
In addition to the flight instruments, the PFD also displays various supplemental information, including ta
generic timer, temperatures, wind data, and Vertical Navigation (VNV) indications.
GENERIC TIMER
The generic timer can be accessed via softkeys on the PFD and allows for quick access for timing functions
(either counting up or down) for the pilot.
EIS
Setting the generic timer:
1) Press the Tmr/Ref Softkey.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the timer field (HH:MM:SS).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired time.
4) Press the ENT Key. The Up/Dn field is now highlighted.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Up/Dn Window.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Up’ or ‘Dn’.
7) Press the ENT Key. ‘Start?’ is now highlighted.
8) Press the ENT Key to start the timer. The field changes to ‘Stop?’. If the timer is counting down, it will start
counting up after reaching zero.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
9) To stop the timer, press the ENT Key with ‘Stop?’ highlighted. The field changes to ‘Reset?’.
10) To reset the timer, press the ENT Key with ‘Reset?’ highlighted. The field changes back to ‘Start?’ and the digits
are reset.
11) To remove the window, press the CLR Key or the Tmr/Ref Softkey.
AFCS
TEMPERATURE DISPLAYS
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The Outside Air Temperature (OAT) appears in the lower left corner of the PFD. It is displayed in either
degrees Celsius (°C) or Fahrenheit (°F), depending on the selected temperature units on the ‘Aux - System Setup
1’ Page.
INDEX
Figure 2-30 Outside Air Temperature
66
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Changing temperature display units:
1) Select the ‘Aux - System Setup 1’ Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Temperature’ field in the ‘Display Units’ Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight either ‘Celsius’ or ‘Fahrenheit’ and press the ENT Key to confirm the
selection.
WIND DATA
Option 3
No Data
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Option 2
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Option 1
EIS
Wind direction and speed in knots can be displayed relative to the aircraft in a window to the upper left of
the HSI. When the window is selected for display, but wind information is invalid or unavailable, the window
displays ‘NO WIND DATA’. Wind data can be displayed in three different ways.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 2-31 Wind Data
AFCS
Displaying wind data:
1) Press the PFD Opt Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the Wind Softkey to display wind data to the left of the HSI.
3) Press one of the numbered Option softkeys to change how wind data is displayed:
• Option 1: Headwind/tailwind and crosswind arrows with numeric speed components
• Option 2: Wind direction arrow and speed
APPENDICES
• Option 3: Wind direction arrow with numeric headwind (H) or tailwind (T) and crosswind (X) components
4) To remove the window, press the Off Softkey.
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
67
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
2.3 PFD ANNUNCIATIONS AND ALERTING FUNCTIONS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The following annunciations and alerting functions pertaining to flight instruments are displayed on the PFD.
Refer to Appendix A for more information on alerts and annunciations.
ALTITUDE ALERTING
Altitude Alerting provides the pilot with a visual alert when approaching the Selected Altitude. Whenever the
Selected Altitude is changed, the Altitude Alerter is reset. The following occur when approaching the Selected
Altitude:
EIS
• Upon passing through 1000 feet of the Selected Altitude, the Selected Altitude changes to black text on a cyan
background and flashes for five seconds.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• When the aircraft passes within 200 feet of the Selected Altitude an aural tone is heard. The Selected Altitude
changes to cyan text on a black background and flashes for five seconds.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• After reaching the Selected Altitude, if the pilot flies outside the deviation band (±200 feet of the Selected
Altitude) an aural tone is heard. The Selected Altitude changes to amber text on a black background and
flashes for five seconds.
Within 1000 ft
Within 200 ft
Deviation of ±200 ft
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 2-32 Altitude Alerting Visual Annunciations
LOW ALTITUDE ANNUNCIATION
NOTE: A Low Altitude Annunciation is available only when SBAS is available. This annunciation is only
AFCS
available when TAWS-B alerting has been inhibited, has failed, or is unavailable.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
When the Final Approach Fix (FAF) is the active waypoint in a GPS SBAS approach using vertical guidance,
a Low Altitude Annunciation may appear if the current aircraft altitude is at least 164 feet below the prescribed
altitude at the FAF. A black-on-amber LOW ALT annunciation appears to the left of the Altimeter, flashes for
several seconds, then remains displayed until the condition is resolved.
68
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
TAWS Inhibited
Annunciation
Glidepath
Indicator
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Low Altitude
Annunciation
Figure 2-33 Low Altitude on GPS SBAS Approach
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
MARKER BEACON ANNUNCIATIONS
Marker Beacon Annunciations are displayed on the PFD to the left of the Selected Altitude. Outer marker
reception is indicated in blue, middle in amber, and inner in white. Refer to the Audio Panel and CNS Section
for more information on Marker Beacon Annunciations.
Middle Marker
Inner Marker
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Outer Marker
AFCS
Altimeter
Figure 2-34 Marker Beacon Annunciations
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
MINIMUM DESCENT ALTITUDE/DECISION HEIGHT ALERTING
APPENDICES
For altitude awareness, a barometric Minimum Descent Altitude (MDA) or Decision Height (DH) can be set in
the References Window and is reset if the current approach is deleted, another approach is loaded, or the system
power is operated off then on. When active, the altitude setting is displayed to the bottom left of the Altimeter.
Once the altitude is within the range of the tape, a bug appears at the selected altitude on the Altimeter. The
following visual annunciations occur when approaching the MDA/DH:
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
INDEX
• When the aircraft altitude descends to within 2500 feet of the MDA/DH setting, the BARO MIN or COMP
MIN box appears with the altitude in cyan text. The bug appears on the altitude tape in cyan (or magenta for
COMP MIN) once in range.
69
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
• When the aircraft passes through 100 feet of the MDA/DH, the bug and text become white.
• Once the aircraft reaches MDA/DH, the bug and text become amber and a “Minimums. Minimums,” voice
alert occurs.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Within 2500 ft
Within 100 ft
Altitude Reached
Barometric
Minimum
Bug
EIS
Selected
Altitude
Bug
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Barometric
Minimum
Box
Figure 2-35 Barometric MDA/DH Alerting Visual Annunciations
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Alerting is inhibited while the aircraft is on the ground and until the aircraft reaches 150 feet above the MDA.
If the aircraft proceeds to climb after having reached the MDA, once it reaches 50 feet above the MDA, alerting
is disabled. The function is reset when the power is cycled or a new approach is activated.
Setting the Minimum Descent Altitude/Decision Height and bug:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the Tmr/Ref Softkey.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Minimums field.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘BARO’ or ‘TEMP COMP’. ‘OFF’ is selected by default. Press the ENT Key or
turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the next field.
4) Use the small FMS Knob to enter the desired altitude.
AFCS
5) If ‘TEMP COMP’ was selected, press the ENT Key or turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the next field and
then enter the temperature (-59˚C to 59˚C)
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
6) To remove the window, press the CLR Key or the Tmr/Ref Softkey.
INDEX
Figure 2-36 BARO and TEMP COMP MDA/DH
70
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
2.4 SYNTHETIC VISION TECHNOLOGY (SVT)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: Use appropriate primary systems for navigation, and for terrain, obstacle, and traffic avoidance.
SVT is intended as an aid to situational awareness only and may not provide either the accuracy or reliability
upon which to solely base decisions and/or plan maneuvers to avoid terrain, obstacles, or traffic.
NOTE: Do not use the flight path marker as a flight director.
EIS
NOTE: Terrain alerting is not available north of 89º North latitude and south of 89º South latitude. This is due
to limitations present within the Terrain database and the system’s ability to process the data representing
the affected areas.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Garmin SVT™ (Synthetic Vision Technology) is an optional visual enhancement to the system. SVT depicts a
forward-looking attitude display of the topography immediately in front of the aircraft. The field of view is 29
degrees to the left and 35.5 degrees to the right. In Reversionary Mode, the field of view is 21.5 degrees to the
left and 35.5 degrees to the right. SVT information is shown on the Primary Flight Display (PFD), or on the
Multifunction Display (MFD) in Reversionary Mode. The depicted imagery is derived from the aircraft attitude,
heading, GPS three-dimensional position, and a 4.9 arc-second database of terrain, obstacles, and other relevant
features. The terrain data resolution is 4.9 arc-seconds, meaning that the terrain elevation contours are stored in
squares measuring 4.9 arc-seconds on each side, is required for the operation of SVT. Loss of any of the required
data, including temporary loss of the GPS signal, will cause SVT to be disabled (although the softkeys will still
appear functional) until the required data is restored.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
The SVT terrain display shows land contours (colors are consistent with those of the topographical map display),
large water features, towers, wind turbines, and other obstacles over 200’ AGL that are included in the obstacle
database. Cultural features on the ground such as roads, highways, railroad tracks, cities, and state boundaries are
not displayed even if those features are found on maps. The terrain display also includes a north–south east–west
grid with lines oriented with true north and spaced at one arc-minute intervals to assist in orientation relative to
the terrain.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Terrain-SVT, which is included with the Garmin-SVT option, or the optional Terrain Awareness and Warning
System (TAWS) provide visual and auditory alerts to indicate the presence of terrain and obstacle threats relevant
to the projected flight path. Terrain alerts are displayed in red and yellow shading on the PFD.
Garmin-SVT can be displayed on the Multifunction Display (MFD) in Reversionary Mode. If SVT is enabled
when switching to Reversionary Mode, it will take up to 30 seconds to be displayed. The standard, non-SVT PFD
display will be shown in the interim.
APPENDICES
The terrain display is intended for situational awareness only. It may not provide the accuracy or fidelity on
which to base decisions and plan maneuvers to avoid terrain or obstacles. Navigation must not be predicated
solely upon the use of the Garmin-SVT or TAWS-B terrain or obstacle data displays.
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
71
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
• Flight Path Marker
• Terrain Alerting
• Horizon Heading Marks
• Obstacle Alerting
• Airport Signs
• Pathways
• Runway Display
• Traffic Display
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The following SVT enhancements appear on the PFD:
AFCS
Figure 2-37 Synthetic Vision Imagery
SVT OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
SVT is activated from the PFD using the softkeys. When SVT is enabled, the pitch attitude scale is reduced
from 20 degrees up and down to 10 degrees up to 7.5 degrees down.
APPENDICES
SVT functions are displayed on three levels of softkeys. The PFD Opt Softkey leads into the PFD function
Softkeys, including synthetic vision. Pressing the SVT Softkey displays the SVT feature softkeys. The softkeys
are labeled Pathways, Terrain, HDG LBL, and APT Sign. The Back Softkey returns to the previous level of
softkeys. Synthetic Terrain must be active before any other SVT feature may be activated.
INDEX
Pathways, HDG LBL, and APT Sign Softkeys are only available when the Terrain Softkey is activated (gray
with black characters). After activating the Terrain Softkey, the Pathways, HDG LBL, and APT Sign softkeys
may be activated in any combination to display desired features. When system power is cycled, the last selected
state (on or off) of the Pathways, Terrain, HDG LBL, and APT Sign softkeys is remembered by the system.
72
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
• Pathways Softkey enables display of rectangular boxes that represent course guidance.
• Terrain Softkey enables synthetic terrain depiction.
• HDG LBL Softkey enables horizon heading marks and digits.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• APT Sign Softkey enables airport signposts.
Activating and deactivating SVT:
1) Press the PFD Opt Softkey.
2) Press the SVT Softkey.
EIS
3) Press the Terrain Softkey. The SVT display will cycle on or off with the Terrain Softkey.
Activating and deactivating Pathways:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Press the PFD Opt Softkey.
2) Press the SVT Softkey.
3) Press the Pathways Softkey. The Pathway feature will cycle on or off with the Pathways Softkey.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Activating and deactivating Horizon Headings:
1) Press the PFD Opt Softkey.
2) Press the SVT Softkey.
3) Press the HDG LBL Softkey. The horizon heading display will cycle on or off with the HDG LBL Softkey.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Activating and deactivating Airport Signs:
1) Press the PFD Opt Softkey.
2) Press the SVT Softkey.
3) Press the APT Sign Softkey. Display of airport signs will cycle on or off with the APT Sign Softkey.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
73
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SVT FEATURES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selected
Altitude
Flight
Path
Marker
Zero
Pitch Line
(ZPL) with
Compass
Heading
Marks
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Airport
Runway
Airplane
Symbol
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Synthetic
Terrain
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
SVT
Softkeys
Figure 2-38 SVT on the Primary Flight Display
NOTE: Pathways and terrain features are not a substitute for standard course and altitude deviation
AFCS
information provided by the altimeter, CDI, and VDI.
AIRPORT SIGNS
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Airport Signs provide a visual representation of airport location and identification on the synthetic terrain
display. When activated, the signs appear on the display when the aircraft is approximately 15 nm from
an airport and disappear at approximately 4.5 nm. Airport signs are shown without the identifier until
the aircraft is approximately eight nautical miles from the airport. Airport signs are not shown behind the
airspeed or altitude display. Airport signs are activated and deactivated by pressing the APTSIGNS Softkey.
74
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Airport
Sign with
Identifier
(Between
4.5 nm and
8 nm)
Airport Sign
without
Identifier
(Between 8 nm
and 15 nm)
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 2-39 Airport Signs and Flight Path Marker
FLIGHT PATH MARKER
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Flight Path Marker (FPM), also known as a Velocity Vector, is displayed on the PFD at groundspeeds
above 30 knots. The FPM depicts the approximate projected path of the aircraft accounting for wind speed
and direction relative to the three-dimensional terrain display.
The FPM is always available when the Synthetic Terrain feature is in operation. The FPM represents the
direction of the flight path as it relates to the terrain and obstacles on the display, while the airplane symbol
represents the aircraft heading.
AFCS
The FPM works in conjunction with the Pathways feature to assist the pilot in maintaining desired altitudes
and direction when navigating a flight plan. When on course and altitude the FPM is aligned inside the
pathway boxes as shown.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The FPM may also be used to identify a possible conflict with the aircraft flight path and distant terrain or
obstacles. Displayed terrain or obstacles in the aircraft’s flight path extending above the FPM could indicate
a potential conflict, even before an alert is issued by TAWS. However, decisions regarding terrain and/or
obstacle avoidance should not be made using only the FPM.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
75
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Pathways
Figure 2-40 SVT with Pathways Enabled and GPS Navigation Source
HORIZON HEADING
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Horizon Heading is synchronized with the HSI and shows approximately 60 degrees of compass
heading in 30‑degree increments on the Zero Pitch Line. Horizon Heading tick marks and digits appearing
on the zero pitch line are not visible behind either the airspeed or altitude display. Horizon Heading is used
for general heading awareness, and is activated and deactivated by pressing the HDG LBL Softkey.
PATHWAYS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Pathways provide a three-dimensional perspective view of the selected route of flight shown as colored
rectangular boxes representing the horizontal and vertical flight path of the active flight plan. The box
size represents 700 feet wide by 200 feet tall during enroute, oceanic, and terminal flight phases. During
an approach, the box width is 700 feet or one half full scale deviation on the HSI, whichever is less. The
height is 200 feet or one half full scale deviation on the VDI, whichever is less. The altitude at which the
pathway boxes are displayed is determined by the higher of either the selected altitude or the VNV altitude
programmed for the active leg in the flight plan.
INDEX
APPENDICES
The color of the rectangular boxes may be magenta, green, or white depending on the route of flight and
navigation source selected. The active GPS or GPS overlay flight plan leg is represented by magenta boxes
that correspond to the magenta CDI. A localizer course is represented by green boxes that correspond to a
green CDI. An inactive leg of an active flight plan is represented by gray boxes corresponding to a white line
drawn on the navigation map indicating an inactive leg.
76
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Selected
Altitude
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Programmed
Altitudes
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 2-41 Programmed and Selected Altitude
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Pathways provide supplemental glidepath/glideslope information on an active ILS, LPV, LNAV/VNAV, and
some LNAV approaches. Pathways are intended as an aid to situational awareness and should not be used
independent of the CDI, VDI, glide path indicator, and glide slope indicator. They are removed from the
display when the selected navigation information is not available. Pathways are not displayed beyond the
active leg when leg sequencing is suspended and are not displayed on any portion of the flight plan leg that
would lead to intercepting a leg in the wrong direction.
Departure and Enroute
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Prior to intercepting an active flight plan leg, pathways are displayed as a series of boxes with pointers at
each corner that point in the direction of the active waypoint. Pathways are not displayed for the first leg
of the flight plan if that segment is a Heading-to-Altitude leg. The first segment displaying pathways is the
first active GPS leg or active leg with a GPS overlay. If this leg of the flight plan route is outside the SVT
field of view, pathways will not be visible until the aircraft has turned toward this leg. While approaching
the center of the active leg and prescribed altitude, the number of pathway boxes decreases to a minimum
of four.
APPENDICES
Climb profiles cannot be displayed due to the variables associated with aircraft performance. Flight
plan legs requiring a climb are indicated by pathways displayed at a level above the aircraft at the altitude
selected or programmed.
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
77
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Descent and Approach
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
During an approach, Pathways be can shown for the programmed descent, level transition flight, and
at the Selected Altitude within the approach segments. When an approach providing vertical guidance is
activated, the corresponding approach glideslope or glidepath will be displayed using a color corresponding
to the selected navigation source and conditions.
EIS
White Pathways represent the next segment of the approach that is not yet active. Magenta Pathways
represent the active segment with GPS as the navigation source. Green Pathways indicate the ILS/LOC
navigation source. With active approach vertical guidance, the selected altitude will be displayed as a level
gray Pathway if the selected altitude is lower than the glidepath/glideslope. The gray Selected Altitude
preview Pathways are displayed until they converge with the green glideslope or magenta glidepath
Pathways. If approach vertical guidance is not yet active, pathways at the Selected Altitude will be displayed
in magenta throughout the arrival/approach.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
During an ILS approach, the initial approach segment is displayed in magenta at the segment altitudes
if GPS is the selected as the navigation source on the CDI. When switching to localizer inbound with the
LOC selected as the navigation source on the CDI, pathways are displayed in green along the localizer and
glideslope. VOR, LOC, BC, and ADF approach segments that are approved to be flown using GPS are
displayed in magenta boxes. Segments that are flown using other that GPS or ILS, such as heading legs or
VOR final approach courses are not displayed.
Selected Altitude
set for Enroute
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selected Altitude
set for Departure
Climbs NOT
displayed
by pathway
Non-programmed descents NOT displayed by pathway
AFCS
TOD
Selected Altitude
for Step Down
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Programmed descent
displayed by pathway
APPENDICES
Selected Altitude or Programmed Altitude
(whichever is higher)
INDEX
Figure 2-42 SVT Pathways, Enroute and Descent
78
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Missed Approach
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Upon activating the missed approach, pathways lead to the Missed Approach Holding Point (MAHP) and
are displayed as a level path at the published altitude for the MAHP, or the selected altitude, whichever is
the highest. If the initial missed approach leg is a Course-to-Altitude (CA) leg, the pathways boxes will
be displayed level at the altitude published for the MAHP. If the initial missed approach leg is defined by
a course using other than GPS, pathways are not displayed for that segment. In this case, the pathways
displayed for the next leg may be outside the field of view and will be visible when the aircraft has turned
in the direction of that leg.
EIS
Pathways are displayed along each segment including the path required to track course reversals that are
part of a procedure, such as holding patterns. Pathways boxes will not indicate a turn to a MAHP unless a
defined geographical waypoint exists between the MAP and MAHP.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FAF
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Descent displayed
by pathway
Selected Altitude
or Programmed Altitude
(whichever is higher)
by pathway
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
MAP Climbs NOT displayed
Turn Segment
NOT displayed
by pathway
MAHP
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 2-43 SVT Pathways, Approach, Missed Approach, and Holding
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
79
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
RUNWAYS
WARNING: Do not use SVT runway depiction as the sole means for determining the proximity of the aircraft
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
to the runway or for maintaining the proper approach path angle during landing.
NOTE: Not all airports have runways with endpoint data in the database, therefore, these runways are not
displayed.
Other Runways on
Airport
Airport Runway
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Runway data provides improved awareness of runway location with respect to the surrounding terrain. All
runway thresholds are depicted at their respective elevations as defined in the database. In some situations,
where threshold elevations differ significantly, crossing runways may appear to be layered. As runways are
displayed, those within 45 degrees of the aircraft heading are displayed in white. Other runways will be gray
in color. When an approach for a specific runway is active, that runway will appear brighter and be outlined
with a white box, regardless of the runway orientation as related to aircraft heading. As the aircraft gets closer
to the runway, more detail such as runway numbers and centerlines will be displayed.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 2-44 Airport Runways
80
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TRAFFIC
WARNING: Intruder aircraft at or below 500 ft. AGL may not appear on the SVT display or may appear as a
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
partial symbol.
EIS
Traffic symbols are displayed in their approximate locations as determined by the related traffic systems.
Traffic symbols are displayed in three dimensions, appearing larger as they are getting closer, and smaller
when they are further away. Traffic within 250 feet laterally of the aircraft will not be displayed on the SVT
display. Traffic symbols and coloring are consistent with that used for non-directional traffic displayed on the
maps. If the traffic altitude is unknown, the traffic will not be displayed on the SVT display. For more details
refer to the traffic system discussion in the Hazard Avoidance section.
TERRAIN ALERTING
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Terrain alerting on the synthetic terrain display is triggered by Forward-looking Terrain Avoidance (FLTA)
alerts from the Terrain-SVT or optional TAWS system, and corresponds to the yellow terrain shading for
a caution alert and the red shading for a warning alert on the navigation maps. These yellow or red areas
represent potential impact areas. For more detailed information about terrain displays and alerting, refer to
the Hazard Avoidance section.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
In some instances, a terrain or obstacle alert may be issued with no conflict shading displayed on the
synthetic terrain. In these cases, the conflict is outside the SVT field of view to the left or right of the aircraft.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Terrain
Caution
Annunciation
AFCS
Potential
Impact
Area
Caution
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 2-45 Terrain Alert
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
81
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Obstacles are represented on the synthetic terrain display by standard two-dimensional tower symbols or
wind turbine symbols found on the maps. Obstacle symbols appear in the perspective view with relative height
above terrain and distance from the aircraft. Unlike the maps, which present obstacles as gray, yellow, or red
based on the obstacle height relative to the aircraft altitude, obstacles shown synthetic terrain display are gray
until the obstacle is associated with an actual FLTA alert, at which point an obstacle may be yellow or red.
Obstacles greater than 1000 feet below the aircraft altitude are not shown. Obstacles may appear behind the
flight instruments.
AFCS
Figure 2-46 Obstacle
ZERO PITCH LINE
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The Zero Pitch Line is drawn completely across the display and represents the horizon when the terrain
horizon is difficult to distinguish from other terrain being displayed. It may not align with the terrain
horizon, particularly when the terrain is mountainous or when the aircraft is flown at high altitudes.
FIELD OF VIEW
INDEX
APPENDICES
The PFD field of view can be represented on the MFD Navigation Map Page. Two dashed lines forming a
V‑shape in front of the aircraft symbol on the map, represent the forward viewing area shown on the PFD.
82
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Enabling/disabling Field of View:
1) While viewing the Navigation Map Page, press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight Map Settings and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Turn the FMS Knob to select the Map Group and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the Map Group Options to Field of View.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select On or Off.
6) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
EIS
The following figure compares the PFD forward looking depiction with the MFD plan view and Field of View
turned on.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Lines Depict
PFD Field of
View
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Field of View on the MFD
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
SVT View on the PFD
Figure 2-47 PFD and MFD Field of View Comparison
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
83
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
2.5 ABNORMAL OPERATIONS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ABNORMAL GPS CONDITIONS
EIS
The annunciations listed in the following table can appear on the HSI when abnormal GPS conditions occur.
Refer to the Flight Management Section for more information on Dead Reckoning Mode.
Annunciation
Location
GPS LOI
Right of HSI
GPS
INTEG OK
Right of HSI
Description
Loss of Integrity Monitoring–GPS integrity is insufficient for the current
phase of flight
Integrity OK–GPS integrity has been restored to within normal limits
(annunciation displayed for 5 seconds)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Lower left of aircraft
symbol if HSI Map Dead Reckoning–System is using projected position rather than GPS
is disabled, or on position to compute navigation data and sequence active flight plan
aircraft icon if HSI waypoints
Map enabled
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Table 2-4 Abnormal GPS Conditions Annunciated on HSI
Figure 2-48 Example HSI Annunciations
APPENDICES
In Dead Reckoning Mode the CDI is removed from the display when GPS is the selected navigation source.
The following items on the PFD are then shown in amber:
• Current Track Bug
• Wind Data
• Ground Speed
INDEX
• Distances in the Bearing Information Windows
• GPS bearing pointers
84
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
These items should be verified when operating in Dead Reckoning Mode as they become increasingly
inaccurate over time.
UNUSUAL ATTITUDES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When the aircraft enters an unusual pitch attitude, red chevrons pointing toward the horizon warn of extreme
pitch. The chevrons are displayed on the Attitude Indicator, starting at 50˚ above and 30˚ below the horizon
line.
Nose High
Nose Low
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 2-49 Pitch Attitude Warnings
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Traffic Annunciations
• PFD Setup Menu
• AFCS Annunciations
• PFD Inset Map
• Windows displayed in the lower
right corner of the PFD:
• Outside Air Temperature (OAT)
– References Window
• Selected Altitude
• Wind data
– Nearest Airports
• VNV Target Altitude
• Selected Heading readout
– Flight Plan
• True Airspeed
• Selected Course readout
– Alerts
• Transponder Status Box
– Procedures
• System Time
• Minimum Descent Altitude/
Decision Height readout
AFCS
If pitch exceeds +30˚/-20˚ or bank exceeds 65˚, some information displayed on the PFD is removed. The
Altimeter and Airspeed, Attitude, Vertical Speed, and Horizontal Situation indicators remain on the display
and the Bearing Information, Alerts, and Annunciation windows can be displayed during such situations. The
following information is removed from each PFD and their softkeys are disabled when the aircraft experiences
unusual attitudes:
• Vertical Deviation, Glideslope,
and Glidepath Indicators
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Altimeter Barometric Setting
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
85
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Blank Page
86
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 3 ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Refer to the Aircraft Flight Manual (AFM) for limitations.
The Engine Indication System (EIS) displays critical engine, electrical, fuel, and other system parameters on the
left side of the Multi Function Display (MFD) during normal operations (Figure 3-1). EIS information can be fully
expanded to an entire page (EIS - Engine Page) using the ENGINE Softkey. In Reversionary Mode, the displays
are re-configured to present Primary Flight Display (PFD) symbology together with the EIS.
EIS
EIS Display
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 3-1 MFD (M20V)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Green bands on the instruments indicate normal ranges of operation; amber and red bands indicate caution
and warning, respectively. White or uncolored bands indicate areas outside of normal operation not yet in the
caution or warning ranges. When unsafe operating conditions occur, the corresponding readouts flash to indicate
cautions and warnings. If sensory data to an instrument becomes invalid or unavailable, a red “X” is displayed
across the instrument.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
87
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3.1 EIS DISPLAY
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
8
7
9
9
10
10
11
11
12
12
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
M20U - Normally Aspirated
M20V - Turbocharged
Figure 3-2 EIS Strip Normal
APPENDICES
Takeoff Flaps
Flaps Up
Flaps Down
Flaps In Transit
INDEX
Figure 3-3 Flap Positions
88
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
5
Oil Pressure
Displays engine oil pressure in pounds per square inch (psi)
6
Oil Temperature
Displays engine oil temperature in degrees Fahrenheit (ºF)
7
Turbine Inlet Temperature
8
Exhaust Gas Temperature
9
Cylinder Head Temperature
10
Voltmeter
Displays the temperature at the turbine inlet in degrees Fahrenheit (ºF)
(Turbocharged Aircraft M20V)
Displays the exhaust gas temperature of the hottest cylinder in degrees
Fahrenheit (ºF) (Normally Aspirated Aircraft M20U)
Displays the head temperature of the hottest cylinder (number is shown
in pointer) in degrees Fahrenheit (ºF)
Displays the bus voltage for the selected battery
11
Ammeter
Displays the battery amperage for the selected battery
12
Trim/Flaps Group
Elevator and rudder trim are displayed on slide bars; the white portions
of the bars represent takeoff trim ranges
Flap position (UP, T/O, DN) is denoted; when the flaps are in transit
between positions, /// is displayed (Figure 3-3)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Fuel Flow
AFCS
4
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Fuel Quantity
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Tachometer
EIS
2
Displays manifold pressure in inches of Mercury (in Hg) to indicate
engine power.
Turbocharged Aircraft – Maximum manifold pressure range shown in red
Displays propeller speed in revolutions per minute (rpm); the red band
indicates propeller overspeed
Displays the amount of fuel in gallons (gal) for each tank (L and R)
Standard Tanks – Indicator displays up to 44.5 gallons when full
Long Range Tanks (options) – Allows 50 gallons per side (100 gallons
total) or 65 gallons per side (130 gallons total), although the indicator
range is the same as for standard tanks. The pointers show tanks as full
until the fuel quantity decreases below 44.5 gallons.
Displays fuel flow in gallons per hour (gph)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Engine Manifold Pressure
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
89
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
3.2 ENGINE PAGE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pressing the ENGINE Softkey accesses the EIS - Engine Page, which displays all engine, fuel, flap setting, trim
position, electrical, and fuel calculation information.
EIS
10
9
8
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1
2
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
7
6
3
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
5
4
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 3-4 Engine Page
90
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
Pressure
Displays manifold pressure in inches of Mercury (in Hg) to indicate engine
power
Turbocharged Aircraft – Maximum manifold pressure range shown in red
Displays oil temperature in degrees Fahrenheit (°F) and pressure in pounds per
square inch (psi)
4 Trim/Flaps Group
Elevator and rudder trim are displayed on slide bars; the white portions of the
bars represent takeoff trim ranges
Flap position (UP, T/O, DN) is denoted; when the flaps are in transit between
positions, /// is displayed (Figure 3-3)
Displays the total time in hours (hrs) the engine has been in service
5 Engine Hours
Displays the bus voltage and the battery amperage for the selected battery
8 Engine Temperature
Displays exhaust gas (EGT) and head (CHT) temperatures of all cylinders in
degrees Fahrenheit (°F)
Turbocharged Aircraft – Displays the temperature at the turbine inlet (TIT) in
degrees Fahrenheit (°F)
9 Fuel Flow
Displays fuel flow in gallons per hour (gph)
10 Tachometer
Displays propeller speed in revolutions per minute (rpm); the red band
indicates propeller overspeed
AFCS
7 Electrical
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Displays calculated endurance and range (in nautical miles, RANGE NM)
based on the displayed fuel remaining and the fuel flow totalizer
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
6 Fuel Calculations
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Displays the amount of fuel in gallons (gal) for each tank (L and R)
Standard Tanks – Indicator displays up to 44.5 gallons when full
Long Range Tanks (options) – Allows 50 gallons per side (100 gallons total) or
65 gallons per side (130 gallons total), although the indicator range is the same
as for standard tanks. The pointers show tanks as full until the fuel quantity
decreases below 44.5 gallons.
EIS
3 Fuel Quantity
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2 Oil Temperature and
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1 Engine Manifold Pressure
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
91
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
FUEL CALCULATIONS
NOTE: Fuel calculations do not use the aircraft fuel quantity indicators and are calculated from the last time
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
the fuel was reset.
Endurance (Endurance), and range (in nautical miles, Range NM) are calculated based on the displayed fuel
remaining (GAL REM) and the fuel flow totalizer. The calculated range is based upon groundspeed and fuel
remaining. See the Flight Management Section for information regarding the map feature related to the EIS
Fuel Calculations.
EIS
Adjusting the fuel totalizer quantity:
On the Engine Page, use the DEC Fuel and INC Fuel softkeys to obtain the desired fuel remaining (GAL REM).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Resetting the fuel totalizer:
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
On the Engine Page, press the RST Fuel Softkey; this resets displayed fuel remaining (GAL REM) to maximum
fuel capacity for aircraft.
92
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
3.3 LEANING ASSIST MODE
NOTE: The pilot should follow the engine manufacturer’s recommended leaning procedures in the Aircraft
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Flight Manual (AFM).
When the Lean Softkey is pressed, the system initially highlights the number and EGT readout of the cylinder
with the hottest EGT. The ∆ Peak temperature is the difference between the peak temperature and the present
temperature for the peaked cylinder. When the first peak is detected, “1st” is annunciated below that cylinder’s
EGT bar and the temperature is marked in light blue on the graph.
EIS
The system continues to detect peak EGTs for each cylinder lean of peak as the fuel flow is decreased, and the
peak of each cylinder’s EGT is indicated by a light blue marker on the graph. Once all cylinders are lean of peak,
the last cylinder to peak is denoted by the “Last” annunciation below its bar on the graph.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
93
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
3.4 EIS DISPLAY IN REVERSIONARY MODE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Refer to the Aircraft Flight Manual (AFM) for limitations.
In reversionary display mode, the remaining display is re-configured to present PFD symbology together with
the EIS Display (refer to the System Overview for information about display Reversionary Mode).
EIS
When the displays enter reversionary mode, the EIS is separated into three displays: Engine (identical to the
normal EIS Display on the MFD), Lean, and System. For a description of the EIS Strip, refer to Section 3.1. The
Lean Display presents temperature information and assistance for engine leaning. The System Display shows
various system parameters and fuel calculations.
NOTE: If any parameters are exceeded while displaying the Lean or System pages, the system automatically
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
switches back to the EIS Engine Strip.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
EIS Display
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 3-12 Reversionary Mode (M20U)
94
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
LEAN DISPLAY
NOTE: The pilot should follow the engine manufacturer’s recommended leaning procedures in the Aircraft
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Flight Manual (AFM).
he EIS Lean Display provides information and a user interface to perform engine leaning. Exhaust gas
(EGT) and head (CHT) temperatures for each cylinder are displayed in bar graph form with a readout for the
temperature of the selected cylinder shown below each graph.
Accessing the EIS Lean Display:
EIS
1) Press the Engine Softkey.
2) Press the Lean Softkey.
3) Press the Lean Softkey again to exit Leaning Assist Mode.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) To return to the default EIS Engine Strip, press the Engine Softkey.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
By default, the cylinder with the hottest temperature is selected (number highlighted in light blue) when the
Lean Softkey is pressed. Bars for cylinders with temperatures in the normal range are shown in white. On the
CHT Bar Graph, caution and warning conditions are indicated in yellow and red, respectively.
Since only one cylinder’s EGT and CHT are displayed at a time, this information can be cycled through for
each cylinder using the CYL SLCT Softkey; the selected cylinder’s number is highlighted in light blue on the
bar graphs. This softkey is disabled when Leaning Assist Mode is selected.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Monitoring the desired cylinder’s temperatures:
From the Lean Display, press the CYL SLCT Softkey to cycle through each cylinder and view its temperature
information. The selected cylinder number is highlighted in light blue.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
95
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SYSTEM DISPLAY
NOTE: Fuel calculations do not use the aircraft fuel quantity indicators and are calculated from the last time
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
the fuel was reset.
The EIS System Display shows the dial gauges, various system parameters, and fuel calculations. Fuel
calculations are based on the displayed fuel remaining (GAL REM) and the fuel flow totalizer.
Accessing the EIS System Display:
1) Press the ENGINE Softkey.
EIS
2) Press the SYSTEM Softkey.
3) To return to the default EIS Engine Strip, press the ENGINE or BACK Softkey.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Adjusting the fuel totalizer quantity:
From the System Display, press the DEC FUEL or INC FUEL Softkey to adjust the fuel remaining (GAL REM).
Resetting the fuel totalizer:
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
From the System Display, press the RST FUEL Softkey. This also resets the fuel remaining (GAL REM) to the
aircraft’s fuel capacity.
96
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 4 AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
4.1 OVERVIEW
The Communication/Navigation/Surveillance (CNS) system includes the Audio Panel, communication radios,
navigation radios, and a Mode S transponder. The System Overview Section provides a block diagram description
of the Audio Panel and CNS system interconnection.
CNS operation is performed by the following Line Replaceable Units (LRUs):
• Multi Function Display (MFD)
• Mode S Transponder
• Integrated Avionics Unit (2)
• MFD/PFD Control Unit
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Audio Panel
EIS
• Primary Flight Display (PFD)
The MFD/PFD controls are used to tune the communication transceivers and navigation radios.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Audio Panel provides the traditional audio selector functions of microphone and receiver audio selection.
The Audio Panel includes an intercom system (ICS) between the pilot, copilot, and passengers, a marker beacon
receiver, and a COM clearance recorder. Ambient noise from the aircraft radios is reduced by a feature called
Master Avionics Squelch (MASQ). When no audio is detected, MASQ processing further reduces the amount of
background noise from the radios.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Mode S transponder is controlled with softkeys and the FMS Knob located on the Primary Flight Display
(PFD). The Transponder Data Box is located to the left of the System Time Box. The data box displays the active
four-digit code, mode, and reply status .
AUDIO PANEL VOLUME CONTROL
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Adjusting the master volume control affects all radio audio volume and airframe type warnings that are heard
in the headsets (not the speaker) for the pilot or copilot side Audio Panel. Radio adjustments made on the PFD
controls to compensate for the master volume change on the Audio Panel also affect the radio levels for the other
pilot. Independent radio volume adjustments made using the Audio Panel Master Volume controls affect only
the audio heard in the corresponding crew position headset.
APPENDICES
Radio volume adjustments may be overridden by each crew position independently using the master volume
control on the Audio Panel for the respective crew position. In addition, the master volume control for each
Audio Panel affects all other system audio output to its designated crew position headset much like volume
adjustments found on many aviation headsets.
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
97
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
PFD CONTROLS AND FREQUENCY DISPLAY
2
3
5
4
6
7
8
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1
9
10
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
11
13
12
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 4-1 PFD Controls, NAV/COM Frequency Tuning Boxes, and DME Tuning Window
98
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
5
COM Frequency Box and Decoded COM Frequency Identifier – Displays COM standby and active
frequency fields and volume. The selected and decoded COM transceiver frequency is displayed in green.
6
COM Knob – Tunes the standby frequencies for the COM transceiver (large knob for MHz; small knob for
kHz). Press to move the frequency selected for tuning (cyan numbers) and the Frequency Transfer Arrow
between COM1 and COM2.
7
COM Frequency Transfer Key – Transfers the standby and active COM frequencies. Press and hold this key
for two seconds to tune the emergency frequency (121.500 MHz) automatically into the active frequency
field.
8
COM VOL/SQ Knob – Controls COM audio volume level. Press to turn the COM automatic squelch on
and off. Volume level is shown in the COM frequency field as a percentage.
9
ADF/DME Tuning Window – Displays ADF frequencies, volume setting, and modes, and DME tuning
selection. Display by pressing the ADF/DME Softkey.
10
ENT Key – Validates or confirms DME pairing mode and Auto-tune selection.
11
FMS Knob – Flight Management System Knob, used to enter transponder codes, select DME modes, and
Auto-tune entries when DME Tuning Window or NRST Window is present. Press the FMS Knob to turn
the selection cursor on and off. The large knob moves the cursor in the window. The small knob selects
individual characters for the highlighted cursor location.
12
Transponder Data Box – Indicates the selected transponder code, operating mode, reply, and ident status
for the applicable transponder.
13
ADF/DME Softkey – Displays the ADF/DME Tuning Window.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NAV Frequency Box – Displays NAV standby and active frequency fields, volume, and station ID. The
frequency of the NAV radio selected for navigation and the station ID are displayed in green.
AFCS
4
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NAV Knob – Tunes the standby frequencies for the NAV receiver (large knob for MHz; small knob for
kHz). Press to move the frequency selected for tuning (cyan numbers) and the Frequency Transfer Arrow
between NAV1 and NAV2.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NAV Frequency Transfer Key – Transfers the standby and active NAV frequencies.
EIS
2
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NAV VOL/ID Knob – Controls NAV audio volume level. Press to turn the Morse code identifier audio on
and off. Volume level is shown in the NAV frequency field as a percentage.
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
99
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
14
15
16
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2
13
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1
18
19
20
21
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
AUDIO PANEL CONTROLS
22
23
17
24
AFCS
Figure 4-2 Audio Panel Controls
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NOTE: When a key is selected, a triangular annunciator above the key is illuminated.
100
1
COM1 MIC – Selects the #1 transmitter for transmitting. COM1 receive is simultaneously selected when
this key is pressed allowing received audio from the #1 COM receiver to be heard. COM2 receive can be
added by pressing the COM2 Key.
2
COM1 – When selected, audio from the #1 COM receiver can be heard.
3
COM2 MIC – Selects the #2 transmitter for transmitting. COM2 receive is simultaneously selected when
this key is pressed allowing received audio from the #2 COM receiver to be heard. COM1 receive can be
added by pressing the COM1 Key.
4
COM2 – When selected, audio from the #2 COM receiver can be heard.
5
COM3 MIC – Not used in Mooney aircraft.
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SPKR – Selects and deselects the cabin speaker. COM and NAV receiver audio can be heard on the
speaker.
11
MKR/MUTE – Selects marker beacon receiver audio. Mutes the currently received marker beacon receiver
audio. Unmutes automatically when new marker beacon audio is received. Also, stops play of recorded
COM audio.
12
HI SENS – Press to increase marker beacon receiver sensitivity. Press again to return to low sensitivity.
13
DME – Turns optional DME audio on or off.
14
NAV1 – When selected, audio from the #1 NAV receiver can be heard.
15
ADF – Turns optional ADF receiver audio on or off.
16
NAV2 – When selected, audio from the #2 NAV receiver can be heard.
17
AUX – Not used in Mooney aircraft.
18
MAN SQ – Enables manual squelch for the intercom. When the intercom is active, press the PILOT Knob
to illuminate SQ. Turn the PILOT/PASS Knobs to adjust squelch.
19
PLAY – Press once to play the last recorded COM audio. Press again while audio is playing and the
previous block of recorded audio is played. Each subsequent press plays each previously recorded block.
Pressing the MKR/MUTE Key during play of a memory block stops play.
20
PILOT – Selects and deselects the pilot intercom isolation.
21
COPLT – Selects and deselects the copilot intercom isolation.
22
PILOT Knob – Press to switch between volume and squelch control as indicated by illumination of VOL
or SQ. Turn to adjust intercom volume or squelch. The MAN SQ Key must be selected to allow squelch
adjustment.
23
PASS Knob – Turn to adjust Copilot/Passenger intercom volume or squelch. The MAN SQ Key must be
selected to allow squelch adjustment.
24
DISPLAY BACKUP Button – Manually selects Reversionary Mode.
APPENDICES
10
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
PA – Selects the passenger address system. The selected COM transmitter is deselected when the PA Key
is pressed.
AFCS
9
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TEL – Not used in Mooney aircraft.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
8
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
COM 1/2 – Split COM Key. Allows simultaneous transmission on COM1 and COM2 by the pilot and copilot.
EIS
7
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
COM3 – Not used in Mooney aircraft.
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
6
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
101
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
MFD/PFD CONTROL UNIT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The optional MFD/PFD Control Unit is a middle armrest-mounted interface allowing MFD/PFD operation,
data entry, COM and NAV tuning, and transponder control. The MFD/PFD Control Unit duplicates many PFD
display bezel controls. The unit is in MFD control mode by default on system power-up.
EIS
Tune the COM and NAV radios in either MFD or PFD control mode. The appropriate frequency box on the
selected display is outlined by a light blue selection box, which flashes for a few seconds to indicate control
unit activity. Selection of a different display control or radio tuning mode results in cancellation of the previous
radio tuning mode.
1
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
13
12
11
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
10
9
2
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
8
3
AFCS
7
6
5
4
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 4-3 MFD/PFD Control Unit
102
1
MENU Key – Displays a list of options for accessing additional features or making setting changes.
2
Alphanumeric Keys – Allows data entry (rather than using the FMS Knob to select characters/numbers).
3
BKSP Key – Moves cursor back one character space and removes last character entered.
4
ENT Key – Validates or confirms a menu selection or data entry.
5
CLR Key – Erases information, cancels entries, or removes menus.
6
SEL Key – Arrows move light blue Softkey Selection Box on selected display. Press the center to activate
the selected softkey
7
Decimal Key – Enters a decimal point.
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
10
Frequency Transfer Key (EMERG) – Transfers the standby and active COM or NAV frequencies. Press
and hold for two seconds to tune the emergency frequency (121.500 MHz) automatically into the COM
active frequency field.
11
PFD Key – When selected, the MFD/PFD Control Unit is used to access PFD functions.
12
MFD Key – When selected, the MFD/PFD Control Unit is used to access MFD functions (default control
mode).
13
FMS/NAV-COM Knob – NAV/COM Tuning Modes: Acts as the NAV or COM Knob. MFD/PFD Control
Modes: Acts as the FMS Knob.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
COM Key – Selects COM radio tuning mode on the MFD/PFD Control Unit. The COM tuning box is
outlined with a light blue selection line when the COM frequency is active on the control unit.
EIS
9
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NAV Key – Selects NAV radio tuning mode on the MFD/PFD Control Unit. The NAV tuning box is
outlined with a light blue selection line when the NAV frequency is active on the control unit.
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
8
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
103
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
4.2 COM OPERATION
2
3
5
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1
7
4
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
6
8
Figure 4-4 COM Tuning Box Indications
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NOTE: When turning on the system for use, the system remembers the last frequencies used and the active
COM transceiver state prior to shutdown.
Active Fields – The COM Frequency Box is composed of four fields; the two active frequencies are on the
left. An active COM frequency is displayed in green and indicates that the COM transceiver is selected
on the Audio Panel (COM1 MIC or COM2 MIC Key). Both active COM frequencies appearing in white
indicate that no COM radio is selected for transmitting (PA Key is selected on the Audio Panel).
2
Frequency Transfer Arrow – Moves between the upper and lower radio frequency fields with the Frequency
Tuning Box. Indicates which COM transciever is selected for frequency transfer between the Standby and
Active fields.
3
Standby Fields – The COM Frequency Box is composed of four fields; the two standby frequencies are on
the right. Frequencies in the standby field are displayed in either white or gray. The standby frequency in
the tuning box is white. The other standby frequency is gray.
4
Frequency Tuning Box – Moves between the upper and lower radio frequency fields with the Frequency
Transfer Arrow. Indicates which COM transceiver is to be tuned in the Standby Field.
5
Automatic Squelch Indication – Indicates that Automatic Squelch is disabled. Automatic Squelch quiets
unwanted static noise when no audio signal is received, while still providing good sensitivity to weak COM
signals. When Automatic Squelch is disabled, COM audio reception is always on. Continuous static noise
is heard over the headsets and speaker, if selected.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
1
104
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
Frequency Spacing – The COM radios can tune either 25-kHz spacing (118.000 to 136.975 MHz) or
8.33-kHz spacing (118.000 to 136.990 MHz) for 760-channel or 3040-channel configuration. When
8.33-kHz channel spacing is selected, all of the 25-kHz channel spacing frequencies are also available in
the complete 3040-channel list.
8
COM Volume – COM radio volume level can be adjusted from 0 to 100% using the VOL/SQ Knob.
Turning the knob clockwise increases volume, turning the knob counterclockwise decreases volume.
When adjusting volume, the level is displayed in place of the standby frequencies. Volume level indication
remains for two seconds after the change.
EIS
7
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Transmit and Receive Indications – During COM transmission, a white TX appears by the active COM
frequency replacing the Frequency Transfer Arrow. During COM signal reception, a white RX appears by
the active COM frequency replacing the Frequency Transfer Arrow.
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
6
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
COM TRANSCEIVER MANUAL TUNING
The COM frequency controls and frequency boxes are on the right side of each PFD.
Manually tuning a COM frequency
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Turn the COM Knob to tune the desired frequency (large knob for MHz; small knob for kHz).
2) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the active field.
3) Adjust the volume level with the COM VOL/SQ Knob.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Press the COM VOL/SQ Knob to turn automatic squelch on and off.
Manual frequency tuning from the optional Control Unit
1) Press the COM Key to select the COM frequency box.
AFCS
2) Turn the FMS or NAV/COM Knob to tune the desired frequency in the COM Tuning Box (large knob for MHz;
small knob for kHz).
3) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the active field.
AUTO-TUNING THE COM FREQUENCY
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
COM frequencies can be automatically tuned from the following:
• Nearest Airports Window (PFD)
• NRST – Nearest Frequencies Page (ARTCC, FSS, WX)
• WPT – Airport Information Page
• NRST – Nearest Airspaces Page
APPENDICES
• NRST – Nearest Airports Page
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
105
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
AUTO-TUNING FROM THE PFD
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
COM frequencies for the nearest airports can be automatically tuned from the Nearest Airports Window on
the PFD. When the desired frequency is entered, it becomes a standby frequency. Pressing the Frequency
Transfer Key places this frequency into the COM Active Frequency Field.
Auto-tuning a COM frequency for a nearby airport from the PFD:
1) Select the Nearest Softkey on the PFD to open the Nearest Airports Window. A list of 25 nearest airport
identifiers and COM frequencies is displayed.
EIS
2) Turn the FMS Knob to scroll through the list and highlight the desired COM frequency.
3) Press the ENT Key to load the COM frequency into the COM Standby Frequency Field.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the COM Active Frequency Field.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Select the Nearest Softkey to Open
the Nearest Airports Window
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 4-5 Nearest Airports Window (PFD)
106
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTO-TUNING FROM THE MFD
Frequencies can be automatically loaded into the COM Frequency Box from pages in the NRST or WPT
page group by highlighting the frequency and pressing the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Auto-tuning a COM frequency from the WPT and NRST Pages:
1) From any page that the COM frequency can be auto-tuned, activate the cursor by pressing the FMS Knob or
selecting the appropriate softkey.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to place the cursor on the desired COM frequency.
EIS
3) Press the ENT Key to display the Load Frequency options window.
4) Turn the FMS Knob to select the desired COM radio field in which to load the frequency.
5) Press the ENT Key to load the COM frequency into the selected COM radio field.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the page menu.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the menu options.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Press the ENT Key to place the cursor on the desired selection.
4) Scroll through the frequency selections with the FMS Knob or the ENT Key.
5) Press the ENT Key to load the COM frequency into the standby field of the selected COM radio.
6) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the COM Active Frequency Field.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Nearest Frequencies Menu
Nearest Airspaces Menu
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Nearest Airports Menu
Figure 4-6 Nearest Pages Menus
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
107
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
On the ‘WPT - Airport Information’ Page, the cursor can be placed on the frequency field by pressing the
FMS Knob and scrolling through the list. With the desired frequency highlighted, press the ENT Key to
bring up the Load Frequency Options menu. Use the FMS Knobs to select the desired COM radio field and
press the ENT Key to load it.
Selected Airport
Identifier and
Information
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Runway
Information
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Press ENT Key
to bring up the
‘Load Frequency’
menu.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Select INFO 1
Softkey for AIRPORT,
RUNWAYS, and
FREQUENCIES
Windows
Figure 4-7 ‘WPT – Airport Information’ Page
AFCS
COM frequencies can also be auto-tuned from the ‘NRST – Nearest Airspaces’, ‘NRST – Nearest Frequencies’,
and ‘NRST – Nearest Airports’ Pages on the MFD in a similar manner using the appropriate softkeys or
MENU Key, the FMS Knobs, and the ENT Key.
FREQUENCY SPACING
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The COM radios can tune either 25-kHz spacing (118.000 to 136.975 MHz) or 8.33-kHz spacing (118.000
to 136.990 MHz) for 760-channel or 3040-channel configuration. When 8.33-kHz channel spacing is selected,
all of the 25-kHz channel spacing frequencies are also available in the complete 3040-channel list.
COM channel spacing is set on the System Setup 1 Page of the Aux Page Group.
APPENDICES
Changing COM frequency channel spacing:
1) Select the ‘Aux – System Setup 1’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Channel Spacing Field in the ‘COM Configuration’ Box.
INDEX
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired channel spacing.
5) Press the ENT Key to complete the channel spacing selection.
108
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
While the ‘COM Configuration’ Box is selected, the softkeys are blank.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Select 8.33-kHz
or 25.0-kHz
COM Frequency
Channel Spacing
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 4-8 ‘Aux – System Setup 1’ Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
109
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
4.3 NAV OPERATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NAV TUNING BOXES
EIS
1
2
4
3
5
6
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
7
1
Standby Fields – The NAV Frequency Box is composed of four fields; the two standby frequencies are on
the left. Frequencies in the standby field are displayed in either white or gray. The standby frequency in
the tuning box is white. The other standby frequency is gray.
2
Frequency Transfer Arrow – Moves between the upper and lower radio frequency fields with the Frequency
Tuning Box. Indicates which NAV transciever is selected for frequency transfer between the Standby and
Active fields.
3
Active Fields – The NAV Frequency Box is composed of four fields; the two active frequencies are on the
right. An active NAV frequency is displayed in green. The active NAV radio is selected by pressing the
CDI softkey on the PFD. Both active NAV frequencies appearing in white indicate that no NAV radio is
selected.
4
NAV Tuning Box – Moves between the upper and lower radio standby frequency fields with the Frequency
Transfer Arrow. Indicates which NAV transceiver is to be tuned in the Standby Field. Moving the Frequency
Tuning Box is accomplished by pressing the NAV knob on the PFD.
5
VOR/LOC Morse Code Audio Indication – When the Morse code Identifier audio is on for a NAV radio,
a white ID replaces the Frequency Transfer Arrow to the left of the active NAV frequency. In order to
listen to either station identifier, press the NAV1 or NAV2 Key on the Audio Panel. Pressing the VOL/ID
Knob turns on/off the Morse code audio only in the radio with the NAV Tuning Box. To turn on/off both
NAV IDs, transfer the NAV Tuning Box between NAV1 and NAV2 by pressing the small NAV Knob and
pressing the VOL/ID Knob again to turn the Morse code off in the other radio.
6
Decoded Morse Code Station Identifier – The NAV Frequency Box displays the decoded Morse Code
station identifier that is received from the navigation source. Audio verification of the selected station
identifier can be accomplished by selecting the corresponding NAV radio on the audio panel and pressing
the NAV VOL/ID Knob.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 4-9 NAV Tuning Box Indications
110
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
7
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NAV VOLUME – NAV radio volume level can be adjusted from 0 to 100% using the VOL/ID Knob.
Turning the knob clockwise increases volume, turning the knob counterclockwise decreases volume.
When adjusting volume, the level is displayed in place of the standby frequencies. Volume level indication
remains for two seconds after the change.
NAV RADIO SELECTION AND ACTIVATION
The NAV Frequency Box is composed of four fields; two standby fields and two active fields. The active
frequencies are on the right side and the standby frequencies are on the left.
EIS
A NAV radio is selected for navigation by selecting the CDI Softkey located on the PFD. The active NAV
frequency selected for navigation is displayed in green. Selecting the CDI Softkey once selects NAV1 as the
navigation radio. Selecting the CDI Softkey a second time selects NAV2 as the navigation radio. Selecting the
CDI Softkey a third time activates GPS mode. Selecting the CDI Softkey again cycles back to NAV1.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
While cycling through the CDI Softkey selections, the selected NAV standby frequency is selected for tuning,
the Frequency Transfer Arrow is placed in the selected NAV Frequency Field, and the active NAV frequency
color changes to green.
The three navigation modes that can be cycled through are:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• VOR1 (or LOC1) – If NAV1 is selected, a green single line arrow (not shown) labeled either VOR1 or LOC1
is displayed on the HSI and the active NAV1 frequency is displayed in green.
• VOR2 (or LOC2) – If NAV2 is selected, a green double line arrow (shown) labeled either VOR2 or LOC2 is
displayed on the HSI and the active NAV2 frequency is displayed in green.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• GPS – If GPS Mode is selected, a magenta single line arrow (not shown) appears on the HSI and neither NAV
radio is selected. Both active NAV frequencies are then displayed in white and the previously selected NAV
standby frequency remains selected for tuning.
See the Flight Instruments Section for selecting the DME and Bearing Information windows and using VOR
or ADF as the source for the bearing pointer.
AFCS
NAV radios are selected for listening by pressing the corresponding keys on the Audio Panel. Pressing the
NAV1, NAV2, ADF, or DME Key selects and deselects the navigation radio source. Selected audio can be heard over
the headset and the speakers (if selected). All radios can be selected individually or simultaneously.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NAV RECEIVER MANUAL TUNING
The NAV frequency controls and frequency boxes are on the left side of the PFDs.
Manually tuning a NAV frequency:
APPENDICES
1) Turn the NAV Knob to tune the desired frequency in the NAV Tuning Box.
2) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the NAV Active Frequency Field.
3) Adjust the volume level with the COM VOL/SQ Knob.
4) Press the COM VOL/SQ Knob to turn automatic squelch on and off.
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
111
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
Manual NAV frequency tuning from the Control Unit
1) Press the NAV Key to enable the FMS Knob for NAV tuning. The NAV Tuning Selection Box is shown.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the NAV Key again, if needed, to select the desired NAV radio (1 or 2).
3) Turn the FMS Knob to tune the desired frequency in the NAV Tuning Box (large knob for MHz; small knob for
kHz).
Or:
Press the numeric keys on the keypad to enter a Frequency.
EIS
4) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the active field.
AUTO-TUNING A NAV FREQUENCY FROM THE MFD
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NAV frequencies can be selected and loaded from the following MFD pages:
• WPT – Airport Information
• NRST – Nearest VOR
• WPT – VOR Information
• NRST – Nearest Frequencies (FSS, WX)
• NRST – Nearest Airports
• NRST – Nearest Airspaces
The MFD provides auto-tuning of NAV frequencies from waypoint and nearest pages. During enroute
navigation, the NAV frequency is entered automatically into the NAV standby frequency field. During approach
activation the NAV frequency is entered automatically into the NAV active frequency field.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Frequencies can be automatically loaded into the NAV Frequency Box from pages in the NRST or WPT page
group by highlighting the frequency and pressing the ENT Key.
Auto-tuning a NAV frequency from the WPT and NRST Pages:
1) From any page that the NAV frequency can be auto-tuned, activate the cursor by pressing the FMS Knob on the
MFD control unit or selecting the appropriate softkey.
AFCS
2) Turn the FMS Knob to place the cursor on the desired NAV identifier or NAV frequency.
3) On the Nearest VOR, Nearest Airspaces, and Nearest Airports pages, select the FREQ Softkey to place the cursor
on the NAV frequency.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Turn the FMS Knob to select the desired NAV radio field in which to load the frequency.
5) Press the ENT Key to load the NAV frequency into the selected NAV radio field.
Or:
APPENDICES
1) When on the NRST pages, press the MENU Key on the MFD control unit to display the page menu.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the menu options.
3) Press the ENT Key to place the cursor in the desired window.
4) Scroll through the frequency selections with the FMS Knob or the ENT Key.
5) Turn the FMS Knob to select the desired NAV radio field in which to load the frequency.
INDEX
6) Press the ENT Key to load the NAV frequency into the selected NAV radio field.
112
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Nearest Airports Menu
Nearest VOR Menu
Nearest Frequencies Menu
Nearest Airspaces Menu
Figure 4-10 Nearest Pages Menus
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
In the example shown, the VOR list is selected with the VOR Softkey or from the page menu. The FMS Knob
or ENT Key is used to scroll through the list. The cursor is placed on the frequency with the FREQ Softkey and
loaded into the desired NAV Tuning Field with the FMS Knobs and the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Select the FREQ Softkey
to Place the Cursor on the
VOR Frequency
AFCS
Select the VOR Softkey
to Place the Cursor on
the VOR Identifier
Press ENT Key
to load the
frequecy into
the selected Nav
Tuning Box
Figure 4-11 Loading the NAV Frequency from the NRST – Nearest VOR Page
APPENDICES
While enroute, NAV frequencies can also be auto-tuned from the NRST – Nearest Airports,
WPT – Airport Information, WPT – VOR Information, and NRST – Nearest Frequencies Pages on the MFD in
a similar manner using the appropriate softkeys or MENU Key, the FMS Knob, and the ENT Key.
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
113
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
AUTO-TUNING NAV FREQUENCIES ON APPROACH ACTIVATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: The primary NAV frequency is auto-tuned upon loading a VOR or ILS/Localizer approach.
NOTE: When an ILS/LOC approach has been activated in GPS Mode, the system switches to NAV Mode as
the final approach course is intercepted (within 15 nm of the FAF). See the Flight Management Section for
details.
EIS
NAV frequencies are automatically loaded into the NAV Frequency field on approach activation, on both
PFD1 and PFD2.
When loading or activating a VOR or ILS/LOC approach, the approach frequency is automatically transferred
to a NAV frequency field as follows:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• If the current CDI navigation source is GPS, the approach frequency is transferred to the NAV1 or NAV2
active frequency fields. The frequency that was previously in the NAV1 or NAV2 active frequency fields are
transferred to standby.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• If the current CDI navigation source is GPS, and if the approach frequency is already loaded into the NAV1
or NAV2 standby frequency field, the standby frequency is transferred to active.
• If the current CDI navigation source is NAV1 or NAV2, the approach frequency is transferred to the standby
frequency fields of the selected CDI NAV radio.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
MARKER BEACON RECEIVER
NOTE: The marker beacon indicators operate independently of marker beacon audio and cannot be turned
off.
AFCS
The marker beacon receiver is used as part of an ILS. The marker beacon receiver is always on and detects
any marker beacon signals within the reception range of the aircraft.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The receiver detects the three marker tones – outer, middle, and inner – and provides the marker beacon
annunciations located to the left of the Altimeter on the PFD.
APPENDICES
Figure 4-12 Marker Beacon Keys
The Audio Panel provides three different states of marker beacon operation; On, Muted, and Deselected.
Pressing the MKR/MUTE Key selects and deselects marker beacon audio. The key annunciator indicates when
marker beacon audio is selected.
INDEX
During marker beacon audio reception, pressing the MKR/MUTE Key mutes the audio but does not affect the
marker annunciations. The marker tone is silenced, then waits for the next marker tone. The MKR/MUTE Key
Annunciator is illuminated, indicating audio muting. The audio returns when the next marker beacon signal
is received. If the MKR/MUTE Key is pressed during signal reception (O, M, I indication) while marker beacon
audio is muted, the audio is deselected and the MKR/MUTE Key Annunciator is extinguished.
114
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Pressing the HI SENS Key switches between high and low marker beacon receiver sensitivity. The HI SENS
function (annunciator illuminated) is used to provide an earlier indication when nearing a marker during an
approach. The LO SENS function (annunciator extinguished) results in a narrower marker dwell while over a
station.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ADF/DME TUNING
NOTE: When another auxiliary window is turned on, the ADF/DME Tuning Window is replaced on the PFD.
EIS
See the Flight Instruments Section for displaying the DME and bearing information windows (ADF) and
using the ADF as the source for the bearing pointer.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The system tunes the ADF receiver (optional) and DME transceiver (optional). The ADF is tuned by entering
the frequency in the ADF standby frequency field of the ADF/DME Tuning Window. (The softkey may be
labeled ADF/DME, ADF, or DME, depending on installed equipment.)
The UHF DME frequency is tuned by pairing with a VHF NAV frequency. DME frequency pairing is automatic
and only the VHF NAV frequency is shown.
The following ADF/DME information is displayed in the ADF/DME Tuning Window:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Active and standby ADF frequencies
• ADF receiver mode
• ADF receiver volume
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• DME tuning mode (DME transceiver pairing)
When the ADF/DME Tuning Window is displayed, the selection cursor is placed over the standby ADF
frequency field.
Active ADF Frequency
AFCS
Turning the large FMS Knob moves the selection cursor through the various fields (standby ADF frequency,
ADF receiver mode, ADF radio volume, and DME tuning mode). Pressing the FMS Knob activates/deactivates
the selection cursor in the ADF/DME Tuning Window. The ADF frequency is entered using the FMS Knob and
the ENT Key.
Standby ADF Frequency
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
ADF
Mode
ADF
Volume
APPENDICES
DME
Tuning
Mode
Figure 4-13 ADF/DME Tuning Window
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
115
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
ADF TUNING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ADF frequencies in the 190.0-kHz to 1799.5-kHz range are entered in the standby ADF frequency field of
the ADF/DME Tuning Window. The System does not tune the ADF emergency frequency, 2182.0‑kHz.
Tuning an ADF frequency:
1) Press the ADF/DME Softkey to display the ‘ADF/DME Tuning’ Window.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the selection cursor over the standby ADF frequency field.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to begin data entry and change each digit.
EIS
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next digit position.
5) Press the ENT Key to complete data entry for the standby frequency.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Pressing the CLR Key before completing frequency entry cancels the frequency change and reverts back to
the previously entered frequency.
Pressing the CLR Key when the cursor is flashing, clears the frequency and replaces the standby field with
‘0000.0’.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Transferring the active and standby ADF frequencies:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the selection cursor over the standby ADF frequency field.
2) Press the ENT Key to complete the frequency transfer.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
SELECTING ADF RECEIVER MODE
The following modes can be selected: (In all modes NDB audio can be heard by pressing the ADF Key on
the Audio Panel.)
• ANT (Antenna) – The ADF bearing pointer parks on the HSI at 90 degrees. Best mode for listening to NDB
audio.
AFCS
• ADF (Automatic Direction Finder) – The ADF pointer points to the relative bearing of the NDB station.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• ADF/BFO (ADF/Beat Frequency Oscillator) – The ADF pointer points to the relative bearing of the NDB
station and an audible tone confirms signal reception. This mode allows identification of the interrupted
carrier beacon stations used in various parts of the world.
• ANT/BFO (Antenna/Beat Frequency Oscillator) – The ADF bearing pointer parks on the HSI at 90 degrees
while an audible tone is provided when a signal is received. This mode also allows identification of the
interrupted carrier beacon stations and confirms signal reception.
APPENDICES
Selecting an ADF receiver mode:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the selection cursor over the ADF mode field.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired ADF receiver mode.
INDEX
ADF receiver volume level can be adjusted in the tuning window from 0 to 100%. The default volume level
is set to 50%.
116
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Adjusting ADF receiver volume:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the selection cursor over the ADF volume field.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to adjust volume as desired.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
DME TUNING
NOTE: When turning on the system for use, it will remember the last frequency used for DME tuning and
the NAV1, NAV2, or HOLD state prior to shutdown.
EIS
The DME transceiver is tuned by selecting NAV1, NAV2, or HOLD in the ADF/DME Tuning Window.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
DME
Modes
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 4-14 ADF/DME Tuning Window, DME Modes
The following DME transceiver pairings can be selected:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• NAV1 – Pairs the DME frequency from the selected NAV1 frequency.
• NAV2 – Pairs the DME frequency from the selected NAV2 frequency.
• HOLD – When in the HOLD position, the DME frequency remains paired with the last selected NAV
frequency.
AFCS
Selecting DME transceiver pairing:
1) Press the ADF/DME Softkey to display the ‘ADF/DME Tuning’ Window.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the DME tuning mode.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Press the ENT Key to complete the selection.
Pressing the CLR Key or FMS Knob while in the process of DME pairing cancels the data entry and reverts
back to the previously selected DME tuning state. Pressing the FMS Knob activates/deactivates the cursor in
the ADF/DME Tuning Window.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
117
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
4.4 MODE S TRANSPONDER
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Mode S Transponder provide Mode A, Mode C, and Mode S interrogation and reply capabilities. The
Diversity option incorporates antennas mounted on the top and bottom of the aircraft for dependable operation
while maneuvering. Selective addressing or Mode Select (Mode S) capability includes the following features:
• Level-2 reply data link capability (used to exchange information between aircraft and ATC facilities)
• Surveillance identifier capability
EIS
• Flight ID (Flight Identification) reporting – The Mode S Transponder reports aircraft identification as either the
aircraft registration or a unique Flight ID.
• Altitude reporting
• Airborne status determination
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Transponder capability reporting
• Mode S Enhanced Surveillance (EHS) requirements
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Acquisition squitter – Acquisition squitter, or short squitter, is the transponder 24-bit identification address.
The transmission is sent periodically, regardless of the presence of interrogations. The purpose of acquisition
squitter is to enable Mode S ground stations and aircraft equipped with a Traffic Avoidance System (TAS) to
recognize the presence of Mode S-equipped aircraft for selective interrogation.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Extended squitter – The extended squitter is transmitted periodically and contains information such as altitude
(barometric and GPS), GPS position, and aircraft identification. The purpose of extended squitter is to provide
aircraft position and identification to ADS-B Ground-Based Transceivers (GBTs) and other aircraft.
The Hazard Avoidance Section provides more details on traffic avoidance systems.
TRANSPONDER CONTROLS
AFCS
Transponder function is displayed on three levels of softkeys on the PFD: Top-level, Mode Selection, and
Code Selection. When the top-level XPDR Softkey is pressed, the Mode Selection softkeys appear: Standby,
On, ALT, VFR, Code, Ident, Back.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
When the Code Softkey is pressed, the number softkeys appear: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, Ident, BKSP, Back. The
digits 8 and 9 are not used for code entry. Pressing the numbered softkeys in sequence enters the transponder
code. If an error is made, pressing the BKSP Softkey moves the code selection cursor to the previous digit.
Pressing the BKSP Softkey again moves the cursor to the next previous digit.
APPENDICES
Pressing the Back Softkey during code selection reverts to the Mode Selection Softkeys. Pressing the Back
Softkey during mode selection reverts to the top-level softkeys.
The code can also be entered with the FMS Knob on either PFD. Code entry must be completed with either
the softkeys or the FMS Knob, but not a combination of both.
Pressing the Ident Softkey while in Mode or Code Selection initiates the ident function and reverts to the
top-level softkeys.
INDEX
After 45 seconds of transponder control inactivity, the system reverts back to the top-level softkeys.
118
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TRANSPONDER MODE SELECTION
Mode selection can be automatic (Altitude Mode) or manual (Standby, ON, and Altitude Modes). The
Standby, ON, and ALT Softkeys can be accessed by pressing the XPDR Softkey.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selecting a transponder mode:
1) Press the XPDR Softkey to display the Transponder Mode Selection Softkeys.
2) Select the desired softkey to activate the transponder mode.
STANDBY MODE (MANUAL)
EIS
NOTE: In Standby Mode, the IDENT function is inhibited.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Standby Mode can be selected at any time by pressing the Standby Softkey. In Standby, the transponder
is powered and new codes can be entered, but no replies or squitters are transmitted.. When Standby is
selected, a white STBY indication and transponder code appear in the mode field of the Transponder Data
Box.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
STBY Mode (White Code
Number and Mode)
Figure 4-15 Standby Mode
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
MANUAL ON MODE
AFCS
On Mode can be selected at any time by pressing the On Softkey. An On indication will appear in the
mode field of the Transponder Data Box. Selecting On mode enables transmission of transponder replies and
squitters, but transmissions will not include altitude information. The On indication and transponder code
in the Transponder Data Box will appear green while airborne and white while on the ground. When the
transponder is operating with an air state of on-ground it will disable replies to Mode A, Mode C, and Mode
S all-call interrogations so the aircraft will not show up on the traffic systems of other aircraft.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
On-Ground On Mode
(No Altitude Reporting)
APPENDICES
Airborne On Mode
(No Altitude Reporting)
INDEX
Figure 4-16 On Mode
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
119
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
ALTITUDE MODE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ALT Mode can be selected at any time by pressing the ALT Softkey. When ALT mode is selected,
an ALT indication will appear in the mode field of the Transponder Data Box. Selecting ALT mode enables
transmission of transponder replies and squitters. Transmissions will include pressure altitude information.
The ALT indication and transponder code in the Transponder Data Box will appear green while airborne and
white while on the ground. When the transponder is operating with an air state of on-ground it will disable
replies to Mode A, Mode C, and Mode S all-call interrogations so the aircraft will not show up on the traffic
systems of other aircraft.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
On-Ground ALT Mode
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Airborne ALT Mode
Figure 4-17 Altitude Mode
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
REPLY STATUS
When the transponder sends replies to interrogations, a white R indication appears momentarily in the
reply status field of the Transponder Data Box.
AFCS
Reply to
Interrogation
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 4-18 Reply Indication
ENTERING A TRANSPONDER CODE
APPENDICES
Entering a transponder code with softkeys:
1) Press the XPDR Softkey to display the Transponder Mode Selection Softkeys.
2) Press the Code Softkey to display the Transponder Code Selection Softkeys, for digit entry.
INDEX
3) Press the digit softkeys to enter the code in the code field. When entering the code, the next softkey in sequence
must be selected within 10 seconds, or the entry is cancelled and restored to the previous code. Pressing the
BKSP Softkey moves the code selection cursor to the previous digit. Five seconds after the fourth digit has been
entered, the transponder code becomes active.
120
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Entering a transponder code with the PFD FMS Knob:
1) Press the XPDR and the Code Softkeys as in the previous procedure to enable code entry.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter the first two code digits.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next code field.
4) Enter the last two code digits with the small FMS Knob.
5) Press the ENT Key to complete code digit entry.
EIS
Pressing the CLR Key or small FMS Knob before code entry is complete cancels code entry and restores the
previous code. Waiting for 10 seconds after code entry is finished activates the code automatically.
Entering a transponder code with the control unit:
1) Press the PFD Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the Softkey Select Right Arrow Key to select the XPDR Softkey.
3) Press the SEL Key to select the transponder CODE Softkey.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Turn the small FMS Knob on the PFD to enter the first two code digits, turn the large FMS Knob to select the
last two digits, and turn the small FMS Knob to enter the last two code digits.
Or:
Press the numeric keys on the keypad to enter a code.
Or:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Press the SEL Key on the keypad to use the Code Selection Softkeys for digit entry.
If an error is made during code entry with the numeric keypad, press the BKSP Key to move the cursor
back one space. If an incorrect code is entered, reenter the correct one using the same procedure.
VFR CODE
AFCS
The VFR code can be entered either manually or by pressing the XPDR Softkey, then the VFR Softkey.
When the VFR Softkey is pressed, the pre-programmed VFR code is automatically displayed in the code field
of the Transponder Data Box. Pressing the VFR Softkey again restores the previous identification code.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The pre-programmed VFR Code is set at the factory to 1200. If a VFR code change is required, contact a
Garmin-authorized service center for configuration.
IDENT FUNCTION
APPENDICES
NOTE: In Standby Mode, the Ident Softkey is inoperative.
INDEX
Pressing the Ident Softkey sends a distinct identity indication to Air Traffic Control (ATC). The indication
distinguishes the identing transponder from all the others on the air traffic controller’s screen. The Ident Softkey
appears on all levels of transponder softkeys. When the Ident Softkey is pressed, a green Ident indication is
displayed in the mode field of the Transponder Data Box for a duration of 18 seconds.
After the Ident Softkey is pressed while in Mode or Code Selection, the system reverts to the top-level softkeys.
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
121
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
FLIGHT ID REPORTING
NOTE: If the Flight ID is required but the system is not configured for it, contact a Garmin-authorized service
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
center for configuration.
When the Flight ID must be entered before flight operation, the identifier is placed in the References Window
on the PFD. The system allows entry of up to eight characters. No space is needed when entering Flight ID.
When a Flight ID contains a space, the system automatically removes it upon completion of Flight ID entry.
EIS
Entering a Flight ID:
1) Press the Tmr/Ref Softkey to display the ‘References’ Window.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the selection cursor, if not already activated.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll down to the Flight ID.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter the desired Flight ID.
5) Press the ENT Key to complete Flight ID entry.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
If an error is made during Flight ID entry, pressing the CLR Key returns to the original Flight ID entry. While
entering a Flight ID, turning the FMS Knob counterclockwise moves the cursor back one space for each detent
of rotation. If an incorrect Flight ID is discovered after the unit begins operation, reenter the correct Flight ID
using the same procedure.
122
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
4.5 ADDITIONAL AUDIO PANEL FUNCTIONS
POWER-UP
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Audio Panel performs a self-test during power-up. During the self-test all Audio Panel annunciator lights
illuminate for approximately two seconds. Once the self-test is completed, most of the settings are restored to
those in use before the unit was last turned off. The exceptions are the speaker and intercom, which are always
selected during power up.
MONO/STEREO HEADSETS
EIS
Stereo headsets are recommended for use in this aircraft.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Using a monaural headset in a stereo jack shorts the right headset channel output to ground. While this does
not damage the Audio Panel, a person listening on a monaural headset hears only the left channel in both ears.
If a monaural headset is used at one of the passenger positions, any other passenger using a stereo headset hears
audio in the left ear only.
SPEAKER
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
All of the radios can be heard over the cabin speakers. Pressing the SPKR Key selects and deselects the cabin
speaker. Speaker audio is muted when the PTT is pressed. Certain aural alerts and warnings (autopilot, traffic,
altitude) are always heard on the speaker, even when the speaker is not selected.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The speaker volume is adjustable within a nominal range. Contact a Garmin-authorized service center for
volume adjustment.
INTERCOM
AFCS
The Audio Panel includes a four-position intercom system (ICS) and two stereo music inputs for the pilot,
copilot and up to two passengers. The intercom provides Pilot and Copilot isolation from the passengers and
aircraft radios.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 4-19 Intercom Controls
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
123
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
COPLT KEY
Annunciator
Copilot Hears
Passenger Hears
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pilot Hears
ALL
OFF
OFF
Selected radios, aural
alerts, pilot, copilot,
passengers, music
PILOT
ON
OFF
Selected radios, aural
alerts, pilot
EIS
PILOT KEY
Annunciator
COPILOT
OFF
ON
Selected radios, aural
alerts, pilot; passengers, Copilot
music
Selected radios, aural
alerts, pilot, passengers,
music
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Mode
Selected radios, aural
alerts, pilot, copilot,
passengers, music
Selected radios, aural
alerts, pilot, copilot,
passengers, music
Copilot, passengers,
music
Copilot, passengers,
music
CREW
ON
ON
Selected radios, aural
alerts, pilot, copilot
Passengers, music
Selected radios, aural
alerts, pilot, copilot
Table 4-1 ICS Isolation Modes
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Pilot isolation is selected when the PILOT Annunciator is illuminated. During Pilot isolation, the pilot can
hear the selected radios and aural alerts and warnings. The copilot and passengers can communicate with each
other. The copilot is isolated from aural alerts and warnings.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Copilot isolation is selected when the COPLT Annunciator is illuminated. The copilot is isolated from the
selected radios, aural alerts and warnings, and everyone else. The pilot and passengers can hear the selected
radios and communicate with each other.
When both the PILOT and COPLT Annunciators are illuminated, the pilot and copilot can hear the selected
radios and communicate with each other. The passengers are isolated from the pilot and copilot but can
communicate with each other.
AFCS
When both the PILOT and COPLT Annunciators are extinguished, everyone hears the selected radios and is
able to communicate with everyone else.
INTERCOM VOLUME AND SQUELCH
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The PILOT/PASS Knob controls volume or manual squelch adjustment for the pilot and copilot/passenger.
The small knob controls the pilot volume and squelch. The large knob controls the copilot/passenger volume
and squelch. The VOL and SQ annunciations at the bottom of the unit indicate which function the knob is
controlling. Pressing the PILOT/PASS Knob switches between volume and squelch control as indicated by
the VOL or SQ annunciation being illuminated.
APPENDICES
The MAN SQ Key allows either automatic or manual control of the squelch setting.
• When the MAN SQ Annunciator is extinguished (Automatic Squelch is on), the PILOT/PASS Knob
controls only the volume (pressing the PILOT/PASS Knob has no effect on the VOL/SQ selection).
INDEX
• When the MAN SQ Annunciator is illuminated (Manual Squelch), the PILOT/PASS Knob controls
either volume or squelch (selected by pressing the PILOT/PASS Knob and indicated by the VOL or SQ
annunciation).
124
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Manual Squelch Annunciator;
Off for Automatic Squelch, On
for Manual Squelch
Automatic/Manual Squelch
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Pilot Volume or Manual
Squelch. Press to switch
between VOL and SQ. Turn
to adjust Squelch when SQ
Annunciation is lit, Volume
when VOL Annunciation is lit.
Copilot/Passenger
Volume or
Manual Squelch
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Volume Annunciation
Squelch Annunciation
Figure 4-20 Volume/Squelch Control
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
PASSENGER ADDRESS (PA) SYSTEM
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
A passenger address system is available for delivering voice messages over the cabin speaker. When the PA
Key is selected on the Audio Panel, the COM MIC Annunciator is extinguished, and the active COM frequency
changes to white, indicating that there is no COM selected. A Push-to-Talk (PTT) must be pressed to deliver PA
announcements. The PA Annunciator flashes about once per second while the PTT is depressed.
CLEARANCE RECORDER AND PLAYER
NOTE: Only the audio for the selected COM MIC Key is recorded.
AFCS
The Audio Panel contains a digital clearance recorder that records up to 2.5 minutes of the selected COM
radio signal. Recorded COM audio is stored in separate memory blocks. Once 2.5 minutes of recording time
have been reached, the recorder begins recording over the stored memory blocks, starting from the oldest block.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The PLAY Key controls the play function. Pressing the PLAY Key once plays the latest recorded memory
block. The PLAY Annunciator flashes to indicate when play is in progress. The PLAY Annunciator turns off
after the present memory block has finished playing.
Pressing the MKR/MUTE Key during play of a memory block stops play. If a COM input signal is detected
during play of a recorded memory block, play is halted.
APPENDICES
Pressing the PLAY Key while audio is playing begins playing the previously recorded memory block. Each
subsequent press of the PLAY Key selects the previously recorded memory block.
Powering off the unit automatically clears all recorded blocks.
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
125
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SPLIT COM
NOTE: Split COM performance is affected by the distance between the COM antennas and the separation
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
of the tuned frequencies. If the selected COM1 and COM2 frequencies are too close together, interference
may be heard during transmission on the other radio.
During Split COM operation, both the pilot and the copilot can transmit simultaneously over separate radios.
The pilot can still monitor NAV1, NAV2, ADF, DME, and MKR Audio as selected, but the copilot is only able
to monitor COM2.
EIS
Pressing the COM 1/2 Key selects Split COM operation. The COM 1/2 Annunciator is illuminated indicating
Split COM operation. Split COM operation is cancelled by pressing the COM 1/2 Key again, at which time the
annunciator is extinguished.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
When Split COM operation is selected, COM1 is used by the pilot and COM2 is used by the copilot. The
COM1 MIC Annunciator flashes when the pilot’s microphone PTT is pressed. The COM2 MIC Annunciator
flashes when the copilot’s microphone PTT is pressed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
ENTERTAINMENT INPUTS
NOTE: Music audio cannot be completely turned off. Audio level for the crew and passengers can be
adjusted by a Garmin-authorized service center.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Audio Panel provides a stereo entertainment input from the data link receiver or a MUSIC IN jack for the
crew and passengers. The MUSIC IN jack is compatible with popular portable entertainment devices such as
MP3 and CD players through a 3.5-mm stereo phone jack, installed in a convenient location. The headphone
outputs of the entertainment devices are plugged into the MUSIC IN jack.
The current ICS state of isolation affects the distribution of the entertainment input (see Table 4‑1).
AFCS
CREW MUSIC
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Music can be heard by the pilot and copilot when both the PILOT and the COPLT ICS Annunciators are
extinguished. Music can also be heard by the pilot when the COPLT Annunciator is illuminated and by the
copilot when the PILOT Annunciator is illuminated.
Music Muting
APPENDICES
Music muting occurs when aircraft radio or marker beacon activity is heard. Music is always soft muted
when an interruption occurs from these sources. Soft muting is the gradual return of music to its original
volume level. The time required for music volume to return to normal is between one-half and four
seconds.
Music Muting Enable/Disable
INDEX
Pressing and holding the MKR/MUTE Key for three seconds switches music muting on and off. When
switching, either one or two beeps are heard; one beep indicates that music muting is enabled, two beeps
indicate music muting is disabled. Music muting is reset (enabled) during power up.
126
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
PASSENGER MUSIC
Music coming through the passenger phone jacks can be heard only by the passengers and is never muted.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
XM RADIO ENTERTAINMENT
XM Radio audio from the Data Link Receiver may be heard by the pilot and passengers simultaneously
(optional: requires subscription to XM Radio Service). Refer to the Additional Features Section for more
details on the Data Link Receiver.
Connecting a stereo input to the MUSIC IN jack removes the XM Radio Audio from that input.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
127
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
4.6 AUDIO PANEL PREFLIGHT PROCEDURE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: If the flight crew is using headsets that have a high/low switch or volume control knob, verify that
the switch is in the high position and the volume control on the headsets are at max volume setting. On
single‑pilot flights, verify that all other headsets are not connected to avoid excess noise in the audio
system.
NOTE: When the MAN SQ Key is pressed, the flight crew is able to set the ICS squelch manually. If manual
EIS
squelch is set to full open (SQ annunciated and the small knob turned counterclockwise) background noise
is heard in the ICS system as well as during COM transmissions.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
After powering up the System, the following steps aid in maximizing the use of the Audio Panel as well as
prevent pilot and copilot induced issues. These preflight procedures should be performed each time a pilot
boards the aircraft to insure awareness of all audio levels in the Audio Panel and radios.
Setting the Audio Panel during preflight:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Verify that the PILOT and COPLT Annunciators are extinguished.
2) Verify that the MAN SQ Annunciator is extinguished.
3) Turn the PILOT/PASS Knobs clockwise two full turns. This sets the headset intercom audio level to max volume
(least amount of attenuation).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Adjust radio volume levels (COM, NAV, etc.) to a suitable level.
5) Adjust the PILOT/PASS Knob volume to the desired intercom level.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Once this procedure has been completed, the pilot and copilot can change settings, keeping in mind the notes
above.
128
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
4.7 ABNORMAL OPERATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Abnormal operation includes equipment failures of system components and failure of associated equipment,
including switches and external devices.
STUCK MICROPHONE
If the push-to-talk (PTT) Key becomes stuck, the COM transmitter stops transmitting after 35 seconds of
continuous operation. An alert appears on the PFD to advise the crew of a stuck microphone.
EIS
The COM1 MIC or COM2 MIC Key Annunciator on the Audio Panel flashes as long as the PTT Key remains
stuck.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 4-21 Stuck Microphone Alert
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
COM TUNING FAILURE
In case of a COM system tuning failure, the emergency frequency (121.500 MHz) is automatically tuned in
the radio in which the tuning failure occurred.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Emergency Channel
Loaded Automatically
Figure 4-22 COM Tuning Failure
AFCS
AUDIO PANEL FAIL-SAFE OPERATION
If there is a failure of the Audio Panel, a fail-safe circuit connects the pilot’s headset and microphone directly
to the COM1 transceiver. Audio is not available on the speaker during Fail-safe operation.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
REVERSIONARY MODE
The red DISPLAY BACKUP Button on the audio panel selects the PFD/MFD Reversionary Mode. See the
System Overview Section for more information on Reversionary Mode.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
129
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
Blank Page
130
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 5 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
5.1 INTRODUCTION
EIS
The system is an integrated flight, engine, communication, navigation and surveillance system. This section of
the Pilot’s Guide explains flight management using the system.
The most prominent part of the system are the two full color displays: one Primary Flight Display (PFD) and
a Multi Function Display (MFD). The information to successfully navigate the aircraft using the GPS sensors is
displayed on the PFD and the MFD. A brief description of the GPS navigation data on the PFD follows.
Navigation mode indicates which sensor is providing the course data (e.g., GPS, VOR) and the flight plan phase
(e.g., Departure (DPRT), Terminal (TERM), Enroute (ENR), Oceanic (OCN), RNAV Approach (LNAV, LNAV+V,
L/VNAV, LP, LP+V, LPV), or Missed Approach (MAPR)). L/VNAV, LP, LP+V, and LPV approach service levels are
only available with SBAS.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Inset Map and HSI Map are small versions of the Navigation Map. The Inset Map is displayed in the lower
left corner of the PFD (lower right during reversionary mode), and the HSI Map is displayed in the center of
the HSI. The Inset Map and the HSI Map may each be referred to as the PFD Map. A PFD Map is displayed by
pressing the Map/HSI Softkey, pressing the Layout Softkey, then pressing either the Inset Map or HSI Map
Softkey. Pressing the Map Off Softkey removes the PFD Map.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Navigation Map displays aviation data (e.g., airports, VORs, airways, airspaces), geographic data (e.g.,
cities, lakes, highways, borders), topographic data (map shading indicating elevation), and hazard data (e.g.,
traffic, terrain, weather). The amount of displayed data for the PFD Map can be reduced by pressing the Map/
HSI Softkey on the PFD, then pressing the Detail Softkey. The amount of displayed data for the Navigation Map
can be reduced by pressing the Detail Softkey on the MFD. The Navigation Map can be oriented three different
ways: North Up (NORTH UP), Track Up (TRK UP), or Heading Up (HDG UP).
AFCS
An aircraft icon is placed on the Navigation Map at the location corresponding to the calculated present position.
The aircraft position and the flight plan legs are accurately based on GPS calculations. The basemap upon which
these are placed are from a source with less resolution, therefore the relative position of the aircraft to map features
is not exact. The leg of the active flight plan currently being flown is shown as a magenta line on the navigation
map. The other legs are shown in white.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
There are 28 different map ranges available, from 250 feet to 1000 nm. The current range is indicated in the
upper left corner of the map and represents the top-to-bottom distance covered by the map. To change the map
range on any map, turn the Joystick counter-clockwise to zoom in ( -, decreasing), or clockwise to zoom out (+,
increasing).
APPENDICES
The Direct To Window, the Flight Plan Window, the Procedures Window, and the Nearest Airports Window
can be displayed in the lower right corner of the PFD. Details of these windows are discussed in detail later in
the section.
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
131
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Navigation Status Box
Current Track Indicator
Navigation Mode
Inset Map
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Location of:
- Direct To Window
- Flight Plan Window
- Procedures Window
- Nearest Airports Window
- References Window
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-1 GPS Navigation Information on the PFD Inset Map
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Navigation Mode
Current Track
Indicator
AFCS
HSI Map
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-2 GPS Navigation Information on the PFD HSI Map
132
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Navigation Status Box
Display Title
Map Orientation
- Aviation Data
- Geographic Data
- Topographic Data
- Hazard Data
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Navigation Map
Map Range
Active Flight Plan Leg
Aircraft Icon
at Present Position
EIS
Flight Plan Leg
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-3 GPS Navigation Information on the MFD Navigation Page
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NAVIGATION STATUS BOX AND DATA BAR
The Navigation Status Box located at the top of the PFD contains two fields displaying the following
information:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-4 PFD Navigation Status Box
AFCS
• Active flight plan leg (e.g., ‘D-> KICT’ or ‘KIXD -> KCOS’) or flight plan annunciations (e.g., ‘Turn right to
021˚ in 8 seconds’)
• Distance (DIS) and Bearing (BRG) to the next waypoint or flight plan annunciations (e.g., ‘TOD within 1
minute’)
The symbols used in the PFD Status Box are:
Description
Symbol
Description
Left Holding Pattern
Direct To
Vector to Final
Right Procedure Turn
Right DME Arc/Radius to Fix Leg
Left Procedure Turn
Left DME Arc/Radius to Fix Leg
APPENDICES
Active Leg
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Symbol
Right Holding Pattern
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
INDEX
Table 5-1 PFD Status Box Symbols
133
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
The Navigation Data Bar located at the top of the MFD contains four data fields, each displaying one of the
following items:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
BRG
DEST
DIS
DTG
DTK
END
ENR
ESA
ETA
ETE
FLT
FOB
FOD
GS
ISA
LDG
MSA
TAS
TKE
TRK
VSR
XTK
Bearing
Destination Airport Identifier
Distance
Distance to Go
Desired Track
Endurance
ETE to Final Destination
Enroute Safe Altitude
Estimated Time of Arrival
Estimated Time Enroute
Flight Timer
Fuel on Board
Fuel over Destination
Ground Speed
Temperature at Standard Pressure
ETA at Final Destination
Minimum Safe Altitude
True Airspeed
Track Angle Error
Track
Vertical Speed Required
Cross-Track Error
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Table 5-2 MFD Data Bar Field Items
Figure 5-5 MFD Navigation Data Bar
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The navigation information displayed in the four data fields can be selected on the ‘MFD Data Bar Fields’ Box
on the ‘Aux-System Setup 1’ Page. The default selections (in order left to right) are GS, DTK, TRK, and ETE.
Changing a field in the MFD Navigation Data Bar:
1) Select the ‘Aux - System Setup 1’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
AFCS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired field number in the ‘MFD Data Bar Fields’ Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display and scroll through the data options list to select the desired data.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
5) Press the ENT Key. Pressing the Defaults Softkey returns all fields to the default setting.
134
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5.2 USING MAP DISPLAYS
• Map Pointer information (distance and bearing
to pointer, location of pointer, name, and other
pertinent information)
• Fuel range ring
• Flight plan legs
• User waypoints
• Track vector
• Terrain
• Topography data
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Airports, NAVAIDs, airspaces, airways, land data
(highways, cities, lakes, rivers, borders, etc.)
with names
• Map range
• Wind direction and speed
• Map orientation
• Icons for enabled map features
• Aircraft icon (representing present position)
• Obstacle data
• Topography scale
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Map displays are used extensively in the system to provide situational awareness in flight. Most system maps
can display the following information:
The information in this section applies to the following maps unless otherwise noted:
Flight Plan Pages (‘FPL’)
Direct To Window
PFD Maps
Procedure Loading Pages
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
All Map Group Pages (‘Map’)
All Waypoint Group Pages (‘WPT’)
Trip Planning Page (‘Aux’)
All Nearest Group Pages (‘NRST’)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
MAP ORIENTATION
Maps are shown in one of three different orientation options, allowing flexibility in determining aircraft
position relative to other items on the map (north up) or for determining where map items are relative to where
the aircraft is going (track up or heading up). The map orientation is shown in the upper left corner of the map.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-6 Map Orientation
• North up (North up) aligns the top of the map display to north (default setting).
INDEX
• Track up (Track up) aligns the top of the map display to the current ground track.
• Heading up (HDG up) aligns the top of the map display to the current aircraft heading.
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
135
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
NOTE: When panning or reviewing active flight plan legs in a non-North Up orientation, the map does not
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
show the map orientation nor the wind direction and speed.
NOTE: Map orientation can only be changed on the Navigation Map Page. Any other displays that show
navigation data reflect the orientation selected for the Navigation Map Page.
Changing the Navigation Map orientation:
EIS
1) With the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page displayed, press the MENU Key. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Settings’
option.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Map Settings
Selection
Figure 5-7 Navigation Map Page Menu Window
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the ENT Key to display the ‘Map Settings’ Window. Select the ‘Map’ group if necessary.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob, or press the ENT Key once, to select the ‘Orientation’ field.
Map Group Selection
Orientation Field
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
North Up Above Field
Figure 5-8 Map Settings Menu Window - Map Group
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired orientation.
5) Press the ENT Key to select the new orientation.
INDEX
6) Press the FMS Knob to return to the base page.
136
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The map can be configured to switch automatically to a north up orientation when the map range reaches a
minimum range.
Enabling/disabling Auto North Up and selecting the minimum switching range:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Press the MENU Key with the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Settings’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Map Settings’ Window is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
EIS
5) Highlight the ‘North Up Above’ field.
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’ using the small FMS Knob.
7) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option. The flashing cursor highlights the range field.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
8) Use the small FMS Knob to select the desired range.
9) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option.
10) Press the FMS Knob to return to the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
MAP RANGE
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
There are 28 different map ranges available, from 250 feet to 1000 nm. The current range is indicated in
the upper left corner of the map and represents the top-to-bottom distance covered by the map. When the
map range is decreased to a point that exceeds the capability of the system to accurately represent the map,
a magnifying glass icon is shown to the left of the map range. To change the map range turn the Joystick
counter-clockwise to decrease the range, or clockwise to increase the range.
NOTE: Since the PFD Map is much smaller than the MFD navigation maps, items are removed on the PFD
AFCS
Map two range levels smaller than the range selected in the Map Settings pages (e.g., a setting of 100 nm
removes the item at ranges above 100 nm on MFD navigation maps, while the PFD Map removes the same
item at 50 nm).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Auto Zoom On
APPENDICES
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
INDEX
Figure 5-9 Map Range
137
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
AUTO ZOOM
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Auto zoom allows the system to change the map display range to the smallest range clearly showing the
active waypoint. Auto zoom can be overridden by adjusting the range with the Joystick, and remains until
the active waypoint changes, a terrain or traffic alert occurs, the aircraft takes off, or the manual override times
out (timer set on ‘Map Settings’ Window). Auto zoom is suspended while the map pointer is active.
EIS
If a terrain caution or warning occurs, all navigation maps automatically adjust to the smallest map range
clearly showing the potential impact areas If a new traffic advisory alert occurs, any map page capable of
displaying traffic advisory alerts automatically adjusts to the smallest map range clearly showing the traffic
advisory. When terrain or traffic alerts clear, the map returns to the previous auto zoom range based on the
active waypoint.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The auto zoom function can be turned on or off independently for the PFD and MFD. Control of the ranges
at which the auto zoom occurs is done by setting the minimum and maximum ‘look forward’ times (set on the
‘Map Settings’ Window for the ‘Map’ Group). These settings determine the minimum and maximum distance
to display based upon the aircraft’s ground speed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Waypoints that are long distances apart cause the map range to increase to a point where many details on
the map are decluttered. If this is not acceptable, lower the maximum look ahead time to a value that limits
the auto zoom to an acceptable range.
• Waypoints that are very short distances apart cause the map range to decrease to a point where situational
awareness may not be what is desired. Increase the minimum look ahead time to a value that limits the auto
zoom to a minimum range that provides acceptable situational awareness.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Flight plans that have a combination of long and short legs cause the range to increase and decrease as
waypoints sequence. To avoid this, auto zoom can be disabled or the maximum/minimum times can be
adjusted.
AFCS
• The ‘time out’ time (configurable on the ‘Map Settings’ Window for the Map Group) determines how long
auto zoom is overridden by a manual adjustment of the range knob. At the expiration of this time, the auto
zoom range is restored. Setting the ‘time out’ value to zero causes the manual override to never time out.
• When the maximum ‘look forward’ time is set to zero, the upper limit becomes the maximum range available
(1000 nm).
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• When the minimum ‘look forward’ time is set to zero, the lower limit becomes 1.5 nm.
138
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Configuring automatic zoom:
1) Press the MENU Key with the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Settings’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Map Settings’ Window is displayed.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Select the ‘Map’ Group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘Auto Zoom’ On/Off field, and select ‘Off’ or ‘On’ using the small FMS Knob.
6) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option. The flashing cursor highlights the ‘Auto Zoom’ display selection field.
EIS
7) Select ‘MFD’, ‘PFD’, or ‘All’ using the small FMS Knob.
8) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option. The flashing cursor highlights the ‘Max Look FWD’ Field.
Times are from zero to 999 minutes.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
9) Use the FMS Knobs to set the time. Press the ENT Key.
10) Repeat step 9 for ‘Min Look FWD’ (zero to 99 minutes) and ‘Time Out’ (zero to 99 minutes).
11) Press the FMS Knob to return to the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
MAP PANNING
Map panning allows the pilot to:
• View parts of the map outside the displayed range without adjusting the map range
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Highlight and select locations on the map
• Review information for a selected airport, NAVAID or user waypoint
• Designate locations for use in flight planning
• View airspace and airway information
AFCS
When the panning function is selected by pushing the Joystick, the Map Pointer flashes on the map display.
A window also appears at the top of the map display showing the latitude/longitude position of the pointer,
the bearing and distance to the pointer from the aircraft’s present position, and the elevation of the land at the
position of the pointer.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
139
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Panning the map:
1) Push the Joystick to display the Map Pointer.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Move the Joystick to move the Map Pointer around the map.
3) Push the Joystick to remove the Map Pointer and recenter the map on the aircraft’s current position.
NOTE: The map is normally centered on the aircraft’s position. If the map has been panned and there has
been no pointer movement for about 60 seconds, the map reverts back to centered on the aircraft position
and the flashing pointer is removed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
When the Map Pointer is placed on an object, the name of the object is highlighted (even if the name was
not originally displayed on the map). When any map feature or object is selected on the map display, pertinent
information is displayed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Map Pointer Information
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Map Pointer
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-10 Navigation Map - Map Pointer Activated
140
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Map Pointer on
POI
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-11 Navigation Map - Map Pointer on Point of Interest
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Reviewing information for an airport, NAVAID, or user waypoint:
1) With the desired map page displayed on the MFD, push the Joystick to display the Map Pointer and place the
Map Pointer on a waypoint.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the ENT Key to display the ‘WPT - Waypoint Information’ Page for the selected waypoint.
3) Press the Go Back Softkey, the CLR Key, or the ENT Key to exit the ‘WPT - Waypoint Information’ Page and
return to the Navigation Map showing the selected waypoint.
AFCS
When the Map Pointer crosses an airspace boundary, the boundary is highlighted and airspace information
is shown. The information includes the name and class of airspace, the ceiling in feet above Mean Sea Level
(MSL), and the floor in feet MSL.
Reviewing information for a special-use or controlled airspace:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) With the desired map page displayed on the MFD, push the Joystick to display the Map Pointer and place the
Map Pointer on an open area within the boundaries of an airspace. (As the Map Pointer crosses the airspace
boundary, the boundary is highlighted and airspace information is shown.)
2) Press the ENT Key to display an options menu.
APPENDICES
3) ‘Review Airspaces’ should already be highlighted, if not select it. Press the ENT Key to display the ‘Information’
Window for the selected airspace.
4) Press the FMS Knob, the CLR Key, or the ENT Key to exit the ‘Information’ Window.
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
141
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
MEASURING BEARING AND DISTANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Distance and bearing from the aircraft’s present position to any point on the viewable navigation map may be
calculated using the ‘Measure Bearing and Distance’ selection from Navigation Map page menu. The bearing
and distance tool displays a dashed Measurement Line and a Measure Pointer to aid in graphically identifying
points with which to measure. Lat/Long, distance and elevation data for the Measure Pointer is provided in a
window at the top of the navigation map.
Measuring bearing and distance between any two points:
1) Press the MENU Key (with the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page displayed).
EIS
2) Highlight the ‘Measure Bearing/Distance’ field.
3) Press the ENT Key. A Measure Pointer is displayed on the map at the aircraft’s present position.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Move the Joystick to place the reference pointer at the desired location. The bearing and distance are displayed
at the top of the map. Elevation at the current pointer position is also displayed. Pressing the ENT Key changes
the starting point for measuring.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) To exit the Measure Bearing/Distance option, push the Joystick; or select ‘Stop Measuring’ from the ‘Page
Menu’ Window and press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Measurement
Information
Pointer Lat/Long
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Measurement Line
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 5-12 Navigation Map - Measuring Bearing and Distance
142
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TOPOGRAPHY
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
All navigation maps can display various shades of topography colors representing land elevation, similar
to aviation sectional charts. Topographic data can be displayed or removed as described in the following
procedures. Topographic data can also be displayed on the selectable VSD Inset at the bottom of the Navigation
Map Page.
Navigation Map
Topographic Data
EIS
Navigation Map
Black Background
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
TOPO Off
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Topographic Data
on VSD Inset
TOPO On
Figure 5-13 Navigation Map - Topographic Data
Displaying/removing topographic data on all MFD pages displaying navigation maps:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the Map Opt Softkey.
2) Press the TER Softkey until ‘Topo’ is shown on the softkey to display topographic data.
3) Press the TER Softkey until ‘Off’ is shown on the softkey to remove topographic data from the navigation map.
When topographic data is removed from the page, all navigation data is presented on a black background.
AFCS
Displaying/removing topographic data on the PFD Map:
1) Press the Map/HSI Softkey .
2) Press the Topo Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Press the Topo Softkey again to remove topographic data from the PFD Map. When topographic data is
removed from the PFD Map, all navigation data is presented on a black background.
APPENDICES
Absolute Terrain On
Terrain Off
INDEX
Figure 5-14 PFD Inset Map - Terrain Data
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
143
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Displaying/removing topographic data using the Navigation Map Page Menu:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
2) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Map Settings’ Window is displayed.
1) Press the MENU Key with the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Settings’
option.
3) Select the ‘Map’ Group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘Terrain Display’ Field.
EIS
6) Select ‘Topo’ or ‘Off’.
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Selecting a topographical data range (Terrain Display):
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The topographic data range is the maximum map range on which topographic data is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ Group.
1) Press the MENU Key with the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Settings’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Map Settings’ Window is displayed.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘Terrain Display’ range field. Ranges are from 1 nm to 1000 nm.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
6) To change the Terrain Display range setting, turn the small FMS Knob to display the range list.
7) Select the desired range using the small FMS Knob.
8) Press the ENT Key.
9) Press the FMS Knob to return to the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
In addition, the Navigation Map can display a topographic scale (located in the lower right hand side of the
map) showing a scale of the terrain elevation and minimum/maximum displayed elevations.
APPENDICES
Maximum Displayed Elevation
Minimum Displayed Elevation
INDEX
Figure 5-15 Navigation Map - TOPO SCALE
144
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Displaying/removing the topographic scale (Topo Scale):
1) Press the MENU Key with the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Settings’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Map Settings’ Window is displayed.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Select the ‘Map’ Group and select the ENT Key.
4) Highlight the ‘Topo Scale’ Field.
5) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
6) Press the FMS Knob to return to the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
EIS
MAP SYMBOLS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
This section discusses the types of land and aviation symbols that can be displayed. Each listed type of symbol
can be turned on or off, and the maximum range to display each symbol can be set. The decluttering of the
symbols from the map using the Detail Softkey is also discussed.
LAND SYMBOLS
The following items are configured on the land menu:
Symbol
User Waypoint
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Land Symbols
Default
Maximum
Range (nm) Range (nm)
25
40
Highways and Roads
400
US Highway (National Highway)
15
150
State Highway (Local Highway)
2.5
100
4
25
Railroads (RAILROAD)
7.5
25
Large City (> 200,000)
100
1000
Medium City (> 50,000)
Small City (> 5,000)
50
25
400
100
State/Province
400
1000
River/Lake
75
100
Latitude/Longitude (LAT/LON)
1
1000
Local Road (Local Road)
N/A
INDEX
50
APPENDICES
International Highway (Freeway)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
400
AFCS
50
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Interstate Highway (Freeway)
Table 5-3 Land Symbol Information
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
145
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
AVIATION SYMBOLS
The following items are configured on the aviation menu:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Aviation Symbols
Symbol
150
1.5
5
7.5
150
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Missed Approach Preview On/Off (Missed APR)
N/A
N/A
Intersection (INT)
25
40
Non-directional Beacon (NDB)
25
50
VOR
50
250
N/A
N/A
Visual Reporting Point (VRP)
25
1000
Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR)
250
1000
VNAV Constraints
1000
1000
N/A
N/A
EIS
25
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Large Airport (Longest Runway ≥ 8100 ft)
Medium Airport (8100 ft > Longest Runway ≥ 5000 ft)
Small Airport (Longest Runway < 5000 ft)
(Medium Airport if it has a tower frequency)
Taxiways (SafeTaxi)
Default
Maximum
Range (nm) Range (nm)
100
1000
50
400
See Additional Features
Runway Extension
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
VOR Compass Rose On/Off
N/A
N/A
(VNAV Constraints) Show All (show all constraints within
flight plan if VNAV Constraints are ‘On’ above)
N/A
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Table 5-4 Aviation Symbol Information
146
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AIRSPACE SYMBOLS
The following items are configured on the airspace menu:
Symbol
Smart Airspace On/Off
Airspace Altitude Labels (Airspace ALT LBL) On/Off
N/A
Default
Maximum
Range (nm) Range (nm)
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Class D Airspace Altitude Label (ceiling)
N/A
N/A
Class B Airspace/TMA (CLASS B/TMA)
50
150
Class C Airspace/TCA (CLASS C/TCA)
50
100
Class D Airspace (CLASS D)
10
100
Alert/Prohibited/Restricted/Warning Areas (RESTRICTED)
50
100
Military Operations Area [MOA(MILITARY)]
50
250
Other/Air Defense Interdiction Zone (OTHER/ADIZ)
50
250
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Class C Airspace Altitude Label (ceiling/floor)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
N/A
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
N/A
EIS
Class B Airspace Altitude Label (ceiling/floor)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Airspace Symbols
AFCS
Table 5-5 Airspace Symbol Information
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
147
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYMBOL SETUP
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
All navigation maps can display land, aviation and airspace symbols. Symbol types (e.g. runway extensions,
railroads) can be removed individually. The range sets the maximum range at which items appear on the
display. For example, enabling “Runway Extension” displays a dashed line on the map extending from each
runway of an airport in the flight plan when the range is set at or below the value of the map settings option.
Setting up the ‘Land’, ‘Aviation’ or ‘Airspace’ group items:
1) Press the MENU Key on the MFD with the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the
‘Map Settings’ option.
EIS
2) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Map Settings’ Window is displayed.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired group.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor flashes on the first field.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the desired option.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired setting (e.g. On/Off or maximum range).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
7) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option and move the cursor to the next item.
8) Repeat steps 5-7 as necessary.
9) Press the FMS Knob to return to the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
MAP DECLUTTER
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The declutter feature allows the pilot to progressively step through four levels of removing map information.
The declutter level is displayed in the Detail Softkey and next to the Declutter Menu Option.
Decluttering the map on the MFD:
AFCS
Press the Detail Softkey with the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page displayed. The current declutter level is shown.
With each softkey press, another level of map information is removed.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Select ‘Declutter’. The current declutter level is shown.
INDEX
APPENDICES
3) Press the ENT Key.
148
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Decluttering the PFD Map:
1) Press the Map/HSI Softkey.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the Detail Softkey. The current declutter level is shown. With each selection, another level of map
information is removed.
Table 5-4 lists the items that are decluttered at each map detail level. The ‘X’ represents map items
decluttered for each level of detail.
Item
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Detail 1
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Detail 2
EIS
Data Link Radar Precipitation
Data Link Lightning
Graphical METARs
Airports
Safe Taxi
Runway Labels
TFRs
Restricted
MOA (Military)
Intersections
NDBs
VORs
VRPs
User Waypoints
Latitude/Longitude Grid
NAVAIDs (does not declutter if used to define airway)
Intersections (does not declutter if used to define airway)
Class B Airspaces/TMA
Class C Airspaces/TCA
Class D Airspaces
Other Airspaces/ADIZ
Obstacles
Cities
Roads
Railroads
State/Province Boundaries
Detail 3
Table 5-6 Navigation Map Items Decluttered for each Detail Level
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
149
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
AIRWAYS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
This airways discussion is based upon the North American airway structure. The airway structure in places
other than North America vary by location, etc. and are not discussed in this book. Low Altitude Airways
(Victor Airways or T-Routes) start 1,200 feet above ground level (AGL) and extend up to 18,000 feet mean sea
level (MSL). Low Altitude Airways are designated with a “V” or a “T” before the airway number.
High Altitude Airways (Jet Routes or Q-Routes) start at 18,000 feet MSL and extend upward to 45,000 feet
MSL. High Altitude Airways are designated with a “J” or a “Q” before the airway number.
EIS
Low Altitude Airways are drawn in gray (the same shade used for roads). High Altitude Airways are drawn
in green. When both types of airways are displayed, High Altitude Airways are drawn on top of Low Altitude
Airways.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
When airways are selected for display on the map, the airway waypoints (VORs, NDBs and Intersections) are
also displayed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
High Altitude
Airway
(Jet Route)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Low Altitude
Airway
(Victor Airway)
Low Altitude
Airway
(T-Route)
AFCS
High Altitude
Airway
(Q-Route)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-16 Airways on MFD Navigation Page
INDEX
APPENDICES
Airways may be displayed on the map at the pilot’s discretion using either a combination of AWY Softkey
presses, or menu selections using the MENU Key from the Navigation Map Page. The Airway range can also be
programmed to only display Airways on the MFD when the map range is at or below a specific number.
150
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Displaying/removing airways:
1) Press the Map Opt Softkey.
2) Press the AWY Softkey. Both High and Low Altitude Airways are displayed (AWY On).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the softkey again to display Low Altitude Airways only (AWY LO).
4) Press the softkey again to display High Altitude Airways only (AWY HI).
5) Press the softkey again to remove High Altitude Airways. No airways are displayed (AWY Off).
Or:
EIS
1) Press the MENU Key with the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Settings’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Map Settings’ Window is displayed.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Airways’ Group, and press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Low ALT Airways’ On/Off field.
5) Turn the FMS Knob to select ‘Off’ or ‘On’.
6) Press the FMS Knob to return to the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The airway range is the maximum map range on which airways are displayed.
Selecting an airway range (Low ALT Airways or High ALT Airways):
1) Press the MENU Key with the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Settings’ option.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Map Settings’ Window is displayed.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Airways’ Group, and press the ENT Key.
4) Highlight the ‘Low ALT Airways’ or ‘High ALT Airways’ range field.
5) To change the range setting, turn the small FMS Knob to display the range list.
AFCS
6) Select the desired range using the small FMS Knob.
7) Press the ENT Key.
8) Press the FMS Knob to return to the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
Airways Symbols
Symbol
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The following items are configured on the airways menu:
Default
Maximum
Range (nm) Range (nm)
50
100
High Altitude Airways (J Routes and Q Routes)
50
100
APPENDICES
Low Altitude Airways (V Routes and T Routes)
Table 5-7 Airways Symbol Information
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
151
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL NAVIGATION MAP ITEMS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Setting up additional ‘Map’ group items:
Navigation maps can display some additional items. These items (e.g. track vector, wind vector, fuel range
ring, SVT field of view, and selected altitude intercept arc) can be displayed/removed individually.
1) Press the MENU Key with the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Settings’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Map Settings’ Window is displayed.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Map’ Group.
EIS
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor flashes on the first field.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the desired option.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
Or:
If it is a data field, use the FMS Knob to select the range or time value.
7) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option and move the cursor to the next item.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
8) Repeat steps 5-7 as necessary.
9) Press the FMS Knob to return to the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
TRACK VECTOR
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The map can display a track vector that is useful in minimizing track angle error. The track vector is a solid
cyan line segment extended to a predicted location. The track vector look-ahead time is selectable (30 sec, 60
sec (default), 2 min, 5 min, 10 min, 20 min) and determines the length of the track vector. The track vector
shows up to 90 degrees of a turn for the 30 and 60 second time settings. It is always a straight line for the 2
min, 5 min, 10 min and 20 min settings.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Track Vector
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 5-17 Navigation Map -Track Vector
152
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
WIND VECTOR
Wind Direction
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The map displays a wind vector arrow in the upper right-hand portion of the screen. Wind vector
information is displayed as a white arrow pointing in the direction in which the wind is moving for wind
speeds greater than or equal to 1 kt.
Wind Speed
Figure 5-18 Navigation Map - Wind Vector
EIS
NOTE: The wind vector is not displayed until the aircraft is moving. It is not displayed on the Waypoint
Information pages.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FUEL RANGE RING
Time to Reserve Fuel
Range to Reserve Fuel
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The map can display a fuel range ring (Fuel Range RSV) which shows the remaining flight distance. A dashed
green circle indicates the selected range to reserve fuel. A solid green circle indicates the total endurance
range. If only reserve fuel remains, the range is indicated by a solid amber circle.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Total Endurance Range
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-19 Navigation Map - Fuel Range Ring
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
153
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FIELD OF VIEW (SVT)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The map can display the boundaries of the PFD Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT) lateral field of view. The
field of view is shown as two dashed lines forming a V shape in front of the aircraft symbol on the map. This
is only available if SVT is installed on the aircraft.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Lateral Field
of View
Boundaries
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-20 Navigation Map - Field of View
SELECTED ALTITUDE INTERCEPT ARC
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The map can display the location along the current track where the aircraft will intercept the selected
altitude (Select ALT Arc). The location will be shown as a cyan arc when the aircraft is actually climbing or
descending.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Selected
Altitude
Intercept Arc
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 5-21 Navigation Map - Range to Altitude Arc
154
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5.3 WAYPOINTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Waypoints are predetermined geographical positions (internal database) or pilot-entered positions, and are
used for all phases of flight planning and navigation.
Communication and navigation frequencies can be tuned “automatically” from various Waypoint Information
(WPT) pages, Nearest (NRST) pages, and the Nearest Airports Window (on PFD). This auto-tuning feature
simplifies frequency entry over manual tuning. Refer to the Audio Panel and CNS section for details on autotuning.
City Entry Field
Facility
Entry Field
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Identifier Entry Field
EIS
Waypoints can be selected by entering the ICAO identifier, entering the name of the facility, or by entering
the city name. See the System Overview section for detailed instructions on entering data in the system. As a
waypoint identifier, facility name, or location is entered, the Spell’N’Find feature scrolls through the database,
displaying those waypoints matching the characters which have been entered to that point. A direct-to navigation
leg to the selected waypoint can be initiated by pressing the Direct-to Key on any of the waypoint pages.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
- Waypoint Identifier
- Type (symbol)
- Facility Name
- City
Entered Waypoint on
Map
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Map Area Showing
Entered Waypoint
Waypoint Location
AFCS
Figure 5-22 Waypoint Information Window
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
155
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
If duplicate entries exist for the entered facility name or location, additional entries may be viewed by continuing
to turn the small FMS Knob during the selection process. If duplicate entries exist for an identifier, a ‘Duplicate
Waypoints’ Window is displayed when the ENT Key is pressed.
Identifier with
Duplicates
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Duplicate
Waypoints
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Duplicate Message
Figure 5-23 Waypoint Information Window - Duplicate Identifier
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AIRPORTS
NOTE: ‘North Up’ orientation on the Airport Information Page cannot be changed; the pilot needs to be
aware of proper orientation if the Navigation Map orientation is different from the Airport Information Page
Map.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
The ‘Airport Information’ Page is the first page in ‘WPT’ page group and allows the pilot to view airport
information, load frequencies (COM, NAV, and lighting), review runways, and review instrument procedures
that may be involved in the flight plan. See the Audio Panel and CNS Section for more information on loading
frequencies (auto-tuning). After engine startup, the ‘Airport Information Page’ defaults to the airport where the
aircraft is located. After a flight plan has been loaded, it defaults to the destination airport. On a flight plan with
multiple airports, it defaults to the airport which is the current active waypoint.
156
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
In addition to displaying a map of the currently selected airport and surrounding area, the Airport Information
Page displays airport information in three boxes labeled ‘Airport’, ‘Runways’, and ‘Frequencies’. For airports
with multiple runways, information for each runway is available. This information is viewed on the ‘Airport
Information’ Page by pressing the Info softkey until ‘1’ is displayed.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Airport Information
- ID/Facility/City
- Usage Type/Region
- Lat/Long/Elev
- Fuel Available
- Time Zone (UTC Offset)
Navigation Map
Showing Selected
Airport
EIS
Runway Information
- Designation
- Length/Width/Surface
- Lighting Available
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
COM/NAV Freq. Info.
- Identification
- Frequency
- Availability
- Additional Information
Airport/Runway
Diagram
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-24 Airport Information Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The following descriptions and abbreviations are used on the Airport Information Page:
• Usage type: Public, Military, Private, or Heliport
• Runway surface type: Hard, Turf, Sealed, Gravel, Dirt, Soft, Unknown, or Water
• Runway lighting type: No Lights, Part Time, Full Time, Unknown, or PCL Freq (for pilot-controlled lighting)
AFCS
• COM Availability: TX (transmit only), RX (receive only), PT (part time), i (additional information available)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
157
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Airport
Information
Airport Directory
Information
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
- ID/Facility/City
- Usage Type/
Region
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-25 Airport Directory Page Example
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The airport directory information is viewed on the ‘Airport Directory’ Page by pressing the Info Softkey until ‘2’ is
displayed. The following are types of airport directory information shown (if available) on the ‘Airport Directory’ Page:
158
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Airport: Identifier, Site Number, Name, City, State
Traffic Pattern Altitudes (TPA): Aircraft Class/Altitude
Runway: Headings, Length, Width, Obstructions, Surface
Phones: Phone/Fax Numbers
Weather: Service Type, Frequency, Phone Number
Obstructions: General Airport Obstructions
Hours: Facility Hours, Light Hours, Tower Hours, Beacon Hours
Flight Service Station (FSS): FSS Name, Phone Numbers
Special Operations at Airport
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Location: Sectional, Magnetic Variation
Instrument Approaches: Published Approach, Freq.
Services Available: Category, Specific Service
Frequencies: Type/Frequency
NAVAIDS: Type, Identifier, Frequency, Radial, Distance
Notes: Airport Notes
Transportation: Ground Transportation Type Available
Noise: Noise Abatement Procedures
Pilot Controlled Lighting: High/Med/Low Clicks/Second
Approach: Approach Facility Name, Frequency, Frequency Parameter
Charts: Low Altitude Chart Number
FBO: Type, Frequencies, Services, Fees, Fuel, Credit Cards, Phone/Fax Numbers
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Selecting an airport for review by identifier, facility name, or location:
1) From the ‘WPT - Airport Information’ Page (Info 1 Softkey), press the FMS Knob.
2) Use the FMS Knobs and enter an identifier, facility name, or location.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the ENT Key.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
Selecting a runway:
1) With the ‘WPT - Airport Information’ Page (Info 1 Softkey) displayed, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
EIS
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor in the ‘Runways’ Box, on the runway designator.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the desired runway (if more than one) for the selected airport.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) To remove the flashing cursor, press the FMS Knob.
Viewing a destination airport:
From the ‘WPT - Airport Information’ Page (Info 1 Softkey) press the MENU Key. Select ‘View Destination
Airport’. The Destination Airport is displayed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The airport ‘Frequencies’ Box uses the descriptions and abbreviations listed in the following table:
Navigation Frequencies
ILS
LOC
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Communication Frequencies
Approach * Control
Pre-Taxi
Arrival *
CTA *
Radar
ASOS
Departure * Ramp
ATIS
Gate
Terminal *
AWOS
Ground
TMA *
Center
Helicopter
Tower
Class B *
Multicom
TRSA *
Class C *
Other
Unicom
Clearance
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
* May include Additional Information
Table 5-8 Airport Frequency Abbreviations
APPENDICES
A departure, arrival, or approach can be loaded using the softkeys on the Airport Information Page. See the
Procedures section for details. METARs or TAFs applicable to the selected airport can be selected for display (see
the Hazard Avoidance section for details about weather).
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
159
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The system provides a Nearest Softkey on the PFD, which gives the pilot quick access to nearest airport
information (very useful if an immediate landing is required). The ‘Nearest Airports’ Window displays a list of
up to 25 of the nearest airports (three entries can be displayed at one time). If there are more than three they
are displayed in a scrollable list. If there are no nearest airports available, “None Within 200nm” is displayed.
Bearing/Distance to Airport
Airport Identifier/
Type
Approach Available
Length of Longest
Runway
EIS
COM Freq. Info.
- Identification
- Frequency
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Additional Airports
(within 200 nm)
Nearest Softkey
Figure 5-26 Nearest Airports Window on PFD
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Pressing the ENT Key while the Nearest Airports Window is shown displays the PFD ‘Airport Information’
Window for the highlighted airport. Pressing the ENT Key again returns to the ‘Nearest Airports’ Window with
the cursor on the next airport in the list. Continued presses of the ENT Key sequences through the information
pages for all airports in the Nearest Airports list.
AFCS
Airport Information
- ID/Type/City
- Facility
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Airport Information
- Usage/Time/Elev
- Region
Airport Information
- Lat/Long
APPENDICES
Figure 5-27 Airport Information Window on PFD
Viewing information for a nearest airport on the PFD:
1) Press the Nearest Softkey to display the ‘Nearest Airports’ Window.
2) Highlight the airport identifier with the FMS Knob and press the ENT Key to display the ‘Airport Information’ Window.
INDEX
3) To return to the ‘Nearest Airports’ Window press the ENT Key (with the cursor on ‘BACK’) or press the CLR Key.
The cursor is now on the next airport in the nearest airports list. (Repeatedly pressing the ENT Key moves through
the airport list, alternating between the ‘Nearest Airports’ Window and the ‘Airport Information’ Window.)
4) Press the CLR Key or the Nearest Softkey to close the PFD ‘Nearest Airports’ Window.
160
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The Nearest Airports Page on the MFD is first in the group of NRST pages because of its potential use in
the event of an in-flight emergency. In addition to displaying a map of the currently selected airport and
surrounding area, the page displays nearest airport information in five boxes labeled ‘Nearest Airports’,
‘Information’, ‘Runways’, ‘Frequencies’, and ‘Approaches’.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The selected airport is indicated by a white arrow, and a dashed white line is drawn on the navigation map
from the aircraft position to the nearest airport. Up to five nearest airports, one runway, up to three frequencies,
and up to four approaches are visible at one time. If there are more than can be shown, each list can be scrolled.
If there are no items for display in a boxed area, text indicating that fact is displayed. The currently selected
airport remains in the list until it is unselected.
EIS
Viewing information for a nearest airport on the MFD:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘NRST’ page group.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Nearest Airports’ Page (it is the first page of the group, so it may already
be selected). If there are no Nearest Airports available, ‘None Within 200nm’ is displayed.
3) Press the APT Softkey; or press the FMS Knob; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select Airport Window’ and press the
ENT Key. The cursor is placed in the ‘Nearest Airports’ Box. The first airport in the nearest airports list is highlighted.
4) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired airport. (Pressing the ENT Key also moves to the next airport.)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Viewing runway information for a specific airport:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) With the ‘NRST - Nearest Airports’ Page displayed, press the RNWY Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight
‘Select Runway Window’; and press the ENT Key. The cursor is placed in the ‘Runways’ Box.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired runway.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
See the Audio Panel & CNS Section for frequency selection and the Procedures section for approaches.
AFCS
Nearest Airports
- ID/Type
- Bearing/Distance
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Nearest Airport
Airport Information
- Facility/City/Elevation
APPENDICES
Runway Information
- Designation/Surface
- Length/Width
COM/NAV Freq. Info.
- Identification
- Frequency
Navigation Map
Showing Nearest
Airport
Window Selection
Softkeys
Figure 5-28 Nearest Airport Page
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
INDEX
Approaches Available
LD APR Softkey (only
available if an approach is
highlighted)
161
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The ‘Nearest Airport’ Box on the System Setup Page defines the minimum runway length and surface type
used when determining the 25 nearest airports to display on the MFD Nearest Airports Page. A minimum
runway length and/or surface type can be entered to prevent airports with small runways or runways that are
not appropriately surfaced from being displayed. Default settings are 3000 feet (or meters) for runway length
and “Hard Only” for runway surface type.
Selecting nearest airport surface and minimum runway length matching criteria:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - System Setup 1’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
EIS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the runway surface field in the ‘Nearest Airport’ Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired runway option (Any, Hard Only, Hard/Soft, Water).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) Press the ENT Key. The cursor moves to the ‘Minimum Length’ Field in the ‘Nearest Airport’ Box.
6) Use the FMS Knob to enter the minimum runway length (zero to 25,000 feet) and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
7) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
162
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
INTERSECTIONS
NOTE: The VOR displayed on the Intersection Information Page is the nearest VOR, not necessarily the VOR
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
used to define the intersection.
The Intersection Information Page is used to view information about intersections. In addition to displaying
a map of the currently selected intersection and surrounding area, the Intersection Information Page displays
intersection information in three boxes labeled ‘Intersection’, ‘Information’, and ‘Nearest VOR’.
EIS
Intersection Identifier
Navigation Map
Showing Selected
Intersection
Intersection Info
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
- Region
- Lat/Long
Nearest VOR Info
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
- Identifier/Type (symbol)
- Radial to VOR
- Distance to VOR
Selected Intersection
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-29 Intersection Information Page
AFCS
Selecting an intersection:
1) With the ‘WPT - Intersection Information’ Page displayed, enter an identifier in the ‘Intersection’ Box.
2) Press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
1) With the ‘NRST - Nearest Intersections’ Page displayed, press the FMS Knob.
APPENDICES
2) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the ‘Nearest INT’ Box.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
163
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
The Nearest Intersections Page can be used to quickly find an intersection close to the flight path. In addition
to displaying a map of the surrounding area, the page displays information for up to 25 nearest intersections in
three boxes labeled ‘Nearest INT’, ‘Information’, and ‘Reference VOR’.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The selected intersection is indicated by a white arrow. Up to 12 intersections are visible at a time. If there
are more than can be shown, the list can be scrolled. If there are no items for display, text indicating that fact
is displayed.
EIS
NOTE: The list only includes waypoints that are within 200 nm.
Intersection Information
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Navigation Map
Showing Nearest
Intersection
- Identifier/Symbol
- Bearing/Distance to
intersection from
aircraft position
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Nearest
Intersection
Intersection Lat/Long
Reference VOR Info
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- Identifier/Type (symbol)
- VOR Frequency
- Bearing/Distance to VOR
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 5-30 Nearest Intersections Page
164
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NDBS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The NDB Information Page is used to view information about NDBs. In addition to displaying a map of
the currently selected NDB and surrounding area, the page displays NDB information in four boxes labeled
‘NDB’, ‘Information’, ‘Frequency’, and ‘Nearest Airport’.
NDB Identifier/Type
- Facility Name
- Nearest City
Navigation Map
Showing Selected
NDB
EIS
NDB Information
- Type
- Region
- Lat/Long
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NDB Frequency
Selected NDB
Nearest Airport Info
- Identifier/Type (symbol)
- Bearing/Distance to
Airport
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-31 NDB Information Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NOTE: Compass locator (LOM, LMM): a low power, low or medium frequency radio beacon installed in
conjunction with the instrument landing system. When LOM is used, the locator is at the Outer Marker;
when LMM is used, the locator is at the Middle Marker.
AFCS
Selecting an NDB:
1) With the ‘WPT - NDB Information’ Page displayed, enter an identifier, the name of the NDB, or the city in which
it’s located in the ‘NDB’ Box.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the ENT Key.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
1) With the ‘NRST - Nearest NDB’ Page displayed, press the FMS Knob.
APPENDICES
2) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the ‘Nearest NDB’ Box.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
165
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
The Nearest NDB Page can be used to quickly find an NDB close to the flight path. In addition to displaying
a map of the surrounding area, the page displays information for up to 25 nearest NDBs in three boxes labeled
‘Nearest NDB’, ‘Information’, and ‘Frequency’.
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A white arrow before the NDB identifier indicates the selected NDB. Up to 12 NDBs are visible at a time. If
there are more than can be shown, each list can be scrolled. The list only includes waypoints that are within
200nm. If there are no NDBs in the list, text indicating that there are no nearest NDBs is displayed. If there are
no nearest NDBs in the list, the information and frequency fields are dashed.
NDB Identifier/Symbol
Navigation Map
Showing Selected
NDB
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
- Bearing/Distance to
NDB from aircraft
position
NDB Information
- Facility Name/City
- Type
- Lat/Long
Nearest NDB
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NDB Frequency
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 5-32 Nearest NDB Page
166
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
VORS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The VOR Information Page can be used to view information about VOR and ILS navigation signals, or to
quickly auto-tune a VOR or ILS frequency. Localizer information cannot be viewed on the VOR Information
Page. If a VOR station is combined with a TACAN station it is listed as a VORTAC on the VOR Information
Page and if it includes only DME, it is displayed as VOR-DME.
In addition to displaying a map of the currently selected VOR and surrounding area, the VOR Information
Page displays VOR information in four boxes labeled ‘VOR’, ‘Information’, ‘Frequency’, and ‘Nearest Airport’.
EIS
VOR Identifier/Type
- Facility Name
- Nearest City
Navigation Map
Showing
Selected VOR
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
VOR Information
- Class/Magnetic Variation
- Region
- Lat/Long
VOR Frequency
Selected VOR
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Nearest Airport Info
- Identifier/Type (symbol)
- Bearing/Distance to
Airport
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-33 VOR Information Page
The VOR classes used in the VOR information box are: Low Altitude, High Altitude, and Terminal.
AFCS
Selecting a VOR:
1) With the ‘WPT - VOR Information’ Page displayed, enter an identifier, the name of the VOR, or the city in which
it’s located in the ‘VOR’ Box.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the ENT Key.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
APPENDICES
1) With the ‘NRST - Nearest VOR’ Page displayed, press the FMS Knob or press the VOR Softkey.
2) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the ‘Nearest VOR’ Box.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
1) With the ‘NRST - Nearest VOR’ Page displayed, press the MENU Key.
INDEX
2) Highlight ‘Select VOR Window’, and press the ENT Key.
3) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the ‘Nearest VOR’ Box.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
167
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Nearest VOR Page can be used to quickly find a VOR station close to the aircraft. Also, a NAV
frequency from a selected VOR station can be loaded from the Nearest VOR Page. In addition to displaying
a map of the surrounding area, the Nearest VOR Page displays information for up to 25 nearest VOR stations
in three boxes labeled ‘Nearest VOR’, ‘Information’, and ‘Frequency’. The list only includes waypoints that
are within 200 nm.
EIS
A white arrow before the VOR identifier indicates the selected VOR. Up to 12 VORs are visible at a time.
If there are more than can be shown, each list can be scrolled. If there are no VORs in the list, text indicating
that there are no nearest VORs is displayed. If there are no nearest VORs in the list, the information is dashed.
Navigation Map
Showing Nearest
VOR
VOR Identifier/Symbol
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
- Bearing/Distance to VOR
from aircraft position
VOR Information
Nearest VOR
- Facility Name/City
- Class/Magnetic Variation
- Lat/Long
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
VOR Frequency
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 5-34 Nearest VOR Page
168
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
VRPS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The VRP Information Page is used to view information about visual reporting points (VRPs). In addition to
displaying a map of the currently selected VRP and surrounding area, the VRP Information Page displays VRP
information in two boxes labeled ‘VRP’ and ‘Information’’.
VRP Identifier/Symbol
Navigation Map
Showing Selected VRP
- VRP Name
EIS
VRP Information
- Country
- Bearing/Distance to VRP
from aircraft position
- Lat/Long
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Selected VRP
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-35 VRP Information Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selecting a VRP:
1) With the ‘WPT - VRP Information’ Page displayed, enter the identifier or the name of the VRP in the ‘VRP’ Box.
2) Press the ENT Key.
AFCS
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) With the ‘NRST - Nearest VRP’ Page displayed, press the FMS Knob.
2) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the ‘Nearest VRP’ Box.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
169
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
The Nearest VRP Page can be used to quickly find a VRP close to the aircraft. In addition to displaying a
map of the surrounding area, the Nearest VRP Page displays information for up to 25 nearest VRPs in two
boxes labeled ‘Nearest VRP’ and ‘Information’. The list only includes VRPs that are within 200 nm.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A white arrow before the VRP identifier indicates the selected VRP. Up to 12 VRPs are visible at a time. If
there are more than can be shown, the list can be scrolled. If there are no VRPs in the list, text indicating
that there are no nearest VRPs is displayed. If there are no nearest VRPs in the list, the information is dashed.
VRP Identifier/Symbol
- Bearing/Distance to VRP
from aircraft position
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Navigation Map
Showing Nearest VRP
Nearest VRP
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
VRP Information
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- VRP Name
- Country
- Lat/Long
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 5-36 Nearest VRP Page
170
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
USER WAYPOINTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The system can create and store up to 1,000 user-defined waypoints. User waypoints can be created from
any map page (except PFD Maps, Aux-Trip Planning Page, or Procedure Pages) by selecting a position on the
map using the Joystick, or from the User Waypoint Information Page by referencing a bearing/distance from
an existing waypoint, bearings from two existing waypoints, or a latitude and longitude. Once a waypoint has
been created, it can be renamed, deleted, or moved. Temporary user waypoints are erased upon system power
down.
EIS
User Waypoint Info
Navigation Map
Showing Selected
User Waypoint
- Identifier
- Temporary/Normal
- Waypoint Type
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
User Wpt Comment
Reference Wpt/Info
- Identifier/Rad/Dist or
- Identifiers/Radials or
- Region/Lat/Long
Selected User
Waypoint
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
User Waypoint List
- Identifier
- Comment
# User Wpts Used
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-37 User Waypoint Information Page
Selecting a User Waypoint:
AFCS
1) With the ‘WPT - User WPT Information’ Page displayed, enter the name of the User Waypoint, or scroll to the
desired waypoint in the ‘User Waypoint List’ Box using the large FMS Knob.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the ENT Key.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
1) With the ‘NRST - Nearest User WPTS’ Page displayed, press the FMS Knob.
APPENDICES
2) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the ‘Nearest User’ Box.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
171
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Nearest User Wpt List
- Identifier
- Bearing/Distance from
aircraft position
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Navigation Map
Showing Selected
User Waypoint
User Waypoint Info
Selected User
Waypoint
- Comment
- Lat/Long
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Reference Wpt Info
- Identifier
- Radial/Distance
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-38 Nearest User Waypoint Page
CREATING USER WAYPOINTS
User waypoints can be created from the User Waypoint Information Page in the following ways:
Creating user waypoints from the User WPT Information Page:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the New Softkey, or press the MENU Key and select ‘Create New User Waypoint’.
2) Enter a user waypoint name (up to six characters).
3) Press the ENT Key. The current aircraft position is the default location of the new waypoint.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
4) If desired, define the type and location of the waypoint in one of the following ways:
Select “RAD/RAD” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the two reference waypoint
identifiers and radials into the ‘Reference Waypoints’ Box using the FMS Knobs.
Or:
Select “RAD/DIS” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the reference waypoint identifier,
the radial, and the distance into the ‘Reference Waypoints’ Box using the FMS Knobs.
Or:
Select “LAT/LON” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the latitude and longitude into
the ‘Information’ Box using the FMS Knobs.
APPENDICES
5) Press the ENT Key to accept the new waypoint.
6) If desired, change the storage method of the waypoint to temporary by moving the cursor to ‘Temporary’ and
pressing the ENT Key to check the box.
7) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
INDEX
Or:
1) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Enter a user waypoint name (up to six characters).
3) Press the ENT Key. The message ‘Are you sure you want to create the new user waypoint AAAAAA?’ is displayed.
172
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
4) With ‘YES’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
5) If desired, define the type and location of the waypoint in one of the following ways:
Select “RAD/RAD” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the two reference waypoint
identifiers and radials into the ‘Reference Waypoints’ Box using the FMS Knobs.
Or:
Select “RAD/DIS” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the reference waypoint identifier,
the radial, and the distance into the ‘Reference Waypoints’ Box using the FMS Knobs.
Or:
Select “LAT/LON” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the latitude and longitude into
the ‘Information’ Box using the FMS Knobs.
EIS
6) Press the ENT Key to accept the new waypoint.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
7) If desired, change the storage method of the waypoint to temporary by moving the cursor to ‘Temporary’ and
selecting the ENT Key to check the box.
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Creating user waypoints from the Navigation Map Page:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Push the Joystick on the MFD to activate the panning function and pan to the map location of the desired user waypoint.
2) Press the ENT Key. The ‘WPT - User WPT Information’ Page is displayed with the captured position.
NOTE: If the pointer has highlighted a map database feature, one of three things happens upon pressing
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
the ENT Key: 1) information about the selected feature is displayed instead of initiating a new waypoint,
2) a menu pops up allowing a choice between ‘Review Airspaces’ or ‘Create User Waypoint’, or 3) a new
waypoint is initiated with the default name being the selected map item.
3) Enter a user waypoint name (up to six characters).
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected name. The first reference waypoint box is highlighted.
AFCS
5) If desired, define the type and location of the waypoint in one of the following ways:
Select “RAD/RAD” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the two reference waypoint
identifiers and radials into the ‘Reference Waypoints’ Box using the FMS Knobs.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Or:
Select “RAD/DIS” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the reference waypoint identifier,
the radial, and the distance into the ‘Reference Waypoints’ Box using the FMS Knobs.
APPENDICES
Or:
Select “LAT/LON” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the latitude and longitude into
the ‘Information’ Box using the FMS Knobs..
6) Press the ENT Key to accept the new waypoint.
INDEX
7) If desired, change the storage method of the waypoint to temporary or normal by moving the cursor to
‘Temporary’ and selecting the ENT Key to check or uncheck the box.
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
9) Press the Go Back Softkey to return to the map page.
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
173
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
EDITING USER WAYPOINTS
Editing a user waypoint comment or location:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) With the ‘WPT - User WPT Information’ Page displayed, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Select a user waypoint in the ‘User Waypoint List’ Box, if required, and press the ENT Key.
3) Move the cursor to the desired field.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to make any changes.
EIS
5) Press the ENT Key to accept the changes.
6) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) With the ‘WPTS - User WPT Information’ Page displayed, highlight a user waypoint in the ‘User Waypoint List’
Box. Press the Rename Softkey, or press the MENU Key and select ‘Rename User Waypoint’.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) With ‘YES’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Renaming user waypoints:
1) With the ‘WPT - User WPT Information’ Page displayed, enter a waypoint name or select the waypoint in the
‘User Waypoint List’ Box, then press the ENT Key.
2) Enter a new name.
3) Press the ENT Key. The message ‘Do you want to rename the user waypoint AAAAAA to BBBBBB?’ is displayed.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Changing the location of an existing waypoint to the aircraft present position:
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Select ‘Use Present Position’.
AFCS
4) Press the ENT Key twice. The new waypoint’s location is saved.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
A system generated comment for a user waypoint incorporates the reference waypoint identifier, bearing,
and distance. If a system generated comment has been edited, a new comment can be generated.
Resetting the comment field to the system generated comment:
1) With the ‘WPT - User WPT Information’ Page displayed, enter a waypoint name or select the waypoint in the
‘User Waypoint List’ Box, then press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Select ‘Auto Comment’.
INDEX
4) Press the ENT Key. The generated comment is based on the reference point used to define the waypoint.
174
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The default type of user waypoint (normal or temporary) can be changed using the user waypoint
information page menu. Temporary user waypoints are automatically deleted upon the next power cycle.
Changing the user waypoint storage duration default setting:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) With the ‘WPT - User WPT Information’ Page displayed, press the MENU Key.
2) Move the cursor to select ‘Waypoint Setup’, and press the ENT Key.
3) Select ‘Normal’ or ‘Temporary’ as desired, and press the ENT Key.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor and return to the ‘WPT - User WPT Information’ Page.
EIS
DELETING USER WAYPOINTS
Deleting a single user waypoint:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) With the ‘WPT - User WPT Information’ Page displayed, highlight a User Waypoint in the ‘User Waypoint List’
Box, or enter a waypoint in the ‘User Waypoint’ Box.
2) Press the Delete Softkey or press the CLR Key. ‘YES’ is highlighted in the confirmation window.
3) Press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
1) With the ‘WPT - User WPT Information’ Page displayed, highlight a User Waypoint in the ‘User Waypoint List’
Box, or enter a waypoint in the ‘User Waypoint’ Box.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Select ‘Delete User Waypoint’.
4) Press the ENT Key twice to confirm the selection.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
AFCS
NOTE: The option to ‘Delete All User Waypoints’ is not available while the aircraft is in flight.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Deleting all user waypoints:
1) With the ‘WPT - User WPT Information’ Page displayed, highlight a User Waypoint in the ‘User Waypoint List’ Box.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Select ‘Delete All User Waypoints.’
APPENDICES
4) Press the ENT Key twice to confirm the selection.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
175
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5.4 AIRSPACES
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The system can display the following types of airspaces: Class B/TMA, Class C/TCA, Class D, Restricted, MOA
(Military), Other Airspace, Air Defense Identification Zone (ADIZ), and Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR). For
detailed information concerning TFRs, see the Hazard Avoidance Section.
MOA (Military)
Class B Airspace
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Restricted Area
Airspace Altitude Label
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Class D Airspace
Alert Area
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Class C Airspace
APPENDICES
ADIZ
Warning Area
INDEX
Figure 5-39 Airspaces
176
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Displaying and removing airspace altitude labels:
1) Press the MENU Key with the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Settings’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Map Settings’ Window is displayed.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Airspace’ Group, if necessary, and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘Airspace ALT LBL’ Field.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘On’ to display labels and ‘Off’ to remove labels.
6) Press the FMS Knob to return to the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
EIS
The Nearest Airspaces Page, Airspace Alerts Window, and Airspace Alerts on the PFD provide additional
information about airspaces and the location of the aircraft in relationship to them.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The Airspace Alerts Box (System Setup 1 Page) on the MFD allows the pilot to turn the controlled/special-use
airspace message alerts on or off. This does not affect the alerts listed on the Nearest Airspaces Page or the airspace
boundaries depicted on the Navigation Map Page. It simply turns on/off the warning provided when the aircraft
is approaching or near an airspace.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
An altitude buffer is also provided which “expands” the vertical range above or below an airspace. For example,
if the buffer is set at 500 feet, and the aircraft is more than 500 feet above/below an airspace, an alert message is
not generated, but if the aircraft is less than 500 feet above/below an airspace and projected to enter it, the pilot
is notified with an alert message. The default setting for the altitude buffer is 200 feet.
Changing the altitude buffer distance setting:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - System Setup 1’ Page (Setup 1 Softkey).
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Altitude Buffer’ Field in the ‘Airspace Alerts’ Box.
4) Use the FMS Knob to enter an altitude buffer value and press the ENT Key.
AFCS
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Turning an airspace alert on or off:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - System Setup 1’ Page (Setup 1 Softkey).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired field in the ‘Airspace Alerts’ Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to turn the airspace alert On or counterclockwise to turn the alert Off.
APPENDICES
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Map ranges for the airspace boundaries are selected from the ‘Airspace’ Group in the ‘Map Settings’ Window. See
Table 5-2 for the default and maximum ranges for each type of airspace and the symbol used to define the airspace area.
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
177
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Nearest Airspaces Page on the MFD can be used to quickly find airspaces close to the flight path. In addition, a
selected frequency associated with the airspace can be loaded from the Nearest Airspaces Page. In addition to displaying
a map of airspace boundaries and surrounding area, the Nearest Airspaces Page displays airspace information in four
boxes labeled ‘Airspace Alerts’, ‘Airspace Agency’, ‘Vertical Limits’, and ‘Frequencies’.
EIS
Airspace Alerts Info
- Name
- Proximity (Ahead, Inside,
Ahead < 2nm, Within 2nm)
- Time till Intercept (only if
Ahead or Ahead < 2nm)
Airspace 1
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Airspace 2
Airspace 3
Airspace/Agency Info
- Airspace Type
- Controlling Agency
Airspace Vertical Limits
- Ceiling
- Floor
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Associated Frequencies
- Type
- Availability/Info
- Frequency
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-40 Nearest Airspaces Page
Airspace alerts and associated frequencies are shown in scrollable lists on the Nearest Airspaces Page. The
Alerts and FREQ softkeys place the cursor in the respective list. The FREQ Softkey is enabled only if one or more
frequencies exist for a selected airspace.
Selecting and viewing an airspace alert with its associated information:
AFCS
1) Use the FMS Knob on the MFD to select the ‘NRST - Nearest Airspaces’ Page.
2) Press the Alerts Softkey; or press the FMS Knob; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select Alerts Window’, and
press the ENT Key. The cursor is placed in the ‘Airspace Alerts’ Box.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Select the desired airspace.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
APPENDICES
Pressing the PFD Alerts/Message Softkey displays the Alerts Window on the PFD. The following airspace alerts
are displayed in the Alerts Window:
INDEX
Message
INSIDE ARSPC – Inside airspace.
ARSPC AHEAD – Airspace ahead – less than
10 minutes.
ARSPC NEAR – Airspace near and ahead.
ARSPC NEAR – Airspace near – less than 2 nm.
Comments
The aircraft is inside the airspace.
Special use airspace is ahead of aircraft. The aircraft penetrates the airspace
within 10 minutes.
Special use airspace is near and ahead of the aircraft position.
Special use airspace is within 2 nm of the aircraft position.
Table 5-9 PFD Airspace Alert Messages
178
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Smart Airspace function de-emphasizes airspaces above or below the current aircraft altitude. The function
does not require the aircraft present position or flight path to enter the lateral boundaries of the airspace. If the
current aircraft altitude is within 1100 feet of the vertical boundaries of the airspace, the airspace boundary is
shown normally. If the current aircraft altitude is not within 1100 feet of the vertical boundaries of the airspace,
the airspace boundary is shown subdued.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Smart Airspace Off
Smart Airspace On
Figure 5-41 Smart Airspace
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Turning smart airspace on or off:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
2) Press the MENU Key, and press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Airspace’ Group and press the ENT Key.
AFCS
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Smart Airspace’ Field.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to turn smart airspace On or counterclockwise to turn smart airspace Off.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
6) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
179
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5.5 DIRECT-TO NAVIGATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Direct-to method of navigation, initiated by pressing the Direct-to Key, is quicker to use than a flight plan
when the desire is to navigate to a single point such as a nearby airport.
Once a direct-to is activated, the system establishes a point-to-point course line from the present position to the
selected direct-to destination. Course guidance is provided until the direct-to is replaced with a new direct-to or
flight plan, or cancelled.
EIS
A vertical navigation (VNV) direct-to creates a descent path (and provides guidance to stay on the path) from
the current altitude to a selected altitude at the direct-to waypoint. Vertical navigation is based on barometric
altitudes, not on GPS altitude, and is used for cruise and descent phases of flight.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The Direct To Window allows selection and activation of direct-to navigation. The Direct To Window displays
selected direct-to waypoint data on the PFD and the MFD.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Direct-to Point Info
- Identifier/Symbol/Region
- Facility Name
- City
VNV Constraints
- Altitude at Arrival
- Along Track Offset
Map of Selected Point
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Desired Course
Location of Destination
AFCS
- Bearing/Distance
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-42 Direct-to Window - MFD
180
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Direct-to Point Info
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
- Identifier/Symbol/City
- Facility Name
VNV Constraints
- Altitude at Arrival
- Along Track Offset
Direct-to Point Info
- Bearing/Distance
- Desired Course
EIS
Activation Command
Figure 5-43 Direct-to Window - PFD
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Any waypoint can be entered as a direct-to destination from the Direct To Window.
Entering a waypoint identifier, facility name, or city as a direct-to destination:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Press the Direct-to Key. The ‘Direct To’ Window is displayed (with the active flight plan waypoint as the default
selection or a blank waypoint field if no flight plan is active).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to begin entering a waypoint identifier (turning it counter-clockwise brings
up the waypoint selection submenu - press the CLR Key to remove it), or turn the large FMS Knob to select the
facility name, or city field and turn the small FMS Knob to begin entering a facility name or city. If duplicate
entries exist for the entered facility or city name, additional entries can be viewed by turning the small FMS
Knob during the selection process.
3) Press the ENT Key. ‘Activate?’ is highlighted.
4) Press the ENT Key to activate the direct-to.
AFCS
Any waypoint contained in the active flight plan can be selected as a direct-to waypoint from the Direct To
Window, the Active Flight Plan Page, or the Flight Plan Window.
Waypoint Submenu
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
- Flight Plan Waypoints
- Nearest Airports
- Recent Waypoints
- User Waypoints
APPENDICES
Figure 5-44 Waypoint Submenu
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
181
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Selecting an active flight plan waypoint as a direct-to destination:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
2) Turn the small FMS Knob counter-clockwise to display a list of flight plan waypoints (the FPL list is populated
only when navigating a flight plan).
1) While navigating an active flight plan, press the Direct-to Key. The ‘Direct To’ Window is displayed with the
active flight plan waypoint as the default selection.
3) Select the desired waypoint.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘Activate?’.
EIS
5) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
Or:
1) Select the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page on the MFD, or the ‘Flight Plan’ Window on the PFD.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Select the desired waypoint.
3) Press the Direct-to Key.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘Activate?’.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
Any Nearest, Recent or User waypoint can be selected as a direct-to destination in the Direct To Window.
Selecting a Nearest, Recent or User waypoint as a direct-to destination:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the Direct-to Key. The ‘Direct To’ Window is displayed (with the active flight plan destination as the
default selection or a blank destination if no flight plan is active).
2) Turn the small FMS Knob counter-clockwise to display a list of flight plan waypoints (the FPL list is populated
only when navigating a flight plan).
3) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to display the Nearest, Recent or User waypoints.
AFCS
4) Turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to select the desired waypoint.
5) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘Activate?’.
6) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The Direct To Window can be displayed from any page and allows selection and activation of direct-to navigation.
If the direct-to is initiated from any page except the WPT pages, the default waypoint is the active flight plan
waypoint (if a flight plan is active) or a blank waypoint field. Direct-to requests on any WPT page defaults to the
displayed waypoint.
APPENDICES
Selecting any waypoint as a direct-to destination:
1) Select the page or window containing the desired waypoint type and select the desired waypoint.
2) Press the Direct-to Key to display the ‘Direct To’ Window with the selected waypoint as the direct-to destination.
3) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘Activate?’.
INDEX
4) Press ENT again to activate the direct-to.
182
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Selecting a nearby airport as a direct-to destination:
1) Press the Nearest Softkey on the PFD; or turn the FMS Knob to display the ‘NRST - Nearest Airports ‘Page on
the MFD and press the FMS Knob.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Select the desired airport (the nearest one is already selected).
3) Press the Direct-to Key.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘Activate?’.
5) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
EIS
Direct-to destinations may also be selected by using the pointer on the navigation map pages. If no airport,
NAVAID, or user waypoint exists at the desired location, a temporary waypoint named ‘MAPWPT’ is automatically
created at the location of the map arrow.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Selecting a waypoint as a direct-to destination using the pointer:
1) From a navigation map page, push the Joystick to display the pointer.
2) Move the Joystick to place the pointer at the desired destination location.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) If the pointer is placed on an existing airport, NAVAID, or user waypoint, the waypoint name is highlighted.
4) Press the Direct-to Key to display the ‘Direct To’ Window with the selected point entered as the direct-to
destination.
5) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘Activate?’.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
6) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
Cancelling a Direct-to:
1) Press the Direct-to Key to display the ‘Direct To’ Window.
2) Press the MENU Key.
AFCS
3) With ‘Cancel Direct-To NAV’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. If a flight plan is still active, the system resumes
navigating the flight plan along the closest leg.
When navigating a direct-to, the system sets a direct great circle course to the selected destination. The course
to a destination can also be manually selected using the course field (‘Course’) on the Direct To Window.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Selecting a manual direct-to course:
1) Press the Direct-to Key. The ‘Direct To’ Window is displayed with the destination field highlighted.
2) Highlight the ‘Course’ Field.
APPENDICES
3) Enter the desired course.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘Activate?’.
5) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
183
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Reselecting the direct course from the current position:
1) Press the Direct-to Key. The ‘Direct To’ Window is displayed with the cursor flashing in the ‘Ident, Facility, City’ Box.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘Activate?’.
3) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
EIS
A direct-to with altitude constraints creates a descent path (and provides guidance to stay on the path) from the
aircraft’s current altitude to the altitude of the direct-to waypoint. The altitude is reached at the waypoint, or at the
specified distance along the flight path if an offset distance has been entered. All VNV altitudes prior to the directto destination are removed from the active flight plan upon successful activation of a direct-to destination that is
part of the active flight plan. All VNV altitudes following the direct-to waypoint are retained. See the section on
Vertical Navigation for more information regarding the use and purpose of VNV altitudes and offset distances.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Entering a VNV altitude and along-track offset for the waypoint:
1) Press the Direct-to Key to display the ‘Direct To’ Window.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor over the VNV altitude field.
3) Enter the desired altitude.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the altitude constraint; if the selected waypoint is an airport, an additional choice
is displayed. Turn the small FMS Knob to choose ‘MSL’ or ‘AGL’, and press the ENT Key to accept the altitude.
5) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now flashing in the VNV offset distance field.
6) Enter the desired along-track distance before the waypoint.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
7) Press the ENT Key. ‘Activate?’ is highlighted.
8) Press the ENT Key to activate.
Removing a VNV altitude constraint:
1) Press the Direct-to Key to display the ‘Direct To’ Window.
AFCS
2) Press the MENU Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) With ‘Clear Vertical Constraints’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
184
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5.6 FLIGHT PLANNING
Flight Plan Leg Type
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Flight planning on the system consists of building a flight plan by entering waypoints one at a time, adding
waypoints along airways, and inserting departures, airways, arrivals, or approaches as needed. The system allows
flight planning information to be entered from either the MFD or PFD. The flight plan is displayed on maps using
different line widths, colors, and types, based on the type of leg and the segment of the flight plan currently being
flown (departure, enroute, arrival, approach, or missed approach).
Symbol
EIS
Active Course Leg*
Active Heading Leg*
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Active Roll Steering Path*†
Course Leg in the current flight segment
Course Leg not in the current flight segment
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Heading Leg
Roll Steering Path †
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Future Roll Steering Path ‡
Turn Anticipation Arc
AFCS
* The active leg or path is the one currently being flown, and is shown in magenta.
† A roll steering path is a computed transition between two disconnected legs.
‡ A roll steering path in the flight plan that is beyond the next leg appears as a future roll steering path. When a future roll
steering path becomes the next leg in the flight plan, it appears as a roll steering path.
Table 5-10 Flight Plan Leg Symbols
INDEX
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
APPENDICES
190-02284-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Up to 99 flight plans with up to 100 waypoints each can be created and stored in memory. Upon power up,
the previously active flight plan is retained and automatically repopulated if the aircraft position is at the origin
airport and the aircraft is on the ground. If, however, the aircraft is not at the origin, on the ground, or if more
than 12 hours have passed since the last active flight plan modification, the previously active flight plan is not
retained. One flight plan can be activated at a time and becomes the active flight plan. The active flight plan
is overwritten when another flight plan is activated. When storing flight plans with an approach, departure,
or arrival, the system uses the waypoint information from the current database to define the waypoints. If the
database is changed or updated, the system automatically updates the information if the procedure has not been
modified. If an approach, departure, or arrival procedure is no longer available, the procedure is deleted from the
affected stored flight plan(s), and an alert is displayed (see Miscellaneous Messages in Appendix A) advising that
one or more stored flight plans need to be edited.
185
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Whenever an approach, departure, or arrival procedure is loaded into the active flight plan, a set of approach,
departure, or arrival waypoints is inserted into the flight plan along with a header line describing the instrument
procedure the pilot selected. The original enroute portion of the flight plan remains active (unless an instrument
procedure is activated) when the procedure is loaded.
When the database is updated, the airways need to be reloaded also. Each airway segment is reloaded from
the database given the entry waypoint, the airway identifier and the exit waypoint. This reloads the sequence of
waypoints between the entry and exit waypoints (the sequence may change when the database is updated). The
update of an airway can fail during this process. If that happens, the airway waypoints are changed to regular
(non-airway) flight plan waypoints, and an alert is displayed (see Miscellaneous Messages in Appendix A).
EIS
The following could cause the airway update to fail:
• Airway identifier, entry waypoint or exit waypoint not found in the new database.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Airway entry/exit waypoint is not an acceptable waypoint for the airway – either the waypoint is no longer on
the airway, or there is a new directional restriction that prevents it being used.
• Loading the new airway sequence would exceed the capacity of the flight plan.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT PLAN CREATION
There are three methods to create or modify a flight plan:
• Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD (create/modify the active flight plan)
• Flight Plan Window on the PFD (create/modify the active flight plan)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Flight Plan Catalog Page on the MFD (create/modify a stored flight plan)
Active FPL Waypoint List
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
- Comment
- Procedure Header
- Waypoint Identifier
- Airway Identifier
- Desired Track to Waypoint
- Distance to Waypoint
- Waypoint Altitude Constraint
Active Flight
Plan Leg
Vertical Navigation Profile
Turn Anticipation
Arc
- Active Vertical WPT Alt/ID
- Time to Top of Descent
- Vertical Speed Target
- Flight Path Angle
- Vertical Speed Target
- Vertical Deviation
APPENDICES
Non-Active,
Flight Plan Leg
INDEX
Figure 5-45 Active Flight Plan Page
186
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Active Flight Plan Comment
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Active Flight
Plan Leg
Active Flight Plan Waypoint List
- Waypoint ID
- Desired Track to Waypoint
- Distance to Waypoint
- Airway Identifier
EIS
Figure 5-46 Active Flight Plan Window on PFD
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Catalog Contents
- # Used
- # Empty
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Flight Plan List
- Comment
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selected
Flight Plan
Map
Selected FPL Info
AFCS
- Departure Waypoint
- Destination Waypoint
- Total Flight Plan Distance
- Enroute Safe Altitude
Figure 5-47 Flight Plan Catalog Page
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The active flight plan is listed on the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD, and in the Flight Plan Window
on the PFD. It is the flight plan to which the system is currently providing guidance, and is shown on the
navigation maps. Stored flight plans are listed on the Flight Plan Catalog Page on the MFD, and are available
for activation (becomes the active flight plan).
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
187
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Active flight plan progress can be displayed on the navigation map.
NOTE: ETE can be displayed as either HH+MM (ETE greater than 60 minutes) or MM:SS (ETE less than 60
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
minutes).
Displaying/removing the active flight plan progress on the navigation map:
1) Select the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
2) Press the Map Opt Softkey.
EIS
3) Press the Inset Softkey.
4) Press the FPL PROG Softkey to display the active flight plan progress.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) To remove the active flight plan progress from the navigation map, press the Off softkey.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Flight Plan
Progress
enabled
AFCS
Active Flight
Plan Leg
Figure 5-48 Flight Plan Progress on Navigation Map
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Creating an active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key. Press the small FMS Knob to activate the cursor (only on MFD).
2) Select the origin airport and runway.
APPENDICES
a) Highlight the field below the ‘Origin’ header to enter the origin airport identifier using the FMS Knob.
b) Use the FMS Knob or the waypoint submenu to enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the departure
waypoint.
c) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Set Runway’ Window is displayed with the ‘Runway’ Field highlighted.
d) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the runway, and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
e) Press the ENT Key again to add the origin airport/runway to the flight plan.
188
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
3) Repeat step number 2 for the destination airport and runway.
4) Select the enroute waypoints.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
a) Highlight the location to insert the waypoint using the FMS Knob (If the enroute header is selected, the
new waypoint is placed following the header. If an enroute waypoint or the dashes are selected, the new
waypoint will be placed ahead of the selected item).
b) Use the FMS Knob or the waypoint submenu to enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the waypoint.
The active flight plan is modified as each waypoint is entered.
5) Repeat step number 4 to enter each additional enroute waypoint.
EIS
6) When all waypoints have been entered, press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor (if required).
Creating a stored flight plan:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) From the MFD, press the FPL Key.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to display the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
3) Press the New Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Create New Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key to
display a blank flight plan for the first empty storage location.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Select the origin airport and runway.
a) Highlight the field below the ‘Origin’ header to enter the origin airport identifier using the FMS Knob.
b) Use the FMS Knob or the waypoint submenu to enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the departure
waypoint.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
c) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Set Runway’ Window is displayed with the ‘Runway’ Field highlighted.
d) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the runway, and press the ENT Key.
e) Press the ENT Key again to add the origin airport/runway to the flight plan.
5) Repeat step number 4 for the destination airport and runway.
AFCS
6) Select the enroute waypoints.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
a) Highlight the location to insert the waypoint using the FMS Knob (If the enroute header is selected, the
new waypoint is placed following the header. If an enroute waypoint or the dashes are selected, the new
waypoint will be placed ahead of the selected item.)
b) Use the FMS Knob or the waypoint submenu to enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the waypoint.
c) Press the ENT Key. The stored flight plan is modified as each waypoint is entered.
7) Repeat step number 6 to enter each additional enroute waypoint.
APPENDICES
8) When all waypoints have been entered, press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
189
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT PLAN IMPORT/EXPORT
Flight plans can be imported from an SD Card or exported to an SD Card from the Stored Flight Plan Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Importing a Flight Plan from an SD Card:
1) Insert the SD card containing the flight plan in the top card slot on the MFD.
2) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page on the MFD.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
4) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
EIS
5) Turn either FMS Knob to highlight an empty or existing flight plan.
6) Press the Import Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select “Import Flight Plan”, and press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
If an empty slot is selected, a list of the available flight plans on the SD card will be displayed.
Or:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
If an existing flight plan is selected, an ‘Overwrite existing flight plan? OK or CANCEL’ prompt is displayed.
Press the ENT Key to choose to overwrite the selected flight plan and see the list of available flight plans on the
SD card. If overwriting the existing flight plan is not desired, select ‘CANCEL’ using the FMS Knob, press the
ENT Key, select another flight plan slot, and press the Import Softkey again.
7) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan for importing.
8) Press the ENT Key to initiate the import.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
9) Press the ENT Key again to confirm the import.
NOTE: If the imported flight plan contains a waypoint with a name that duplicates the name of a waypoint
AFCS
already stored on the system, the system compares the coordinates of the imported waypoint with those of
the existing waypoint. If the coordinates are different, the imported waypoint is automatically renamed by
adding characters to the end of the name.
Exporting a Flight Plan to an SD Card:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Insert the SD card into the top card slot on the MFD.
2) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page on the MFD.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
4) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
APPENDICES
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be exported.
6) Press the Export Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Export Flight Plan’.
7) If desired, change the name for the exported file by turning the large FMS Knob to the left to highlight the
name, then use the small and large FMS knobs to enter the new name, and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
8) Press the ENT Key to initiate the export.
9) Press the ENT Key to confirm the export.
NOTE: The exported flight plan will not contain any procedures or airways.
190
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT PLAN IMPORT/EXPORT MESSAGES
Under certain conditions, some messages may appear in conjunction with others.
‘Too many points. Flight plan truncated.’
‘One or more user waypoints renamed.’
AFCS
‘Flight plan successfully exported.’
‘Flight plan export failed.’
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
‘User waypoint database full. Not all
loaded.’
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
‘Some waypoints not loaded. Waypoints
locked.’
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
‘File contained user waypoints only.’
EIS
‘File contained user waypoints only. User
waypoints imported successfully. No
stored flight plan data was modified.’
‘No flight plan files found to import.’
‘Flight plan import failed.’
‘Flight plan partially imported.’
Description
A flight plan file stored on the SD card was successfully imported as a stored flight
plan.
The file stored on the SD card did not contain a flight plan, only user waypoints.
These waypoints have been saved to the system user waypoints. No flight plans
stored in the system have been modified.
The SD card contains no flight plan data.
Flight plan data was not successfully imported from the SD card.
Some flight plan waypoints were successfully imported from the SD card, however
others had errors and were not imported. A partial stored flight plan now exists in
the system.
The file stored on the SD card did not contain a flight plan, only user waypoints.
One or more of these waypoints did not import successfully.
The flight plan on the SD card contains more waypoints than the system can
support. The flight plan was imported with as many waypoints as possible.
The flight plan on the SD card contains one or more waypoints that the system
cannot find in the navigation database. The flight plan has been imported, but
must be edited within the system before it can be activated for use.
The flight plan file on the SD card contains user waypoints. The quantity of stored
user waypoints has exceeded system capacity, therefore not all the user waypoints
on the SD card have been imported. Any flight plan user waypoints that were not
imported are locked in the flight plan. The flight plan must be edited within the
system before it can be activated for use.
One or more imported user waypoints were renamed when imported due to
naming conflicts with waypoints already existing in the system.
The stored flight plan was successfully exported to the SD card.
The stored flight plan was not successfully exported to the SD card. The SD card
may not have sufficient available memory or the card may have been removed
prematurely.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Flight Plan Import/Export Results
‘Flight plan successfully imported.’
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Table 5-11 Flight Plan Import/Export Messages
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
191
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Flight plans can be transferred to or from a mobile device via the Flight Stream 510 Bluetooth wireless
connection. Transfer of a flight plan to a mobile device is controlled by the mobile device.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Previewing a pending flight plan transfer from a wireless connection:
1) When a flight plan transfer has been initiated from a mobile device, a Pending Flight Plan pop-up alert appears
in the lower right corner of the MFD, and an Connext annunciation appears to the right of the MFD page name.
2) Press the ENT Key to display the ‘FPL - Preview Flight Plan’ Page on the MFD.
Or:
EIS
Press the Preview Softkey to display the ‘FPL - Preview Flight Plan’ Page on the MFD.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key,
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Preview Flight Plan’.
c) Press the ENT Key to display the ‘FPL - Preview Flight Plan’ Page on the MFD.
Ignoring a pending flight plan transfer from a wireless connection:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) When a flight plan transfer has been initiated from a mobile device, a Pending Flight Plan pop-up alert appears
in the lower right corner of the MFD, and an Connext annunciation appears to the right of the MFD page name.
2) Press the CLR Key to remove the pop-up alert and ignore the pending flight plan. The pending flight plan will
still be available on the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Or:
Press the Ignore Softkey to remove the pop-up alert and ignore the pending flight plan. The pending flight plan
will still be available on the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
AFCS
Pending Connext Action
Annunciator
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Pending Flight Plan
Pending Flight Plan
Pop-Up Alert
Preview Softkey
Ignore Softkey
INDEX
Figure 5-49 Pending Flight Plan Transfer
192
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Pending Connext Action
Annunciator
Pending Flight Plan
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Store? or Activate?
Selection
Store Softkey
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Delete Softkey
Activate Softkey
Figure 5-50 Preview Flight Plan Page
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Storing a pending flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and
4) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the pending flight plan.
5) Press the ENT Key to display the ‘FPL - Preview Flight Plan’ Page on the MFD.
6) Press the Store Softkey to store the flight plan. The pending flight plan is stored and the pending annunciation
is removed.
AFCS
Or:
a) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Store?’.
c) Press the ENT Key to store the flight plan. The pending flight plan is stored and the pending annunciation
is removed.
Or:
APPENDICES
a) Press the MENU Key,
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Store Flight Plan’.
c) Press the ENT Key to store the flight plan. The pending flight plan is stored and the pending annunciation
is removed.
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
193
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Activating a pending flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD and turn the small FMS Knob to display the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the pending flight plan.
3) Press the ENT Key to display the ‘FPL - Preview Flight Plan’ Page.
4) Press the Activate Softkey. The ‘Activate Flight Plan?’ window is displayed.
Or:
a) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
EIS
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Activate?’.
c) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Activate Flight Plan?’ window is displayed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Activate Flight Plan’.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to activate the pending flight plan. The pending flight plan becomes
the active flight plan and is removed from the Flight Plan Catalog Page. To cancel the request, press the CLR
Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
c) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Activate Flight Plan?’ window is displayed.
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD.
Deleting a pending flight plan:
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
4) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired pending flight plan.
AFCS
5) Press the Delete Softkey. The ‘Delete Flight Plan XX?’ window is displayed.
Or:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Press the CLR Key. The ‘Delete Flight Plan XX?’ window is displayed.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Delete Flight Plan’.
APPENDICES
c) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Delete Flight Plan XX?’ window is displayed.
INDEX
6) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to delete the pending flight plan. The pending flight plan is removed
from the Flight Plan Catalog Page. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press
the ENT Key.
194
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Deleting all pending flight plans:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the MENU Key.
4) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Delete All Pending’.
5) Press the ENT Key. A ‘Delete all pending flight plans?’ confirmation window is displayed.
6)
EIS
With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to delete all pending flight plans. To cancel the request, press the
CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
ADDING WAYPOINTS TO AN EXISTING FLIGHT PLAN
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Waypoints can be added to the active flight plan or any stored flight plan. Choose the flight plan, select the
desired point of insertion, enter the waypoint, and it is added in front of the selected waypoint. Flight plans are
limited to 100 waypoints (including waypoints within airways and procedures). If the number of waypoints in
the flight plan exceeds 100, the message “Flight plan is full. Remove unnecessary waypoints.” appears and the
new waypoint(s) are not added to the flight plan.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NOTE: Manually adding waypoints to a flight plan after a MANSEQ leg creates a lateral gap in the flight
plan. Time, fuel, and distance values for legs beyond the gap do not include the distance across the gap.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Stored Flight Plan Selected
AFCS
- Memory Slot
- Comment
- Procedure Identifier
- Waypoint Identifier
- Airway Identifier
- Desired Track to Waypoint
- Distance to Waypoint
- Waypoint Altitude Constraint
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-51 Stored Flight Plan Page
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
195
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Adding a waypoint to a stored flight plan:
1) On the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Highlight the desired flight plan.
3) Press the Edit Softkey; or press the ENT Key, turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to select “EDIT” and press the
ENT Key. The ‘FPL - Stored Flight Plan’ Page is displayed.
4) Select the point in the flight plan to add the new waypoint.
EIS
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the ‘Waypoint Information’ Window. (Turning it clockwise displays a blank
‘Waypoint Information’ Window, turning it counter-clockwise displays the ‘Waypoint Information Window’ with
a waypoint selection submenu allowing selection of active flight plan, nearest, recent, user, or airway waypoints).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
6) Enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the waypoint or select a waypoint from the submenu of waypoints
and press the ENT Key. The new waypoint now exists in the flight plan.
NOTE: If the identifier entered in the Waypoint Information Window has duplicates, a Duplicate Waypoint
Window is displayed. Use the FMS Knob to select the correct waypoint.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Adding a waypoint to the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD).
3) Select the point in the flight plan to add the new waypoint.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the ‘Waypoint Information’ Window. (Turning it clockwise displays a blank
‘Waypoint Information’ Window, turning it counter-clockwise displays the ‘Waypoint Information’ Window with
a waypoint selection submenu allowing selection of active flight plan, nearest, recent, user, or airway waypoints).
AFCS
5) Enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the waypoint or select a waypoint from the submenu of waypoints
and press the ENT Key. The active flight plan is modified as each waypoint is entered.
Creating and adding user waypoints to the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD).
3) Select the point in the flight plan to add the new waypoint.
4) Push the Joystick on the MFD to activate the panning function on the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page and pan
to the map location of the desired user waypoint.
INDEX
APPENDICES
5) Press the LD WPT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Load Waypoint’, and press the ENT Key. The user
waypoint is created with a name of USRxxx (using the next available in sequence) and is added to the active
flight plan.
196
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDING AIRWAYS TO A FLIGHT PLAN
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Airways can be added to the active flight plan or any stored flight plan. Choose a flight plan (add the desired
airway entry point if not already in the flight plan), select the waypoint after the desired airway entry point,
select the airway, and it is added in front of the selected waypoint. An airway can only be loaded if there is a
waypoint in the flight plan that is part of the desired airway and is not part of an arrival or approach procedure.
The system also anticipates the desired airway and exit point based on loaded flight plan waypoints.
Airway Entry Waypoint
EIS
Selected Airway
Airways Available at TOP
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Preview of
Selected Airway
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-52 Select Airway Page - Selecting Airway
Adding an airway to a flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key.
AFCS
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD).
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the waypoint after the desired airway entry point. If this waypoint is not
a valid airway entry point, a valid entry point should be entered at this time.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Turn the small FMS Knob one click clockwise and press the LD AIRWY Softkey, or press the MENU Key and
select ‘Load Airway’. The Select Airway Page/Window is displayed. The LD AIRWY Softkey or the ‘Load Airway’
menu item is available only when a valid airway entry waypoint has been chosen (the waypoint ahead of the
cursor position).
APPENDICES
5) Turn the FMS Knob to select the desired airway from the list, and press the ENT Key.
6) Turn the FMS Knob to select the desired airway exit point from the list, and press the ENT Key. ‘Load?’ is
highlighted.
7) Press the ENT Key. The system returns to editing the flight plan with the new airway inserted.
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
197
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Airway Entry Waypoint
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selected Airway
Selected Exit Point
Preview of
Selected Airway
Selected Airway Exit
Point
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Airway Exit Points
Available
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-53 Select Airway Page - Selecting Exit Point
RESTRICTIONS ON ADDING AIRWAYS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Some airways have directional restrictions on all or part of the route. Airway “A2” in Europe has a directional
restriction over the whole route such that it can be flown only one direction.
For example, airway “UR975” in North Africa has more complicated directional restrictions within the list of
airway waypoints. That is, each waypoint may have its own conditional route in relation to another waypoint.
In the US, airways that are “one-way” for specified hours of operation are not uncommon. These airways
are always bidirectional in the system database.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
The system only allows correct airway sequences to be inserted. If the pilot subsequently inverts the flight
plan, the system inverts the airway waypoint sequence and removes the airway header.
198
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDING PROCEDURES TO A STORED FLIGHT PLAN
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The system allows the pilot to insert pre-defined instrument procedures from the navigation database into a
flight plan. The procedures are designed to facilitate routing of traffic leaving an airport (departure), arriving at
an airport (arrival), and landing at an airport (approach). See the procedures section for more details.
Flight Plan Name
EIS
Flight Plan Waypoint
List
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Softkeys
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Load Departure Load Arrival Load Approach Activate Flight Plan
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-54 Stored Flight Plan Page
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
199
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
DEPARTURE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A Departure Procedure (DP) is loaded at the departure airport in the flight plan. Only one departure can
be loaded at a time in a flight plan. The route is defined by selection of a departure, the transition waypoints,
and a runway.
Departure Airport
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Selected
Departure
Departures Available at
KMKC
Preview of
Selected
Departure
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Departure Waypoint
Sequence
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-55 Departure Loading Page - Selecting the Departure
200
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Loading a departure procedure into a stored flight plan:
1) Select a stored flight plan from the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the Edit Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘FPL - Stored
Flight Plan’ Page is displayed.
3) Press the LD DP Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Load Departure’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘PROC
- Departure Loading’ Page is displayed.
4) Select a departure. Press the ENT Key.
5) Select a runway served by the selected departure, if required. Press the ENT Key.
EIS
6) Select a transition for the selected departure. Press the ENT Key.
7) Press the ENT Key to load the selected departure procedure.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Departure Airport
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selected
Departure
Selected Runway
Preview of
Selected
Departure
Selected
Departure End
Point
Selected Transition
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Departure Transition
Points Available
AFCS
Figure 5-56 Departure Loading Page - Selecting Transition
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
201
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
ARRIVAL
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A Standard Terminal Arrival (STAR) is loaded at the destination airport in the flight plan. Only one arrival
can be loaded at a time in a flight plan. The route is defined by selection of an arrival, the transition waypoints,
and a runway.
Destination Airport
EIS
Selected Arrival
Arrivals Available at KCOS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Selected Runway
Arrival Waypoint Sequence
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Preview of
Selected Arrival
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-57 Arrival Loading Page - Selecting the Arrival
202
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Destination Airport
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selected Arrival
Selected Transition
Transitions Available with
DBRY3
Preview of
Selected Arrival
EIS
Arrival Waypoint Sequence
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-58 Arrival Loading Page - Selecting the Transition
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Loading an arrival procedure into a stored flight plan:
1) Select a stored flight plan from the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the Edit Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘FPL - Stored
Flight Plan’ Page is displayed.
3) Press the LD STAR Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select “Load Arrival”, and press the ENT Key. The ‘PROC
- Arrival Loading’ Page is displayed.
4) Select an arrival. Press the ENT Key.
AFCS
5) Select a transition for the selected arrival. Press the ENT Key.
6) Select a runway served by the selected arrival, if required. Press the ENT Key.
7) Press the ENT Key to load the selected arrival procedure.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
203
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
APPROACH
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
An Approach Procedure (APR) can be loaded at any airport that has an approach available. Only one
approach can be loaded at a time in a flight plan. The route for a selected approach is defined by designating
transition waypoints.
EIS
Destination Airport
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Selected
Approach
Approaches Available at
KCOS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Preview of
Selected
Approach
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-59 Approach Loading Page - Selecting the Approach
Loading an approach procedure into a stored flight plan:
1) Select a stored flight plan from the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
AFCS
2) Press the Edit Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘FPL - Stored
Flight Plan’ Page is displayed.
3) Press the LD APR Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Load Approach’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘PROC
- Approach Loading’ Page is displayed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Select the airport and approach:
a) Use the FMS Knob to select an airport and press the ENT Key.
b) Select an approach from the list and press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
Or:
a) If necessary, push the FMS Knob to exit the approach list, and use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor
to the ‘Approach Channel’ Box.
b) Use the FMS Knob to enter the approach channel number, and press the ENT Key to accept the approach
channel number. The airport and approach are selected.
INDEX
5) Select a transition for the selected approach. Press the ENT Key.
6) Press the ENT Key to load the selected approach procedure.
204
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Destination Airport
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selected
Approach
Selected Transition
Transitions Available with
Selected Approach
EIS
Preview of
Selected
Approach
Approach Waypoint
Sequence
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-60 Approach Loading Page - Selecting the Transition
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
205
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT PLAN STORAGE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The system can store up to 99 flight plans, numbered 1 through 99. The active flight plan is erased when
the system is powered off or when another flight plan is activated. Details about each stored flight plan can be
viewed on the Flight Plan Catalog Page and on the Stored Flight Plan Page.
Viewing information about a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
EIS
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
4) The ‘Flight Plan Info’ Box displays departure, destination, total distance, and enroute safe altitude information
for the selected flight plan.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) Press the Edit Softkey to open the ‘FPL - Stored Flight Plan’ Page and view the waypoints in the flight plan.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
6) Press the FMS Knob to exit the ‘FPL - Stored Flight Plan’ Page.
Flight Plan Name
(Comment)
Selected Flight Plan
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Preview of Selected
Flight Plan
AFCS
Stored Flight Plan Info
- Departure Airport
- Destination Airport
- Total Flight Plan Distance
- Enroute Safe Altitude
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Stored FPL Editing
Softkeys
Figure 5-61 Stored Flight Plan Information
Storing an active flight plan from the Active Flight Plan Page or the Active Flight Plan Window:
APPENDICES
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Highlight ‘Store Flight Plan’.
3) Press the ENT Key.
INDEX
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. The flight plan is stored in the next available position in the flight
plan list on the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
206
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ACTIVATE A FLIGHT PLAN
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Activating a stored flight plan erases the active flight plan and replaces it with the flight plan being activated.
Inverting a stored flight plan reverses the waypoint order, erases the active flight plan, and replaces it with the
flight plan being activated (the stored flight plan is not changed).
Activating a stored flight plan on the MFD:
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
EIS
3) Press the Activate Softkey; or press the ENT Key twice; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Activate Flight Plan’,
and press the ENT Key. The ‘activate stored flight plan?’ window is displayed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
COPY A FLIGHT PLAN
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The system allows copying a flight plan into a new flight plan memory slot, allowing editing, etc., without
affecting the original flight plan. This can be used to duplicate an existing stored flight plan for use in creating
a modified version of the original stored flight plan.
Copying a stored flight plan on the MFD:
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
3) Press the Copy Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Copy Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘Copy
to flight plan XX?’ window is displayed.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to copy the flight plan. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or
highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
AFCS
DELETE A STORED FLIGHT PLAN
Individual or all stored flight plans can be deleted from the system memory.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Deleting a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
APPENDICES
3) Press the Delete Softkey; press the CLR Key; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Delete Flight Plan’, and press
the ENT Key. The ‘Delete flight plan XX?’ window is displayed.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to delete the flight plan. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or
highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
INDEX
NOTE: The option to delete all stored flight plans is not available while the aircraft is in flight.
207
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Deleting all stored flight plans:
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Highlight ‘Delete All’ and press the ENT Key. A ‘Delete all flight plans?’ confirmation window is displayed.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to delete all flight plans. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or
highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT PLAN EDITING
EIS
The active flight plan or any stored flight plan can be edited. The edits made to the active flight plan affect
navigation as soon as they are entered.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
DELETING THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
The system allows deleting an active flight plan. Deleting the active flight plan suspends navigation by the
system.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Deleting the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the ‘Flight Plan’ Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Delete Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘Delete all waypoints in flight
plan?’ window is displayed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to delete the active flight plan. To cancel the request, press the CLR
Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
DELETING FLIGHT PLAN ITEMS
AFCS
Individual waypoints, entire airways, and entire procedures can be deleted from a flight plan. Some waypoints
in the final approach segment (such as the FAF or MAP) can not be deleted individually. Attempting to delete
a waypoint that is not allowed results in a window displaying ‘Invalid flight plan modification.’
NOTE: If removal of a flight plan item (waypoint, procedure, etc.) results in deletion of the end waypoint of
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
the active leg, an off-route direct-to to the deleted waypoint is created and activated.
Deleting an individual waypoint from the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the ‘Flight Plan’ Window (PFD).
APPENDICES
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the waypoint to be deleted.
3) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove XXXXX?’ window is displayed.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
INDEX
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
208
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Deleting an entire airway from the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the ‘Flight Plan’ Window (PFD).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the header of the airway to be deleted.
3) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove <airway name> from flight plan?’ window is displayed.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
EIS
Deleting an entire procedure from the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the ‘Flight Plan’ Window (PFD).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the header of the procedure to be deleted.
3) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove <procedure name> from flight plan?’ window is displayed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the ‘Flight Plan’ Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu and turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Remove <procedure>’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Remove <procedure name> from flight plan?’ window is displayed.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
AFCS
Deleting an individual waypoint from a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be edited.
4) Press the Edit Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’ and press the ENT Key. The ‘FPL - Stored
Flight Plan’ Page is displayed.
APPENDICES
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the waypoint to be deleted.
6) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove XXXXX?’ window is displayed.
7) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
INDEX
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
209
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Deleting an entire airway from a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be edited.
4) Press the Edit Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’ and press the ENT Key. The ‘FPL - Stored
Flight Plan’ Page is displayed.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the header of the airway to be deleted.
EIS
6) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove <airway name> from flight plan?’ window is displayed.
7) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Deleting an entire procedure from a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be edited.
4) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’ and press the ENT Key. The ‘FPL Stored Flight Plan’ Page is displayed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the header of the procedure to be deleted.
6) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove <procedure name> from flight plan?’ window is displayed.
7) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
AFCS
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be edited.
INDEX
APPENDICES
4) Press the Edit Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’ and press the ENT Key. The ‘FPL - Stored
Flight Plan’ Page is displayed.
210
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu and turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Remove <procedure>’.
6) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Remove <procedure name> from flight plan?’ window is displayed.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
7) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
CHANGING FLIGHT PLAN COMMENTS (NAMES)
EIS
The comment field (or name) of each flight plan can be changed to something that is useful for identification
and sorting.
Changing the active flight plan comment:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the ‘Flight Plan’ Window (PFD).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the FMS Knob (not required on the PFD) to activate the cursor and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the comment field.
3) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the comment.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the changes.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Changing a stored flight plan comment:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be edited.
4) Press the Edit Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’ and press the ENT Key. The ‘FPL - Stored
Flight Plan’ Page is displayed.
AFCS
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the comment field.
6) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the comment.
7) Press the ENT Key to accept the changes.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
211
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
ALONG TRACK OFFSETS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A waypoint having an “along track offset” distance from an existing waypoint can be entered into a flight plan.
Along track offset waypoints lie along the path of the existing flight plan, and can be used to make the system
reach a specified altitude before or after reaching the specified flight plan waypoint. Offset distances can be
entered from 1 to 999 nm in increments of 1 nm. Entering a negative offset distance results in an along track
offset waypoint inserted before the selected waypoint, whereas entering a positive offset distance results in an
along track offset waypoint inserted after the selected waypoint. Multiple offset waypoints are allowed.
EIS
A waypoint must be adjacent to its parent waypoint in the flight plan, so the system limits the along-track
distance to less than the length of the leg before or after the selected waypoint. If the selected waypoint is the
active waypoint, the distance is limited to less than the distance to go to the active waypoint. Assigning an along
track offset to a leg with indeterminate length is not permitted. An along track offset is not allowed at or after
the final approach fix of an approach.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
An along track offset distance cannot be modified once entered. If the along track offset distance must be
changed, the existing along track offset waypoint must be deleted and a new one created with the new offset
distance.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Along Track Offset
Waypoint and Distance
from Flight Plan Waypoint
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Along Track
Offset Waypoint
and Distance
Figure 5-62 Along Track Offset
APPENDICES
Entering an along track offset distance:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the ‘Flight Plan’ Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the waypoint for the along track offset.
3) Press the ATK OFS Softkey (MFD only); or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Create ATK Offset Waypoint’, and
press the ENT Key.
INDEX
4) Enter a positive or negative offset distance in the range of +/- 1 to 999 nm (limited by leg distances).
5) Press the ENT Key to create the offset waypoint.
6) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
212
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
PARALLEL TRACK
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Parallel Track (PTK) feature allows creation of a parallel course offset of 1 to 50 nm left or right of the
current flight plan. When Parallel Track is activated, the course line drawn on the map pages shows the parallel
course, and waypoint names have a lower case “p” placed after the identifier.
While flying a parallel track:
• Initiating a direct-to will cancel the parallel track and fly direct-to the selected waypoint.
• Initiating a hold at the present position will cancel the parallel track and fly the holding pattern.
EIS
• Initiating a hold at a waypoint will result in the aircraft flying the parallel track until a turn is required to fly
to the hold waypoint. If the hold is removed prior to reaching the hold waypoint, the parallel track will be
resumed. Once the holding pattern is active, the parallel track will not be resumed upon exiting the hold.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Parallel Track is also cancelled if a course change occurs greater than 120° or the parallel tracks overlap as a
result of the course change.
NOTE: Vertical navigation is unavailable while the Parallel Track feature is active.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Activating parallel track:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the ‘Flight Plan’ Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Parallel Track’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘Parallel Track’ Window is displayed
with the ‘Direction’ Field highlighted.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘LEFT’ or ‘RIGHT’ and press the ENT Key. The ‘Distance’ Field is highlighted.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter a distance from 1-99 nm and press the ENT Key. ‘Activate Parallel Track’ is highlighted.
5) Press the ENT Key to activate parallel track. Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to cancel the parallel track activation.
AFCS
Offset Direction
Offset Distance
Activation Prompt
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-63 Parallel Track Window
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
213
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Parallel Track
Waypoints
- TIFTO-p
- TOP-p
- ...
- LAA-p
Original Track
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Parallel Track
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-64 Parallel Track Active
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
If the parallel track proposed by the offset direction and distance is not allowed by the system,
the activation prompt is displayed, but disabled. If an approach leg is active, the status indicates
that the system is unable to activate the parallel track with the message ‘Parallel Track Unavailable
Approach Leg Active’. If the offset direction and distance results in an unreasonable route geometry
(e.g., there is a sharp turn of more than 120 degrees), the status indicates that the system is unable
to activate the parallel track because of invalid geometry (‘Parallel Track Unavailable Invalid Route
Geometry’). If the active leg is not a track between two fixes (TF) or a course to a fix (DF) leg, the status
indicates that the system is unable to activate the parallel track because parallel track is not available for the
active leg type (‘Parallel Track Unavailable Not Allowed for Active Leg’). Parallel track is also unavailable for a
leg if there are no legs remaining in the flight plan after the given leg, or OBS mode is active. Parallel track will
be cancelled if the active leg changes to a leg where one of the preceding is true.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Activation of parallel track will apply from the current position along the flight plan until a leg that does not
meet the criteria for parallel track. Guidance will be computed to return to the original track at the beginning
of that leg.
Cancelling parallel track:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the ‘Flight Plan’ Window (PFD).
APPENDICES
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Parallel Track’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘Parallel Track’ Window is displayed
with ‘Cancel Parallel Track?’ highlighted.
INDEX
3) Press the ENT Key.
214
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ACTIVATING A FLIGHT PLAN LEG
The system allows selection of a highlighted leg as the “active leg” (the flight plan leg which is currently
used for navigation guidance).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Activating a flight plan leg:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the ‘Flight Plan’ Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the end waypoint for the desired leg.
EIS
3) Press the ACT Leg Softkey (MFD only); or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Activate Leg’, and press the ENT Key.
A confirmation window is displayed with ‘Activate’ highlighted.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Press the ENT Key to activate the flight plan leg. To cancel, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘Cancel’ and press
the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
INVERTING A FLIGHT PLAN
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Any flight plan may be inverted (reversed) for navigation back to the original departure point.
Inverting the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the ‘Flight Plan’ Window (PFD).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Invert Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. An ‘Invert active flight plan?’
confirmation window is displayed.
3) Select ‘OK’.
4) Press the ENT Key to invert and activate the active flight plan. To cancel, press the CLR Key, or highlight
‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
AFCS
Inverting and activating a stored flight plan on the MFD:
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Press the Invert Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Invert & Activate FPL?’, and press the ENT Key. The
‘Invert and activate stored flight plan?’ window is displayed.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
215
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT PLAN VIEWS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Information about flight plans can be viewed in more than one way. The active flight plan can be configured
to show cumulative distance over the length of the flight plan or the distance for each leg of the flight plan;
and the active flight plan can be viewed in a narrow or wide view. In the wide view, additional information is
displayed: Fuel Remaining (FUEL REM), Estimated Time Enroute (ETE), Estimated Time of Arrival (ETA), and
Bearing to the waypoint (BRG).
Changing the flight plan view:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page.
EIS
2) Press the View Softkey to display the Wide, Narrow, Leg-Leg, and CUM Softkeys.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Press the CUM Softkey to view cumulative waypoint distance, or press the Leg-Leg Softkey to view leg-to-leg
waypoint distance.
4) Press the Wide Softkey to display the wide view, or press the Narrow Softkey to display the narrow view.
5) Press the Back Softkey to return to the top level active flight plan softkeys.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
COLLAPSING AIRWAYS
The system allows airways on the active flight plan to be collapsed or expanded from the Stored or Active
Flight Plan Page/Window. When airways have been collapsed, it is indicated on the airway heading.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
When airways are collapsed, leg-to-leg computed values such as DIS or ETE shown for the exit waypoint
reflect the total of all the legs on the airway that have been hidden in the collapsed display. The DTK value is
inhibited because it is not usable in this context.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
The Active Flight Plan Page always keeps the following three waypoints visible: “From” waypoint, “To”
waypoint, and “Next” waypoint. To prevent one or more of these waypoints from being hidden in a collapsed
airway segment, the airway segment that contains either the “To” or the “Next” waypoint is automatically
expanded. When an airway is loaded, airways are automatically expanded to facilitate flight plan review.
216
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
All Airways
Collapsed View
V4.SLN Airway
Expanded View
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-65 Expanded/Collapsed Airways
Collapsing/expanding the airways in the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the ‘Flight Plan’ Window (PFD).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Collapse Airways’ or ‘Expand Airways’, and press the ENT Key. The airways are
collapsed/expanded.
CLOSEST POINT OF FPL
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
‘Closest Point of FPL’ calculates the bearing and closest distance at which a flight plan passes a reference waypoint,
and creates a new user waypoint along the flight plan at the location closest to a chosen reference waypoint.
Determining the closest point along the active flight plan to a selected waypoint:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the ‘Flight Plan’ Window (PFD).
AFCS
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Closest Point Of FPL’’, and press the ENT Key. A window appears with the
reference waypoint field highlighted.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Enter the identifier of the reference waypoint. The system displays the bearing (BRG) and distance (DIS) to
the closest point along the flight plan to the selected reference waypoint and creates a user waypoint at this
location. Press the ENT Key. The name for the new user waypoint is derived from the identifier of the reference
waypoint.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
217
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
USER-DEFINED HOLDING PATTERNS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A holding pattern can be defined at any active flight plan waypoint, at the aircraft present position, or at a
direct-to waypoint.
Creating a user-defined hold at an active flight plan waypoint:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the ‘Flight Plan’ Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the waypoint for the hold.
EIS
3) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Hold At Waypoint’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘Hold at’ Window appears with
the ‘Course’ Field highlighted.
4) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the course, and press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘Inbound’ or ‘Outbound’ course direction, and press the ENT Key.
6) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘Time’ or ‘Distance’ length mode, and press the ENT Key.
7) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the length, and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
8) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘Right’ or ‘Left’ turn direction, and press the ENT Key.
9) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the Expect Further Clearance Time (EFC Time), and press the ENT Key.
10) Press the ENT Key while ‘Load?’ is highlighted to insert the hold into the flight plan.
Creating a user-defined hold at the aircraft present position:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the ‘Flight Plan’ Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Hold At Present Position’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘Hold at’ Window appears
with the ‘Course’ Field highlighted.
3) If desired, use the FMS Knobs to edit the course, and press the ENT Key.
AFCS
4) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘Inbound’ or ‘Outbound’ course direction, and press the ENT Key.
5) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘Time’ or ‘Distance’ length mode, and press the ENT Key.
6) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the length, and press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
7) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘Right’ or ‘Left’ turn direction, and press the ENT Key.
8) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the Expect Further Clearance Time (EFC Time), and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
9) Press the ENT Key while ‘Activate?’ is highlighted to create an Offroute Direct-to hold waypoint at the aircraft
present position and activate the hold.
218
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Creating a user-defined hold at a direct-to waypoint:
1) Press a Direct-to Key and set up the direct-to waypoint as desired, but select ‘Hold?’ instead of ‘Activate?’
when finished (MFD or PFD).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the course, and press the ENT Key.
3) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘Inbound’ or ‘Outbound’ course direction, and press the ENT Key.
4) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘Time’ or ‘Distance’ length mode, and press the ENT Key.
5) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the length, and press the ENT Key.
EIS
6) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘Right’ or ‘Left’ turn direction, and press the ENT Key.
7) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the Expect Further Clearance Time (EFC Time), and press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
8) Press the ENT Key while ‘Activate?’ is highlighted to activate the direct-to with the user-defined hold defined at
the direct-to waypoint. (If the direct-to waypoint is part of the active flight plan, the hold is inserted into the active
flight plan. If the direct-to waypoint is not part of the active flight plan, an off-route direct-to hold is created.)
Editing a user-defined hold:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the ‘Flight Plan’ Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the waypoint for the hold.
3) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Edit Hold’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘Hold at’ Window appears with the
course field highlighted.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the course, and press the ENT Key.
5) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘Inbound’ or ‘Outbound’ course direction, and press the ENT Key.
6) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘Time’ or ‘Distance’ length mode, and press the ENT Key.
7) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the length, and press the ENT Key.
AFCS
8) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘Right’ or ‘Left’ turn direction, and press the ENT Key.
9) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the Expect Further Clearance Time (EFC Time), and press the ENT Key.
10) Press the ENT Key while ‘Update?’ is highlighted to update the hold.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
219
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Hold At
Waypoint
Menu
Selection
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Waypoint
Selected
Hold Course
Location of Hold
Course Direction
Inbound or Outbound
Leg Length Mode Button
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
(Time or Distance)
Leg Length
(Time in nm or Distance in minutes)
Turn Direction
AFCS
(Right or Left)
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Map of Hold Location
Expect Further Clearance Time
INDEX
Load Hold in Active Flight Plan
Figure 5-66 Creating a User Defined Holding Pattern at an Active Flight Plan Waypoint
220
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Waypoint
Selected
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Hold Course
Location of Hold
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Course Direction
(Inbound or Outbound)
Leg Length
(Time in nm or
Distance in minutes)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Turn Direction
(Right or Left)
Leg Length Mode
Button
(Time or Distance)
AFCS
Map of Hold Location
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Expect Further
Clearance Time
Load Hold and
Activate Direct To
INDEX
Hold At Direct To Waypoint Selection
Figure 5-67 Creating a User Defined Holding Pattern at a Direct To Waypoint
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
221
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Exiting a user-defined hold inserted into the active flight plan:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Removing a user-defined hold inserted into the active flight plan:
Press the SUSP Softkey. The system will provide guidance to follow the holding pattern to the inbound course
and resume automatic waypoint sequencing.
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the ‘Flight Plan’ Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the ‘HOLD’ waypoint.
EIS
3) Press the CLR Key. A ‘Remove Holding Pattern?’ confirmation window is displayed.
4) Select ‘OK’ and press the ENT Key. The holding pattern is removed from the active flight plan. Select ‘CANCEL’
and press the ENT Key to cancel the removal of the holding pattern.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Removing a user-defined hold at an off-route direct-to:
1) Press a Direct To Key to display the ‘Direct To’ Window (PFD or MFD).
2) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu with the cursor on the ‘Cancel Direct-To NAV’ selection.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Press the ENT Key. The holding pattern is removed.
222
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5.7 VERTICAL NAVIGATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: The system supports vertical path guidance and altitude constraints for the following leg types: AF,
CD, CF, CI, CR, DF, FC, FD, PI, RF, and TF. Altitude constraints are not retained in stored flight plans.
Disabled (fields dashed)
Active Vertical Navigation Profile
Enabled (valid data)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Active Vertical Navigation Profile
EIS
The system Vertical Navigation (VNV) feature provides vertical profile guidance during the enroute and terminal
phases of flight. Guidance based on specified altitudes at waypoints in the active flight plan or to a direct-to
waypoint is provided. It includes vertical path guidance to a descending path, which is provided as a linear
deviation from the desired path. The desired path is defined by a line joining two waypoints with specified
altitudes or as a vertical angle from a specified waypoint/altitude. The vertical waypoints are integrated into the
active flight plan. Both manual and autopilot-coupled guidance are supported.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Cncl VNV Softkey
ENBL VNV Softkey
Figure 5-68 Enabling/Disabling Vertical Navigation
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Enabling and Disabling VNV guidance:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the ‘FPL- Active Flight Plan’ Page.
APPENDICES
2) Press the ENBL VNV Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Enable VNV’, and press the ENT Key. Vertical
navigation is enabled, and vertical guidance begins with the waypoint shown in the ‘Active VNV Profile’ Box
(defaults first waypoint in the active flight plan with an altitude enabled for vertical navigation (e.g., FALUR)).
3) To Disable VNV guidance, press the Cncl VNV Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Cancel VNV’, and
press the ENT Key. Vertical navigation is disabled.
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
223
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Canceling vertical navigation results in vertical deviation (V DEV), vertical speed required (VS REQ), and
time to top of descent/bottom of descent (TOD/BOD) going invalid. The Vertical Deviation Indicator (VDI) and
Required Vertical Speed Indicator (RVSI) on the PFD are removed, and the V DEV, VS REQ, and TOD items
displayed in the Active VNV Profile box are dashed. VNV remains disabled until manually enabled. Vertical
guidance in reversionary mode can only be enabled for a direct-to waypoint.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
The system allows a vertical navigation direct-to for any waypoint in the active flight plan with an altitude
constraint “designated” for vertical guidance. Pressing the VNV Direct-to Softkey on the Active Flight Plan Page
allows the flight plan to be flown, while vertical guidance based on the altitude constraint at the VNV direct-to
waypoint is provided. The altitude change begins immediately and is spread along the flight plan from current
position to the vertical direct-to waypoint, not just along the leg for the direct-to waypoint. A direct-to with
altitude constraint activated by pressing the Direct-to Key also provides vertical guidance, but would bypass
flight plan waypoints between the current position in the flight plan and the direct-to waypoint. A top of descent
(TOD) point is computed based on the default flight path angle; descent begins once the TOD is reached.
Activating a vertical navigation direct-to:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired waypoint.
NOTE: The selected waypoint must have a designated altitude constraint (cyan number) to be used. If not,
the first waypoint in the flight plan with a designated altitude constraint is selected.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Press the VNV Direct-To Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘VNV Direct-To’, and press the ENT Key.
An ‘Activate vertical Direct-to to: NNNNNFT at XXXXXX?’ confirmation window is displayed.
4) Press the ENT Key. Vertical guidance begins to the altitude constraint for the selected waypoint.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
AFCS
The vertical navigation profile can be modified by directly entering a vertical speed target (VS TGT) and/or flight
path angle (FPA) in the ‘Active VNV Profile’ Box.
Modifying the VS TGT and FPA:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the VNV Prof Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select VNV Profile Window’, and press the ENT
Key. The cursor is now located in the ‘Active VNV Profile’ Box.
3) Turn the FMS Knobs as needed to edit the values.
INDEX
APPENDICES
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
224
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ALTITUDE CONSTRAINTS
Altitude Constraint
Examples
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The system can use altitude constraints associated with lateral waypoints to give guidance for vertical
navigation. These altitudes are, depending on the specific instance, manually entered or retrieved from the
published altitudes in the navigation database.
Displayed Text
Examples
System Calculated Altitude
(White Text)
EIS
Cross AT or ABOVE
5,000 ft
Edited Altitude Constraint
(Cyan Text with Pencil Icon)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Designated Altitude Constraint
(Cyan Text)
Cross AT 2,300 ft
White Text with
Altitude Restriction Bar
Cross AT or BELOW
3,000 ft
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Temperature
Compensated
Figure 5-69 Waypoint Altitude Constraints
White Text
Cyan Text
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
5OOOFT
Altitude retrieved from the navigation database. White line above or
below indicates the type of constraint, as shown in the preceding figure.
These altitudes are provided as a reference, and are not designated to be
used in determining vertical guidance.
The system cannot use this altitude in
determining vertical guidance because of an
invalid constraint condition.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Altitude is designated for use in determining
vertical guidance. A pencil icon indicates manual
designation or manually edited data entry.
AFCS
Altitude calculated by the system estimating the altitude of the aircraft
as it passes over the navigation point. No white line above or below to
indicate a potential constraint.
5OOOFT
Table 5-12 Altitude Constraint Color Coding
APPENDICES
Altitudes associated with approach procedures are “auto-designated”. This means the system automatically
provides descending vertical speed and deviation guidance to an altitude(s) chosen by the system for any
waypoint up to and including FAF. These altitudes are displayed as cyan text. Additionally, all altitudes can
be manually designated. Manually designated altitudes are displayed as cyan text with a pencil icon. For all
designated altitudes, the system will automatically calculate altitude constraints prior to the designated altitude,
which are displayed as white text.
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
225
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Altitude constraints are displayed and entered in feet mean sea level (MSL) values to the nearest hundred. An
altitude constraint in feet above ground level (AGL) format is supported for airports. When a database altitude
restriction is displayed, the system allows entry of a different altitude when creating a waypoint, effectively overriding
the database restriction (only before the FAF). When a database altitude restriction of type “AT or ABOVE” or “AT
or BELOW” is activated, the system uses the “AT” portion of the restriction to define the vertical profile.
NOTE: All designated altitudes (cyan text) will be displayed in the Active Flight Plan Page and Flight Plan
Window without restriction bars regardless of what is shown on the published procedure.
EIS
Manually Designating a waypoint altitude to be used for vertical guidance:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter editing mode.
4) Press the ENT Key. The altitude is now shown in cyan, indicating it is usable for vertical guidance.
Manually Designating a procedure waypoint altitude to be used for vertical guidance:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob, and highlight the desired waypoint altitude. Turn the small FMS Knob to enter editing mode.
3) Press the ENT Key. The altitude is now shown in cyan, indicating it is usable for vertical guidance.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Altitudes that have been designated for use in vertical guidance can be “un-designated” using the CLR Key.
The altitude is now displayed only as a reference (white text). It is not used to give vertical guidance. Other
displayed altitudes may change due to re-calculations or be rendered invalid as a result of manually changing
an altitude to a non-designated altitude.
An altitude constraint is invalid if:
AFCS
• Meeting the constraint requires the aircraft to climb
• Meeting the constraint requires the maximum flight path angle or maximum vertical speed to be exceeded
• The altitude constraint results in a TOD behind the aircraft present position
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• The constraint is within a leg type for which altitude constraints are not supported
• The altitude constraint is added to the FAF of an approach that provides vertical guidance (i.e., ILS or GPS SBAS approach)
• The altitude constraint is added to a waypoint past the FAF
INDEX
APPENDICES
Altitude constraints can be modified or deleted after having been added to the flight plan. In the event an
altitude constraint is deleted and the navigation database contains an altitude restriction for the lateral waypoint,
the system displays the altitude restriction from the database provided no predicted altitude can be provided.
The system also provides a way to reinstate a published altitude constraint that has been edited.
226
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Entering/modifying an altitude constraint:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude constraint.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Enter an altitude constraint value using the FMS Knobs. To enter altitudes as a flight level, turn the small
FMS Knob counter-clockwise past zero or clockwise past 9 on the first character, and the system automatically
changes to show units of Flight Level. Turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to highlight the first zero and enter
the three digit flight level.
EIS
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the altitude constraint; if the selected waypoint is an airport, an additional choice
is displayed. Turn the small FMS Knob to choose ‘MSL’ or ‘AGL’, and press the ENT Key to accept the altitude.
Deleting an altitude constraint provided by the navigation database:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude constraint.
3) Press the CLR Key. A ‘Remove VNV altitude?’ confirmation window is displayed.
4) Select ‘OK’ and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Deleting an altitude constraint that has been manually entered:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude constraint.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Press the CLR Key. A ‘Remove or Revert to published VNV altitude of nnnnnFT?’ confirmation window is
displayed.
4) Select ‘REMOVE’ and press the ENT Key. The manually entered altitude is deleted (it is replaced by a system
calculated altitude, if available).
Reverting a manually entered altitude constraint back to the navigation database value:
AFCS
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude constraint.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Press the CLR Key. A ‘Remove or Revert to published VNV altitude of nnnnnFT?’ confirmation window is
displayed.
4) Select ‘REVERT’ and press the ENT Key. The altitude is changed to the navigation database value.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
APPENDICES
Modifying a system calculated altitude constraint:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude constraint.
3) Press the CLR Key. An ‘Edit or Revert to published VNV altitude of nnnnnFT?’ confirmation window is displayed.
INDEX
4) Select ‘EDIT’ and press the ENT Key.
5) Edit the value using the FMS Knobs, and press the ENT Key.
6) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
227
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
VERTICAL SITUATION DISPLAY (VSD)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A Vertical Situation Display (VSD) can be shown on the bottom of the Navigation Map Page. The terrain,
obstacles, vertical track vector, selected altitude, and active flight plan information (active flight plan information
consists of waypoints, associated altitude constraints, current VNAV profile, BOC/TOC, TOD/BOD, and
destination runway) can be displayed on the VSD, depending on the selected mode. See the Hazard Avoidance
section for information about winds aloft, obstacles, and relative terrain on the VSD.
NOTE: Certain leg types (e.g. holds, heading legs) do not support VNAV PATH descents because the lateral
EIS
distance of those legs in unknown. The VSD will not show a VNAV profile for any legs that have no vertical
path guidance.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The VSD horizontal range is equal to the navigation map indicated range when the VSD is in Track mode.
When the VSD is in Flight Plan mode, the horizontal range is the lower of twice the navigation map indicated
range or the lowest range the displays all of the remaining active flight plan. The VSD altitude range automatically
changes when the navigation map range is changed to keep a constant ratio of altitude range to horizontal
range, until both minimum and maximum display limits have been met. At ranges above the maximum, the
altitude range remains constant at the maximum.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The aircraft symbol is displayed on the left side of the VSD. The position of the aircraft symbol on the vertical
scale is close to the top for a descent phase, at the bottom for on-ground or a climb phase, and in the middle
for a cruise phase or if the phase is unknown.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
If two waypoints are close together, and their labels or constraint values overlap enough to obscure any text,
one waypoint label/constraint value is removed and the vertical dashed line for that waypoint is displayed as
darker gray. The priority for which waypoint remains displayed is: (1) the current TO waypoint, (2) waypoint
with an altitude constraint, and (3) waypoint closer to the aircraft.
Enabling the Vertical Situation Display
1) Select the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
AFCS
2) Press the Map Opt Softkey.
3) Press the Inset Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Press the VSD Softkey to enable the Vertical Situation Display.
5) Press the VSD Mode softkey to choose between Auto, FPL, or TRK.
Or:
1) Select the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
APPENDICES
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Show VSD’ and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
4) Press the VSD Mode softkey to choose between Auto, FPL, or TRK.
228
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Disabling the Vertical Situation Display
1) Select the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
2) Press the Map Opt Softkey.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the Off Softkey.
Or:
1) Select the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
EIS
3) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Hide VSD’ and press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
VSD Mode (AUTO FPL)
Active FPL Waypoints
Altitude Constraints
Selected Alt. (1000ft)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Destination Runway
Vertical Situation
Display (VSD)
Absolute Terrain
Current VNAV Profile
VSD Mode Buttons
Obstacle
AFCS
Figure 5-70 Vertical Situation Display (VSD)
- FPL
- TRK
- Auto
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
229
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
VSD Mode Displayed
Button
Mode
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
AUTO FPL
Auto
AUTO TRK
FPL Criteria
Items available on VSD
Available active FPL & aircraft
within FPL swath
(1) Active FPL available &
aircraft not within FPL swath,
or (2) Active FPL not available
Terrain/obstacles along the active flight plan route, vertical track
vector, selected altitude, and active flight plan information
Terrain/obstacles along the current track, vertical track vector, and
selected altitude
Terrain/obstacles along the active flight plan route, vertical track
vector, selected altitude, and active flight plan information
Flight Plan
FPL
Active FPL not available
Only shows message 'Flight Plan Not Available'
Terrain/obstacles along the current track, vertical track vector, and
Track
TRK
NA
selected altitude
Active flight plan information consists of waypoints, associated altitude constraints, current VNAV profile, BOC/TOC, TOD/BOD,
and destination runway
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Active FPL available
Table 5-13 VSD Modes
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Terrain/obstacles are available on the VSD, and will be shown if the aircraft altitude is low enough for the
terrain/obstacles to be in view (terrain will be shown in gray if the terrain is selected Off on the navigation map).
The depicted terrain profile represents an approximate forward-looking contour of the terrain based upon the
highest reported terrain elevations, measured at intervals defined by the terrain database resolution, within a
predefined width along the active flight plan between the aircraft present position and the end of the map range
or active flight plan. The predefined width is determined by the flight phase.
Flight Phase
Approach, Departure
Terminal
En Route, Oceanic
Width of Swath
0.6 nm
2.0 nm
4.0 nm
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Table 5-14 VSD Width of Swath
230
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
VSD MESSAGES
Under certain conditions, some messages may appear in conjunction with others.
Message
‘Flight Plan Not Available’
‘Flight Plan mode unavailable because aircraft off
course and active leg over 200 NM’
‘VSD Not Available’
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
‘VSD Data Old. Deselect and Reselect VSD’
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
‘Active Leg Begins Beyond Aircraft Position’
EIS
‘Aircraft Beyond Active Leg’
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
‘Loading...’
Description
VSD is loading data due to a range change, full/half switch, or first being
selected for display.
Flight Plan mode is selected and there is not a flight plan loaded with at
least one leg.
All of the following are true:
- Flight Plan mode is selected
- The active leg is greater than 200 nm
- The aircraft is outside the swath
Flight Plan mode is selected and the aircraft’s position, as projected on
the flight plan, is past the end of the active leg.
Flight Plan mode is selected and the aircraft’s position, as projected on
the flight plan, is prior to the beginning of the active leg.
At least one of the following is true:
- Valid terrain database not available
- GPS MSL altitude not available
- Current barometric altitude not available
- Neither current track nor current heading available
- GPS position not available
- Map range setting is less than 1 nm
VSD data has failed to update for 2 seconds or more.
Table 5-15 VSD System Messages
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
231
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5.8 PROCEDURES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The system can access the whole range of instrument procedures available. Departures (DPs), arrivals (STARs),
and non-precision and precision approaches (APRs) are stored within the database and can be loaded using any
Procedures (PROC) Key.
The selected procedure for the departure or arrival airport is added to the active flight plan. No waypoints are
required to be in the active flight plan to load procedures; however, if the origin and destination airport are already
loaded, the procedure loading window defaults to the appropriate airport, saving some time selecting the correct
airport on the Procedure Loading Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
The system adds terminal procedures to the flight plan based on leg types coded within that procedure in the
navigation database. If the terminal procedure in the flight plan contains an identifier like ‘6368ft’, that indicates
a leg that terminates when the specified altitude (6368 feet) has been exceeded. A heading leg in the flight plan
displays ‘hdg’ preceding the DTK (e.g. ‘hdg 008°’). A flight plan leg requiring the pilot to manually initiate
sequencing to the next leg displays ‘MANSEQ’ as the identifier.
Heading Leg Terminating at the
Specified Altitude
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Manually Sequenced Heading Leg
Figure 5-71 Procedure Leg Identifiers
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Viewing available procedures at an airport:
1) From the ‘WPT - Airport Information’ Page (Info 1 Softkey):
Press the DP Softkey. The ‘WPT - Departure Information’ Page is displayed, defaulting to the airport displayed
on the Airport information Page.
APPENDICES
Or:
Press the STAR Softkey. The ‘WPT - Arrival Information’ Page is displayed, defaulting to the airport displayed on
the Airport information Page.
Or:
INDEX
Press the APR Softkey. The ‘WPT - Approach Information’ Page is displayed, defaulting to the airport displayed
on the Airport information Page.
232
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
2) To select another airport, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, enter an identifier/facility name/city, and
press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the procedure. The procedure is previewed on the map.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available procedures. Press the ENT Key to select the procedure. The
cursor moves to the next box (runway or transition). The procedure is previewed on the map.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available runway or transition. Press the ENT Key to select the runway or
transition. The cursor moves to the next box (if available). The procedure is previewed on the map.
EIS
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available runway or transition. Press the ENT Key to select the runway or
transition. The cursor moves to the ‘Sequence’ Box or the ‘Minimums’ Box. The procedure is previewed on the
map.
7) Press the Info 1 Softkey to return to the ‘WPT - Airport Information’ Page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Loading a procedure into the active flight plan from the <Procedure> Information Page:
1) From the ‘WPT - Airport Information’ Page (Info 1 Softkey):
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Press the DP Softkey. The ‘WPT - Departure Information’ Page is displayed, defaulting to the airport displayed
on the Airport information Page.
Or
Press the STAR Softkey. The ‘WPT - Arrival Information’ Page is displayed, defaulting to the airport displayed on
the Airport information Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Or.
Press the APR Softkey. The ‘WPT - Approach Information’ Page is displayed, defaulting to the airport displayed
on the Airport information Page.
2) To select another airport, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, enter an identifier/facility name/city, and
press the ENT Key.
AFCS
3) Select a different procedure, if desired.
a) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the procedure. The procedure is previewed on the map.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
b) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available procedures. Press the ENT Key to select the procedure. The
cursor moves to the next box (runway or transition). The procedure is previewed on the map.
c) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available runway or transition. Press the ENT Key to select the
runway or transition. The cursor moves to the next box (if available). The procedure is previewed on the
map.
APPENDICES
d) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available transitions. Press the ENT Key to select the transition. The
cursor moves to the ‘Sequence’ Box or the ‘Minimums’ Box. The procedure is previewed on the map.
4) Press the MENU Key to display the <Procedure> Information Page Menu.
5) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Load <procedure>’.
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
INDEX
6) Press the ENT Key to load the procedure into the active flight plan.
233
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
DEPARTURES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A Departure Procedure (DP) is loaded at the departure airport in the flight plan. Only one departure can be
loaded at a time in a flight plan. If a departure is loaded when another departure is already in the active flight
plan, the new departure replaces the previous departure. The route is defined by selection of a departure, the
transition waypoints, and a runway.
LOADING A DEPARTURE INTO THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
Loading a departure into the active flight plan using the PROC Key:
EIS
1) Press the PROC Key. The ‘Procedures’ Window is displayed.
2) Highlight ‘Select Departure’.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Use the FMS Knob to select an airport, if necessary, and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Press the ENT Key. The Departure Loading Page/Window is displayed.
7) Select a transition (if required) and press the ENT Key. ‘Load?’ is highlighted.
5) Select a departure from the list and press the ENT Key.
6) Select a runway (if required) and press the ENT Key.
8) Press the ENT Key to load the departure procedure.
Departure Airport
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Available Procedure Actions
Departure Choices
INDEX
APPENDICES
Departure Preview
Loaded Procedures
Figure 5-72 Departure Selection
234
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Selected Departure
Loaded Departure
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Procedure Loading Page Selection Softkeys
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-73 Departure Loading
REMOVING A DEPARTURE FROM THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
When plans change while flying IFR, departures can be easily removed from the Active Flight Plan.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Removing a departure procedure from the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the ‘Flight Plan’ Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key, and highlight ‘Remove Departure’.
3) Press the ENT Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the departure procedure.
AFCS
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal request, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT
Key.
Or:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the ‘Flight Plan’ Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the departure header in the active flight plan.
3) Press the CLR Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the departure procedure.
APPENDICES
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal request, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT
Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
235
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
ARRIVALS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A Standard Terminal Arrival (STAR) can be loaded at any airport that has one available. Only one arrival
can be loaded at a time in a flight plan. If an arrival is loaded when another arrival is already in the active
flight plan, the new arrival replaces the previous arrival. The route is defined by selection of an arrival, the
transition waypoints, and a runway.
LOADING AN ARRIVAL INTO THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
Loading an arrival into the active flight plan using the PROC Key:
EIS
1) Press the PROC Key. The ‘Procedures’ Window is displayed.
2) Highlight ‘Select Arrival’.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Use the FMS Knob to select an airport, if necessary, and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Press the ENT Key. The Arrival Loading Page/Window is displayed.
7) Select a runway (if required) and press the ENT Key. ‘Load?’ is highlighted.
5) Select an arrival from the list and press the ENT Key.
6) Select a transition (if required) and press the ENT Key.
8) Press the ENT Key to load the arrival procedure.
Destination Airport
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Available Procedure Actions
Loaded Procedures
Arrival Preview
Arrival Choices
INDEX
Figure 5-74 Arrival Selection
236
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Selected Arrival
Loaded Arrival
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Procedure Loading Page Selection Softkeys
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-75 Arrival Loading
REMOVING AN ARRIVAL FROM THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
When plans change while flying IFR, arrivals can be easily removed from the Active Flight Plan.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Removing an arrival from the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the ‘Flight Plan’ Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key, and highlight ‘Remove Arrival’.
3) Press the ENT Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the arrival procedure.
AFCS
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal request, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT
Key.
Or:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the ‘Flight Plan’ Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the arrival header in the active flight plan.
3) Press the CLR Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the arrival procedure.
APPENDICES
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal request, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT
Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
237
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
APPROACHES
NOTE: If certain GPS parameters (SBAS, RAIM, etc.) are not available, some published approach procedures
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
for the desired airport may not be displayed in the list of available approaches.
An Approach Procedure (APR) can be loaded at any airport that has one available, and provides guidance
for non-precision and precision approaches to airports with published instrument approach procedures.
Only one approach can be loaded at a time in a flight plan. If an approach is loaded when another approach
is already in the active flight plan, the new approach replaces the previous approach. The route is defined by
selection of an approach and the transition waypoints.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Whenever an approach is selected, the choice to either “Load” or “Load and Activate” is given (“Load and
Activate” is only available for the active flight plan). “Loading” adds the approach to the end of the flight plan
without immediately using it for navigation guidance. This allows continued navigation via the intermediate
waypoints in the original flight plan, but keeps the procedure available for quick activation when needed.
“Activating” also adds the procedure to the end of the flight plan but immediately begins to provide guidance
to the first waypoint in the approach.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
When selecting an approach, a “GPS” designation to the right of the procedure name indicates the procedure
can be flown using the GPS receiver. Some procedures do not have this designation, meaning the GPS
receiver can be used for supplemental navigation guidance only. If the GPS receiver cannot be used for
primary guidance, the appropriate navigation receiver must be used for the selected approach (e.g., VOR or
ILS). The final course segment of ILS approaches, for example, must be flown by tuning the NAV receiver to
the proper frequency and selecting that NAV receiver on the CDI.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The SBAS GPS allows for flying LNAV, LNAV+V, LNAV/VNAV, LP, LP+V, and LPV approach service levels
according to the published chart. LNAV+V is an LNAV with advisory vertical guidance provided for assistance
in maintaining a constant vertical glidepath similar to an ILS glideslope on approach. This guidance is
displayed on the system PFD in the same location as the ILS glideslope using a magenta diamond. In all cases
where LNAV+V is indicated by the system during an approach, LNAV minima are used. The active approach
service level is annunciated on the HSI as shown in the following table:
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
HSI Annunciation
Description
Example on HSI
LNAV
RNAV GPS approach using published LNAV minima
LNAV+V
RNAV GPS approach using published LNAV minima. Advisory
vertical guidance is provided
L/VNAV
RNAV GPS approach using published LNAV/VNAV minima
(available only if (downgrades to LNAV if SBAS unavailable)
SBAS available)
LP
RNAV GPS approach using published LP minima (downgrades to
(available only if LNAV if SBAS unavailable)
SBAS available)
LP+V
RNAV GPS approach using published LP minima
Approach Service Level
- LNAV, LNAV+V, L/VNAV, LP, LP+V, LPV
(available only if Advisory vertical guidance is provided (downgrades to LNAV if
SBAS available) SBAS unavailable)
LPV
RNAV GPS approach using published LPV minima (downgrades
(available only if to LNAV if SBAS unavailable)
SBAS available)
Table 5-16 Approach Service Levels
238
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
LOADING AN APPROACH INTO THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
Loading an approach into the active flight plan using the PROC Key:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Press the PROC Key. The ‘Procedures’ Window is displayed.
2) Highlight ‘Select Approach’, and press the ENT Key. The Approach Loading Page/Window is displayed.
3) Select the airport and approach:
a) Use the FMS Knob to select an airport, if necessary, and press the ENT Key.
b) Select an approach from the list and press the ENT Key.
EIS
Or:
a) If necessary, push the FMS Knob to exit the approach list, and use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor
to the Approach Channel field.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
b) Use the FMS Knob to enter the approach channel number, and press the ENT Key to accept the approach
channel number. The airport and approach are selected.
4) Select a transition (if required) and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) Minimums
a) To set ‘Minimums’, turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘BARO’ or ‘TEMP COMP’, and press the ENT Key.
Turn the small FMS Knob to select the altitude, and press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
b) If ‘TEMP COMP’ was selected, the cursor moves to the temperature field. Turn the small FMS Knob to
select the temperature, and press the ENT Key.
Or:
To skip setting minimums, press the ENT Key.
6) Press the ENT Key with ‘Load?’ highlighted to load the approach procedure; or turn the large FMS Knob to
highlight ‘Activate’ and press the ENT Key to load and activate the approach procedure.
AFCS
NOTE: When GPS is not approved for the selected final approach course, the message ‘NOT APPROVED
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
FOR GPS’ is displayed. GPS provides guidance to the approach, but the HSI must to be switched to a NAV
receiver to fly the final course of the approach.
NOTE: If there is no arrival procedure in the active flight plan, loading an approach after a destination
airport has already been entered will result in a duplicate destination airport waypoint being added to the
end of the enroute segment.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
239
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Destination Airport
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Available Procedure Actions
Loaded Procedures
Approach Preview
Approach Choices
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-76 Approach Selection
Loaded Approach
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selected Approach
APPENDICES
Procedure Loading Page Selection Softkeys LOAD or ACTIVATE? Annunciation
Figure 5-77 Approach Loading
Loading an approach into the active flight plan from the Nearest Airport Page:
1) Select the ‘NRST - Nearest Airports’ Page.
INDEX
2) Press the FMS Knob, then turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired nearest airport. The airport is
previewed on the map.
240
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
3) Press the APR Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select Approach Window’, and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired approach.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
5) Press the LD APR Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Load Approach’, and press the ENT Key. The
‘PROC - Approach Loading’ Page is displayed with the transition field highlighted.
6) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired transition, and press the ENT Key.
7) Minimums
a) To set ‘Minimums’, turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘BARO’ or ‘TEMP COMP’, and press the ENT Key.
Turn the small FMS Knob to select the altitude, and press the ENT Key.
EIS
b) If ‘TEMP COMP’ was selected, the cursor moves to the temperature field. Turn the small FMS Knob to
select the temperature, and press the ENT Key.
Or:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
To skip setting minimums, press the ENT Key. ‘Load?’ is highlighted.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
8) Press the ENT Key with ‘Load?’ highlighted to load the approach procedure; or turn the large FMS Knob to
highlight ‘Activate’ and press the ENT Key to load and activate the approach procedure. The system continues
navigating the current flight plan until the approach is activated. When GPS is not approved for the selected
final approach course, the message ‘NOT APPROVED FOR GPS’ is displayed. GPS provides guidance to the
approach, but the HSI must to be switched to a NAV receiver to fly the final course of the approach.
ACTIVATING AN APPROACH
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
A previously loaded approach can be activated from the Procedures Window.
Activating a previously loaded approach:
1) Press the PROC Key. The ‘Procedures’ Window is displayed with ‘Activate Approach’ highlighted.
2) Press the ENT Key to activate the approach.
AFCS
In many cases, it may be easiest to “load” the full approach while still some distance away, enroute to the
destination airport. Later, if vectored to final, use the steps below to select ‘Activate Vector-To-Final’ — which
makes the inbound course to the FAF waypoint active.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Activating a previously loaded approach with vectors to final:
1) Press the PROC Key to display the ‘Procedures‘ Window.
2) Highlight ‘Activate Vector-to-Final’ and press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
Loading and activating an approach using the MENU Key:
1) From the ‘PROC - Approach Loading’ Page, press the MENU Key on the MFD. The page menu is displayed with
‘Load & Activate Approach’ highlighted.
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
INDEX
2) Press the ENT Key. When GPS is not approved for the selected final approach course, the message ‘NOT
APPROVED FOR GPS’ is displayed. GPS provides guidance to the approach, but the HSI must to be switched to
a NAV receiver to fly the final course of the approach.
241
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
REMOVING AN APPROACH FROM THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
When plans change while flying IFR, approaches can be easily removed from the Active Flight Plan.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Removing an approach from the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the ‘Flight Plan’ Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key, and highlight ‘Remove Approach’.
3) Press the ENT Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the approach procedure.
EIS
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
Or:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the ‘Flight Plan’ Window (PFD).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the approach header in the active flight plan.
3) Press the CLR Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the approach procedure.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
MISSED APPROACH
Activating a missed approach in the active flight plan:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the PROC Key.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Activate Missed Approach’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The aircraft automatically sequences to the MAHP.
Or:
AFCS
Fly past the MAP, and press the SUSP Softkey on the PFD.
Or:
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Press the Go-Around Button.
242
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
In this missed approach procedure, the altitude immediately following the MAP (in this case ‘6600ft’) is
not part of the published procedure. It is simply a Course to Altitude (CA) leg which guides the aircraft along
the runway centerline until the altitude required to safely make the first turn toward the MAHP is exceeded.
This altitude is provided by the navigation database, and may be below, equal to, or above the published
minimums for this approach. In this case, if the aircraft altitude is below the specified altitude (6,600 feet)
after crossing the MAP, a direct-to is established to provide a course on runway heading until an altitude of
6,600 feet is reached. After reaching 6,600 feet, a direct-to is established to the published MAHP (in this case
ADANE). If the aircraft altitude is above the specified altitude after crossing the MAP, a direct-to is established
to the published fix (ADANE) to begin the missed approach procedure.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Course to Altitude Leg
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-78 Course to Altitude
AFCS
In some missed approach procedures this Course to Altitude leg may be part of the published procedure.
For example, a procedure may dictate a climb to 5,500 feet, then turn left and proceed to the Missed Approach
Hold Point (MAHP). In this case, the altitude would appear in the list of waypoints as ‘5500ft’. Again, if the
aircraft altitude is lower than the prescribed altitude, a direct-to is established on a Course to Altitude leg
when the missed approach procedure is activated.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
243
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
VISUAL APPROACH
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The system provides a visual approach feature. Unlike instrument approaches, visual approaches are not
defined in the navigation database and do not follow a precise prescribed path. Instead, the system calculates
the lateral and vertical path for the chosen runway and creates visual approach waypoints based on runway
position and course as specified in the navigation database.
EIS
Each visual approach will have two transitions, the straight in transition (STRAIGHT) and the Vectors-toFinal transition (VECTORS). The visual approach waypoints (fixes) consist of the initial fix (STRGHT), the
final approach fix (FINAL), and the missed approach point (RWxx). A 3 degree glide path is calculated from
the missed approach point up to each waypoint along the extended straight-in path.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
For visual approaches, the pilot is responsible for avoiding terrain, obstacles and traffic. Therefore, when
a visual approach is selected, the message “Obstacle clearance is not provided for visual approaches” is
displayed on the approach selection page and must be acknowledged before the visual approach is loaded
into the flight plan.
Loading and Activating a visual approach using the PROC Key:
1) Press the PROC Key. The ‘Procedures’ Window is displayed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Highlight ‘Select Approach’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘Approach Loading’ Page is displayed.
3) Select the airport and approach:
a) Use the FMS Knob to select an airport, if necessary, and press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
b) Select a visual approach from the list and press the ENT Key.
4) Select a transition and press the ENT Key.
5) Minimums
a) To set ‘Minimums’, turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘BARO’ or ‘TEMP COMP’, and press the ENT Key.
Turn the small FMS Knob to select the altitude, and press the ENT Key.
AFCS
b) If ‘TEMP COMP’ was selected, the cursor moves to the temperature field. Turn the small FMS Knob to
select the temperature, and press the ENT Key.
Or:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
To skip setting minimums, press the ENT Key.
6) Press the ENT Key with ‘Load?’ highlighted to load the approach procedure or turn the large FMS Knob to
highlight ‘Activate?’ and press the ENT Key to load and activate the approach procedure.
INDEX
APPENDICES
7) The message ‘Obstacle clearance is not provided for visual approaches’ is displayed. Press ENT to continue.
244
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-79 Loading Visual Approach
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
245
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
TEMPERATURE COMPENSATED ALTITUDE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
If desired, the system can compensate the loaded approach altitudes based on a pilot-supplied temperature
at the destination. For example, if the pilot enters a destination temperature of -40º C, the system increases
the approach altitudes accordingly. A temperature compensated altitude is displayed in white text with a
snowflake icon next to it.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Manually inputting the temperature for compensation is explained in the following procedures. However
the system already automatically offsets the lateral position of the baro-VNAV bottom of descent without
manual input. Once calculated, the VNAV function seamlessly applies the lateral adjustment to the baroVNAV descent path so that a smooth transition onto the approach vertical path occurs. For example, on a day
with temperatures colder than ISA, the baro-VNAV path will typically be below the actual approach descent
path. The system will automatically adjust for this by calculating a lateral distance prior to the FAF which is
applied to ensure the baro-VNAV path intersects the approach descent path.
NOTE: Manually specifying temperature compensation for an approach will disrupt the system from
automatically creating a lateral offset of the VNAV function in use.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NOTE: Initiating the VNAV direct-to function or manually specifying an FPA at the FAF will disrupt the VNAV
function from creating a lateral offset. Thus, temperature is not compensated for and the baro-VNAV path
and may not intersect the approach descent path.
Manually activating temperature compensated altitude:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) From the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page, press the MENU Key on the MFD. The ‘Page Menu’ Window is displayed.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Temperature Compensation’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Temperature Compensation’ Window is displayed.
AFCS
4) Use the small FMS Knob to select the temperature at the <airport>. The compensated altitude is computed as
the temperature is selected.
NOTE: The temperature at the destination can be entered in the Temperature Compensation Window on the
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
MFD, or in the References Window on the PFD. There is only one compensation temperature for the system,
therefore, changing the temperature will affect both the loaded approach altitudes and the minimums.
Refer to the Flight Instruments section for information about applying temperature compensation to the
MDA/DH.
APPENDICES
5) Press the ENT Key. ‘Activate Compensation?’ is highlighted.
INDEX
6) Press the ENT Key. The compensated altitudes for the approach are shown in the flight plan.
246
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selected
Temperature
FAF Altitude
Compensated
Altitude
EIS
Temperature
Compensation
Selected
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-80 Temperature Compensation
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Compensated
Altitudes
Uncompensated
Altitudes
AFCS
Figure 5-81 Temperature Compensation in the Active Flight Plan
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Cancelling temperature compensated altitude:
1) From the Active Flight Plan Page, press the MENU Key. The ‘Page Menu’ Window is displayed.
APPENDICES
2) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Temperature Compensation’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The Temperature Compensation Window is displayed.
4) Press the ENT Key. ‘Cancel Compensation?’ is highlighted.
5) Press the ENT Key. The manual entry for temperature compensated altitude is cancelled.
INDEX
NOTE: Activating/cancelling temperature compensation for the loaded approach altitudes does not select/
deselect temperature compensated minimums (MDA/DH), nor does selecting/deselecting temperature
compensated minimums activate/cancel temperature compensated approach altitudes.
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
247
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5.9 TRIP PLANNING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The system allows the pilot to view trip planning information, fuel information, and other information for
a specified flight plan or flight plan leg based on automatic data, or based on manually entered data. Weight
planning is also available, based on manually entered fuel data and the active flight plan (to estimate remaining
fuel).
TRIP PLANNING
EIS
All of the input of data needed for calculation and viewing of the statistics is done on the Trip Planning Page
located in the Aux Page Group.
Selected Flight Plan Segment
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
- FPL Number/Cumulative Legs (CUM or REM) or Leg Number (NN)
- Waypoints Defining Selected Flight Plan/Flight Plan Leg
Trip Planning Page Mode
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- Automatic/Manual
Preview of Selected
Flight Plan/
Flight Plan Leg
Trip Statistics
Trip Input Data (sensor/pilot)
- Departure Time (local)
- Ground Speed
- Fuel Flow
- Fuel On Board Aircraft
- Calibrated Airspeed
- Indicated Altitude
- Barometric Pressure
- Total Air Temperature
AFCS
Desired Track Distance Est. Time Enroute Est. Time of Arrival Enroute Safe Altitude Sunrise Time (local) Sunset Time (local) -
Other Statistics
- Density Altitude
- True Airspeed (TAS)
Fuel Statistics
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Efficiency Total Endurance Remaining Fuel Remaining Endurance Fuel Required Total Range -
Softkeys
- Automatic/Manual Page Mode
- Flight Plan/Waypoint Mode
Figure 5-82 Trip Planning Page
APPENDICES
The trip planning inputs are based on sensor inputs (automatic page mode) or on pilot inputs (manual page
mode). Some additional explanation of the sources for some of the inputs is as follows:
• Departure Time - This defaults to the current time in automatic page mode. The computations are from the
aircraft present position, so the aircraft is always just departing.
• Calibrated Airspeed - The primary source is from the air data system, and the secondary source of information
is GPS ground speed.
INDEX
• Indicated Altitude - The primary source is the barometric altitude, and the secondary source of information
is GPS altitude.
248
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TRIP STATISTICS
The trip statistics are calculated based on the selected starting and ending waypoints and the trip planning
inputs.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
In flight plan mode (FPL) with a stored flight plan selected (NN), and the entire flight plan (CUM) selected,
the waypoints are the starting and ending waypoints of the selected flight plan.
In flight plan mode (FPL) with a stored flight plan selected (NN), and a specific leg (NN) selected, the
waypoints are the endpoints of the selected leg.
EIS
In flight plan mode (FPL) with the active flight plan selected (00), and the remaining flight plan (REM)
selected, the ‘from’ waypoint is the present position of the aircraft and the ‘to’ waypoint is the endpoint of the
active flight plan.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
In flight plan mode (FPL) with the active flight plan selected (00), and a specific leg (NN) selected, the
‘from’ waypoint is the current aircraft position and the ‘to’ waypoint is the endpoint of the selected leg.
In waypoint (WPTs) mode these are manually selected waypoints (if there is an active flight plan, these
default to the endpoints of the active leg).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Some of the calculated trip statistics are dashed when the selected leg of the active flight plan has already
been flown.
• Desired Track - Desired Track is shown as nnn° and is the desired track between the selected waypoints.
It is dashed unless only a single leg is selected.
• Distance - The distance is shown in tenths of units up to 99.9, and in whole units up to 9999.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Estimated time enroute (ETE) - ETE is shown as hours:minutes until less than an hour, then it is shown
as minutes:seconds.
• Estimated time of arrival (ETA) - ETA is shown as hours:minutes and is the local time at the destination.
- If in waypoint mode then the ETA is the ETE added to the departure time.
AFCS
- If a flight plan other than the active flight plan is selected it shows the ETA by adding to the departure
time all of the ETEs of the legs up to and including the selected leg. If the entire flight plan is selected,
then the ETA is calculated as if the last leg of the flight plan was selected.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
- If the active flight plan is selected the ETA reflects the current position of the aircraft and the current
leg being flown. The ETA is calculated by adding to the current time the ETEs of the current leg up to
and including the selected leg. If the entire flight plan is selected, then the ETA is calculated as if the
last leg of the flight plan was selected.
• Enroute safe altitude (ESA) - The ESA is shown as nnnnnFT
APPENDICES
• Destination sunrise and sunset times - These times are shown as hours:minutes of the time at the
destination.
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
249
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FUEL STATISTICS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The fuel statistics are calculated based on the selected starting and ending waypoints and the trip planning
inputs. Some of the calculated trip statistics are dashed when the selected leg of the active flight plan has
already been flown.
• Fuel efficiency (Efficiency) - This value is calculated by dividing the current ground speed by the current
fuel flow.
• Time of fuel endurance (Total Endurance) - This time is shown as hours:minutes. This value is obtained
by dividing the amount of fuel on board by the current fuel flow.
EIS
• Fuel on board upon reaching end of selected leg (Remaining Fuel) - This value is calculated by taking the
amount of fuel onboard and subtracting the fuel required to reach the end of the selected leg.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Fuel endurance remaining at end of selected leg (Remaining Endurance) - This value is calculated by taking
the time of fuel endurance and subtracting the estimated time enroute to the end of the selected leg.
• Fuel required for trip (Fuel Required) - This value is calculated by multiplying the time to go by the fuel
flow.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Total range at entered fuel flow (Total Range) - This value is calculated by multiplying the time of fuel
endurance by the ground speed.
OTHER STATISTICS
These statistics are calculated based on the system sensor inputs or the manual trip planning inputs.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Density Altitude
• True Airspeed
The pilot may select Automatic or Manual page mode, and flight plan (FPL) or waypoint (WPTs) mode. In
automatic page mode, only the FPL, LEG, or waypoint IDs are editable (based on FPL/WPTs selection).
Selected Leg(s)
AFCS
Selected Flight Plan NN -
00 is Active FPL
01-99 are Stored FPLs
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Starting and Ending Waypoint of
Selected Flight Plan Segment
Stored Flight Plan
- CUM: Beginning to End of FPL
- NN: Beginning to End of Selected Leg
Active Flight Plan
- REM: Pres. Pos. to End of FPL
- NN: Pres. Pos. to End of Selected Leg
Figure 5-83 Trip Planning Page - Flight Plan Mode
Selected Flight Plan
Selected Leg(s)
APPENDICES
Not Available
Not Available
Selected Starting and Ending Waypoints
INDEX
Figure 5-84 Trip Planning Page - Waypoint Mode
250
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Selecting automatic or manual page mode:
From the ‘Aux - Trip Planning’ Page, press the Auto Softkey or the Manual Softkey; or press the MENU Key,
highlight ‘Auto Mode’ or ‘Manual Mode’, and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selecting flight plan or waypoint mode:
From the ‘Aux - Trip Planning’ Page, press the FPL Softkey or the WPTs Softkey; or press the MENU Key,
highlight ‘Flight Plan Mode’ or ‘Waypoints Mode’, and press the ENT Key.
Selecting a flight plan and leg for trip statistics:
EIS
1) From the ‘Aux - Trip Planning’ Page, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor in the ‘FPL’ Field.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired flight plan number.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘CUM’ or ‘REM’. The statistics for each leg can be viewed by turning the
small FMS Knob to select the desired leg. The Trip Planning Map also displays the selected data.
Selecting waypoints for waypoint mode:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) From the ‘Aux - Trip Planning’ Page, press the WPTs Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Waypoints
Mode’, and press the ENT Key. The cursor is positioned in the waypoint field directly below the FPL field.
2) Turn the FMS knobs to select the desired waypoint (or select from the Page Menu ‘Set WPT to Present Position’
if that is what is desired), and press the ENT Key. The cursor moves to the second waypoint field.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Turn the FMS knobs to select the desired waypoint, and press the ENT Key. The statistics for the selected leg
are displayed.
In manual page mode, the other eight trip input data fields must be entered by the pilot, in addition to flight
plan and leg selection.
Entering manual data for trip statistics calculations:
AFCS
1) From the ‘Aux - Trip Planning’ Page, press the Manual Softkey or select ‘Manual Mode’ from the Page Menu,
and press the ENT Key. The cursor may now be positioned in any field in the top right two boxes.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Turn the FMS Knobs to move the cursor onto the ‘Departure Time’ Field and enter the desired value. Press the
ENT Key. The statistics are calculated using the new value and the cursor moves to the next entry field. Repeat
until all desired values have been entered.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
251
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5.10 ABNORMAL OPERATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: The Inset Map is removed from the PFD any time aircraft pitch is greater than +30° or less than –20°,
or when a 65° bank angle is reached.
This section discusses the Dead Reckoning mode of operation and the subsequent indications.
NOTE: Dead Reckoning Mode only functions in Enroute (ENR) or Oceanic (OCN) phase of flight. In all other
EIS
phases, an invalid GPS solution produces a “NO GPS POSITION” annunciation on the map and the system
stops using GPS.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
It is important to note that estimated navigation data supplied by the system in DR Mode may become increasingly
unreliable and must not be used as a sole means of navigation. If while in DR Mode airspeed and/or heading data
is also lost or not available, the DR function may not be capable of accurately tracking estimated position and,
consequently, the system may display a path that is different than the actual movement of the aircraft. Estimated
position information displayed by the system through DR while there is no heading and/or airspeed data available
should not be used for navigation.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
DR Mode is inherently less accurate than the standard GPS/SBAS Mode due to the lack of satellite measurements
needed to determine a position. Changes in wind speed and/or wind direction compound the relative inaccuracy
of DR Mode. Because of this degraded accuracy, other navigation equipment must be relied upon for position
awareness until GPS-derived position data is restored.
AFCS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
While in Enroute or Oceanic phase of flight, if the system detects an invalid GPS solution or is unable to
calculate a GPS position, the system automatically reverts to Dead Reckoning (DR) Mode. In DR Mode, the system
uses its last-known position combined with continuously updated airspeed and heading data (when available) to
calculate and display the aircraft’s current estimated position.
DR Mode is indicated on the system by the appearance of the letters ‘DR’ superimposed in amber over the ‘own
aircraft’ symbol as shown in Figure 5-85. In addition, ‘DR’ is prominently displayed in amber on the HSI slightly
below and to the left of the aircraft symbol on the CDI as shown in Figure 5-85. The CDI deviation bar is removed
from the display in DR Mode. Lastly, but at the same time, a ‘GPS NAV LOST’ alert message appears on the PFD.
Normal navigation using GPS/SBAS source data resumes automatically once a valid GPS solution is restored.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
As a result of operating in DR Mode, all GPS-derived data is computed based upon an estimated position and
is displayed as amber text on the display to denote degraded navigation source information as shown in Figure
5-85. If the VSD Inset is selected on the MFD, ‘VSD Not Available’ will be displayed.
APPENDICES
NOTE: GPS derived information will remain displayed in magenta (not amber) on the Flight Plan Progress
inset when operating in Dead Reckoning mode. However, this information shall still be considered as
degraded navigation source information.
INDEX
Also, while the system is in DR Mode, some terrain functions are not available. Additionally, the accuracy of
all nearest information (airports, airspaces, and waypoints) is questionable. Finally, airspace alerts continue to
function, but with degraded accuracy.
252
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Distance &
Bearing
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Current
Track
Indicator
GPS Navigation
Lost Message
EIS
Course Deviation
Indicator Removed
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Dead Reckoning
Annunciation
Bearing
Pointer/
Distance
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Nav Data Bar
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
All data except
Active Leg, TAS,
and DTK are in
amber
Dead Reckoning
Annunciation
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-85 Dead Reckoning Mode - GPS Derived Data Shown in Amber
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
253
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Blank Page
254
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 6 HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Hazard avoidance features available for the system are designed to aid situational awareness and provide advisory
information with regard to potential hazards to flight safety associated with weather, terrain, and air traffic.
Weather
• GDL 69 SXM/69A SXM SiriusXM Weather (Subscription Optional)
• Flight Information Services-Broadcast (FIS-B) (Optional)
• L-3 WX-500 Stormscope® Lightning Detection System
EIS
Terrain Avoidance
• Terrain Awareness and Warning System Class-B (TAWS-B)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Traffic
• Garmin GTS 800 Traffic Advisory System (TAS) (Optional)
• Garmin GTX 345 Automatic Dependent Surveillance-Broadcast (ADS-B) Traffic
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
255
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6.1 DATA LINK WEATHER
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: Do not use data link weather information for maneuvering in, near, or around areas of hazardous
weather. Information contained within data link weather products may not accurately depict current
weather conditions.
WARNING: Do not use the indicated data link weather product age to determine the age of the weather
EIS
information shown by the data link weather product. Due to time delays inherent in gathering and processing
weather data for data link transmission, the weather information shown by the data link weather product
may be older than the indicated weather product age.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The Data Link Weather feature enables the system to receive weather information from a variety of weather
sources, depending on the equipment installed in the aircraft. These sources may include SiriusXM Weather and
Flight Information Services-Broadcast (FIS-B). For each source, a ground-based system processes the weather
information collected from a network of sensors and weather data providers.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The SiriusXM Weather service, available with the GDL 69 SXM and GDL 69A SXM data link receiver and an active
service subscription, updates its weather data periodically and automatically, and transmits this information to the
aircraft’s receiver via satellite on the S-Band frequency. This service provides continuous reception capabilities at
any altitude throughout North America.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The FIS-B Weather service, available when equipped with a capable transponder or data link receiver which
can receive 978 MHz Universal Access Transceiver (UAT) data, delivers subscription-free weather information
periodically and automatically to the aircraft. FIS-B uses a network of FAA-operated Ground-Based Transceivers
(GBTs) to transmit the information to the aircraft’s receiver. Reception is limited to line-of-sight, and is available
below 24,000 feet MSL in the United States. FIS-B broadcasts provide weather data in a repeating cycle which
may take approximately ten minutes to transmit all available weather data. Therefore, not all weather data may
be present immediately upon initial FIS-B signal acquisition. FIS-B is a component of the Automatic Dependent
Surveillance (ADS-B) system, which offers both weather and traffic data; refer to the ADS-B Traffic discussion later
in this section for a more detailed discussion of the ADS-B system and its capabilities.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
ACTIVATING DATA LINK WEATHER SERVICES
NOTE: Service activation is not applicable to the FIS-B Weather service.
ACTIVATING THE SIRIUSXM WEATHER SERVICE
APPENDICES
Before SiriusXM Weather can be used, the service must be activated by providing SiriusXM’s customer
service the coded ID(s) unique to the installed data link receiver. The Data Radio ID must be provided to
activate the weather service. A separate Audio Radio ID, if present, enables the receiver to provide SiriusXM
Radio entertainment. To view this information, refer to the following locations:
• The ‘Aux - XM Information’ Page on the MFD
INDEX
• The SiriusXM Activation Instructions included with the Data Link Receiver
• The label on the back of the Data Link Receiver
256
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SiriusXM uses the coded IDs to send an activation signal that allows the system to display weather data and/
or provide audio entertainment programming through the data link receiver.
Establishing an account for SiriusXM services:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Select the XM Radio Page in the Aux Page Group.
2) If necessary, press the Info Softkey to display the ‘Aux - XM Information’ Page.
3) Note the Data Radio ID (for SiriusXM Weather data) and/or the Audio Radio ID (for SiriusXM Satellite Radio).
4) Contact SiriusXM customer service through the phone number listed on its website, www.siriusxm.com.
EIS
5) Provide SiriusXM customer service the Data Radio ID and/or Audio Radio ID, in addition to payment information,
and the desired weather product subscription package.
After SiriusXM has been contacted, it may take approximately 15 minutes until the activation occurs.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Verifying the SiriusXM Weather service activation:
1) Once a SiriusXM Weather account has been established, select the XM Radio Page in the Auxiliary Page Group.
2) If necessary, press the Info Softkey to display the ‘Aux - XM Information’ Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) View the list of supported Weather Products. A white empty box appears next to an unavailable weather
product; a green filled box appears next to an available weather product. During activation, it may take several
minutes for weather products in the selected subscription package to become available.
NOTE: Not all weather products offered by SiriusXM are supported for display on this system. This pilot’s
Data Radio ID
(for SiriusXM
Weather
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
guide only discusses supported weather products.
AFCS
Audio Radio ID
(for SiriusXM Satellite
Radio)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Weather Products
(Available Products for
Service Class Indicated
in Green)
APPENDICES
Select to Display XM
Information page
Figure 6-1 XM Information Page
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
257
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
WEATHER PRODUCT AGE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Unlike real-time weather information collected directly from weather sensors on-board an aircraft, such as an
airborne weather radar or a lightning detection system, data link weather by contrast relies on service providers
to collect, process, and transmit weather information to the aircraft. This information can come from a variety
of sources such as government agencies. Due to the time it takes to collect, process, and distribute data link
weather information, it is imperative for pilots to understand that data link weather information is not real-time
information and may not accurately depict the current conditions.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
For each data link weather product which can be displayed as a map overlay, such as radar precipitation,
the system can also show a weather product age. This age represents the elapsed time, in minutes, since the
weather service provider compiled the weather product and the current time. It does not represent the age of the
information contained within the weather product itself. For example, a single mosaic of radar precipitation is
comprised data from multiple radar sites providing data at differing scan rates or intervals. The weather service
provider periodically compiles this data to create a single composite image, and assigns one time to this image
which becomes the basis of the product age. The service provider then makes this weather product available for
data link transmission at the next scheduled update time. The actual age of the weather data contained within
the mosaic is therefore older than its weather product age and should never be considered current.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
SiriusXM and FIS-B weather products are broadcast automatically on a repeating cycle without pilot
intervention.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Each data link weather product age has an expiration time. The weather product age is shown in white if it
is less than half of this expiration time, otherwise it is shown in amber until reaching its expiration time. After
a weather product has expired, the system removes the expired weather product from the displays, and shows
white dashes instead of the age. If the data link receiver has not yet received a weather product ‘N/A’ appears
instead of the age to show the product is currently not available for display. This may occur, for example, after
powering on the system but before the data link receiver has received a complete weather data transmission. It
could also indicate a possible outage of a weather product.
AFCS
The weather product age is shown automatically for weather products displayed on MFD maps. For PFD
maps, the pilot can manually enable/disable the age information.
Enabling/disabling the weather product age for PFD Maps:
1) Press the Map/HSI Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the Layout Softkey.
3) Press the WX LGND to show/remove the weather product age information for PFD maps.
4) Press the Back Softkey twice to return to the top-level softkeys.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Tables 6-1 and 6-2 show the weather product symbols, the expiration times and the broadcast rates for
SiriusXM Weather and FIS-B Weather, respectively. The broadcast rate represents the interval at which the
SiriusXM Weather service transmits new signals that may or may not contain updated weather product
information. It does not represent the rate at which the weather information is updated or when the Data Link
Receiver receives new data. The service provider and its weather data suppliers define and control the data
update intervals, which are subject to change.
258
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Symbol
NEXRAD
Expiration Time
(Minutes)
30
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SiriusXM Weather Product
Broadcast Rate
(Minutes)
Cloud Top (CLD TOP)
60
Echo Top (ECHO TOP)
30
7.5
SiriusXM Lightning (LTNG)
30
5
Cell Movement
30
1.25
SIGMETs/AIRMETs
60
12
METARs
90
12
City Forecast
90
12
Surface Analysis
60
12
Freezing Levels
120
12
Winds Aloft
90
12
County Warnings
60
5
Cyclone Warnings
60
12
Icing Potential (CIP and SLD)
90
22
Pilot Weather Report (PIREP)
90
12
Air Report(AIREP)
90
12
Turbulence
180
12
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
5 (U.S.)
10 (Canada)
30
INDEX
12
APPENDICES
60
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
No product image
AFCS
Terminal Aerodrome Forecast (TAF)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
5
12
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
30
60
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
No product image
EIS
Radar Coverage Not Available
Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR)
Table 6-1 SiriusXM Weather Product Symbols and Data Timing
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
259
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Expiration Time
(Minutes)
Broadcast Rate
(Minutes)
NEXRAD Composite (US)
30
15
NEXRAD Composite (Regional)
30
2.5
METARs
90
5
Pilot Weather Report (PIREP)
90
10
Winds Aloft
90
10
SIGMETs/AIRMETs
60
5
Symbol
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FIS-B Weather Product
No Radar Coverage
no product image
30
2.5
Terminal Aerodrome Forecast
(TAF)
no product image
60
10
Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR)
10
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Table 6-2 FIS-B Weather Product Symbols and Data Timing
DISPLAYING DATA LINK WEATHER PRODUCTS
WEATHER DATA LINK PAGE
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
The Map - Weather Data Link (XM/FIS-B) Page is the principal map page for viewing data link weather
information. This page provides the capability for displaying the most data link weather products of any map
on the system. The Weather Data Link Page also provides system-wide controls for selecting the data link
weather source, if more than one source has been installed. The page title indicates the selected data link
weather source (e.g., “XM”, “FIS-B”).
260
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NEXRAD Weather
Product Display
Enabled Icon
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NEXRAD Weather
Product Age (US)
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NEXRAD
Weather Product
Selected for
Display
Figure 6-2 Weather Data Link (XM) Page
Viewing the Weather Data Link Page and changing the data link weather source, if applicable:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Weather Data Link (XM or FIS-B) Page. The currently selected data link
weather source appears in the page title.
3) If the page title does not contain the desired weather source, press the MENU Key.
b)
AFCS
a) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Display XM Weather’, or ‘Display FIS-B Weather’ (choices may vary
depending on the installed equipment).
Press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 6-3 Changing the Data Link Weather Source
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
INDEX
The system presents the softkeys for the selected source on the Weather Data Link Page, and for map
overlays used throughout the system. The following figures show the softkeys for the Weather Data Link Page
based on the selected source.
261
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
The system presents the softkeys for the selected source on the Weather Data Link Page, and for map overlays
used throughout the system. The following figures show the softkeys for the Weather Data Link Page based on
the selected source.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WEATHER DATA LINK (XM) PAGE SOFTKEYS
NOTE: Softkeys not related to data link weather are not shown in the following tables.
EIS
Level 1
NEXRAD
Level 2
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Echo Top
CLD Top
XM LTNG
Cell MOV
SIG/AIR
METAR
Legend
More WX
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Cyclone
SFC
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
FRZ LVL
Wind
ICNG
262
Level 3
Description
Enables/disables the NEXRAD weather product overlay.
Enables/disables the Echo Tops weather product overlay.
Enables/disables the Cloud Tops weather product overlay.
Enables/disables the SiriusXM Lightning weather product overlay.
Enables/disables the Cell Movement weather product overlay.
Enables/disables the SIGMET/AIRMET weather product overlay.
Enables/disables the graphical METAR weather product overlay.
Enables/disables the SiriusXM Weather Legends Window. Softkey available
for selection when at least one SiriusXM Weather product is enabled.
Displays second-level SiriusXM Weather product softkeys.
Enables/disables the Cyclone weather product overlay.
Displays third level softkey for enabling/disabling the Surface Analysis and
City Forecast weather product and selecting a forecast period.
Disables the Surface Analysis and City Forecast weather product overlay.
Displays the Surface Analysis for the current time period overlay.
Off
Current
12 HR, 24 HR, 36 HR, These softkeys display a Surface Analysis and City Forecast overlay for the
selected future time period.
48 HR
Enables/disables the SiriusXM Weather Legends Window. Softkey available
Legend
for selection when at least one SiriusXM Weather product is enabled.
Returns to the second-level softkeys.
Back
Enables/disables the Freezing Level weather product overlay.
Displays third level softkeys for enabling/disabling the Winds Aloft weather
product and selecting a winds aloft altitude.
Shows the previous level of winds aloft altitude softkeys.
PREV
Disables the Winds Aloft weather product overlay.
Off
Softkeys available for Enables/disables the Winds Aloft weather product for the surface (SFC)
selecting winds from through 15,000 feet. Softkeys available for 3,000 foot increments of
the Surface to 42,0000 altitude.
feet
Shows the next level of winds aloft altitude softkeys.
Next
Enables/disables the SiriusXM Weather Legends Window. Softkey available
Legend
for selection when at least one SiriusXM Weather product is enabled.
Returns to the second-level softkeys.
Back
Displays altitude softkeys for the Icing weather product overlay.
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Level 2
Level 3
PREV
Off
Shows the next level of Icing weather product softkeys.
Enables/disables the SiriusXM Weather Legends Window. Softkey available
for selection when at least one SiriusXM Weather product is enabled.
Returns to the second-level softkeys.
Enables/disables the AIREPs weather product overlay.
Enables/disables the PIREPs weather product overlay.
Enables/disables the County Warnings weather product overlay.
Returns to the first level softkeys.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
AIREPS
PIREPS
County
Back
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Back
Shows the next level of Icing weather product softkeys.
Enables/disables the SiriusXM Weather Legends Window. Softkey available
for selection when at least one SiriusXM Weather product is enabled.
Displays softkeys for enabling/disabling the Turbulence weather product
overlay.
Shows the previous level of Turbulence altitude softkeys.
Disables the Turbulence weather product overlay.
Enables/disables the Icing weather product overlay from 21,000 feet to
45,000 feet. Softkeys available for 3,000 foot increments of altitude.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
PREV
Off
Softkeys available for
selecting Turbulence
altitude from 21,000
feet to 45,000 feet
Next
Legend
Enables/disables the Icing weather product overlay from 1,000 feet to
30,000 feet. Softkeys available for 3,000 foot increments of altitude.
EIS
TURB
Description
Shows the previous level of Icing altitude softkeys.
Disables the Icing weather product.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Softkeys available for
selecting winds from
the Icing altitude from
to 1,000 to 30,000 feet
Next
Legend
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Level 1
WEATHER DATA LINK (FIS-B) PAGE SOFTKEYS
Level 3
Description
Cycles through NEXRAD display modes with each press:
NEXRAD (with annunciator disabled): No NEXRAD is shown.
US: Displays NEXRAD data for the Continental US (CONUS).
RGNL: Displays regional NEXRAD data.
APPENDICES
US/RGNL: Displays regional NEXRAD data where available, and CONUS
NEXRAD data in other coverage areas.
Enables/disables the SIGMET/AIRMET weather product overlay.
Enables/disables the METAR weather product overlay.
Enables/disables the Connext Weather Legends Window. Softkey available
for selection when at least one Connext Weather product is enabled.
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Level 2
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Level 1
NEXRAD
or
US
or
RGNL
or
US/RGNL
SIG/AIR
METAR
Legend
263
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Level 1
Level 2
More WX
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Wind
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
PIREPs
Back
Level 3
Description
Displays second-level Connext Weather product softkeys.
Displays third level softkeys for enabling/disabling the Winds Aloft weather
product and selecting a winds aloft altitude.
Shows the previous level of winds aloft altitude softkeys.
PREV
Disables the Winds Aloft weather product overlay.
Off
Softkeys available for Enables/disables the Winds Aloft weather product for the surface (SFC)
selecting winds from through 15,000 feet. Softkeys available for 3,000 foot increments of
the Surface to 42,0000 altitude.
feet
Shows the next level of winds aloft altitude softkeys.
Next
Enables/disables the Connext Weather Legends Window. Softkey available
Legend
for selection when at least one Connext Weather product is enabled.
Returns to the second-level softkeys.
Back
Enables/disables the PIREPs weather product overlay.
Returns to the first level softkeys.
The Weather Data Link Page can display a legend for each enabled weather product.
Viewing legends for displayed weather products on the Weather Data Link Page:
1) Select the Weather Data Link Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the Legend Softkey to display the legends for the displayed weather products.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Select ‘Weather Legend’ and press the ENT Key.
AFCS
3) Turn the FMS Knob to scroll through the legends if more are available than fit in the window.
4) To remove the Weather Legends Window, press the Legend Softkey, the ENT or the CLR Key, or press the FMS
Knob.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Additional information about the following weather products can be displayed by panning the Map Pointer
over the following products on the Weather Data Link Page:
• Echo Tops
• METARs
• Cloud Tops
• County Warnings
• Cell Movement
• TFRs
• SIGMETs
• AIREPs
• AIRMETs
• PIREPs
INDEX
The map panning feature is enabled by pressing the Joystick. The map range is adjusted by turning the
Joystick. If the map range is adjusted while panning is enabled, the map is re-centered on the Map Pointer.
264
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Additional
Information
on Weather
Feature
Selected with
Map Pointer
EIS
Severe
Thunderstorm
Selected with Map
Pointer
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-4 Panning on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Certain weather products, such as METARs or TFRs have associated full text. When a weather product is
selected with the Map Pointer, press the ENT Key. The system displays the full text for the selected weather
product in a window. To remove the window, press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key.
The Weather Data Link Page also has a page menu that can be accessed by pressing the MENU Key. It has
controls for enabling/disabling the weather products as an alternative to using the softkeys.
AFCS
Customizing the Weather Data Link Page
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The Weather Data Link Page includes controls for selecting the maximum map range to display each
weather product on the page. If the pilot increases the map range beyond this selected maximum range,
the system removes the weather product from the map. If more than one data link weather source has been
installed, the system uses the same maximum map range for the comparable weather product of another
source.
Setting up and customizing the Weather Data Link Page:
APPENDICES
1) Select the Weather Data Link Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Weather Setup’, then press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Product Group 1’ or ‘Product Group 2’, and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
NOTE: ‘Product Group 2’ is not applicable to FIS-B Weather.
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
265
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (ON/OFF, range settings, etc.).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Weather Data Link Page with the changed settings.
Restoring default Weather Data Link Page settings:
1) Select the Weather Data Link Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
EIS
3) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Weather Setup’, then press the ENT Key.
4) Press the MENU Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) Highlight the desired default(s) to restore (all or for selection) and press ENT Key.
6) When finished, press the FMS Knob or press the CLR Key.
WEATHER PRODUCT MAP OVERLAYS
Cloud Top
+
Echo Top
+
Data Link Lightning
+
Cell Movement
APPENDICES
INDEX
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
METARs
266
+
+
SIGMETs/AIRMETs
+
+
+
Surface Analysis & City Forecast
+
Freezing Levels
+
Winds Aloft
Flight Plan Pages
+
Nearest Page Group
+
Weather Information Page
Weather Data Link Page
+
Aux - Trip Planning Page
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NEXRAD
Navigation Map Page
AFCS
Data Link Weather Product
PFD Map
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Other PFD and MFD maps and pages can display a smaller set of data link weather products. The following
table shows which data link weather products can be displayed on specific maps, indicated with a ‘+’ symbol.
+*
+
+
+
County Warnings
+
Cyclone Warnings
+
Icing Potential
+
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
+
+
+
+
TFRs
+
+
+
+
+
+
TAFs
+
+
+
+
+
+
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
No Radar Coverage
Flight Plan Pages
Turbulence (TURB)
Nearest Page Group
+
Aux - Trip Planning Page
Weather Information Page
+
Navigation Map Page
AIREPs
PFD Map
+
EIS
+
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
PIREPs
Data Link Weather Product
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Weather Data Link Page
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
* Winds Aloft data is available inside the VSD when VSD is enabled on the Navigation Map Page.
Table 6-3 Weather Product Display Maps
Displaying Data Link Weather Products on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the Map Opt Softkey.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Press the softkey to enable/disable the desired weather product.
The Navigation Map Page also can display legends for weather products enabled on this map with the
Legend Softkey. This softkey is subdued if no weather products are enabled.
Showing/removing the weather legend on the Navigation Map Page:
AFCS
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the Map Opt Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Press the Legend Softkey to show the weather legends window.
4) When finished, press the Legend Softkey again, or press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to remove the window.
APPENDICES
The Navigation Map Page also allows the pilot to select the maximum map range to display weather
products. If the pilot increases the map range beyond this selected maximum range, the system removes
the weather product from the map. The system uses this setting for all navigation maps, including those
displayed on the PFD.
Setting up and customizing weather data for the navigation maps:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
INDEX
3) With ‘Map Settings’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Weather’ Group and press the ENT Key.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections.
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
267
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (ON/OFF, range settings).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
The system can also display data link weather information on the PFD navigation maps.
Displaying Data Link Weather products on the PFD:
1) On the PFD, press the Map/HSI Softkey.
2) Press the desired weather product softkey(s) to enable/disable the display of data link products on the PFD map.
EIS
On the MFD maps, the weather product icon and age appear automatically when a weather is enabled and
the range is within the maximum display limits. On PFD maps, this information is available using the PFD
softkeys.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Enabling/disabling the weather product icon and age display (PFD maps):
1) On the PFD, press the Map/HSI Softkey.
2) Press the Layout Softkey.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Press the WX LGND Softkey to enable/disable the weather product age, source, and icon box display on PFD
Maps.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The setup menus for the Navigation Map Page and the Weather Data Link Page control the map range
settings above which weather products data are decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the
weather product map range setting is selected, the weather product data is removed from the map. The page
menus also provide an alternative to using the softkeys to enable/disable data link weather product overlays
on maps.
WEATHER PRODUCT OVERVIEW
AFCS
The following is an overview of data link weather products the system can display.
NEXRAD (SIRIUSXM)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NOTE: Datalink weather radar information cannot be displayed at the same time as terrain, echo tops, icing,
or turbulence data.
APPENDICES
The National Weather Service (NWS) operates the WSR-88D, or NEXRAD (NEXt-generation RADar)
system, an extensive network of 156 high-resolution Doppler radar systems. The NEXRAD network provides
centralized meteorological information for the continental United States and selected overseas locations. The
maximum range of a single NEXRAD site is 250 nm.
INDEX
Individual NEXRAD sites supply the network with radar images, and the images from each radar site may
arrive at the network at different rates and times. Periodically, the weather data provider compiles the available
individual site images from the network to form a composite image, and assigns a single time to indicate when
it created the image. This image becomes the NEXRAD weather product. Individual images--gathered from
each NEXRAD site--differ in age, and are always older than the displayed NEXRAD weather product age. The
data provider then sends the NEXRAD data to the SiriusXM Weather service, whose satellites transmit this
information during the next designated broadcast time for the NEXRAD weather product.
268
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Because of the time required to detect, assemble, and distribute the NEXRAD weather product, the displayed
weather information contained within the product may be significantly older than the current radar synopsis
and may not depict the current weather conditions. The NEXRAD weather product should never be used as a
basis for maneuvering in, near, or around areas of hazardous weather regardless of the information it contains.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-5 NEXRAD Weather Product on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page
AFCS
For radar sites in the United States, the NEXRAD weather product shows a composite reflectivity image.
This shows the highest radar energy received from multiple antenna tilt angles at various altitudes. For radar
sites based in Canada, the NEXRAD weather product shows radar returns from the lowest antenna tilt angle,
known as base reflectivity. The display of the information is color-coded to indicate the intensity of the echoes
and the type of precipitation, if known.
Displaying the NEXRAD weather product on the ‘Weather Data Link (XM)’ Page:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Select the ‘Weather Data Link (XM)’ Page.
2) Press the NEXRAD Softkey.
A mosaic of data from all the available NEXRAD radar sites is shown.
APPENDICES
INDEX
No Radar Coverage
Figure 6-6 NEXRAD Weather Product Legend
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
269
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Displaying the NEXRAD weather product on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Press the Map Opt Softkey.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the NEXRAD Softkey.
Displaying the NEXRAD weather product on PFD maps:
1) Press the Map/HSI Softkey.
2) Press the NEXRAD Softkey to enable/disable the display of NEXRAD information.
EIS
The display of No Radar Coverage is always active when either NEXRAD or Echo Tops is selected. Areas
where NEXRAD radar coverage and Echo Tops information is not currently available or is not being collected
are indicated in gray shade of purple.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The system can animate a loop of NEXRAD information on the ‘Weather Data Link (XM)’ Page. Animation
begins after the system has received at least two recent NEXRAD images since the avionics power cycle.
When animation is enabled, a timeline appears to the left of the NEXRAD weather product age display. The
large square on the timeline indicates the relative position of the displayed frame of animation, from oldest
to newest. The NEXRAD weather product age corresponds to the displayed frame. The system can show
up to six frames of NEXRAD animation when the USA coverage option is selected, and up to three frames of
animation when Canada is selected.
Displaying Time-Lapse NEXRAD Animation on the ‘Weather Data Link (XM)’ Page:
1) Press the MENU Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Turn the FMS Knob to select ‘Weather Setup’ and press the ENT Key.
3) With Product Group 1 selected, turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the NEXRAD Animation On/Off field.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘On’ or ‘Off’, then press the ENT Key.
5) To remove the menu, push the FMS Knob or the CLR Key.
AFCS
The pilot can select either the United States or Canada region for the desired NEXRAD coverage area on the
‘Weather Data Link (XM)’ Page. NEXRAD information is shown for the selected region, while a gray shade of
purple is shown for the region which is not selected.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Selecting the NEXRAD Coverage Region on the ‘Weather Data Link (XM)’ Page:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to select ‘Weather Setup’ and press the ENT Key.
3) With Product Group 1 selected, turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the NEXRAD Region field.
APPENDICES
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘US’ or ‘CNDA’, then press the ENT Key.
5) To remove the menu, push the FMS Knob or the CLR Key.
The NEXRAD weather product age display indicates either ‘US’ or ‘CN’ for the selected coverage region.
INDEX
Reflectivity
Reflectivity is the amount of transmitted power returned to the radar receiver. Colors on the NEXRAD
display are directly correlative to the level of detected reflectivity. Reflectivity as it relates to hazardous
weather can be very complex.
270
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The role of radar is essentially to detect moisture in the atmosphere. Simply put, certain types of weather
reflect radar better than others. The intensity of a radar reflection is not necessarily an indication of the
weather hazard level. For instance, wet hail returns a strong radar reflection, while dry hail does not. Both
wet and dry hail can be extremely hazardous.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The different NEXRAD echo intensities are measured in decibels (dB) relative to reflectivity (Z). NEXRAD
measures the radar reflectivity ratio, or the energy reflected back to the radar receiver (designated by the
letter Z). The value of Z increases as the returned signal strength increases.
NEXRAD Limitations
NEXRAD radar images may have certain limitations:
EIS
• Undetermined precipitation types may be displayed as mixed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• An individual NEXRAD site cannot depict high altitude storms at close ranges. It has no information
about storms directly over the site.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Precipitation may be occurring below the lowest antenna tilt angle (0.5º), and therefore the radar beam
overshoots the precipitation. For example, at a distance of 124 miles from the radar site, the radar beam
is approximately 18,000 feet above the radar site. The radar cannot detect any precipitation occurring
below the beam at this distance and altitude.
• At smaller map ranges, the smallest square block on the display represents an area of approximately
four square kilometers. The intensity level reflected by each square represents the highest level of radar
reflectivity sampled within the area.
• Unknown precipitation below 52ºN is displayed as rain regardless of actual precipitation type.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Block represents
approximately 4 km2
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 6-7 NEXRAD Weather Product with 30 NM Map Range
INDEX
The following may cause abnormalities in displayed NEXRAD radar images:
• Ground clutter
• Strobes and spurious radar data
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
271
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
• Sun strobes (when the radar antenna points directly at the sun)
• Interference from buildings or mountains, which may cause shadows
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Metallic dust (chaff) from military aircraft, which can cause alterations in radar scans
NEXRAD Limitations (Canada)
• Radar coverage extends to 55ºN.
EIS
• Any precipitation displayed between 52ºN and 55ºN is displayed as mixed precipitation regardless of
actual precipitation type.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• If the precipitation type is unknown, the system displays the precipitation as rain, regardless of actual
precipitation type.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
No Coverage
Above 55°N
AFCS
Precipitation
Above 52°N
Always Displays
as Mixed
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-8 NEXRAD Weather Product - Canada
NEXRAD (FIS-B)
NOTE: The NEXRAD weather product cannot be displayed at the same time as terrain.
APPENDICES
The National Weather Service (NWS) operates the WSR-88D, or NEXRAD (NEXt-generation RADar)
system, an extensive network of 156 high-resolution Doppler radar systems. The NEXRAD network provides
centralized meteorological information for the continental United States and selected overseas locations. The
maximum range of a single NEXRAD site is 250 nm.
INDEX
Individual NEXRAD sites supply the network with radar images, and the images from each radar site may
arrive at the network at different rates and times. Periodically, the weather data provider to FIS-B compiles
272
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
the available individual site images from the network to form a composite image, and assigns a single time
to indicate when it created the image. This image becomes the NEXRAD weather product. Individual
images--gathered from each NEXRAD site--differ in age, and are always older than the displayed NEXRAD
weather product age. The data provider then sends the NEXRAD data to the FIS-B GBTs, which transmit this
information during the next designated broadcast time for the NEXRAD weather product.
Because of the time required to detect, assemble, and distribute the NEXRAD weather product, the displayed
weather information contained within the product may be older than the current radar synopsis and may not
depict the current weather conditions. NEXRAD information should never be used as a basis for maneuvering
in, near, or around areas of hazardous weather regardless of the information it contains.
EIS
Regional
NEXRAD
Weather Product
Icon and Age
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Boundary
of Regional
NEXRAD Data
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
No radar coverage
within coverage
boundary
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Regional
NEXRAD
Weather Product
enabled
Figure 6-9 Regional NEXRAD Weather Product on the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The FIS-B NEXRAD weather product may be displayed for a region around the GBT (higher resolution,
updated more frequently) or for across the continental United States (lower resolution, updated less
frequently). A combined version of both weather products is also available for display on the same map.
When the combined NEXRAD is selected, regional NEXRAD takes display precedence where data is available,
and continental US NEXRAD is displayed outside of the regional NEXRAD coverage area.
APPENDICES
Displaying the NEXRAD weather product on the ‘Weather Data Link (FIS-B)’ Page:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page.
2) Select the NEXRAD Softkey. Each selection cycles though a coverage option as the softkey name changes (US,
RGNL, or US/RGNL.
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
273
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Weather Setup’ and press the ENT Key.
3) To enable/disable the display of NEXRAD information for the continental United States, turn the small FMS
Knob to highlight the NEXRAD On/Off field.
a) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight ‘On’ to enable the display of NEXRAD for the continental United
States or ‘Off’ to disable.
b) Press the ENT Key.
EIS
4) To enable/disable the display of Regional NEXRAD information, turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the
Regional On/Off field.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
a) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight ‘On’ to enable the display of Regional NEXRAD or ‘Off’ to disable.
b) Press the ENT Key.
5) When finished, push the FMS Knob.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Continental
USA NEXRAD
Weather Product
Icon and Age
No radar coverage
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Regional
NEXRAD
Weather Product
enabled
APPENDICES
Figure 6-10 Continental US (CONUS) NEXRAD Weather Product on the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page
NOTE: When both NEXRAD options are enabled on the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page menu, a combined
INDEX
version is displayed.
274
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Enables/disables
regional NEXRAD
data display
Enables/disables
NEXRAD data display for
the continental United
States
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 6-11 Weather Data Link
(FIS-B) Page Menu
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-12 Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page Setup Menu
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Displaying the NEXRAD weather product on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the Map Opt Softkey.
2) Select the NEXRAD Softkey.
3) To change the type of NEXRAD displayed, press the MENU Key.
AFCS
4) With ‘Map Settings’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Weather’ Group, then press the ENT Key.
6) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the NEXRAD Data Region field.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
7) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight ‘CONUS’ (continental United States), ‘RGNL’ (regional), or ‘Combined’,
then press the ENT Key. This selection also affects display of NEXRAD on the PFD Maps.
8) When finished, press the FMS Knob or press the CLR Key.
APPENDICES
Displaying the NEXRAD weather product on PFD maps:
1) Press the Map/HSI Softkey (in TCAS II installations, press the Map Opt Softkey).
2) Press the NEXRAD Softkey to enable/disable the display of NEXRAD information.
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
INDEX
The regional NEXRAD weather product coverage area varies, as it is determined by the data received from
ground-based sources. When the regional NEXRAD weather product is enabled, a white spiked boundary
encloses this area to indicate the geographic limits of the regional NEXRAD coverage being displayed. The
system shows composite radar data from all available NEXRAD sites inside of this boundary area.
275
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
If the continental United States version of the NEXRAD weather product is shown (US Softkey enabled),
the coverage boundary is not shown on the map.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Continental
USA NEXRAD
Weather Product
Icon and Age
No radar coverage
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Regional
NEXRAD
Weather Product
enabled
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-13 Continental US (CONUS) NEXRAD Weather Product on the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
This data is composed of the maximum reflectivity from the individual radar sweeps. The display of the
information is color-coded to indicate the weather severity level. All weather product legends can be viewed
on the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page. For the NEXRAD legend, select the Legend Softkey when the
NEXRAD weather product is enabled.
APPENDICES
No radar coverage
Boundary of radar
coverage area
Figure 6-14 NEXRAD Weather Product Legend
INDEX
The display of no radar coverage is enabled when NEXRAD is selected for display. Areas where radar data
is not currently available, has not yet been received, or is not being collected are indicated in gray shade of
purple.
276
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NOTE: If the system has not received all available NEXRAD weather data (such as during initial FIS-B signal
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
acquisition or in areas of marginal or poor signal reception), the system may display areas of no radar
coverage which are subsequently removed as radar data is received. It may take up to approximately ten
minutes to receive all FIS-B data, when adequate reception is available.
Reflectivity
EIS
Reflectivity is the amount of transmitted power returned to the radar receiver. Colors on the NEXRAD
display are directly correlative to the level of detected reflectivity. Reflectivity as it relates to hazardous
weather can be very complex.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The role of radar is essentially to detect moisture in the atmosphere. Simply put, certain types of weather
reflect radar better than others. The intensity of a radar reflection is not necessarily an indication of the
weather hazard level. For instance, wet hail returns a strong radar reflection, while dry hail does not. Both
wet and dry hail can be extremely hazardous.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The different NEXRAD echo intensities are measured in decibels (dB) relative to reflectivity (Z). NEXRAD
measures the radar reflectivity ratio, or the energy reflected back to the radar receiver (designated by the
letter Z). The value of Z increases as the returned signal strength increases.
NEXRAD Limitations
NEXRAD radar images may have certain limitations:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• At smaller map ranges, individual blocks of NEXRAD weather data are viewable. For the regional version
of the NEXRAD weather product, the smallest block represents 1.5 nm wide by 1 nm tall. For the
continental United States version of the NEXRAD weather product, each block is 7.5 nm wide by 5 nm
wide. The color of each block represents the highest radar reflectivity detected within that area.
• The continental US version of the NEXRAD weather product is not available above 60º of latitude.
The following may cause abnormalities in displayed NEXRAD radar images:
AFCS
• Ground clutter
• Strobes and spurious radar data
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Sun strobes (when the radar antenna points directly at the sun)
• Interference from buildings or mountains, which may cause shadows
• Metallic dust (chaff) from military aircraft, which can cause alterations in radar scans
ECHO TOPS (SIRIUSXM)
APPENDICES
NOTE: Echo Tops cannot be displayed at the same time as Cloud Tops or NEXRAD data is displayed.
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
INDEX
The Echo Tops weather product shows the location, elevation, and direction of the highest radar echo. The
highest radar echo does not indicate the top of a storm or clouds; rather it indicates the highest altitude at
which precipitation is detected. Information is derived from NEXRAD data.
277
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Altitude for
selected Echo Top
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-15 Echo Tops Weather Product
Displaying Echo Tops information:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
2) Press the Echo Top Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Since Echo Tops and Cloud Tops use the same color scaling to represent altitude, display of these weather
products is mutually exclusive. When Echo Tops is activated, NEXRAD and Cloud Tops data are removed.
No Radar Coverage
APPENDICES
Figure 6-16 Echo Tops Legend
CLOUD TOPS (SIRIUSXM)
NOTE: Cloud Tops and Echo Tops cannot be displayed at the same time.
INDEX
NOTE: The broadcast rate for Cloud Tops is 30 minutes. As with all SiriusXM Weather products, the product
age becomes amber when it reaches half of the expiration time, which is 60 minutes for Cloud Tops.
Therefore, this weather product age may be amber during routine operation.
The Cloud Tops weather product depicts cloud top altitudes as determined from satellite imagery.
278
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-17 Cloud Tops Weather Product
Displaying Cloud Tops information:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page with the FMS Knob.
2) Select the CLD Top Softkey.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Since Cloud Tops and Echo Tops use the same color scaling to represent altitude, display of these weather
products is mutually exclusive. When Cloud Tops is activated, Echo Tops data is removed.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-18 Cloud Tops Legend
DATA LINK LIGHTNING (SIRIUSXM)
APPENDICES
NOTE: Lightning from a data link source cannot be displayed simultaneously on the same map as information
from an optional on-board lightning detection system.
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
INDEX
The Data Link Light weather product shows the approximate location of cloud-to-ground lightning strikes.
A strike icon represents a strike that has occurred within a two-kilometer region. The exact location of the
lightning strike is not displayed.
279
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Lightning
Strikes
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-19 Data Link Weather Product
Displaying Data Link Lightning information on Weather Data Link Page:
1) Turn the FMS Knob to select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the XM LTNG or DL LTNG Softkey.
AFCS
To display the Lightning legend on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page, select the Legend Softkey when
SiriusXM Lightning is selected for display.
Figure 6-20 Data Link Lightning Legend
Displaying Data Link Lightning information on the Navigation Map Page:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Turn the FMS Knob to select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Select the Map Opt Softkey.
3) Select the XM LTNG or DL LTNG Softkey.
APPENDICES
Displaying Data Link Lightning information on PFD maps:
1) On the PFD, press the Map/HSI Softkey.
2) Press the Lightning Softkey.
3) Press the Datalink Softkey.
INDEX
4) When finished, press the Back Softkey.
280
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
CELL MOVEMENT (SIRIUSXM)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Cell Movement weather product shows the location and movement of storm cells as identified by the
ground-based system. Cells are represented by yellow squares, with direction of movement indicated with
short, orange arrows.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Storm Cells
Additional
information for
selected Storm Cell
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-21 Cell Movement Weather Product
On the Weather Data Link (XM) Page, the Cell Movement weather product has a dedicated CEL MOV
softkey for enabling/disabling this weather product on this page.
AFCS
NOTE: The Storm Cell base height is not available. The Storm Cell base height is displayed as 0 feet when
the map pointer selects a storm cell.
Displaying Cell Movement information on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page using the FMS Knob.
2) Select the Cell MOV Softkey.
APPENDICES
Figure 6-22 Cell Movement Legend
INDEX
For navigation maps, the pilot can enable/disable the Cell Movement weather product using the NEXRAD
Softkey. For this to occur, the pilot must first enable the ‘Cell Movement’ option in the Map Settings menu
of the Navigation Map Page.
Setting up the system to display Cell Movement with NEXRAD on navigation maps:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
281
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
3) With ‘Map Settings’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight ‘Weather’ and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to ‘On’ or ‘Off’ for the Cell Movement menu option. When set to ‘On’, Cell Movement
is enabled/disabled with the NEXRAD weather product on navigation maps. When set to ‘Off’, Cell Movement
is not displayed on navigation maps.
6) When finished, push the FMS Knob or CLR Key to remove the menu.
EIS
After the ‘Cell Movement’ option is set to ‘On’, refer to the previous procedures for enabling/disabling the
NEXRAD weather product to control both products simultaneously on navigation maps using the NEXRAD
Softkey.
SIGMETS AND AIRMETS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
SIGMET (SIGnificant METeorological Information) and AIRMET (AIRmen’s METeorological Information)
are issued for potentially hazardous weather. A Convective SIGMET is issued for hazardous convective
weather such as severe or widespread thunderstorms. A localized SIGMET is a significant weather condition
occurring at a localized geographical position.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NOTE: If SiriusXM Weather is the active data link weather source, the SIGMET and AIRMET weather products
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
are not available unless at least one SIGMET or AIRMET has been received. The weather product age
indicates ‘N/A’ when no SIGMET or AIRMET is available.
AIRMET for
Turbulence
AIRMET for IFR
conditions
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
AIRMET for
Icing conditions
APPENDICES
SIGMET
Figure 6-23 SIGMET/AIRMET Data
INDEX
Displaying SIGMETs and AIRMETs:
1) Select the Weather Data Link Page.
2) Press the SIG/AIR Softkey.
282
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
3) To view the text of the SIGMET or AIRMET, press the Joystick and move the Map Pointer over the icon.
4) Press the ENT key. The following figure shows sample SIGMET text.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Sample SIGMET Text
SIGMET/AIRMET Legend
Figure 6-24 SIGMET/AIRMET Text and Legend
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
METARS AND TAFS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NOTE: Atmospheric pressure as reported for METARs is given in hectopascals (hPa), except for in the United
States, where it is reported in inches of mercury (in Hg). Temperatures are reported in Celsius.
NOTE: METAR information is only displayed within the installed navigation database service area.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
METARs (METeorological Aerodrome Reports) typically contain information about the temperature,
dewpoint, wind, precipitation, cloud cover, cloud heights, visibility, and barometric pressure at an airport or
observation station. They can also contain information on precipitation amounts, lightning, and other critical
data. METARs reflect hourly observations; non-routine updates include the code “SPECI” in the report.
METARs are shown as colored flags at airports that provide them.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Additional Information on Weather
Feature Selected
with Map Pointer
METAR flag
selected with Map
Pointer
INDEX
Figure 6-25 METAR Flags on the Weather Data Link Page
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
283
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
TAFs (Terminal Aerodrome Forecasts) are weather predictions for specific airports within a 24- hour period,
and may span up to 36 hours. TAFs typically include forecast wind, visibility, weather phenomena, and sky
conditions using METAR codes.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
METAR and TAF text are displayed on the Weather Information Page. METAR data is displayed first in a
decoded fashion, followed by the original text. Note the original text may contain additional information not
found in the decoded version. TAF information is displayed only in its original form when TAFs are available.
Displaying METAR and TAF text on the MFD:
1) On the Weather Data Link Page, press the METAR Softkey.
EIS
2) Press the Joystick and pan to the desired airport.
3) Press the ENT Key. The Weather Information Page is shown with METAR and TAF text.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Use the FMS Knob or the ENT Key to scroll through the METAR and TAF text. METAR text must be completely
scrolled through before scrolling through the TAF text.
5) Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to return to the Weather Data Link Page.
Or:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Select the Weather Information Page.
a) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Waypoint Page Group.
b) Select the WX Softkey to select the Weather Information Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to display the cursor.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired airport and press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
4) Use the FMS Knob or the ENT Key to scroll through the METAR and TAF text. Note that the METAR text must
be completely scrolled through before scrolling through the TAF text.
APPENDICES
METAR Text for the
Selected Airport
INDEX
TAF Text for the
Selected Airport
Figure 6-26 METAR and TAF Text on the Weather Information Page
284
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
To display the METAR legend on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page, select the Legend Softkey when
METARs are enabled for display.
The METAR flag color is determined by the information in the METAR text. The system displays a gray
METAR flag when the system cannot determine the METAR category based on the information available.
EIS
Figure 6-27 METAR Legend
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The system also shows METAR flags and their associated text on the Active Flight Plan Page on the MF.D.
The system shows a METAR flag next to waypoints in the flight plan with an available METAR.
Displaying original METAR text on the Active Flight Plan Page:
1) Select the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight a waypoint with an available METAR (indicated with a METAR flag next
to it). The METAR text will appear in the ‘Selected Waypoint Weather’ Window below.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) When finished, press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor or press the FPL Key to exit the Active Flight Plan
Page.
Original METAR text is also accessible on navigation maps displaying METAR flags. When the map pointer
is panned over a METAR flag, the METAR text is shown in a box near the flag.
Displaying original METAR text information on PFD maps:
1) On the PFD, press the Map/HSI Softkey.
AFCS
2) Press the METAR Softkey.
3) Press the Joystick and pan to the desired METAR flag. Original METAR text appears on the map.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) When finished, press the Joystick to remove the Map Pointer.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
285
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SURFACE ANALYSIS AND CITY FORECAST (SIRIUSXM)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Surface Analysis and City Forecast information is available for current and forecast weather conditions.
Forecasts are available for intervals of 12, 24, 36, and 48 hours.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-28 Current Surface Analysis Data
Displaying Surface Analysis and City Forecast information:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
2) Select the More WX Softkey.
AFCS
3) Select the SFC Softkey.
4) Press the softkey for the desired forecast time: Current, 12 HR, 24 HR, 36 HR, or 48 HR. The SFC Softkey
label changes to show the forecast time selected.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Or:
INDEX
APPENDICES
Press the Off Softkey to disable the display of the weather product.
Figure 6-29 Surface Analysis Legend
286
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FREEZING LEVEL (SIRIUSXM)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Freezing Level weather product shows the color-coded contour lines for the altitude and location at
which the first isotherm is found. When no data is displayed for a given altitude, the data for that altitude
has not been received, or is out of date and has been removed from the display. New data appears when it
becomes available.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-30 Freezing Level Data
Displaying Freezing Level information:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
AFCS
2) Select the More WX Softkey.
3) Select the FRZ LVL Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 6-31 Freezing Levels Legend
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
287
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
WINDS ALOFT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
If the FIS-B option is installed and FIS-B is the active data link weather source, the Winds Aloft weather
product also displays temperatures aloft next to the winds aloft arrows on the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page.
The Winds Aloft weather product shows the forecast wind speed and direction at the surface and at selected
altitudes. Altitude can be displayed in 3000-foot increments beginning at the surface up to 42,000 feet MSL.
Displaying the Winds Aloft weather product:
1) Select the Weather Data Link Page with the FMS Knob.
EIS
2) Select the More WX Softkey.
3) Select the Wind Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Select a softkey for the desired altitude level: SFC (surface) up to 42,000 feet. Select the Next or Prev Softkey
to cycle through the altitude softkeys. The Wind Softkey label changes to reflect the altitude selected.
APPENDICES
Figure 6-32 Winds Aloft Data at 12,000 Feet
INDEX
Figure 6-33 Winds Aloft Data with Legend
Headwind and tailwind components aloft are available inside the Vertical Situation Display (VSD) on the
Navigation Map Page. The displayed components are relative to current aircraft altitude and track, but not
to aircraft speed.
288
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Winds Aloft Data Age
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Wind Component
Velocity and Direction
Arrows
Altitude Scale
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-34 Navigation Map Page with Winds Aloft Data on the VSD
Arrows pointing to the left indicate headwind components; tailwind component arrows point to the right,
as shown in the following table.
Tailwind Symbol
Headwind/Tailwind Component
None
None
Less than 5 knots
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Headwind Symbol
5 knots
AFCS
10 knots
50 knots
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Table 6-4 VSD Headwind/Tailwind Component Symbols
Enabling/disabling the Vertical Situation Display (containing winds aloft data):
APPENDICES
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the Map Opt Softkey.
3) Press the Inset Softkey.
4) Press the VSD Softkey to enable/disable the Vertical Situation Display.
INDEX
Or:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Show VSD’ or ‘Hide VSD’ and press the ENT Key.
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
289
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Winds Aloft data inside the VSD is enabled by default when the VSD is displayed on the Navigation Map
Page. This behavior can be changed on the Navigation Map Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Enabling/disabling winds aloft data display for the VSD:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Settings’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘VSD’ and press the ENT Key.
EIS
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Winds on/off field.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
7) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
COUNTY WARNINGS (SIRIUSXM)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The County warning weather product provides specific public awareness and protection weather warnings
from the National Weather Service (NWS). This can include information on tornadoes, severe thunderstorms,
and flood conditions.
Flood
Warnings
AFCS
Thunderstorm
Warning
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Additional
Information
on Flood
Warning
Selected
with Map
Pointer
INDEX
Figure 6-35 County Flood Warning
290
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Displaying County Warning information:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page with the FMS Knob.
2) Press the More WX Softkey.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the County Softkey.
EIS
Figure 6-36 County Warnings Legend
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
CYCLONE (SIRIUSXM)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Cyclone weather product shows the current location of cyclones (hurricanes), tropical storms,
and their projected tracks. The system displays the projected track information in the form of
DD/HH:MM.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Cyclone
APPENDICES
Figure 6-37 Cyclone Weather Product on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
291
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Displaying cyclone (hurricane) track information:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page with the FMS Knob.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Select the More WX Softkey.
3) Select the Cyclone Softkey.
EIS
Figure 6-38 Cyclone Legend
NOTE: The Cyclone weather product is not available unless at least one cyclone or tropical storm has been
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
received. The weather product age indicates ‘N/A’ when no cyclone or tropical storm has been received.
ICING (CIP & SLD) (SIRIUSXM)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Current Icing Product (CIP) weather product shows a graphical view of the current icing environment.
Icing severity is displayed in four categories: light, moderate, severe, and extreme (not specific to aircraft
type). The CIP product is not a forecast, but a presentation of the current conditions at the time of the
analysis.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Supercooled Large Droplet (SLD) icing conditions are characterized by the presence of relatively large,
super cooled water droplets indicative of freezing drizzle and freezing rain aloft. SLD threat areas are depicted
as magenta dots over the CIP colors.
Displaying Icing data:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
AFCS
2) Select the More WX Softkey.
3) Select the ICNG Softkey.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Select a softkey for the desired altitude level: 1,000 feet up to 30,000 feet. Select the Next or PREV Softkey to
cycle through the altitude softkeys. The ICNG Softkey label changes to indicate the altitude selected.
292
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-39 Icing Data at 18,000 Feet
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-40 Icing Potential Legend
AFCS
TURBULENCE (SIRIUSXM)
The Turbulence weather product identifies the potential for erratic movement of high-altitude air mass
associated winds. Turbulence is classified as light, moderate, severe or extreme, at altitudes between 21,000
and 45,000 feet. Turbulence information is intended to supplement AIRMETs, SIGMETs, and PIREPs.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Displaying Turbulence data:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
2) Select the More WX Softkey.
APPENDICES
3) Select the TURB Softkey.
4) Select a softkey for the desired altitude: 21,000 feet up to 45,000 feet. Press the Next or PREV Softkey to cycle
through the altitude softkeys. The TURB Softkey label changes to indicate the altitude selection.
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
293
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-41 Turbulence Weather Product at 21,000 Feet
Figure 6-42 Turbulence Legend
AFCS
PIREPS AND AIREPS
NOTE: AIREPs are only available with the SiriusXM Weather service.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Pilot Weather Reports (PIREPs) are in-flight weather observations collected from pilots. When significant
weather conditions are reported or forecast, Air Traffic Control (ATC) facilities are required to solicit PIREPs.
A PIREP may contain adverse weather conditions, such as low in-flight visibility, icing conditions, wind shear,
and turbulence. PIREPs are issued as either Routine (UA) or Urgent (UUA).
INDEX
APPENDICES
Another type of PIREP is an Air Report (AIREP). Commercial airlines typically generate AIREPs.
294
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
AIREP
EIS
Urgent PIREP
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
PIREP selected with
Map Pointer
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-43 PIREPs and AIREPS on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page
Displaying PIREP and AIREP text:
1) Select the Weather Data Link Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Select the More WX Softkey.
3) Select the PIREPS or AIREPS Softkey. (Note the AIREPS Softkey is only available with the SiriusXM Weather
service.)
4) Press the Joystick and pan to the desired weather report. A gray circle will appear around the weather report
when it is selected.
AFCS
5) Press the ENT Key. The Weather Information Page is shown with PIREP or AIREP text. The data is first displayed
in a decoded fashion, followed by the original text. Note the original text may contain additional information
not present in the decoded version.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
6) Use the FMS Knob or the ENT Key to scroll through the PIREP or AIREP text.
7) Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to return to the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
295
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Decoded PIREP Text
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Original PIREP
Text
Figure 6-44 PIREP Text on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The PIREP color is determined by the type (routine or urgent).
Figure 6-45 AIREPs & PIREPs Legend
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
TFRS
NOTE: Do not rely solely upon data link services to provide Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR) information.
Always confirm TFR information through official sources such as Flight Service Stations or Air Traffic Control.
INDEX
APPENDICES
In the United States, the FAA issues Temporary Flight Restrictions (TFRs) to designate areas where flight is
restricted. TFRs are issued to restrict flight for a variety of reasons including national security, law enforcement,
natural disasters, and large sporting events. TFRs may be issued at any time, and TFR data displayed on the
system is only intended to supplement official TFR information obtained from Flight Service Stations (FSS),
and air traffic control.
296
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Information for
selected TFR
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-46 TFR Data on the Navigation Map Page
Displaying TFR Data:
1) Select the Weather Data Link Page or Navigation Map Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the Joystick and pan the map pointer over a TFR to highlight it. The system displays TFR summary
information above the map.
3) Press the ENT Key. The system displays a pop-up menu.
4) If necessary, turn the FMS Knob to select ‘Review Airspaces’ and press the ENT Key. The system displays the
TFR Information window.
AFCS
5) Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to remove the TFR Information window.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 6-47 Full Text for Selected TFR
The setup menus for the Navigation Map Page control the map range settings above which TFR data is
decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the TFR product map range setting is selected, the
TFR product data is removed from the map.
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
INDEX
Maps other than the Navigation Map Page use settings based on those selected for the Navigation Map Page.
297
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Setting up and customizing TFR data for maps on which TFR data can be displayed:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Settings’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Aviation’ Group and press the ENT Key.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll to the TFR product range setting.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options (Off, range settings).
EIS
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FIS-B WEATHER STATUS
Additional information about the status of FIS-B weather products is available on the ‘Aux - ADS-B’ Status
Page.
Viewing FIS-B status:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Aux Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - ADS-B Status’ Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
On the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) page, the pilot can enable/disable the FIS-B weather feature, which includes
all FIS-B weather products and related softkeys on various maps.
Enabling/disabling the FIS-B weather feature:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight ‘Enable FIS-B Weather’ or ‘Disable FIS-B Weather’, and press the ENT Key.
Figure 6-48 Viewing FIS-B Weather Status on the ADS-B Status Page
298
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
NOT
AVAILABLE
FIS-B weather data is not available for the weather product, and/or the system is not
receiving the FIS-B weather service.
AWAITING
DATA
The system is receiving the FIS-B weather service, and is waiting to receive the
weather product from the FIS-B data broadcast.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Weather Products:
AIRMET
CONUS NEXRAD
METAR
METAR GRAPHICAL
NOTAM/TFR
PIREP
REGIONAL NEXRAD
SIGMET
TAF
WINDS/TEMPS ALOFT
The FIS-B weather feature is enabled to process and display FIS-B weather products.
The FIS-B weather feature is disabled.
No FIS-B weather data received.
FIS-B weather data is available for display for the weather product.
Description
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FIS-B Weather Status:
FIS-B Processing
Status
Message
ENABLED
DISABLED
---------------AVAILABLE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADS-B Status Page Item
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Table 6-5 Aux-ADS-B Status Page Messages for FIS-B Weather
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
299
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6.2 STORMSCOPE LIGHTNING DETECTION SYSTEM
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: Do not rely on information from the lightning detection system display as the sole basis for
hazardous weather avoidance. Range limitations and interference may cause the system to display inaccurate
or incomplete information. Refer to documentation from the lightning detection system manufacturer for
detailed information about the system.
NOTE: Stormscope lightning information cannot be displayed simultaneously on the same map as lightning
EIS
information from data link lightning sources.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The system can display L-3 WX-500 Stormscope lightning detection system information on the Stormscope
Page, and as an overlay on navigation maps. The system uses the symbols shown in the following table to depict
lightning strikes and cells based on the age of the information.
Lightning Age
Symbol
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Strike is less than 6 seconds old
Strike is between 6 and 60 seconds old
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Strike is between 1 and 2 minutes old
Strike is between 2 and 3 minutes old
Table 6-6 Lightning Age and Symbols
AFCS
USING THE STORMSCOPE PAGE
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The Map - Stormscope Page is the principal map page for viewing Stormscope lighting information, and offers
map ranges of 25 nm, 50 nm, 100 nm, and 200 nm. The Map - Stormscope Page map orientation is heading
up, or track up if there is no valid heading.
Adjusting the Stormscope Map Range:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
APPENDICES
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Stormscope Page.
INDEX
3) Turn the Joystick clockwise to increase the map range or counter-clockwise to decrease the map range.
300
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Stormscope Mode
Lightning Strike
Rate Per Minute
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 6-49 Stormscope Page with Cell Mode Selected
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selecting ‘cell’ or ‘strike’ mode:
1) Select the Stormscope Page.
2) Press the Mode Softkey. The Cell and Strike softkeys are displayed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Press the Cell Softkey to display ‘CELL’ data or press the Strike Softkey to display ‘STRIKE’ data. ‘CELL’ or
‘STRIKE’ is displayed in the mode box in the upper right corner of the Stormscope Page.
4) Press the Back Softkey to return to the top level softkeys for the Stormscope Page.
Or:
1) Select the Stormscope Page.
AFCS
2) Press the MENU Key to display the Stormscope Page Menu. Either ‘Cell Mode’ or ‘Strike Mode’ is highlighted
in cyan to indicate the mode to be selected.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Press the ENT Key to select the highlighted mode and remove the menu. To remove the menu without changing
modes, press the MENU Key or the CLR Key, or push the FMS Knob.
If heading input is lost, strikes and/or cells must be cleared manually after the execution of each turn . This
is to ensure that the strike and/or cell positions are depicted accurately in relation to the nose of the aircraft.
Clearing Stormscope lightning on any map clears this information from all displays on the system.
APPENDICES
Manually clearing Stormscope cell or strike information:
1) Select the Stormscope Page.
2) Press the Clear Softkey.
Or:
INDEX
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Clear Lightning Data’, then press the ENT Key.
Or:
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
301
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Clear Stormscope® Lightning’, then press the ENT Key.
STORMSCOPE MAP OVERLAYS
The system can display Stormscope lightning on navigation maps as an overlay. When this overlay is
enabled, a Stormscope icon appears on the map, with the exception of the HSI Map. On MFD navigation
maps, a box also appears with the selected Stormscope mode and strike rate.
EIS
Displaying Stormscope information on MFD navigation maps:
1) Press the Map Opt Softkey.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the STRMSCP Softkey.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Stormscope Mode
Lightning Strike
Rate Per Minute
AFCS
Stormscope Navigation Map
Overlay Enabled Icon
Figure 6-50 Navigation Map Page with Stormscope Lightning Data
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Enabling/disabling Stormscope information on PFD navigation maps:
1) On the PFD, press the Map/HSI Softkey.
2) Press the Lightning Softkey.
APPENDICES
3) Press the STRMSCP Softkey to enable Stormscope lightning or press the LTNG Off Softkey to disable Stormscope
lightning.
Setting up Stormscope options on the Navigation Map:
1) On the Navigation Map Page, press the MENU Key.
INDEX
2) With ‘Map Settings’ selected, press the ENT Key.
302
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the group selection window. Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Weather’,
and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight and move between the product selections.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
5) When an item is highlighted, turn the small FMS Knob to select the option.
6) Press the ENT Key.
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
The following options are available:
• Stormscope On/Off field – Enables/disables the display of Stormscope lightning symbols.
EIS
• Stormscope maximum display range – Selects the maximum map range to display Stormscope symbols.
Stormscope data is removed when a map range greater than the STRMSCP SMBL value is selected.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Stormscope Mode – Selects the Cell or Strike mode of lightning activity. Cell mode identifies clusters or
cells of electrical activity. Strike mode indicates the approximate location of lightning strikes.
CELL AND STRIKE MODE ON THE NAVIGATION MAP
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
On the Navigation Map, cell mode identifies cells of lightning activity. Stormscope identifies clusters of
electrical activity that indicate cells. Strike mode indicates the approximate location of lightning strikes.
Selecting the ‘cell’ or ‘strike’ mode on the Navigation Map:
1) Press the MENU Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) With ‘Map Settings’ selected, press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the FMS Knob to select the ‘Weather’ group and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Stormscope Mode field.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to change between ‘Cell’ and ‘Strike’ options. When the desired item is selected, press
the ENT Key.
AFCS
6) Press the FMS knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
If heading input is lost, strikes and/or cells must be cleared manually after the execution of each turn. This
is to ensure that the strike and/or cell positions are depicted accurately in relation to the nose of the aircraft.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Manually clearing Stormscope data on the Navigation Map:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Clear Stormscope® Lightning’.
APPENDICES
3) Press the ENT Key.
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
303
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6.3 TERRAIN DISPLAYS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: Do not use terrain avoidance displays as the sole source of information for maintaining separation
from terrain and obstacles. Garmin obtains terrain and obstacle data from third party sources and cannot
independently verify the accuracy of the information.
NOTE: Terrain data is not displayed when the aircraft is outside of the installed terrain database coverage
EIS
area.
NOTE: Terrain and obstacle alerting is not available north of 89º North latitude and south of 89º South
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
latitude. This is due to limitations present within the Terrain database and the system’s ability to process
the data representing the affected areas.
NOTE: Terrain and obstacle alerting requires the Terrain-SVT or TAWS-B option. No terrain or obstacle
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
alerting occurs for the Terrain Proximity feature.
The terrain system increases situational awareness and aids in reducing controlled flight into terrain (CFIT) and
obstacles.
One of the following terrain systems is installed on this aircraft:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Terrain Proximity
• Terrain-SVT (included with the Garmin SVT option when the Terrain Awareness and Warning System Class-B
(TAWS-B) is not installed; refer to the Flight Instruments section for more information about Garmin SVT.)
• TAWS-B (optional)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
The installed terrain system provides color indications on map displays when terrain or obstacles are within
a certain altitude threshold from the aircraft. Terrain-SVT and TAWS-B furthermore provide advisory visual
annunciations and voice alerts to indicate the presence of threatening terrain or obstacles relevant to the projected
flight path. This alerting capability is not present in the Terrain Proximity feature. Compared to Terrain-SVT
alerting, TAWS-B uses more sophisticated algorithms to assess aircraft distance from terrain and obstacles. The
TAWS-B system includes more alerting capabilities than the Terrain-SVT system.
The terrain system requires the following for proper operation:
• Valid 3-D GPS position
APPENDICES
• Valid terrain and obstacle databases
The terrain system uses terrain and obstacle information supplied by government sources. Terrain information
is based on terrain elevation information in a database that may contain inaccuracies. Individual obstructions may
be shown if available in the database. Garmin verifies the data to confirm accuracy of the content. However, the
displayed information should never be understood as being all-inclusive and data may still contain inaccuracies.
INDEX
The terrain system uses information provided from the GPS receiver to provide a horizontal position and
altitude. GPS altitude is derived from satellite measurements. GPS altitude is then converted to the height above
geodetic sea level (GSL), which is the height above mean sea level (MSL) calculated geometrically. The system
304
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
uses GSL altitude to determine alerts for the Terrain-SVT and TAWS-B systems. GSL altitude accuracy is affected
by satellite geometry, but is not subject to variations in pressure and temperature that normally affect pressure
altitude sensors. GSL altitude does not require local altimeter settings to determine MSL altitude. It is a widelyused MSL altitude source. Therefore, GSL altitude provides a highly accurate and reliable MSL altitude source to
calculate terrain and obstacle alerts.
EIS
The terrain and obstacle databases used by the terrain system are referenced to MSL. Using the GPS position
and GSL altitude, terrain system displays a 2-D picture of the surrounding terrain and obstacles relative to the
position and altitude of the aircraft. Furthermore, for the Terrain-SVT or TAWS-B systems, the system uses the
GPS position and GSL altitude to calculate and “predict” the aircraft’s flight path in relation to the surrounding
terrain and obstacles. In this manner, the Terrain-SVT or TAWS-B systems can provide advanced alerts of predicted
dangerous terrain conditions.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Baro-corrected altitude (or indicated altitude) is derived by adjusting the altimeter setting for local atmospheric
conditions. The most accurate baro-corrected altitude can be achieved by frequently updating the altimeter
setting to the nearest reporting station along the flight path. However, because actual atmospheric conditions
seldom match the standard conditions defined by the International Standard Atmosphere (ISA) model (where
pressure, temperature, and lapse rates have fixed values), it is common for the baro-corrected altitude (as read
from the altimeter) to differ from the GSL altitude. This variation results in the aircraft’s GSL altitude differing
from the baro-corrected altitude.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
RELATIVE TERRAIN SYMBOLOGY
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The terrain system uses colors and symbols to represent terrain and obstacles (with heights greater than 200
feet above ground level, AGL) present in the databases relative to aircraft altitude. The system dynamically
adjusts these colors as the aircraft altitude changes, and after takeoff and landing.
AFCS
While the aircraft is on the ground, the system displays relative terrain 400 feet or more above the aircraft
altitude using red, and terrain at less than 400 feet above aircraft altitude using black, as shown on the OnGround Legend. When the aircraft is in the air, the system displays relative terrain information using red,
yellow, green, and black, as shown on the In-Air Legend. As the aircraft transitions from on-ground to in-air, or
from in-air to on-ground, the display of relative terrain momentarily fades into the corresponding colors. For
Terrain-SVT or TAWS-B systems, if an alert occurs, the relative terrain colors transition to the In-Air Legend if
the On-Ground Legend was shown in order to provide the pilot with the most information possible.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
On-Ground Legend
In-Air Legend
APPENDICES
Figure 6-51 Relative Terrain Legend
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
305
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
The following figure shows the relative terrain coloring for the Terrain Proximity system.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
100 ft Threshold
Red
Terrain above or within 100 feet
below the aircraft altitude
Yellow
Terrain is between 100 feet and
1000 feet below aircraft altitude
Lighted Obstacle
2000 ft
EIS
Green Terrain is between 1000 feet and
2000 feet below aircraft altitude
Black Terrain is at least 2000 feet
below aircraft altitude
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 6-52 Terrain Altitude/Color Correlation for Terrain Proximity
The following figure shows relative terrain coloring for the Terrain-SVT and TAWS-B systems.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Projected Flight Path
100 ft Threshold
Red
Terrain above or within 100 feet
below the aircraft altitude
Yellow
Terrain is between 100 feet and
1000 feet below aircraft altitude
Lighted Obstacle
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2000 ft
Green Terrain is between 1000 feet and
2000 feet below aircraft altitude
Black Terrain is at least 2000 feet
below aircraft altitude
AFCS
Figure 6-53 Terrain Altitude/Color Correlation for Terrain-SVT or TAWS-B Systems
NOTE: The Vertical Situation Display (VSD) Inset Window shows terrain at least 2000 feet below the aircraft
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
altitude as gray.
The following tables show the relative obstacle coloring used by the terrain systems.
Unlighted Obstacle
Lighted Obstacle
< 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL < 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL
Obstacle Location
APPENDICES
Red obstacle is above or within 100 ft below the aircraft
altitude
INDEX
Yellow obstacle is between 100 ft and 1000 ft below the
aircraft altitude
White obstacle is more than 1000 ft below aircraft altitude
Table 6-7 Relative Obstacle Symbols and Colors
306
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Lighted Wind
Turbine Obstacle
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Unlighted Wind
Turbine Obstacle
Wind Turbine Obstacle Location
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Red obstacle is above or within 100 ft below the aircraft altitude
Yellow obstacle is between 100 ft and 1000 ft below the aircraft
altitude
White obstacle is more than 1000 ft below aircraft altitude
EIS
Table 6-8 Wind Turbine Obstacles and Colors
Potential Impact
Area Examples
Alert Type
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The Terrain-SVT and TAWS-B systems show potential impacts areas for terrain and obstacles using yellow and
red as shown in the the following table.
Example Annunciation
Warning
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
TAWS-B Warning
Terrain-SVT Warning
or
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Caution
or
Table 6-9 Terrain-SVT and TAWS-B Potential Impact Area with Annunciations
• Trip Planning Page
• Navigation Map Page
• Flight Plan Page
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• PFD Maps
AFCS
The Map - Terrain Proximity or Terrain-SVT or TAWS-B Page is the principal map page for viewing terrain
information. Terrain and obstacle information can be displayed on the following maps and pages:
• Terrain Proximity/Terrain-SVT/TAWS-B Page
Displaying terrain and obstacle information (MFD maps other than the terrain page):
APPENDICES
1) Press the Map Opt Softkey (for PFD maps, press the Map/HSI Softkey).
2) Press the TER Softkey until REL is shown to display terrain and obstacle data.
When relative terrain is selected on maps other than the terrain page, an icon to indicate the feature is enabled
for display and a legend for the relative terrain colors are shown.
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
INDEX
The Navigation Map Page Setup Menu provides a means in addition to the softkey for enabling/disabling
display of terrain and obstacles. The setup menu also controls the map range settings above which terrain and
obstacle data are decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the map range setting is selected, the
data is removed from the map.
307
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Terrain information can be selected for display independently of obstacle data; however, obstacles recognized
by Terrain Proximity as yellow or red are shown when terrain is selected for display and the map range is within
the setting limit.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Maps besides the Terrain Page use settings based on those selected for the Navigation Map Page. The maximum
display ranges for obstacles on each map are dependent on the range setting made for the Navigation Map.
Customizing terrain and obstacle display on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
EIS
3) With ‘Map Settings’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Map’ Group and press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections.
• Terrain Display – Turns the display of relative (‘REL’) terrain data on or off and sets maximum range at which
terrain is shown
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Obstacle Data – Turns the display of obstacle data on or off and sets maximum range at which obstacles are
shown
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (On/Off, range settings, etc.).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Additional information about obstacles can be displayed by panning over the display on the map. The map
panning feature is enabled by pressing the Joystick. The map range is adjusted by turning the Joystick. If the
map range is adjusted while panning is enabled, the map is re-centered on the Map Pointer.
AFCS
Additional
Information on
Obstacle Selected
with Map Pointer
Yellow Terrain Area
(Between 100’ and
1000’ Below Aircraft
Altitude)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Lighted Obstacle
Selected with Map
Pointer
APPENDICES
Red Lighted
Obstacles
(Above or Within
100’ Below Aircraft
Altitude)
Terrain Display
Enabled Icon
INDEX
Red Terrain Area
(Above or Within
100’ Below Aircraft
Altitude)
Terrain Legend
Figure 6-54 Terrain Information on the Navigation Map Page
308
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TERRAIN PAGE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Map - Terrain Proximity, or Map - Terrain-SVT, or Map - TAWS-B Page is specialized to show terrain,
and obstacle in relation to the aircraft’s current altitude, without clutter from the basemap. This page is the
principal page for viewing terrain information. Aviation data (airports, VORs, and other NAVAIDs) can be
enabled for reference.
For Terrain-SVT and TAWS-B systems only, this page also shows potential impact areas. If an obstacle and
the projected flight path of the aircraft intersect, the display automatically adjusts to a map range if necessary to
emphasize the display of the potential impact area.
EIS
Aircraft orientation on this map is always heading up unless there is no valid heading, in which case the
orientation is track up. Map range is adjustable with the Joystick from 250 feet to 1000 nm, which is indicated
on the map range arc.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Displaying the terrain page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Terrain Proximity Page/Terrain-SVT/TAWS-B Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Showing/hiding aviation information on the terrain page:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Select ‘Show Aviation Data’ or ‘Hide Aviation Data’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Current Aircraft
GPS-derived GSL
Altitude
Map Orientation
AFCS
Black Terrain
(More than 1000’
Below the Aircraft
Altitude)
Red Lighted Obstacle
(Above or Within
100’ Below Aircraft
Altitude)
Yellow Lighted Obstacles
(Between 100’ and 1000’
Below Aircraft Altitude)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Yellow Terrain
(Between 100’
and 1000’ Below
the Aircraft
Altitude)
Red Terrain
(Above or Within
100’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
APPENDICES
Terrain Legend
TAWS Annunciation
Figure 6-55 TAWS-B Page
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
309
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
VERTICAL SITUATION DISPLAY (VSD) TERRAIN
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The system offers a Vertical Situation Display (VSD), which includes a profile of terrain and obstacles in an
inset window on the bottom of the Navigation Map Page. Although the VSD does not display Terrain-SVT or
TAWS-B alerts and potential impact areas, the VSD does use many of the same colors and symbols as these
systems to depict relative terrain and obstacles within the VSD.
Enabling/Disabling the Vertical Situation Display (VSD):
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
EIS
2) Press the Map Opt Softkey.
3) Press the Inset Softkey.
4) Press the VSD Softkey to enable or disable the VSD.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Or:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Select ‘Show VSD’ or ‘Hide VSD’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key.
The same controls which enable/disable the display of relative terrain and obstacles on the Navigation Map Page
also control the display of this information in the VSD.
VSD DISPLAY
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
When the VSD is enabled, terrain and obstacles in the VSD will be shown if the aircraft altitude is low
enough or the VSD altitude range is high enough for the terrain to be in view (absolute terrain will be shown
in gray if the TER Softkey is selected off on the Navigation Map Page).
AFCS
The depicted terrain profile represents an approximate forward-looking contour of the terrain based upon
the highest reported terrain elevations, measured at intervals defined by the terrain database resolution,
within a predefined width along the aircraft track between the aircraft present position and the end of the
map range. The predefined width is determined by the flight phase, as annunciated on the HSI, and is widest
during enroute or oceanic phases.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Flight Phase
Approach
Departure
Terminal
Enroute
Oceanic
Total VSD Width
0.6 nm
0.6 nm
2.0 nm
4.0 nm
4.0 nm
Table 6-10 VSD Terrain Width Varies with Phase of Flight
INDEX
The forward looking swath of terrain is based on the selected VSD Mode, annunciated in the top-left corner
of the VSD Inset Window. In Flight Plan Mode, the contour follows the active flight plan, and if no active
flight plan is present, the VSD Inset Window displays ‘Flight Plan Not Available’. In Track Mode, the contour
is based on the aircraft ground track. In Auto Mode, the contour is based on the active flight plan, when
available, otherwise, it is based on the ground track.
310
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Selecting a VSD Mode:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the Inset Softkey.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the VSD Softkey displaying the VSD mode in cyan. Each press of the softkey cycles through a mode
selection: FPL (flight plan), TRK (track), or Auto.
EIS
When the Navigation Map range is adjusted with the Joystick, the horizontal distance of the VSD is adjusted
to match the distance shown on the map range arc, down to one nautical mile. If the Navigation Map range is
adjusted below one nautical mile, the VSD range remains at one nautical mile. When Navigation Map range
is adjusted to remove altitude-correlated colored terrain data (as shown in the Terrain Legend) or obstacles
from the Navigation Map, these items are also removed from the VSD; only an outline of the terrain will be
displayed in black in the VSD Inset Window.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Track Mode
Boundary
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Relative
Terrain legend
VSD Mode
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-56 VSD on the Navigation Map Page with Relative Terrain Information
APPENDICES
Obstacles with heights greater than 200 feet AGL appear relative to aircraft altitude along the altitude scale.
The top of the obstacle symbol on the scale represents the obstacle’s height AGL. If the obstacle’s height AGL
is higher than can be represented by the obstacle symbol itself (e.g. for especially tall obstacles), a vertical
line appears below the obstacle symbol in order to depict the top of the obstacle symbol at its height AGL, as
shown in the following figure.
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
311
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
EIS
Figure 6-57 VSD with Tall Obstacles
TRACK MODE BOUNDARY
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The Track Mode Boundary represents the horizontal and lateral boundaries of the VSD. The boundary is
shown as a white rectangle on the Navigation Map Page and is only available when the VSD is enabled in
Track Mode. White range markers on both edges of the Track Mode Boundary rectangle match the range
markers along the distance scale inside the VSD Inset Window whenever the profile range is at least four
nautical miles (or 7.5 km if configured for metric units).
The Track Mode Boundary may be enabled/disabled, and the Navigation Map range at which the Profile
Path is removed from map display can be changed.
Customizing the Track Mode Boundary display on the Navigation Map Page:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Settings’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘VSD’ Group and press the ENT Key.
AFCS
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections.
• TRK Mode BNDRY – Enables/disables the display of the Track Mode Boundary and sets maximum range at
which Track Mode Boundary is shown.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options (On/Off range settings).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
APPENDICES
TERRAIN-SVT AND TAWS-B ALERTING DISPLAYS
Alerts are issued when flight conditions meet parameters that are set within Terrain-SVT or TAWS-B software
algorithms. Terrain alerts typically employ a caution or a warning alert severity level, or both. When an alert
is issued, visual annunciations are displayed and voice alerts are simultaneously issued.
INDEX
When an alert is issued, annunciations appear on the PFD and MFD. The terrain alert annunciation appears
to the left of the Selected Altitude box on the PFD, and bottom left on the MFD. If the terrain page is not
displayed at the time, a pop-up alert appears on the MFD. To acknowledge the pop-up alert:
• Press the CLR Key (returns to the currently viewed page), or
• Press the ENT Key (accesses the Terrain-SVT or TAWS-B Page)
312
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Pop-up
Alert
Alert Annunciation
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 6-58 TAWS-B Alert Annunciations
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Potential Impact
Area
AFCS
Terrain Legend
Alert Annunciation
Figure 6-59 TAWS-B Page with Terrain Annunciation
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
313
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
The following table lists the possible Terrain-SVT alerts.
PFD/MFD*
Alert
Annunciation
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Alert Type
MFD
Pop-Up Alert (except
Terrain-SVT Page)
Voice Alert
Reduced Required Terrain Clearance
Warning (RTC)
“Warning; Terrain, Terrain”
Imminent Terrain Impact Warning (ITI)
“Warning; Terrain, Terrain”
Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance
Warning (ROC)
“Warning; Obstacle, Obstacle”
Imminent Obstacle Impact Warning (IOI)
“Warning; Obstacle, Obstacle”
Reduced Required Terrain Clearance
Caution (RTC)
“Caution; Terrain, Terrain”
Imminent Terrain Impact Caution (ITI)
“Caution; Terrain, Terrain”
Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance
Caution (ROC)
“Caution; Obstacle, Obstacle”
Imminent Obstacle Impact Caution (IOI)
“Caution; Obstacle, Obstacle”
* Annunciation is displayed on the MFD when terrain display is enabled.
Table 6-11 Terrain-SVT Alerts Summary
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The following table lists the TAWS-B alerts.
Alert Type
PFD/MFD**
Alert
Annunciation
MFD Pop-Up Alert
(except TAWS-B Page)
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Excessive Descent Rate
Warning (EDR)
INDEX
“Terrain, Terrain; Pull Up, Pull Up”*
or
“Terrain Ahead, Pull Up; Terrain Ahead, Pull Up”
“Terrain, Terrain; Pull Up, Pull Up”
or
* “Terrain Ahead, Pull Up; Terrain Ahead, Pull Up”*
*
or
Imminent Terrain Impact
Warning (ITI)
or
Imminent Obstacle Impact
Warning (IOI)
314
“Pull Up”
Reduced Required Terrain
Clearance Warning (RTC)
Reduced Required Obstacle
Clearance Warning (ROC)
Voice Alert
or
“Obstacle, Obstacle; Pull Up, Pull Up”*
or
“Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up; Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up”
or
“Obstacle, Obstacle; Pull Up, Pull Up”
or
* “Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up; Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up”*
*
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
or
“Caution, Terrain; Caution, Terrain”*
or
“Terrain Ahead; Terrain Ahead”
or
“Caution, Terrain; Caution, Terrain”
or
“Terrain Ahead; Terrain Ahead”*
*
or
“Caution, Obstacle; Caution, Obstacle”
or
“Obstacle Ahead; Obstacle Ahead”*
*
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Imminent Obstacle Impact
Caution (IOI)
EIS
or
“Caution, Obstacle; Caution, Obstacle”*
or
“Obstacle Ahead; Obstacle Ahead”
*
Reduced Required Obstacle
Clearance Caution (ROC)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Imminent Terrain Impact
Caution (ITI)
“Too Low, Terrain”
None
None
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
“Five-Hundred”
“Sink Rate”
*
or
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Negative Climb Rate
Caution (NCR)
Voice Alert
*
Reduced Required Terrain
Clearance Caution (RTC)
Premature Descent Alert
Caution (PDA)
Altitude Voice Callout
(VCO) “500”
Excessive Descent Rate
Caution (EDR)
MFD Pop-Up Alert
(except TAWS-B Page)
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
PFD/MFD**
Alert
Annunciation
Alert Type
“Don’t Sink”*
or
“Too Low, Terrain”
AFCS
* Alerts with multiple messages are configurable at installation and are installation-dependent. Alerts for the default
configuration when more than one option is available are indicated with asterisks.
** Annunciation is displayed on the MFD when terrain display is enabled.
Table 6-12 TAWS-B Alerts Summary
FORWARD LOOKING TERRAIN AVOIDANCE
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance (FLTA) feature of Terrain-SVT or TAWS-B compares the projected
flight path as derived from GPS data with terrain features and obstacles from the terrain and obstacle databases.
The system issues FLTA alerts when the projected flight path conflicts with terrain or obstacles.
APPENDICES
The projected flight path is a calculated area ahead of, to the sides, and below the aircraft. The size of the
projected flight path varies based on factors including ground speed (the path ahead is larger when the ground
speed is higher), whether the aircraft is level, turning, or descending, and the proximity to the nearest runway
along the current track. As the aircraft approaches the runway, the projected flight path becomes narrower until
the system automatically disables FLTA alerts or the pilot manually inhibits them.
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
INDEX
There are two types of FLTA alerts, Reduced Required Terrain/Obstacle Clearance (RTC or ROC respectively)
and Imminent Terrain/Obstacle Impact (ITI or IOI respectively).
315
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Level (FT)
Descending (FT)
800
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Required
Clearance
(FT)
Required Terrain
Clearance (FT)
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
0
0
5
10
15
20
25
Distance From Runway (NM)
30
Figure 6-60 FLTA Alert Minimum Terrain and Obstacle Clearance Values
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The system automatically disables FLTA alerts when the aircraft is less than 200 feet above the destination
runway elevation while within 0.5 nm of the approach runway or the aircraft is between runway ends.
ADDITIONAL TAWS-B ALERTING
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
In addition to the FLTA alerting discussed previously, TAWS-B provides the following additional types of
alerts.
EXCESSIVE DESCENT RATE ALERT
AFCS
The purpose of the Excessive Descent Rate (EDR) alert is to provide notification when the aircraft is
determined to be closing (descending) upon terrain a rate that is calculated to be excessive relative to height
above terrain. The following figure shows the parameters for the alert.
6000
5500
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
5000
Height Above Terrain (Feet)
4500
INK
n: “S
4000
”
RATE
io
Caut
3500
APPENDICES
3000
2500
2000
Warning: “PULL UP”
1500
1000
12000
11000
Descent Rate (FPM)
10000
9000
8000
7000
6000
5000
4000
3000
2000
1000
0
0
INDEX
500
Figure 6-61 Excessive Descent Rate Alert Criteria
316
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
PREMATURE DESCENT ALERTING
A Premature Descent Alert (PDA) is issued when the system detects that the aircraft is significantly
below the normal approach path to a runway.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
PDA alerting begins when the aircraft is below 700 feet AGL within 15 nm of the destination airport and
ends when the aircraft is 0.5 nm from the runway threshold.
800
600
EIS
500
400
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Height Above Destination (Feet)
700
300
PDA ALERTING AREA
200
100
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
0
0
Distance to Destination (NM)
Figure 6-62 PDA Alerting Threshold
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NEGATIVE CLIMB RATE AFTER TAKEOFF ALERT (NCR)
The Negative Climb Rate (NCR) After Takeoff alert (also referred to as “Altitude Loss After Takeoff”)
provides alerts when the system determines the aircraft is losing altitude (closing upon terrain) after takeoff.
The voice alert “Don’t Sink” is given for NCR alerts, accompanied by visual annunciations. NCR alerting is
only active when departing from an airport and when the following conditions are met:
AFCS
• Height above the terrain is less than 700 feet
• Distance from the departure airport is 5 nm or less
• Heading change from the departure heading is less than 110 degrees
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NCR alerts can be triggered by either altitude loss or sink rate.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
317
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
1000
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Height Above Terrain (Feet)
900
800
700
600
“DON’T SINK”
or
“TOO LOW, TERRAIN”
500
400
300
200
100
0
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
Altitude Loss (Feet)
Figure 6-63 Negative Climb Rate (NCR) Altitude Loss
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1000
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Height Above Terrain (Feet)
900
800
700
600
“DON’T SINK”
or
“TOO LOW, TERRAIN”
500
400
300
200
AFCS
100
0
0
500
1000
1500
2000
2500
3000
3500
4000
4500
5000
5500
6000
6500
7000
Sink Rate (FPM)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-64 Negative Climb Rate (NCR) Sink Rate
FIVE-HUNDRED VOICE ALERT
APPENDICES
The purpose of the TAWS-B “Five-hundred” voice alert is to provide an advisory alert of when the aircraft
descends to within 500 feet above the terrain or runway threshold. When the aircraft is within 5 nm of an
airport, the “Five Hundred” voice alert is based on the nearest runway threshold elevation. When the aircraft
is more than 5 nm of the nearest airport, the “Five Hundred” voice alert is based on the height above terrain
(as determined by the GPS altitude and Terrain Database).
INDEX
There are no display annunciations or pop-up alerts that accompany the voice alert.
318
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
INHIBITING ALERTING
The pilot can manually inhibit FLTA alerts. If TAWS-B is installed, PDA alerts are also inhibited with FLTA
alerts.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Terrain-SVT System
TAWS-B System
Figure 6-65 Alerting is Inhibited when Annunciation is displayed
EIS
Inhibiting/enabling TAWS-B or Terrain-SVT Alerting:
1) Select the terrain page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the Inhibit Softkey. Alerting is inhibited when softkey annunciator is green.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired inhibit or enable option and press the ENT Key.
SYSTEM STATUS
TERRAIN-SVT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
During power-up, Terrain-SVT conducts a self-test of its visual annunciations and voice alerts. An voice alert
is issued at test completion.
Terrain-SVT continually monitors several system-critical items such as database validity, hardware status, and
GPS status. If the terrain/obstacle database is not available, the system issues the voice alert “Terrain System
Failure” along with the ‘TER FAIL’ alert annunciation.
AFCS
Terrain-SVT requires a 3-D GPS navigation solution along with specific vertical accuracy minimums. Should
the navigation solution become degraded or if the aircraft is out of the database coverage area, the annunciation
‘TER N/A’ is generated in the annunciation window and on the Terrain-SVT Page. The voice alert “Terrain
System Not Available” is generated. When sufficient GPS signal is returns and the aircraft is within the
database coverage area, the voice alert “Terrain System Available” is generated.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
319
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
PFD/MFD† Alert
Annunciation
Alert Type
System Test in Progress
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
System Test Pass
None
Terrain Alerting Inhibited
No GPS position
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Excessively degraded GPS signal;
or Out of database coverage area
Terrain System Test Fail; Terrain
or Obstacle database unavailable
or invalid; Invalid software
configuration; or System audio
fault
MFD Terrain or Obstacle database
unavailable or invalid, and
Terrain-SVT operating with PFD
Terrain or Obstacle databases
None
Terrain-SVT Page Center
Banner Annunciation
TERRAIN TEST
Voice Alert
None
None
“Terrain System Test OK”
None
None
NO GPS POSITION
“Terrain System Not Available”*
None
“Terrain System Not Available”*
TERRAIN FAIL
“Terrain System Failure”
TERRAIN DATABASE FAILURE
None
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
† Annunciation is shown on Terrain-SVT Page and the Navigation Map Page when Terrain is enabled.
* “Terrain System Available” will be heard when sufficient GPS signal is received, or Terrain database coverage area reentered.
Table 6-13 Terrain-SVT System Status Annunciations
TAWS-B
AFCS
During power-up, TAWS-B conducts a self-test of its visual annunciations and voice alerts. An voice alert is
issued at test completion. The pilot can also manually select a TAWS-B system test. The system test option is
unavailable when the ground speed exceeds 30 knots.
Manually testing the TAWS-B System:
1) Select the TAWS-B Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Select ‘Test TAWS System’ and press the ENT Key to confirm the selection.
APPENDICES
TAWS-B continually monitors several system-critical items such as database validity, hardware status, and
GPS status. If the terrain/obstacle database is not available, the voice alert “TAWS System Failure” is generated
along with the ‘TAWS FAIL’ alert annunciation.
INDEX
TAWS-B requires a 3-D GPS navigation solution along with specific vertical accuracy minimums. Should
the navigation solution become degraded or if the aircraft is out of the database coverage area, the system
displays the ‘TAWS N/A’ annunciation, and issues the “TAWS Not Available” voice alert. When the GPS signal
integrity returns and the aircraft is within the database coverage area, the system issues the voice alert, “TAWS
Available”.
320
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
System Test in progress
None
TAWS-B FLTA Alerting Inhibited
No GPS position
TAWS TEST
None
None
“TAWS System Test Test OK”
None
None
NO GPS POSITION
“TAWS Not Available”
None
“TAWS Not Available”
TAWS FAIL
“TAWS System Failure”
TERRAIN DATABASE FAILURE
None
EIS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
None
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Excessively degraded GPS signal; or
Out of database coverage area
TAWS-B System Test Fail; Terrain or
Obstacle database unavailable or
invalid; Invalid software configuration;
or System audio fault
MFD Terrain or Obstacle database
unavailable or invalid. TAWS operating
with PFD Terrain or Obstacle databases
Voice Alert
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
System Test pass
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
PFD/MFD* Alert TAWS-B Page Center Banner
Annunciation
Annunciation
Alert Type
† Annunciation is shown on TAWS-B Page and the Navigation Map Page when Terrain is enabled.
* “TAWS Available” will be heard when sufficient GPS signal is received, or Terrain database coverage area re-entered.
Table 6-14 TAWS-B System Status Annunciations
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
321
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6.4 TAS TRAFFIC
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information for collision avoidance maneuvering.
The traffic display does not provide collision avoidance resolution advisories and does not under any
circumstances or conditions relieve the pilot’s responsibility to see and avoid other aircraft.
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information to accurately depict all of the traffic
EIS
information within range of the aircraft. Due to lack of equipment, poor signal reception, and/or inaccurate
information from other aircraft, traffic may be present but not represented on the display.
NOTE: Pilots should be aware of traffic system limitations. Traffic systems require transponders of other
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
aircraft to respond to system interrogations. If the transponders do not respond to interrogations due
to phenomena such as antenna shading or marginal transponder performance, traffic may be displayed
intermittently, or not at all. Aircraft without altitude reporting capability are shown without altitude
separation data or climb descent indication. Pilots should remain vigilant for traffic at all times.
NOTE: Refer to the Automatic Dependent Surveillance-Broadcast (ADS-B) traffic discussion for more
information about ADS-B traffic displays.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The optional Garmin GTS 800 is a Traffic Advisory System (TAS). It enhances flight crew situational awareness
by displaying traffic information for transponder-equipped aircraft. The system also provides visual annunciations
and voice traffic alerts to assist in visually acquiring traffic.
The Garmin GTS 800 is capable of tracking up to 45 intruding aircraft equipped with Mode A or C transponders,
and up to 30 intruding aircraft equipped with Mode S transponders. A maximum of 30 aircraft with the highest
threat potential can be displayed simultaneously.
AFCS
No TAS surveillance is provided for aircraft without operating transponders.
THEORY OF OPERATION
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
When the traffic system is in Operating Mode, the system interrogates the transponders of intruding aircraft
while monitoring for transponder replies. The system uses this information to derive the distance, relative
bearing, and if reported, the altitude and vertical trend for each aircraft within its surveillance range. The
traffic system then calculates a closure rate to each intruder based on the projected Closest Point of Approach
(CPA). If the closure rate meets the threat criteria for a Traffic Advisory (TA), the traffic system provides visual
annunciations and voice alerts.
TAS SURVEILLANCE VOLUME AND SYMBOLOGY
INDEX
The TAS surveillance system monitors the airspace within ±10,000 feet of own altitude. Under ideal
conditions, the GTS 800 scans transponder traffic up to 22 nm in the forward direction. The range is
somewhat reduced to the sides and aft of own aircraft due to the directional interrogation signal patterns. In
areas of greater transponder traffic density or when TCAS II (Traffic Alert and Collision Avoidance System II)
systems are detected, the on-board traffic system automatically reduces its interrogation transmitter power
(and therefore range) in order to limit potential interference from other signals.
322
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NOTE: The Garmin traffic system does not display traffic determined to be on the ground, including Mode
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
C transponder equipped aircraft operating below 300’ AGL that is not climbing. However, if own aircraft
has ADS-B In capability, and is receiving traffic information from an ADS-B source (including ADS-R, ADS-B,
TIS-B), the system does display this traffic while operating in SURF Mode. Refer to the ADS-B Traffic Section
for more information.
The symbols in the following table depict traffic, and include Automatic Dependent Surveillance-Broadcast
(ADS-B) information. Refer to the ADS-B traffic discussion later in this section for more information.
Description
EIS
Symbol
Traffic Advisory with ADS-B directional information. Points in the direction of the intruder aircraft track.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Traffic Advisory without directional information.
Traffic Advisory with ADS-B directional information is out of the selected display range. Displayed at outer range ring at proper
bearing. Arrow points in the direction of the intruder aircraft track.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Traffic Advisory out of the selected display range without directional information. Displayed at outer range ring at proper
bearing.
Proximity Advisory with ADS-B directional information. Points in the direction of the aircraft track.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Proximity Advisory without ADS-B directional information.
Other Non-Threat traffic with ADS-B directional information. Arrow points in the direction of the intruder aircraft track.
Other Non-Threat traffic without ADS-B directional information.
AFCS
Traffic located on the ground with ADS-B directional information. Arrow points in the direction of the aircraft track. Ground
traffic is only displayed when ADS-B is in Surface (SURF) Mode or own aircraft is on the ground.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Ground traffic without ADS-B directional information. Ground traffic is only displayed when ADS-B is in Surface (SURF) Mode or
own aircraft is on the ground.
Non-aircraft ground traffic with ADS-B directional information. Pointed end indicates direction of travel. Ground traffic is only
displayed when ADS-B is in Surface (SURF) Mode or own aircraft is on the ground.
APPENDICES
Non-aircraft ground traffic without ADS-B directional information.. Ground traffic is only displayed when ADS-B is in Surface
(SURF) Mode or own aircraft is on the ground.
Table 6-15 ADS-B Traffic Symbology with GTX 345R Transponder
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
INDEX
A Traffic Advisory (TA), displayed as a solid amber circle or circle enclosing an arrow, alerts the crew to a
potentially hazardous intruding aircraft, if the closing rate, distance, and vertical separation meet TA criteria.
A Traffic Advisory that is beyond the selected display range (off scale) is indicated by a half TA symbol at the
edge of the screen at the relative bearing of the intruder.
323
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
A Proximity Advisory (PA), displayed as a solid white diamond or arrow, indicates the intruding aircraft is
within ±1200 feet and is within a 6 nm range, but is still not considered a TA threat.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Other, non-threat traffic, shown as an open white diamond or arrow, is displayed for traffic beyond six
nautical miles that is neither a TA or PA.
Relative altitude, when available, is displayed above or below the corresponding intruder symbol in
hundreds of feet. When this altitude is above own aircraft, it is preceded by a ‘+’ symbol; a minus sign ‘-’
indicates traffic is below own aircraft.
EIS
The system displays the altitude vertical trend as an up/down arrow (for speeds greater than 500 fpm in
either direction) to the right of the intruder symbol.
Relative Altitude
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Vertical trend arrow
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-66 Intruder Altitude and Vertical Trend Arrow
If the system is receiving ADS-B track information, a motion vector line extending beyond the traffic symbol
in the direction of the track may also be displayed when either absolute or relative motion vectors are enabled.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Vector Line indicates
intruder aircraft track
Figure 6-67 Intruder Traffic with ADS-B Directional Information and Track
AFCS
TAS TA ALERTING CONDITIONS
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The TAS system automatically adjusts its TA sensitivity level to reduce the likelihood of nuisance TA alerting
during flight phases likely to be near airports. The system applies Level A TA (less) sensitivity when the
aircraft’s landing gear is extended. Level B TA sensitivity applies in all other conditions to calculate TA threats.
324
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
B
Yes
B
No
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
No
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
A
Intruder closing rate provides less than 20 seconds of vertical and horizontal separation.
Or:
Intruder closing rate provides less than 20 seconds of horizontal separation and vertical
separation is within 600 feet.
Or:
Intruder range is within 0.2 nm and vertical separation is within 600 feet.
Intruder closing rate provides less than 15 seconds of separation or intruder range is
within 0.2 NM.
Intruder closing rate provides less than 30 seconds of vertical and horizontal separation.
Or:
Intruder closing rate provides less than 30 seconds of horizontal separation and vertical
separation is within 800 feet.
Or:
Intruder range is within 0.55 nm and vertical separation is within 800 feet.
Intruder closing rate provides less than 20 seconds of separation or intruder range is
within 0.55 NM.
EIS
Yes
TA Alerting Conditions
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Sensitivity Intruder Altitude
Level
Available
Table 6-16 TA Sensitivity Level and TA Alerting Criteria
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TAS ALERTS
When the TAS detects a new TA, the following occur:
AFCS
• The system issues a “Traffic” voice alert followed by bearing information. If the intruder is more than 0.25
nm from own aircraft, the system then announces the intruder’s relative altitude and approximate distance.
For example, the voice alert “Traffic! 12 o’clock, high, four miles,” would indicate the traffic is in front of
own aircraft, above own altitude, and approximately four nautical miles away.
If the traffic is at close range (i.e. less than 0.25 nm), only the “Traffic” voice alert and bearing information is
heard, and the system omits the relative altitude and distance information. This also happens when multiple
TAs occur at the same time.
Relative Altitude*
“Traffic”
“One o’clock” through
“Twelve o’clock”
or “No Bearing”
“High”, “Low”, “Same Altitude” (if
within 200 feet of own altitude), or
“Altitude not available”
Approximate
Distance* (nm)
“Less than one mile”,
“One Mile” through
“Ten Miles”, or “More
than ten miles”
APPENDICES
Bearing
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
TA Announcement
Beginning
* If aircraft causing the TA is within 0.25 nm from own aircraft, or multiple TAs are occurring simultaneously, the
system omits relative altitude and approximate distance information from the voice alert.
Table 6-17 TA Descriptive Voice Announcements
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
325
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
NOTE: The system mutes TAS traffic voice alerts when own aircraft altitude is below 500’ AGL.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• A ‘TRAFFIC’ Annunciation appears at the right of the airspeed on the PFD, flashes for five seconds, and
remains displayed until no TAs are detected in the area.
• A PFD map is automatically displayed with TA traffic.
If the bearing of TA traffic cannot be determined, a yellow text banner will be displayed in the center of the
Traffic Map Page and in the lower-left of the PFD inset map instead of a TA symbol. The text will indicate
“TA” followed by the distance, relative altitude, and vertical trend arrow for the TA traffic, if known.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
A TA will be displayed for at least eight seconds, even if the condition(s) that initially triggered the TA are no
longer present.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Inset Map
Displays When
TA is Detected
Figure 6-68 Traffic Annunciation (PFD)
AFCS
SYSTEM TEST
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The traffic system provides a system test mode to verify normal operation. The test takes about ten seconds
to complete. When the system test is initiated, a test pattern of traffic symbols appears on any displayed traffic
maps. The test pattern corresponds to the current aircraft heading. A climbing TA is shown to the west, level
Other Non-Threat traffic is shown to the northwest, and a descending Proximity Advisory is in the northeast,
relative to own aircraft.
APPENDICES
The voice alert “Traffic System Test” indicates the traffic system test is complete, and the system enters
Standby Mode.
Testing the traffic system:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Traffic Map Page.
INDEX
3) Turn the Joystick to set the range to 2/6 nm to allow for full test pattern to be displayed during test.
4) If the ADS-B Softkey is enabled, press the ADS-B Softkey to disable the display of ADS-B Traffic.
5) Press the TAS STBY Softkey to place the TAS system into Standby Mode.
326
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
6) Press the Test Softkey.
Or:
1) On the Traffic Map Page, press the MENU Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Turn the small FMS knob to select ‘Test Mode’.
3) Press the ENT Key.
TAS Test Mode
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-69 System Test in Progress with Example Test Pattern
OPERATION
AFCS
NOTE: The Garmin GTS 800 traffic system automatically changes from Standby to Operating mode eight
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
seconds after takeoff. The system also automatically changes from Operating to Standby mode 24
seconds after landing.
After power-up, the traffic system is in Standby Mode. The system must be in Operating Mode for traffic to
be displayed and for TAs to be issued.
Changing traffic system modes on the Traffic Map Page:
APPENDICES
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Traffic Map Page.
3) Press the TAS OPER Softkey to begin displaying traffic. ‘OPERATING’ is displayed in the Traffic mode field.
INDEX
4) Press the TAS STBY Softkey to place the system in the Standby mode. ‘STANDBY’ is displayed in the Traffic
mode field.
Or:
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
327
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
1) With the Traffic Map Page displayed, press the MENU Key.
2) Turn the small FMS knob to highlight the desired mode.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the ENT Key.
TRAFFIC MAP PAGE
EIS
The ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page shows surrounding traffic data in relation to the aircraft’s current position
and altitude, without basemap clutter. It is the principal map page for viewing traffic information. Aircraft
orientation is always heading up unless there is no valid heading. The pilot can adjust the map range with
the Joystick. A range indication appears on each range ring.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The system annunciates the traffic mode and altitude display mode in the upper right corner of the Traffic
Map Page.
TAS Operating Mode
Annunciation
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Other Non-Threat
Traffic, 1000 below,
climbing
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Traffic Advisory,
200’ above,
climbing
No-bearing
Traffic Advisory,
4.0 nm away,
1100’ above,
descending
Traffic Display
Range Rings
AFCS
Proximity
Advisory, 1200’
feet below,
descending
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-70 Traffic Map Page
Altitude Display Mode
APPENDICES
The pilot can select the volume of airspace in which Other Non-Threat and Proximity Advisory traffic is
displayed. TAs occurring outside of these limits will always be shown.
Changing the altitude range:
1) On the Traffic Map Page, press the ALT Mode Softkey.
2) Press one of the following softkeys:
INDEX
• Above: Displays Other Non-Threat and Proximity Advisory traffic from 9900 feet above the aircraft to 2700
feet below the aircraft. Typically used during climb phase of flight.
• Normal: Displays Other Non-Threat and Proximity Advisory traffic from 2700 feet above the aircraft to
2700 feet below the aircraft. Typically used during enroute phase of flight.
328
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
• Below: Displays Other Non-Threat and Proximity Advisory traffic from 2700 feet above the aircraft to 9900
feet below the aircraft. Typically used during descent phase of flight.
•
UNREST (unrestricted): All traffic is displayed from 9900 feet above and 9900 feet below the aircraft.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) To return to the Traffic Page, press the Back Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select one of the following (see softkey description in the previous step 2):
•
Normal
•
Below
•
Unrestricted
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Above
EIS
•
3) Select the ENT Softkey.
Traffic Map Page Display Range
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The display range on the Traffic Map Page can be changed at any time. Map range is adjustable with the
Joystick, and rings on the map denote the ranges.
Adjusting the Trafic Map Page:
1) Turn the Joystick clockwise to increase the map range.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Turn the Joystick counter-clockwise to descrease the map range.
ADDITIONAL TRAFFIC DISPLAYS
• Nearest Pages
• Traffic Map Page
• Active Flight Plan Page
• Trip Planning Page
• IFR/VFR Charts Page
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Navigation Map Page
AFCS
The Map - Traffic Map Page is the principal map page for viewing traffic information. Traffic information
can also be displayed on the following other maps for additional reference on the MFD when the traffic unit
is operating:
APPENDICES
Traffic information can also be displayed on the PFD when the Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT) option
is installed and enabled. See the Additional Features Section for details.
Enabling/disabling traffic information (MFD maps other than the Traffic Map Page):
1) Press the Map Opt Softkey.
2) Press the Traffic Softkey. Traffic is now displayed on the map.
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
INDEX
When traffic is selected on maps other than the Traffic Map Page, the system shows a traffic status icon to
indicate traffic is enabled for display.
329
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Proximity
Advisory
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Traffic Advisory
Traffic
Advisory OffScale Banner
Annunciation
Traffic overlay
enabled icon and
Altitude Display
Mode
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-71 TAS Traffic on Navigation Map
Customizing the traffic display on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Settings’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Traffic Group and press the ENT Key.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through the selections.
AFCS
• Traffic – Turns the display of traffic data on or off
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Traffic Mode – Selects the traffic mode for display; select from:
- All Traffic - Displays all traffic
- TA/PA - Displays Traffic Advisories and Proximity Advisories
- TA Only - Displays Traffic Advisories only
• Traffic Symbols – Selects the maximum range at which traffic symbols are shown
APPENDICES
• Traffic Labels – Selects the maximum range at which traffic labels are shown with the option to turn off
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options (On/Off, range settings, etc.).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page.
INDEX
The Navigation Map Page Setup Menu also controls the display of traffic. The setup menu controls the map
range settings. Traffic data symbols and labels can be decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than
the map range setting is selected, the data is removed from the map. Maps besides the Traffic Map Page use
settings based on those selected for the Navigation Map Page.
330
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
A traffic-only inset map is available on the PFD by pressing the TFC Map Softkey. A traffic map appears on
the PFD. This map resembles the Traffic Map Page, and presents a heading up format. Traffic information
can also be overlaid on PFD navigation maps.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Enabling/disabling traffic overlay on PFD navigation maps:
1) With the Inset Map or HSI Map displayed, press the Map/HSI Softkey on the PFD.
2) Press the Traffic Softkey to enable/disable the display traffic information.
SYSTEM STATUS
TAS Mode
Traffic Display Status Icon
(Other Maps)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Traffic System Test
Initiated
Traffic Mode Annunciation
(Traffic Map Page)
EIS
The traffic mode is annunciated in the upper right corner of the Traffic Map Page.
TEST
(‘TEST MODE’ shown in center of page)
OPERATING
Operating
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
STANDBY
(also shown in white in center of page)
Standby
Traffic System Failed*
FAIL
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
* See Table 6-19 for additional failure annunciations
Table 6-18 Traffic Modes
If the traffic unit fails, an annunciation as to the cause of the failure is shown in the center of the Traffic Map
Page. During a failure condition, the Operating Mode cannot be selected.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Traffic Map Page Center
Description
Annunciation
NO DATA
Data is not being received from the TAS unit
DATA FAILED
Data is being received from the TAS unit, but the unit is self-reporting a failure
FAILED
Incorrect data format received from the TAS unit
Table 6-19 TAS Failure Annunciations
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
331
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
The annunciations to indicate the status of traffic information appear in a banner at the lower left corner of
maps on which traffic can be displayed.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Traffic Status Banner
Annunciation
TA OFF SCALE
EIS
TA X.X ± XX ↕
TRFC FAIL
NO TRFC DATA
Description
A Traffic Advisory is outside the selected display range*.
Annunciation is removed when traffic comes within the selected display range.
System cannot determine bearing of Traffic Advisory**.
Annunciation indicates distance in nm, altitude separation in hundreds of feet, and
altitude trend arrow (climbing/descending).
TAS unit has failed (unit is self-reporting a failure or sending incorrectly formatted data)
Data is not being received from the TAS unit
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
*Shown as symbol on Traffic Map Page
**Shown in center of Traffic Map Page
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Table 6-20 TAS Traffic Status Annunciations
332
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
6.5 ADS-B TRAFFIC
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information for collision avoidance maneuvering.
The traffic display does not provide collision avoidance resolution advisories and does not under any
circumstances or conditions relieve the pilot’s responsibility to see and avoid other aircraft.
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information to accurately depict all of the traffic
EIS
information within range of the aircraft. Due to lack of equipment, poor signal reception, and/or inaccurate
information from other aircraft, traffic may be present but not represented on the display.
ADS-B SYSTEM OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Automatic Dependent Surveillance-Broadcast (ADS-B) is a core technology in the FAA NextGen air traffic
control system. It offers improved surveillance services, both air-to-air and air-to-ground, especially in areas
where radar coverage is ineffective due to terrain, or where it is impractical or cost prohibitive. ADS-B is
comprised of three segments for the purposes of providing traffic information: ADS-B (Broadcast), ADS-R
(Rebroadcast), and Traffic Information Service-Broadcast (TIS-B).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
ADS-B includes the automatic broadcast of position reports by aircraft, surface vehicles, and transmitters on
fixed objects. These broadcasts contain information such as GPS position, identity (Flight ID, Call Sign, Tail
Number, ICAO registration number, etc.), ground track, ground speed, pressure altitude, and emergency status.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1090 ES
UAT
RADAR
Composite
GPS
1090 ES
AFCS
18,000 FT
10,000 FT
RADAR
ATC
UAT
UAT
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Mode A/C
UAT
1090 ES
ADS-B Ground Station (ADS-R,
TIS-B, FIS-B)
APPENDICES
Figure 6-72 ADS-B System
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
INDEX
For the purpose of distinguishing between levels of ADS-B service, there are three classifications of aircraft or
system capability: ADS-B In, ADS-B Out, and ADS-B participating. ADS-B In refers to the capability to receive
ADS-B information. ADS-B Out refers to the capability to transmit ADS-B information. ADS-B participating
refers to the capability to both send and receive ADS-B information. Aircraft lacking either ADS-In, ADS-B Out,
or both ADS-B capabilities may also be referred to as ADS-B nonparticipating aircraft.
333
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The ADS-B system operates on two frequencies: 1090 MHz and 978 MHz. Both frequencies provide the same
traffic information. An aircraft may be ADS-B In, Out, or participating on one or both frequencies, depending
on the installed equipment. The 1090 MHz frequency portion of ADS-B is known as 1090 Extended Squitter
(1090 ES). The 978 MHz portion of ADS-B is known as Universal Access Transceiver (UAT).
The Garmin GTX 345R transponder provides ADS-B Out functions using the 1090 ES data link. It also
performs ADS-B In functions using the UAT data link. This includes the reception of Flight Information ServicesBroadcast (FIS-B) data link weather service, provided when the aircraft is receiving data from a participating
ground station; refer to the Data Link Weather section for more information about FIS-B Weather.
EIS
AUTOMATIC DEPENDENT SURVEILLANCE-REBROADCAST (ADS-R)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Because it is not required that ADS-B In capable aircraft be able to receive ADS-B data on both the 1090
MHz and 978 MHz data links, a method exists to get data from one data link to the other. ADS-R is the
rebroadcast of ADS-B data by FAA ground stations, which provide this service by taking traffic data from one
link and rebroadcasting it on the other. For example, if two aircraft are in the service volume for a ground
station, and one is transmitting on 1090 MHz and the other is transmitting on 978 MHz, the ground station
retransmits the data from each aircraft on the other link to ensure the two aircraft can “see” each other as
traffic.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
If another aircraft can only receive 978 MHz UAT information, it cannot directly ‘see’ another aircraft
sending only 1090 ES information aircraft unless an ADS-R ground station in the vicinity rebroadcasts the
1090 ES data over the 978 MHz UAT frequency. This is also true for an aircraft when can only receive 1090
ES data; it would need an ADS-R ground station to ‘see’ another aircraft operating on the UAT frequency.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TRAFFIC INFORMATION SERVICE-BROADCAST (TIS-B)
TIS-B provides a link between the secondary surveillance radar (SSR)-based system ATC uses and the ADSB-based system. When an ADS-B In or Out capable aircraft is within the service volume of an FAA ADS-B
ground station, the ground station broadcasts a portion of the ATC radar data to the aircraft. This aircraft is
then included in the list of aircraft being provided TIS-B service and is then considered a “TIS-B participant.”
AFCS
TIS-B coverage is available when the aircraft is within ground station coverage, in SSR coverage, and the
other aircraft is also in SSR coverage, and is transmitting its altitude.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The ground station provides ATC radar information for other aircraft within ±3,500 feet and 15 NM of the
participant, to include altitude, position, ground speed, and ground track. TIS-B broadcasts occur once every
three to thirteen seconds, depending on the characteristics of the ground station providing the TIS-B service.
INDEX
APPENDICES
The following table describes the aircraft that are observed by a GTX 345R-equipped aircraft according to
the level of equipment installed in the other aircraft.
334
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Other Aircraft Equipment
Viewable by GTX 345R Equipped Aircraft
1090ES Out Equipped
Yes
UAT Receive Only Capable
No
UAT Transmit Equipped
Yes
No Transponder, No ADS-B
No
Non ADS-B Equipped, but with Mode C or S Transponder
Yes*
* Only when in ADS-B ground station coverage and when the other aircraft is in ATC radar coverage, or own
aircraft is equipped with a TAS system and traffic is within the TAS surveillance range.
Table 6-21 Aircraft Available for Viewing by an ADS-B Equipped Own Aircraft
EIS
ADS-B WITH TAS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
When the system is receiving ADS-B In traffic and with an optional Garmin GTS 825 TAS in Operating
Mode, the system attempts to match (or “correlate”) data the two traffic sources. When a correlation is made,
the system displays the traffic information for the tracked aircraft determined to be the most accurate. Any
traffic that is not correlated (i.e., only detected by one system but not the other) is also displayed for the
flight crew. This may occur, for example, if another aircraft is beyond the surveillance range of the TAS, but
own aircraft is receiving information via ADS-B for the other aircraft. The traffic correlation feature improves
the accuracy of the traffic displayed, while reducing the occurrence of displaying the same traffic for a given
aircraft twice.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NOTE: In certain situations, a single aircraft may be depicted as two aircraft on the display if the system
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
is unable to correlate the traffic. This may occur, for example, when operating on the edges of ATC radar
coverage, or when using an optional active traffic system providing intermittent data. This may also occur
if TIS-B traffic data does not closely match the traffic data from other sources, especially while the traffic
tracked by ATC radar is turning.
AFCS
NOTE: The TAS system issues alerts for traffic it is tracking using TAS alerting criteria. The ADS-B system
issues alerts for traffic it is tracking using the Conflict Situational Awareness & Alerting (CSA) criteria.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
CONFLICT SITUATIONAL AWARENESS & ALERTING
Conflict Situational Awareness (CSA) is an alerting algorithm which provides ADS-B traffic alerting similar to
the TAS system discussed previously.
APPENDICES
When a TA occurs with is equipment, the displays a ‘TRAFFIC’ annunciation and provides a voice alert. This
annunciation and voice alert is the same as the alerts issues by the Garmin GTS 800 TAS discussed previously.
The own aircraft altitude above terrain determines the sensitivity of the CSA algorithm to minimize nuisance
alerts. Height Above Terrain, and Geodetic Sea Level (GSL) altitude are used to adjust the sensitivity of the CSA
algorithm in accordance with the following table:
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
335
Height Above
Terrain (HAT)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
4
4
4
5
5
5
6
Any
Any
Unavailable
Any
>1000
<=2350
Unavailable
Unavailable or
>2350
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Sensitivity
Level
EIS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
7
Unavailable or
>2350
8
Unavailable or
>2350
9
Unavailable or
>2350
10
Unavailable or
>2350
Vertical
Protected
Own Altitude Look-ahead
GPS Phase of Flight
Threshold for Volume
(Feet)
time (sec)
Alert (feet)
(NM)
Any
Any
20
850
0.20
Any
Any
20
850
0.20
Approach
Any
20
850
0.20
Any
Any
25
850
0.20
Any
Any
25
850
0.20
Terminal
Not approach and not
Terminal (including
unavailable)
Not approach and not
Terminal (including
unavailable)
Not approach and not
Terminal (including
unavailable)
Not approach and not
Terminal (including
unavailable)
Not approach and not
Terminal (including
unavailable)
Any
<=5000
25
30
850
850
0.20
0.35
>5000
<=10,000
40
850
0.55
>10,000
<=20,000
45
850
0.80
>20,000
<=42,000
48
850
1.10
> 42,000
48
1200
1.10
Table 6-22 CSA Alerting Thresholds for ADS-B Traffic
AFCS
NOTE: ADS-B traffic voice alerts are suppressed when own aircraft is below 500 feet AGL.
AIRBORNE AND SURFACE APPLICATIONS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
ADS-B traffic can help the pilot visually acquire traffic both in the air and on-the-ground. There are two ADS-B
applications or modes: Airborne Situational Awareness (AIRB) and Surface Situational Awareness (SURF). The
system automatically selects the appropriate application based on conditions.
APPENDICES
The AIRB application is on when the aircraft is more than five nautical miles and 1,500 feet above the nearest
airport. When the AIRB application is active, the system only displays traffic which is airborne.
INDEX
The SURF application is on when the aircraft is within five nautical miles and less than 1,500 feet above field
elevation. When the SURF applications is on, the system displays airborne and on the ground traffic. At a
Traffic Map Page range of one nm or less, the airport environment (including taxiways and runways) appears in
addition to traffic. The airport displays are derived from the SafeTaxi database. Refer to the Additional Features
section for more information about SafeTaxi displays.
336
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NOTE: Do not rely on the solely on the traffic display to determine the runway alignment of traffic, especially
when runways are in close proximity to each other.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Due to the varying precision of the data received via ADS-B, ADS-R, and TIS-B services, not all traffic symbols
may not be depicted on the traffic display. Because higher data precision is required for traffic to be displayed
in the SURF environment, some traffic eligible for AIRB will not be displayed while SURF is on. Availability for
AIRB and SURF is depicted on the ‘Aux -ADS-B Status’ Page, discussed later in this section.
EIS
SURF Application On
Ground-based
vehicle
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Aircraft on the
ground
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 6-73 Traffic Map Page with SURF Mode On
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
337
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
TRAFFIC DESCRIPTION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The symbols used to display ADS-B traffic are shown in the following table. Above or below the traffic symbol
is the traffic identifier, and altitude. A small up or down arrow next to the traffic symbol indicates that the traffic
is climbing or descending at a rate of at least 500 feet per minute.
Symbol
Description
Traffic Advisory with directional information. Points in the direction of the intruder aircraft track.
EIS
Traffic Advisory without directional information.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Traffic Advisory out of the selected display range with directional information. Displayed at outer range ring at proper bearing.
Traffic Advisory out of the selected display range without directional information. Displayed at outer range ring at proper
bearing.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Proximity Advisory with directional information. Points in the direction of the aircraft track.
Proximity Advisory without directional information.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Other Non-Threat traffic with directional information. Points in the direction of the intruder aircraft track.
Other Non-Threat traffic without directional information.
Traffic located on the ground with directional information. Points in the direction of the aircraft track. Ground traffic is only
displayed when ADS-B is in Surface (SURF) Mode or own aircraft is on the ground.
AFCS
Ground traffic without directional information. Ground traffic is only displayed when ADS-B is in Surface (SURF) Mode or own
aircraft is on the ground.
Non-aircraft ground traffic with ADS-B directional information. Pointed end indicates direction of travel. Ground traffic is only
displayed when ADS-B is in Surface (SURF) Mode or own aircraft is on the ground.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Non-aircraft ground traffic. Ground traffic is only displayed when ADS-B is in Surface (SURF) Mode or own aircraft is on the
ground.
Table 6-23 ADS-B Traffic Symbology with GTX 345R Transponder
APPENDICES
OPERATION
TRAFFIC MAP PAGE
INDEX
The Traffic Map Page shows surrounding traffic data in relation to the aircraft’s current position and altitude,
without basemap clutter. Aircraft orientation is always heading up unless there is no valid heading. Map
range is adjustable with the Joystick, as indicated by the map range rings.
The traffic mode and altitude display mode are annunciated in the upper right corner of the page.
338
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AIRB Application On
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Other Non-Threat
Traffic, 1000 below,
climbing
Traffic Advisory,
200’ above,
climbing
Traffic Display
Range Rings
EIS
No-bearing
Traffic Advisory,
4.0 nm away,
1100’ above,
descending
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Proximity
Advisory, 1200’
feet below,
descending
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-74 Traffic Map Page
Enabling/disabling the display of ADS-B traffic.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Select the Traffic Map Page.
2) Press the ADS-B Softkey.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key and turn the small FMS Knob to highlight ‘ADS-B On’ or ‘ADS-B Off’.
AFCS
b) Press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The traffic system provides a system test mode to verify normal operation. The test takes about ten seconds
to complete. When the system test is initiated, a test pattern of traffic symbols appears on any displayed traffic
maps. The test pattern corresponds to the current aircraft heading. A climbing TA is shown to the west, level
Other Non-Threat traffic is shown to the northwest, and a descending Proximity Advisory is in the northeast,
relative to own aircraft.
The voice alert “Traffic System Test” indicates the traffic system test is complete, and the system enters
Standby Mode.
APPENDICES
Testing the traffic system:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Traffic Map Page.
3) Turn the Joystick to set the range to 2/6 nm to allow for full test pattern to be displayed during test.
INDEX
4) If a TAS is installed, press the TAS STBY Softkey to place the TAS system into Standby Mode.
5) If the ADS-B Softkey is enabled, press the ADS-B Softkey to disable ADS-B traffic.
6) Press the Test Softkey.
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
339
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Or:
1) With the Traffic system in Standby mode and the ADS-B softkey disabled, press the MENU Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Test Mode’.
3) Press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
ADS-B Test Mode
Figure 6-75 System Test in Progress with Example Test Pattern
The pilot can select the volume of airspace in which Other Non-Threat and Proximity traffic is displayed.
TAs occurring outside of these limits will always be shown.
AFCS
Changing the altitude range:
1) On the Traffic Map Page, select the ALT Mode Softkey.
2) Press one of the following softkeys:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Above: Displays Other Non-Threat and proximity traffic from 9900 feet above the aircraft to 2700 feet
below the aircraft. Typically used during climb phase of flight.
• Normal: Displays Other Non-Threat and proximity traffic from 2700 feet above the aircraft to 2700 feet
below the aircraft. Typically used during enroute phase of flight.
APPENDICES
• Below: Displays Other Non-Threat and proximity traffic from 2700 feet above the aircraft to 9900 feet
below the aircraft. Typically used during descent phase of flight.
•
UNREST (unrestricted): All traffic is displayed from 9900 feet above and 9900 feet below the aircraft.
3) To return to the Traffic Map Page, select the Back Softkey.
INDEX
Or:
340
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1) On the Traffic Map Page, press the MENU Key.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight one of the following options (see softkey description in the previous step
2):
Above
•
Normal
•
Below
•
Unrestricted
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
•
3) Press the ENT Key.
EIS
DISPLAYING MOTION VECTORS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
When Absolute Motion Vectors are selected, the vectors extending from the traffic symbols depict the
traffic’s reported track and speed over the ground. When Relative Motion Vectors are selected, the vectors
extending from the traffic symbols display how the traffic is moving relative to own aircraft. These vectors
are calculated using the traffic’s track and ground speed and own aircraft’s track and ground speed. These two
values are combined to depict where the traffic is moving purely with respect to own aircraft, and provide a
forecast of where the traffic will be, relative to own aircraft, in the near future. If the system does not have
sufficient information to calculate motion vectors, they are not shown.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Absolute
Motion Vectors
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Absolute Motion Vectors
selected
APPENDICES
Figure 6-76 Traffic Map Page with Absolute Motion Vectors Enabled
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
341
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Relative Motion
Vectors
Relative Motion Vectors
selected
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-77 Traffic Map Page with Relative Motion Vectors Enabled
Enabling/disabling the Motion Vector display:
1) Select the Traffic Map Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the Motion Softkey.
AFCS
3) Press one of the following softkeys:
•
Absolute: Displays the motion vector pointing in the absolute direction.
•
Relative: Displays the motion vector relative to own aircraft
•
Off: Disables the display of the motion vector.
Or:
1) Select the Traffic Map Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight ‘Relative Motion’, ‘Absolute Motion’ or ‘Motion Vector Off’.
4) Press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
Adjusting the duration for the Motion Vector projected time:
1) Select the Traffic Map Page.
2) Select the Motion Softkey.
3) Select the Duration Softkey.
INDEX
4) Select a softkey for the desired duration (30 SEC, 1 MIN, 2 MIN, 5 MIN).
5) When finished, select the Back Softkey to return to the Traffic Map Page.
342
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Displaying Additional Traffic Information
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Traffic Map Page can display additional information for a selected aircraft symbol. This may include
the aircraft tail number/Flight ID, type of aircraft (e.g., glider, small/medium/large aircraft, service vehicle,
unmanned airborne vehicle (UAV), course, track, groundspeed), and other information.
Showing additional traffic information:
1) Select the Traffic Map Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob. A cyan border appears on the first selected traffic symbol. Additional information appears
in a window in the lower-left corner of the Traffic Map Page.
EIS
3) To select a different aircraft symbol, turn the FMS Knob to move the cyan border until another symol is selected.
4) When finished, press the FMS Knob again to disable the traffic selection.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Traffic Map Page Display Range
The pilot can adjust the range of traffic displayed on the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page. Range indications
appear on rings shown on the page. The minimum map range is 750 feet. A maximum map range of 40
nautical miles is available.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selecting the Traffic Map Display Range:
1) Select the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page.
2) Turn the Joystick as needed to select the desired map range.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NOTE: ADS-B traffic can be displayed as an overlay to navigation maps and IFR/VFR Charts. Refer to the
previous TAS discussions for information about these additional traffic displays.
ADS-B SYSTEM STATUS
TEST MODE
ADS-B: AIRB
None
ADS-B: SURF
None
ABS-B Traffic Off
ADS-B: OFF
ADS-B TRFC OFF
ADS-B Traffic Not
Available
ADS-B: N/A
NO TRK/HDG
ADS-B Failed*
ADS-B: FAIL
ADS-B TRFC FAIL
INDEX
ADS-B: TEST
ADS-B System Test
Initiated
ADS-B Operating in
Airborne Mode
ADS-B Operating in
Surface Mode
Traffic Display Status Icon
(Other Maps)
APPENDICES
Traffic Map Page Center
Banner Annunciation
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Traffic Mode Annunciation
(Traffic Map Page)
ADS-B Mode
AFCS
The traffic mode is annunciated in the upper right corner of the Traffic Map Page.
* See Table 6-25 for additional failure annunciations
Table 6-24 ADS-B Modes
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
343
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
If the traffic unit fails, an annunciation as to the cause of the failure is shown in the center of the Traffic Map
Page. During a failure condition, the Operating Mode cannot be selected.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Traffic Map Page Center
Annunciation
NO DATA
DATA FAILED
FAILED
Description
Data is not being received from the traffic unit
Data is being received from the traffic unit, but the unit is self-reporting a failure
Incorrect data format received from the traffic unit
EIS
Table 6-25 Traffic Failure Annunciations
The annunciations to indicate the status of traffic information appear in a banner at the lower left corner of
maps on which traffic can be displayed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Traffic Status Banner
Annunciation
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
TA OFF SCALE
TA X.X ± XX ↕
TRFC FAIL
NO TRFC DATA
Description
A Traffic Advisory is outside the selected display range*.
Annunciation is removed when traffic comes within the selected display range.
System cannot determine bearing of Traffic Advisory**.
Annunciation indicates distance in nm, altitude separation in hundreds of feet, and altitude trend
arrow (climbing/descending).
Traffic unit has failed (unit is self-reporting a failure or sending incorrectly formatted data)
Data is not being received from the traffic unit
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
*Shown as symbol on Traffic Map Page
**Shown in center of Traffic Map Page
Table 6-26 Traffic Status Annunciations
AFCS
Additional information about the status of ADS-B traffic products is available on the ‘Aux - ADS-B Status’
Page.
Viewing ADS-B Traffic Status:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Aux Page Group.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - ADS-B Status’ Page.
344
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 6-78 Viewing ADS-B Traffic Status on ADS-B Status Page
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
345
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ADS-B Status Page
Item
Traffic Application
Status: Airborne
(AIRB), Surface (SURF),
Airborne Alerts (CSA)
Status Message
Description
On
Traffic application is currently on. Required input data is available, and it meets
performance requirements.
Traffic application is not currently active, but application is ready to run when
condition(s) determine the application should be active. Required input data is
available, and it meets performance requirements.
Traffic application is not available. Required input data is available, but it does
not meet performance requirements.
Traffic application is not available. Required input data is not available or the
application has failed.
Traffic application is not available, because it has not been configured. If this
annunciation persists, the system should be serviced.
Traffic application status is invalid or unknown.
The system is receiving the ADS-R coverage from an FAA ground station.
The system is not receiving the ADS-R coverage from an FAA ground station.
ADS-R coverage is invalid or unknown.
The system is using the #1 GPS receiver for the GPS position source.
The system is using the #2 GPS receiver for the GPS position source.
The GPS source is invalid or unknown.
Displays the number of minutes elapsed since the last uplink from a ground
station occurred. If no uplink has been received, or the status is invalid, dashes
appear instead of the number of minutes.
Available to Run
Not Available
EIS
Fault
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Not Configured
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
TIS-B/ADS-R Coverage
GPS Status: GPS
Source
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Ground Uplink Status:
Last Uplink
---------------Available
Not Available
--------------External #1
External #2
--------Number of minutes, or
‘------’
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Table 6-27 Aux - ADS-B Status Page Messages for ADS-B Traffic
346
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
NOTE: The approved Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH) always supersedes this Pilot’s Guide.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
7.1 AFCS OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 7 AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
The Garmin AFCS is a digital Automatic Flight Control System (AFCS), fully integrated within the system
avionics architecture. The System Overview section provides a block diagram to support this system description.
The flight director provides:
– Command Bars showing pitch/roll guidance
– Vertical/lateral mode selection and processing
• Autopilot (AP) — Autopilot operation occurs within the pitch, roll, and pitch trim servos. It also provides
servo monitoring and automatic flight control in response to flight director steering commands, Attitude and
Heading Reference System (AHRS) attitude and rate information, and airspeed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Manual Electric Trim (MET) — The pitch trim adapter provides manual electric trim capability when the
autopilot is not engaged.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
– Autopilot communication
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Flight Director (FD) — Flight director operation takes place within the primary (#1) GIA 63W. Flight
director commands are displayed on the PFD. The flight director provides:
EIS
The Garmin AFCS can be divided into these main operating functions:
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
AFCS CONTROLS ON THE MFD
The following dedicated AFCS keys are located on the bezels of the PFD and MFD:
1
2
3
4
5
7
ALT Key
9 VNV Key
10 BC Key
8
11
Engages/disengages the autopilot
Selects/deselects Heading Select Mode
Selects/deselects Navigation Mode
Selects/deselects Approach Mode
Selects/deselects Vertical Speed Mode
Selects/deselects Flight Level Change Mode
Activates/deactivates the flight director only
Pressing once turns on the flight director in the default pitch and roll modes. Pressing
again deactivates the flight director and removes the Command Bars. If the autopilot
is engaged, the key is disabled.
Selects/deselects Altitude Hold Mode
Selects/deselects Vertical Path Tracking Mode for Vertical Navigation flight control
Selects/deselects Backcourse Mode
NOSE UP/NOSE Control the mode reference in Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed, and Flight Level Change
modes
DN Keys
1
7
2
8
3
9
4
10
5
11
6
Figure 7-1 Dedicated AFCS Controls
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
6
AP Key
HDG Key
NAV Key
APR Key
VS Key
FLC Key
FD Key
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
AP DISC Switch
(Autopilot Disconnect)
Disengages the autopilot and interrupts pitch trim operation
This switch may be used to mute the aural autopilot disconnect alert.
While pressed, allows manual control of the aircraft while the autopilot is
CWS Button
engaged and synchronizes the flight director’s Command Bars with the
(Control Wheel Steering)
current aircraft pitch (if not in Glideslope Mode) and roll (if in Roll Hold
Mode)
GA Switch (Go Around)
Disengages the autopilot and selects flight director Go Around Mode
The GA Switch is located on the instrument panel above the throttle.
Used to command manual electric trim
(Manual Electric Trim)
This composite switch is split into left and right sides. The left switch is
the ARM contact and the right switch controls the DN (forward) and UP
(rearward) contacts. The MET ARM Switch can be used to disengage the
autopilot and to acknowledge an autopilot disconnect alert and mute the
associated aural tone.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The MET Switch is located on the pilot’s control wheel.
AFCS
Manual trim commands are generated only when both sides of the switch
are operated simultaneously. If either side of the switch is active separately
for more than three seconds, MET function is disabled and ‘PTRM’ is
displayed as the AFCS Status Annunciation on the PFD. The function
remains disabled until both sides of the switch are inactivated.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
MET Switch
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
If an approach procedure is loaded this switch also activates the missed
approach when the selected navigation source is GPS or when the navigation
source is VOR/LOC and a valid frequency has been tuned.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The CWS Button is located on the pilot’s control wheel.
EIS
Upon release of the CWS Button, the flight director may establish new
reference points, depending on the current pitch and roll modes. CWS
operation details are discussed in the flight director modes section.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The AP DISC Switch is located on the pilot’s control wheel.
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The following AFCS controls are located in the cockpit separately from the PFD and MFD:
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
BASIC AUTOPILOT OPERATION
The following describes basic autopilot functionality. A more detailed description follows in Section 7.4.
• Autopilot Engagement — The autopilot may be engaged by pushing the AP Key on the AFCS Control Unit.
Annunciations regarding the engagement are indicated on the PFD.
• Autopilot Engagement with Flight Director Off — Upon engagement, the autopilot will be set to hold the
current attitude of the airplane, if the flight director was not previously on. In this case, ‘PIT’ and ‘ROL’ will be
annunciated.
• Autopilot Engagement with Flight Director On — If the flight director is on, the autopilot will smoothly
pitch and roll the airplane to capture the FD command bars. The prior flight director modes remain unchanged.
• Autopilot Disengagement — The most common way to disconnect the autopilot is to press and release the
AP DISC Switch, which is located on the control wheel. An autopilot disconnect tone will be heard and
annunciated on the PFD. Other ways to disconnect the autopilot include:
– Pressing the AP Key on the AFCS Control Unit
– Pressing the GA Switch (located on the instrument panel above the throttle.)
– Pulling the autopilot circuit breaker
In the event of unexpected autopilot behavior, pressing and holding the AP DISC Switch will disconnect the
autopilot and remove all power to the servos.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
– Operating the MET Switch (located on the pilot’s control wheel)
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
ACTIVATING THE FLIGHT DIRECTOR
Modes Selected
BC Key
Backcourse***
APR Key
Approach**
HDG Key
Heading Select
Pitch Hold (default)
PIT
Pitch Hold (default)
PIT
Pitch Hold (default)
PIT
Pitch Hold (default)
PIT
**The selected navigation receiver must have a valid VOR or LOC signal or active GPS
course before NAV or APR Key press activates flight director.
***The selected navigation receiver must have a valid LOC signal before BC Key press
activates flight director.
APPENDICES
Table 7-1 Flight Director Activation
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
*Valid VNV flight plan must be entered before VNV Key press activates flight director.
AFCS
Navigation**
GA Switch
ROL
ROL
ROL
TO
GA
ROL
ROL
ROL
GPS
VOR
LOC
BC
GPS
VOR
LOC
HDG
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NAV Key
FD Key
AP Key
CWS Button
Vertical
Pitch Hold (default)
PIT
Pitch Hold (default)
PIT
Pitch Hold (default)
PIT
Takeoff (on ground)
TO
Go Around (in air)
GA
Altitude Hold
ALT
Vertical Speed
VS
Vertical Path Tracking* VPTH
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
ALT Key
VS Key
VNV Key
Lateral
Roll Hold (default)
Roll Hold (default)
Roll Hold (default)
Takeoff (on ground)
Go Around (in air)
Roll Hold (default)
Roll Hold (default)
Roll Hold (default)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Control Pressed
EIS
An initial press of a key listed in Table 7-1 (when the flight director is not active) activates the flight director
in the listed modes. The flight director may be turned off and the Command Bars removed from the display by
pressing the FD Key again. The FD Key is disabled when the autopilot is engaged.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The flight director function provides pitch and roll commands to the AFCS and displays them on the PFD.
With the flight director activated, the aircraft can be hand-flown to follow the path shown by the Command Bars.
Maximum commanded pitch (+20°/-15°) and roll (22°) angles, vertical acceleration, and roll rate are limited to
values established during AFCS certification. The flight director also provides commands to the autopilot.
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
7.2 FLIGHT DIRECTOR OPERATION
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
AFCS STATUS BOX
Flight director mode annunciations are displayed on the PFD when the flight director is active. Flight director
selection and autopilot statuses are shown in the center of the AFCS Status Box. Lateral flight director modes
are displayed on the left and vertical on the right. Armed modes are displayed in white and active in green.
Lateral Modes
Armed
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
Active
Autopilot
Status
Vertical Modes
Active
Mode
Reference
Armed
Selected
Altitude
Command
Bars
GPS is
Selected
Navigation
Source
Figure 7-2 PFD AFCS Display
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
AFCS Status Box
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
Armed modes are annunciated in white and active in green in the AFCS Status Box. Under normal operation,
when the control for the active flight director mode is pressed, the flight director reverts to the default mode(s)
for the axis(es). Automatic transition from armed to active mode is indicated by the white armed mode
annunciation moving to the green active mode field and flashing for 10 seconds.
Upon activation of the flight director, Command Bars are displayed in magenta on the PFD as a single cue.
The Command Bars do not override the Aircraft Symbol. The Command Bars move together vertically to
indicate pitch commands and bank left or right to indicate roll commands.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
COMMAND BARS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The flight director is automatically disabled if the attitude information required to compute the default flight
director modes becomes invalid or unavailable.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 7-3 Loss of GPS Signal
EIS
If the information required to compute a flight director mode becomes invalid or unavailable, the flight
director automatically reverts to the default mode for that axis. A flashing yellow mode annunciation and
annunciator light indicate loss of sensor (ADC) or navigation data (VOR, LOC, GPS, VNV, SBAS) required to
compute commands. When such a loss occurs, the system automatically begins to roll the wings level (enters
Roll Hold Mode) or maintain the pitch angle (enters Pitch Hold Mode), depending on the affected axis. The
flashing annunciation stops when the affected mode key is pressed or another mode for the axis is selected. If
after 10 seconds no action is taken, the flashing annunciation stops.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Flight director modes are normally selected independently for the pitch and roll axes. Unless otherwise
specified, all mode keys are alternate action (i.e., press on, press off). In the absence of specific mode selection,
the flight director reverts to the default pitch and/or roll modes.
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT DIRECTOR MODES
Command Bars
AFCS
Aircraft Symbol
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 7-4 Command Bars
APPENDICES
If the attitude information being sent to the flight director becomes invalid or unavailable, the Command Bars
are removed from the display. The flight director Command Bars also disappear if the pitch exceeds +30˚/-20˚
or bank exceeds 65˚.
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
7.3 AFCS MODES
The AFCS is capable of operating in a variety of independent Lateral Modes, Vertical Modes and Combination
of both the Lateral and Vertical Modes.
VERTICAL MODES
The following table lists the vertical modes with their corresponding controls and annunciations. The mode
reference is displayed next to the active mode annunciation for Altitude Hold, Vertical Speed, and Flight Level
Change modes. The NOSE UP/DN Wheel can be used to change the vertical mode reference while operating
under Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed, or Flight Level Change Mode.
Vertical Mode
Description
Control Annunciation
Reference
Range
Holds the current aircraft pitch
attitude; may be used to climb/ (default)
PIT
-15° to +20°
descend to the Selected Altitude
Selected Altitude Capture
Captures the Selected Altitude
*
ALTS
Altitude Hold
Holds the current Altitude Reference ALT Key ALT nnnnn ft
Maintains the current aircraft vertical
-2000 to
Vertical Speed
speed; may be used to climb/descend VS Key VS nnnn fpm
+1500 fpm
to the Selected Altitude
70 to 150 kts
(172)
Maintains the current aircraft
70 to 160 kts
airspeed in IAS while the aircraft is
Flight Level Change, IAS Hold
w Key FLC nnn kt
climbing/descending to the Selected
(182)
Altitude
80 to 160 kts
(206)
Pitch Hold
Reference
Change
Increment
0.5°
100 fpm
1 kt
* ALTS armed automatically when PIT, VS, FLC, TO, or GA active, and under VPTH when Selected Altitude is to be captured
instead of VNV Target Altitude
Table 7-2 Flight Director Vertical Modes
PITCH HOLD MODE (PIT)
When the flight director is activated (the FD Key is pressed), Pitch Hold Mode is selected by default. Pitch
Hold Mode is indicated as the active vertical mode by the green ‘PIT’ annunciation. This mode may be used
for climb or descent to the Selected Altitude (shown above the Altimeter), since Selected Altitude Capture
Mode is automatically armed when Pitch Hold Mode is activated.
In Pitch Hold Mode, the flight director maintains a constant pitch attitude, the pitch reference. The pitch
reference is set to the aircraft pitch attitude at the moment of mode selection. If the aircraft pitch attitude
exceeds the flight director pitch command limitations, the flight director commands a pitch angle equal to
the nose-up/down limit.
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
When operating in Pitch Hold Mode, the pitch reference can be adjusted by:
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Changing the Pitch Reference
• Using the NOSE UP/NOSE DN Keys
Pitch Hold
Mode Active
Selected Altitude
Capture Mode Armed
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Pressing the CWS Switch, hand-flying the aircraft to establish a new pitch reference, then releasing the
CWS Switch
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 7-5 Pitch Hold Mode
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Command Bars Maintain
Desired Pitch Reference
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SELECTED ALTITUDE CAPTURE MODE (ALTS)
Selected Altitude Capture Mode is automatically armed with activation of the following modes:
• Pitch Hold
• Go Around
• Vertical Speed
• Vertical Path Tracking (if the Selected Altitude
is to be captured instead of the VNV Target
Altitude)
• Flight Level Change
The white ‘ALTS’ annunciation indicates Selected Altitude Capture Mode is armed. The ALT Knob is used
to set the Selected Altitude (shown above the Altimeter) until Selected Altitude Capture Mode becomes active.
As the aircraft nears the Selected Altitude, the flight director automatically transitions to Selected Altitude
Capture Mode with Altitude Hold Mode armed. This automatic transition is indicated by the green ‘ALTS’
annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds and the appearance of the white ‘ALT’ annunciation. The Selected
Altitude is shown as the Altitude Reference beside the ‘ALTS’ annunciation.
At 50 feet from the Selected Altitude, the flight director automatically transitions from Selected Altitude
Capture to Altitude Hold Mode and holds the Selected Altitude (shown as the Altitude Reference). As Altitude
Hold Mode becomes active, the white ‘ALT’ annunciation moves to the active vertical mode field and flashes
green for 10 seconds to indicate the automatic transition.
Altitude Reference
(in this case, equal to
Selected Altitude)
Flash up to 10 sec, Indicating Automatic Transition
Changing the Selected Altitude
NOTE: Pressing the CWS Switch while in Selected Altitude Capture Mode does not cancel the mode.
Use of the ALT Knob to change the Selected Altitude while Selected Altitude Capture Mode is active
causes the flight director to revert to Pitch Hold Mode with Selected Altitude Capture Mode armed for the
new Selected Altitude.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 7-6 Automatic Mode Transitions During Altitude Capture
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
Altitude Hold Mode is automatically armed when the flight director is in Selected Altitude Capture Mode.
Selected Altitude Capture Mode automatically transitions to Altitude Hold Mode when the altitude error is
less than 50 feet. In this case, the Selected Altitude becomes the flight director’s Altitude Reference.
EIS
Changing the Altitude Reference
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Altitude Hold Mode can be activated by pressing the ALT Key; the flight director maintains the current
aircraft altitude (to the nearest 10 feet) as the Altitude Reference. The flight director’s Altitude Reference,
shown in the AFCS Status Box, is independent of the Selected Altitude, displayed above the Altimeter.
Altitude Hold Mode active is indicated by a green ‘ALT’ annunciation in the AFCS Status Box.
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ALTITUDE HOLD MODE (ALT)
NOTE: Turning the ALT Knob while in Altitude Hold Mode changes the Selected Altitude, but not the flight
The Altitude Reference (shown in the AFCS Status Box) may be changed by:
• Using the NOSE UP/NOSE DN Keys
Altitude Hold
Mode Active
Altitude
Reference
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selected
Altitude
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Pressing the CWS Switch, hand-flying the aircraft to attain a new Altitude Reference, then releasing the
CWS Switch at the desired altitude (the new altitude is now the Altitude Reference)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
director’s Altitude Reference, and does not cancel the mode.
AFCS
Command Bars Hold Pitch Attitude
to Maintain Altitude Reference
APPENDICES
Figure 7-7 Altitude Hold Mode
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Selected
Altitude
Bug
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
VERTICAL SPEED MODE (VS)
In Vertical Speed Mode, the flight director acquires and maintains a Vertical Speed Reference. Current
aircraft vertical speed (to the nearest 100 fpm) becomes the Vertical Speed Reference at the moment of Vertical
Speed Mode activation. This mode may be used for climb or descent to the Selected Altitude (shown above
the Altimeter) since Selected Altitude Capture Mode is automatically armed when Vertical Speed Mode is
selected.
When Vertical Speed Mode is activated by pressing the VS Key, ‘VS’ is annunciated in green in the AFCS
Status Box along with the Vertical Speed Reference. The Vertical Speed Reference is also displayed above the
Vertical Speed Indicator. A Vertical Speed Reference Bug corresponding to the Vertical Speed Reference is
shown on the indicator.
The Vertical Speed Reference (shown both in the AFCS Status Box and above the Vertical Speed Indicator)
may be changed by:
• Using the NOSE UP/NOSE DN Keys
• Pressing the CWS Switch, hand-flying the aircraft to attain a new Vertical Speed Reference, then releasing
the CWS Switch
NOTE: If the Selected Altitude is reached during CWS maneuvering, the Altitude Reference is not changed.
To adjust the Altitude Reference in this case, the CWS Switch must be pressed again after the Selected
Altitude is reached.
Vertical Speed
Mode Active
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Changing the Vertical Speed Reference
Selected
Altitude
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Vertical
Speed
Reference
Selected
Altitude Capture
Mode Armed
Vertical
Speed
Reference
Vertical
Speed
Reference
Bug
Command Bars Indicate Climb to
Attain Vertical Speed Reference
Figure 7-8 Vertical Speed Hold Mode
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
NOTE: The Selected Altitude should be set before selecting Flight Level Change Mode.
Changing the Airspeed Reference
• Using the NOSE UP/NOSE DN Keys
NOTE: If the Selected Altitude is reached during CWS maneuvering, the Airspeed Reference is not changed.
To adjust the Airspeed Reference in this case, the CWS Switch must be pressed again after the Selected
Altitude is reached.
Selected
Airspeed Altitude Capture
Reference Mode Armed
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Airspeed
Reference
APPENDICES
Airspeed
Reference
Bug
Figure 7-9 Flight Level Change Mode (IAS)
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
INDEX
Command Bars Indicate Climb
to Attain Selected Altitude
190-02284-00 Rev. A
AFCS
Flight Level
Change Mode
Active
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Pressing the CWS Switch, hand-flying the aircraft to attain a new Airspeed Reference, then releasing the
CWS Switch
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Airspeed Reference (shown in both the AFCS Status Box and above the Airspeed Indicator) may be
adjusted by:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Engine power must be adjusted to allow the autopilot to fly the aircraft at a pitch attitude corresponding
to the desired flight profile (climb or descent) while maintaining the Airspeed Reference. The flight director
maintains the current altitude until either engine power or the Airspeed Reference are adjusted and does not
allow the aircraft to climb or descend away from the Selected Altitude.
EIS
The Airspeed Reference is set to the current airspeed upon mode activation. Flight Level Change Mode is
indicated by a green ‘FLC’ annunciation beside the Airspeed Reference in the AFCS Status Box. The Airspeed
Reference is also displayed directly above the Airspeed Indicator, along with a bug corresponding to the
Airspeed Reference along the tape.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Flight Level Change Mode is selected by pressing the FLC Key. This mode acquires and maintains the
Airspeed Reference (IAS) while climbing or descending to the Selected Altitude (shown above the Altimeter).
When Flight Level Change Mode is active, the flight director continuously monitors Selected Altitude,
airspeed and altitude.
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT LEVEL CHANGE MODE (FLC)
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
LATERAL MODES
The following table relates each Garmin AFCS lateral mode to its respective control and annunciation. Refer
to the combination modes section for information regarding Go Around and Takeoff modes.
Lateral Mode
Description
Control Annunciation
Holds the current aircraft roll
attitude or rolls the wings level,
(default)
depending on the commanded
bank angle
Captures and tracks the Selected HDG
Heading
Key
Roll Hold
Heading Select
Navigation, GPS Arm/Capture/Track
ROL
22°
HDG
22°
GPS
Captures and tracks the selected
Navigation, VOR Enroute Arm/Capture/Track navigation source (GPS, VOR,
LOC)
Navigation, LOC Arm/Capture/Track
(No Glideslope)
NAV
Key
Maximum Roll
Command Limit
VOR
LOC
22° Capture
10° Track
22° Capture
10° Track
22° Capture
10° Track
* No annunciation appears in the AFCS Status Box. The acceptable bank angle range is indicated in green along the Roll
Scale of the Attitude Indicator.
Table 7-3 Flight Director Lateral Modes
The CWS Button does not change lateral references for Heading Select, Navigation, Backcourse, or Approach
Mode. The autopilot guides the aircraft back to the Selected Heading/Course upon release of the CWS Button.
ROLL HOLD MODE (ROL)
NOTE: If Roll Hold Mode is activated as a result of a mode reversion, the flight director rolls the wings level.
When the flight director is activated or switched, Roll Hold Mode is selected by default. This mode is
annunciated as ‘ROL’ in the AFCS Status Box. The current aircraft bank angle is held, subject to the bank
angle condition.
Figure 7-10 Roll Hold Mode Annunciation
Bank Angle
< 6°
6 to 22°
> 22°
Flight Director Response
Rolls wings level
Maintains current aircraft roll attitude
Limits bank to 22°
Table 7-4 Roll Hold Mode Responses
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
The roll reference can be changed by pressing the CWS Switch, establishing the desired bank angle, then
releasing the CWS Switch.
Heading Select Mode is activated by pressing the HDG Key. Heading Select Mode acquires and maintains
the Selected Heading. The Selected Heading is shown by a light blue bug on the HSI.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
HEADING SELECT MODE (HDG)
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Changing the Roll Reference
Changing the Selected Heading
Heading Select
Mode Active
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Turns are commanded in the same direction as Selected Heading Bug movement, even if the bug is turned
more than 180° from the present heading (e.g., a 270° turn to the right). However, Selected Heading
changes of more than 330° at a time result in turn reversals.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The Selected Heading is adjusted using the HDG Knob. Pressing the CWS Switch and hand-flying
the aircraft does not change the Selected Heading. The autopilot guides the aircraft back to the Selected
Heading upon release of the CWS Switch.
EIS
NOTE: Pressing the HDG Knob synchronizes the Selected Heading to the current heading.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Command Bars Track
Selected Heading
APPENDICES
Figure 7-11 Heading Select Mode
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Selected
Heading
Bug
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
NAVIGATION MODES (GPS, VOR, LOC)
NOTE: The selected navigation receiver must have a valid VOR or LOC signal or active GPS course for the
flight director to enter Navigation Mode.
NOTE: When intercepting a flight plan leg, the flight director gives commands to capture the active leg at
approximately a 45° angle to the track between the waypoints defining the active leg. The flight director
does not give commands to fly to the starting waypoint of the active leg.
NOTE: When making a backcourse approach, set the Selected Course to the localizer front course.
Backcourse Mode captures and tracks a localizer signal in the backcourse direction. The mode may be
selected by pressing the BC Key. Backcourse Mode is armed if the CDI is greater than one dot when the mode
is selected. If the CDI is less than one dot, the Backcourse Mode is automatically captured when the BC Key
is pressed. The flight director creates roll steering commands from the Selected Course and deviation when
in Backcourse Mode
If the Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) shows greater than one dot when the NAV or BC Key is pressed,
the selected mode is armed. If the CDI shows less than one dot, Navigation Mode is automatically captured
when the NAV or BC Key is pressed. The armed annunciation appears in white to the left of the active lateral
mode.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Pressing the NAV Key selects Navigation Mode. Navigation Mode acquires and tracks the selected navigation
source (GPS, VOR, LOC). The flight director follows GPS roll steering commands when GPS is the selected
navigation source. When the navigation source is VOR or LOC, the flight director creates roll steering
commands from the Selected Course and deviation. Navigation Mode can also be used to fly GPS and LOC
approaches where vertical guidance is not required.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
Figure 7-12 GPS Navigation Mode Armed
When the CDI has automatically switched from GPS to LOC during a LOC/ILS approach, GPS Navigation
Mode remains active, providing GPS steering guidance until the localizer signal is captured. LOC Navigation
Mode is armed automatically when the navigation source switch takes place if the APR Key is not pressed
prior to the automatic source switch.
If Navigation Mode is active and either of the following occur, the flight director reverts to Roll Hold Mode
(wings rolled level):
• Different VOR tuned while in VOR Navigation Mode (VOR Navigation Mode reverts to armed)
• Navigation source manually switched (with the CDI Softkey)
INDEX
• During a LOC/ILS approach, the FAF is crossed while in GPS Navigation Mode after the automatic navigation
source switch from GPS to LOC
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
If the navigation source is VOR or localizer, or OBS Mode has been enabled when using GPS, the Selected
Course is controlled using the CRS Knob.
GPS Navigation
Mode Active
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pressing the CWS Switch and hand-flying the aircraft does not change the Selected Course while in
Navigation Mode. The autopilot guides the aircraft back to the Selected Course (or GPS flight plan) when
the CWS Switch is released.
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Changing the Selected Course
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Command Bars Indicate Right
Turn to Track GPS Course
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
GPS is Selected
Navigation Source
Figure 7-13 Navigation Mode
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
COMBINATION MODES (VNV, APR, NAV, BC, GA)
The following table lists the modes that operating by using both Vertical and Lateral Modes with their
corresponding controls and annunciations.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
Mode
Description
EIS
Vertical Path Tracking
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Glidepath
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
VNV Target Altitude Capture
Backcourse Arm/Capture/Track
Glideslope
Control
Captures and tracks descent
legs of an active vertical VNV Key
profile
Captures
the
Vertical
Navigation (VNV) Target
*
Altitude
Captures and tracks the
SBAS glidepath on approach
APR Key
Captures and tracks the ILS
glideslope on approach
Captures
and
tracks
a localizer signal for BC Key
backcourse approaches
Annunciation
ALTV
GP
GS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Approach, ILS Arm/Capture/Track
(Glideslope Mode automatically
armed)
22° Capture
10° Track
22° Capture
10° Track
VAPP
22° Capture
10° Track
LOC
Commands a constant pitch
angle and wings level in the
air
GA
Button
GA
7°
* ALTV is armed automatically under VPTH when VNV Target Altitude is to be captured instead of Selected Altitude.
**Go Around mode disengages the autopilot unless a compatible lift computer is installed.
Table 7-5 Flight Director Combination Modes
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Go Around**
22° Capture
10° Track
BC
GPS
Captures and tracks the
selected navigation source APR Key
(GPS, VOR, LOC)
Reference
Range
VPTH
Approach, GPS Arm/Capture/Track
Approach, VOR Arm/Capture/Track
Maximum
Roll
Command
Limit
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
NOTE: VNV is disabled when parallel track or Dead Reckoning Mode is active.
Vertical Navigation (VNV) flight control is available for enroute/terminal cruise and descent operations any
time that VNV flight planning is available. Refer to the Flight Management Section for more information on
VNV flight plans. Conditions for availability include, but are not limited to:
EIS
• The selected navigation source is GPS.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: The Selected Altitude takes precedence over any other vertical constraints.
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
VERTICAL NAVIGATION MODES (VPTH, ALTV)
• A VNV flight plan (with at least one altitude-constrained waypoint) or vertical direct-to is active.
• Crosstrack error is valid and within certain limits.
• Desired/actual track are valid or track angle error is within certain limits.
• The VNV Target Altitude of the active waypoint is no more than 250 ft above the current aircraft altitude.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Vertical Path Tracking Mode (VPTH)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The flight director may be armed for VNV at any time, but no target altitudes are captured during a climb.
The Command Bars provide vertical profile guidance based on specified altitudes (entered manually or loaded
from the database) at waypoints in the active flight plan or vertical direct-to. The appropriate VNV flight
control modes are sequenced by the flight director to follow the path defined by the vertical profile. Upon
reaching the last waypoint in the VNV flight plan, the flight director transitions to Altitude Hold Mode and
cancels any armed VNV modes.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• VNV is enabled (VNV ENBL Softkey pressed on the MFD).
NOTE: Vertical Path Tracking Mode is only applicable to aircraft equipped with a VNV Key.
AFCS
NOTE: If another vertical mode key is pressed while Vertical Path Tracking Mode is selected, Vertical Path
Tracking Mode reverts to armed.
autopilot guides the aircraft back to the descent path upon release of the CWS Switch.
APPENDICES
When a vertical profile (VNV flight plan) is active and the VNV Key is pressed, Vertical Path Tracking
Mode is armed in preparation for descent path capture. ‘VPTH’ (or ‘/V’ when Glidepath or Glideslope
Mode is concurrently armed) is annunciated in white in addition to previously armed modes. If applicable,
the appropriate altitude capture mode is armed for capture of the next VNV Target Altitude (ALTV) or the
Selected Altitude (ALTS), whichever is greater.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NOTE: Pressing the CWS Switch while Vertical Path Tracking Mode is active does not cancel the mode. The
INDEX
Figure 7-14 Vertical Path Tracking Armed Annunciations
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
Prior to descent path interception, the Selected Altitude must be set below the current aircraft altitude
by at least 75 feet. For the flight director to transition from Altitude Hold to Vertical Path Tracking Mode,
acknowledgment is required within five minutes of descent path interception by:
• Adjusting the Selected Altitude
• Pressing the VNV Key
If acknowledgment is not received within one minute of descent path interception, the white ‘VPTH’
annunciation starts to flash. Flashing continues until acknowledged or the descent path is intercepted. If
the descent is not confirmed by the time of interception, Vertical Path Tracking Mode remains armed and
the descent is not captured.
In conjunction with the “TOD [top of descent] within 1 minute” annunciation in the PFD Navigation
Status Box and the “Vertical track” voice message, VNV indications (VNV Target Altitude, vertical deviation,
and vertical speed required) appear on the PFD in magenta.
Altitude Hold
Mode Active
Vertical Path Tracking
Armed (Flashing Indicates
Acknowledgment Required
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
VNV Target
Altitude
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selected
Altitude
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Required
Vertical
Speed Bug
GPS is Selected
Navigation
Source
Enroute
Phase of
Flight
Vertical
Deviation
Indicator
When a descent leg is captured (i.e., vertical deviation becomes valid), Vertical Path Tracking becomes
active and tracks the descent profile. An altitude capture mode (‘ALTS’ or ‘ALTV’) is armed as appropriate.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 7-15 Vertical Path Capture
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Vertical Path
Tracking Active
VNV Target Altitude
Capture Armed
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
VNV Target
Altitude
EIS
Terminal
Phase of
Flight
Command Bars Indicate Descent to
Maintain Required Vertical Speed
Vertical Deviation
Indicator (VDI)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
If the altimeter barometric setting is adjusted while Vertical Path Tracking is active, the flight director
increases/decreases the descent rate by up to 500 fpm to re-establish the aircraft on the descent path
(without commanding a climb). Adjusting the altimeter barometric setting creates discontinuities in VNV
vertical deviation, moving the descent path. For large adjustments, it may take several minutes for the
aircraft to re-establish on the descent path. If the change is made while nearing a waypoint with a VNV
Target Altitude, the aircraft may not re-establish on the descent path in time to meet the vertical constraint.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 7-16 Vertical Path Tracking Mode
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
GPS is Selected
Navigation
Source
Required
Vertical
Speed Bug
Automatic Reversion to Pitch Hold Mode
AFCS
Several situations can occur while Vertical Path Tracking Mode is active which cause the flight director
to revert to Pitch Hold Mode:
• Vertical deviation exceeds 200 feet during an overspeed condition.
• Vertical deviation becomes invalid (the Vertical Deviation Indicator is removed from the PFD).
Unless VNV is disabled, Vertical Path Tracking Mode and the appropriate altitude capture mode become
armed following the reversion to Pitch Hold Mode to allow for possible profile recapture.
APPENDICES
• A display enters Reversionary Mode (this does not apply to an active vertical direct-to).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Vertical deviation experiences a discontinuity that both exceeds 200 feet in magnitude and results in
the vertical deviation exceeding 200 feet in magnitude. Such discontinuities are usually caused by
flight plan changes that affect the vertical profile.
Non-Path Descents
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
INDEX
Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed, and Flight Level Change modes can also be used to fly non-path descents
while VNV flight control is selected. If the VS or FLC Key is pressed while Vertical Path Tracking Mode is
selected, Vertical Path Tracking Mode reverts to armed along with the appropriate altitude capture mode
to allow profile re-capture.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
Figure 7-17 Flight Level Change VNV Non-Path Descent
To prevent immediate profile re-capture, the following must be satisfied:
• At least 10 seconds have passed since the non-path transition was initiated
• Vertical deviation from the profile has exceeded 250 feet, but is now less than 200 feet
EIS
Pressing the VNV Key twice re-arms Vertical Path Tracking for immediate profile re-capture.
VNV Target Altitude Capture Mode (ALTV)
NOTE: Armed VNV Target Altitude and Selected Altitude capture modes are mutually exclusive. However,
Selected Altitude Capture Mode is armed implicitly (not annunciated) whenever VNV Target Altitude Capture
Mode is armed.
VNV Target Altitude Capture is analogous to Selected Altitude Capture Mode and is armed automatically
after the VNV Key is pressed and the next VNV Target Altitude is to be intercepted before the Selected
Altitude. The annunciation ‘ALTV’ indicates that the VNV Target Altitude is to be captured. VNV Target
Altitudes are shown in the active flight plan or vertical direct-to, and can be entered manually or loaded
from a database (see the Flight Management Section for details). At the same time as “TOD within 1
minute” is annunciated in the Navigation Status Box, the active VNV Target Altitude is displayed above the
Vertical Speed Indicator (see Figure 7-15).
As the aircraft nears the VNV Target Altitude, the flight director automatically transitions to VNV Target
Altitude Capture Mode with Altitude Hold Mode armed. This automatic transition is indicated by the green
‘ALTV’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds and the appearance of the white ‘ALT’ annunciation.
The VNV Target Altitude is shown as the Altitude Reference beside the ‘ALTV’ annunciation and remains
displayed above the Vertical Speed Indicator. The Required Vertical Speed Indication (RVSI) is removed
once VNV Target Altitude Capture Mode becomes active.
At 50 feet from the VNV Target Altitude, the flight director automatically transitions from VNV Target
Altitude Capture to Altitude Hold Mode and tracks the level leg. As Altitude Hold Mode becomes active,
the white ‘ALT’ annunciation moves to the active vertical mode field and flashes green for 10 seconds to
indicate the automatic transition. The flight director automatically arms Vertical Path Tracking, allowing
upcoming descent legs to be captured and subsequently tracked.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NOTE: VNV Target Altitude Capture Mode is only applicable to aircraft equipped with a VNV Key.
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
Altitude Reference (In This Case,
Equal To VNV Altitude Target)
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flash up to 10 sec, Indicating Automatic Transition
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Figure 7-18 Automatic Mode Transitions During Altitude Capture
EIS
Changing the VNV Target Altitude
NOTE: Pressing the CWS Switch while in VNV Target Altitude Capture Mode does not cancel the mode.
Changing the current VNV Target Altitude while VNV Target Altitude Capture Mode is active causes
the flight director to revert to Pitch Hold Mode. Vertical Path Tracking and the appropriate altitude
capture mode are armed in preparation to capture the new VNV Target Altitude or the Selected Altitude,
depending on which altitude is to be intercepted first.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
VNV target altitudes can be changed while editing the active flight plan (see the Flight Management
Section for details).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
APPROACH MODES (GPS, VAPP, LOC)
NOTE: The selected navigation receiver must have a valid VOR or LOC signal or active GPS course for the
flight director to enter Approach Mode.
Approach Mode is activated when the APR Key is pressed. Approach Mode acquires and tracks the
selected navigation source (GPS, VOR, or LOC), depending on loaded approach. This mode uses the selected
navigation receiver deviation and desired course inputs to fly the approach. Pressing the APR Key when the
CDI is greater than one dot arms the selected approach mode (annunciated in white to the left of the active
lateral mode). If the CDI is less the 1 dot, the LOC is automatically captured when the APR Key is pressed.
VOR Approach Mode (VAPP) provides greater sensitivity for signal tracking than VOR Navigation Mode.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Selecting VOR Approach Mode:
1) Ensure a valid VOR frequency is tuned
2) Ensure that VOR is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources if
necessary).
3) Press the APR Key.
When GPS Approach Mode is armed, Glidepath Mode is also armed.
Selecting GPS Approach Mode:
1) Ensure a GPS approach is loaded into the active flight plan. The active waypoint must be part of the flight plan
(cannot be a direct-to a waypoint not in the flight plan).
2) Ensure that GPS is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources if
necessary).
Figure 7-19 GPS Approach Mode Armed
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
3) Press the APR Key.
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
1) Ensure a valid localizer frequency is tuned.
2) Ensure that LOC is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources if
necessary).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selecting LOC Approach Mode:
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
LOC Approach Mode allows the autopilot to fly a LOC/ILS approach with a glideslope. When LOC
Approach Mode is armed, Glideslope Mode is also armed automatically. LOC captures are inhibited if the
difference between aircraft heading and localizer course exceeds 105°.
3) Press the APR Key.
EIS
Or:
1) Ensure that GPS is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources if
necessary).
3) Ensure the corresponding LOC frequency is tuned.
4) Press the APR Key.
• Approach Mode is active and a Vectors-To-Final is activated
• Approach Mode is active and Navigation source is manually switched
Changing the Selected Course
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Pressing the CWS Button and hand-flying the aircraft does not change the Selected Course while in
Approach Mode. The autopilot guides the aircraft back to the Selected Course (or GPS flight plan) when the
CWS Button is released.
AFCS
If the navigation source is VOR or localizer or OBS Mode has been enabled when using GPS, the Selected
Course is controlled using the CRS Knob corresponding to the selected flight director (CRS1 for the pilot
side, CRS2 for the copilot side).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• During a LOC/ILS approach, GPS Navigation Mode is active and the FAF is crossed after the automatic
navigation source switch from GPS to LOC
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
If the following occurs, the flight director reverts to Roll Hold Mode (wings rolled level):
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Ensure a LOC/ILS approach is loaded into the active flight plan.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
GLIDEPATH MODE (GP) (SBAS ONLY)
NOTE: Pressing the CWS Switch while Glidepath Mode is active does not cancel the mode. The autopilot
Glidepath Mode is available only when SBAS is available. Glidepath Mode is used to track the SBAS-based
glidepath. When Glidepath Mode is armed, ‘GP’ is annunciated in white in the AFCS Status Box.
Selecting Glidepath Mode (SBAS Only):
1) Ensure a GPS approach with vertical guidance or vertical descent angle (LPV, LNAV/VNAV, LNAV +V) is loaded
into the active flight plan. The active waypoint must be part of the flight plan (cannot be a direct-to a waypoint
not in the flight plan).
2) Ensure that GPS is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources if
necessary).
3) Press the APR Key.
NOTE: Some RNAV (GPS) approaches provide a vertical descent angle as an aid in flying a stabilized
approach. These approaches are NOT considered Approaches with Vertical Guidance (APV). Approaches
that are annunciated on the HSI as LNAV or LNAV+V should be flown to an MDA, until visual with the
landing surface, even though vertical glidepath (GP) information may be provided.
WARNING: When flying an LNAV approach (with vertical descent angle) with the autopilot coupled, the
aircraft will not level off at the MDA even if the MDA is set in the altitude preselect.
Upon reaching the glidepath, the flight director transitions to Glidepath Mode and begins to capture and
track the glidepath.
Figure 7-20 Glidepath Mode Armed
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
guides the aircraft back to the glidepath upon release of the CWS Switch.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Once the following conditions have been met, the glidepath can be captured:
• A GPS approach with vertical guidance (LPV, LNAV/VNAV, LNAV+V) is loaded into the active flight plan.
• The active waypoint is at or after the final approach fix (FAF).
• Vertical deviation is valid.
• The CDI is at less than full-scale deviation
• Automatic sequencing of waypoints has not been suspended (no ‘SUSP’ annunciation on the HSI)
NOTE: Pressing the CWS Button while Glidepath Mode is active does not cancel the mode. The autopilot
INDEX
guides the aircraft back to the glidepath upon release of the CWS Button.
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
Glidepath
Mode Active
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
GPS Approach
Mode Active
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
LPV Approach
Active
GLIDESLOPE MODE (GS)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Glideslope Mode is available for LOC/ILS approaches to capture and track the glideslope. When Glideslope
Mode is armed (annunciated as ‘GS’ in white), LOC Approach Mode is armed as the lateral flight director
mode.
Selecting Glideslope Mode:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Glidepath
Indicator
Figure 7-21 Glidepath Mode
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
GPS is Selected
Navigation
Source
1) Ensure a valid localizer frequency is tuned.
3) Press the APR Key.
AFCS
2) Ensure that LOC is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources if
necessary).
Or:
2) Ensure a LOC/ILS approach is loaded into the active flight plan.
4) Press the APR Key.
APPENDICES
3) Ensure the corresponding LOC frequency is tuned.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Ensure that GPS is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources if
necessary).
Figure 7-22 Glideslope Mode Armed
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
Once LOC is the navigation source, the localizer and glideslope can be captured. Upon reaching the
glideslope, the flight director transitions to Glideslope Mode and begins to capture and track the glideslope.
guides the aircraft back to the glideslope upon release of the CWS Button.
Approach
Mode Active
Active ILS
Frequency Tuned
Glideslope
Mode Active
NAV2 (localizer) is Selected
Navigation Source
Glideslope
Indicator
Figure 7-23 Glideslope Mode
BACKCOURSE MODE (BC)
NOTE: When making a backcourse approach, set the Selected Course to the localizer front course.
Backcourse Mode captures and tracks a localizer signal in the backcourse direction. The mode may be
selected by pressing the BC Key. Backcourse Mode is armed if the CDI is greater than one dot when the mode
is selected. If the CDI is less than one dot, Backcourse Mode is automatically captured when the BC Key is
pressed. The flight director creates roll steering commands from the Selected Course and deviation when in
Backcourse Mode.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Pressing the CWS Button while Glideslope Mode is active does not cancel the mode. The autopilot
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Backcourse
Mode Active
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Changing the Selected Course
Pressing the CWS Button and hand-flying the aircraft does not reset any reference data while in Backcourse
Mode. The autopilot guides the aircraft back to the Selected Course when the CWS Button is released.
APPENDICES
If the pilot decides to intercept the arc at a location other than the published IAF (i.e. ATC provides vectors
to intercept the arc) and subsequently selects Heading Mode or Roll Mode, the AFCS will not automatically
intercept or track the arc unless the pilot activates the arc leg of the flight plan and arms GPS Navigation
Mode. The AFCS will not intercept and fly a DME arc before reaching an IAF that defines the beginning of the
arc segment. Likewise, if at any point while established on the DME arc the pilot deselects GPS Navigation
Mode, the AFCS will no longer track the arc.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The AFCS will intercept and track a DME arc that is part of the active flight plan provided that GPS
Navigation Mode is engaged, GPS is the active navigation source on the CDI, and the DME arc segment is
the active flight plan leg. It is important to note that automatic navigation of DME arcs is based on GPS.
Thus, even if the APR key is pressed and LOC or VOR Approach Mode is armed prior to reaching the Initial
Approach Fix (IAF), Approach Mode will not activate until the arc segment is completed.
AFCS
INTERCEPTING AND FLYING A DME ARC
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
If the navigation source is VOR or localizer or OBS Mode has been enabled when using GPS, the Selected
Course is controlled using the CRS Knob corresponding to the selected flight director (CRS1 for the pilot
side, CRS2 for the copilot side).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 7-24 Backcourse Mode
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
LOC2 is Selected Navigation Source
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
GO AROUND (GA) MODES
Pressing the GA Switch while in the air activates the flight director in a wings-level, pitch-up attitude,
allowing the execution of a missed approach or a go around. Go Around Mode disengages the autopilot and
arms Selected Altitude Capture Mode automatically. Subsequent autopilot engagement is allowed. Attempts
to modify the aircraft attitude (i.e., with the NOSE UP/NOSE DN Keys or CWS Switch) result in reversion to
Pitch and Roll Hold modes.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Go Around
Mode Active
Command Bars Indicate Climb
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 7-25 Go Around Modes
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
7.4 AUTOPILOT
NOTE: Refer to the POH/AFM for specific instructions regarding emergency procedures.
FLIGHT CONTROL
PITCH AXIS AND TRIM
ROLL AXIS
APPENDICES
The autopilot roll axis uses roll rate to stabilize aircraft roll attitude during flight director maneuvers. The
flight director roll commands are rate- and attitude-limited, combined with roll damper control, and sent to
the roll servo motor.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
When the autopilot is not engaged, the pitch trim servo may be used to provide manual electric pitch
trim (MET). This allows the aircraft to be trimmed using a control wheel switch rather than the trim wheel.
Manual trim commands are generated only when both halves of the MET Switch are operated simultaneously.
Trim speeds are scheduled with airspeed to provide more consistent response.
AFCS
The autopilot pitch axis uses pitch rate to stabilize the aircraft pitch attitude during flight director maneuvers.
Flight director pitch commands are rate and attitude-limited, combined with pitch damper control, and sent
to the pitch servo motor. The pitch servo measures the output effort (torque) and provides this signal to the
pitch trim servo. The pitch trim servo commands the motor to reduce the average pitch servo effort.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Pitch and roll commands are provided to the servos based on the active flight director modes. Servo motor
control limits the maximum servo speed and torque. The servo mounts are equipped with slip-clutches set to
certain values. This allows the servos to be overridden in case of an emergency.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Servo motor control limits the maximum servo speed and torque. The servo mounts are equipped with slipclutches set to certain values. This allows the servos to be overridden in case of an emergency.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
When the autopilot is not engaged, the pitch trim servo may be used to provide manual electric trim (MET).
This allows the aircraft to be trimmed using a control wheel switch rather than the trim wheel. Manual trim
commands are generated with the MET Switch. Trim speeds are scheduled with airspeed to provide more
consistent response.
EIS
Pitch autotrim provides trim commands to the pitch trim servo to relieve any sustained effort required by the
pitch servo. The pitch servo measures the output effort (torque) and provides this signal to the pitch trim servo.
The pitch trim servo commands the motor to reduce the average pitch servo effort.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The autopilot operates flight control surface servos to provide automatic flight control. Pitch and roll commands
are provided to the servos, based on the active flight director modes. The autopilot uses pitch and roll rates to
stabilize the aircraft attitude during upsets and flight director maneuvers. Flight director commands are rate- and
attitude-limited, combined with pitch and roll damper control, and sent to the pitch and roll servo motors.
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
ENGAGEMENT
NOTE: Autopilot engagement/disengagement is not equivalent to servo engagement/disengagement. Use
the CWS Switch to disengage the pitch and roll servos while the autopilot remains active.
When the AP Key is pressed, the autopilot and flight director (if not already engaged) are activated. Engagement
is indicated by a green ‘AP’ annunciation in the center of the AFCS Status Box. The flight director engages in
Pitch and Roll Hold modes when initially activated.
Autopilot
Engaged
Figure 7-26 Autopilot Engaged
CONTROL WHEEL STEERING
During autopilot operation, the aircraft may be hand-flown without disengaging the autopilot. Pressing and
holding the CWS Button disengages the pitch and roll servos from the flight control surfaces and allows the
aircraft to be hand-flown. At the same time, the flight director is synchronized to the aircraft attitude during
the maneuver. The ‘AP’ annunciation is temporarily replaced by ‘CWS’ in white for the duration of CWS
maneuvers.
In most scenarios, releasing the CWS Button reengages the autopilot with a new reference. Refer to the flight
director modes section for CWS behavior in each mode.
Control Wheel Steering
Figure 7-27 CWS Annunciation
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
Figure 7-28 Manual Autopilot Disengagement
• Invalid sensor data
• Inability to compute default flight director modes
(FD also disengages automatically)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• System failure
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Automatic autopilot disengagement is indicated by a flashing red and white ‘AP’ annunciation and by the
autopilot disconnect aural alert, which continue until acknowledged by pushing the AP DISC or MET ARM
Switch. Automatic autopilot disengagement occurs due to:
EIS
Pushing the AP DISC Switch disengages the autopilot. When the autopilot is manually disengaged, the
‘AP’ annunciation turns yellow and flashes for 5 seconds and a three-second autopilot disconnect aural alert is
generated. After manual disengagement, the autopilot disconnect aural alert may be cancelled by pushing the
MET ARM or AP DISC Switch (AP DISC Switch also cancels the flashing ‘AP’ annunciation).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The autopilot is manually disengaged by pushing the AP DISC Switch, AP Key on the MFD, GA Switch,
or MET ARM Switch. Manual autopilot disengagement is indicated by a five-second flashing yellow ‘AP’
annunciation and a three-second autopilot disconnect aural alert.
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
DISENGAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
7.5 AFCS ANNUNCIATIONS AND ALERTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
AFCS ALERTS
Alert Condition
Aileron Mistrim Right
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Aileron Mistrim Left
Elevator Mistrim Down
Elevator Mistrim Up
Pitch Trim Failure
(or Stuck AP TRIM
Switch)
Roll Failure
Pitch Failure
System Failure
AIL→
←AIL
↓ELE
↑ELE
PTRM
ROLL
PTCH
AFCS
Description
Roll servo providing sustained force in indicated
direction
Pitch servo providing sustained force in the
indicated direction
If AP engaged, take control of the aircraft and
disengage AP
If AP disengaged, move AP TRIM switches
separately to unstick
Roll axis control failure; AP inoperative
Pitch axis control failure; AP inoperative
AP and MET are unavailable; FD may still be
available
PFT
Performing preflight system test; aural alert sounds
at completion
Do not press the AP DISC Switch during servo
power-up and preflight system tests. Doing so may
cause the preflight system test to fail or never to
start. Cycle power to the servos if this occurs.
PFT
Preflight system test failed; aural alert sounds at
failure
Table 7-6 AFCS Alerts
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Preflight Test
Annunciation
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
NOTE: Overspeed protection is not active in ALT, GS or GP modes.
EIS
When Overspeed Protection is active, the Airspeed Reference appears in a box above the Airspeed Indicator,
flashing a yellow ‘MAXSPD’ annunciation. Engine power should be reduced and/or the pitch reference adjusted
to slow the aircraft. The annunciation disappears when the overspeed condition is resolved.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
While Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed, Flight Level Change, Vertical Path Tracking, or an altitude capture mode is
active, airspeed is monitored by the flight director. Overspeed protection is provided to limit the flight director’s
pitch command in situations where the flight director cannot acquire and maintain the mode reference for the
selected vertical mode without exceeding Vne.
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
OVERSPEED PROTECTION
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 7-32 Overspeed Annunciation
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
Blank Page
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 8 ADDITIONAL FEATURES
NOTE: With the availability of SafeTaxi®, ChartView, or FliteCharts®, it may be necessary to carry another
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
source of charts on-board the aircraft.
Additional features of the system include the following:
• Scheduler
• ChartView, FliteCharts® and IFR/VFR electronic charts
• Flight Data Logging
• AOPA™ or AC-U-KWIK Airport Directory
• Bluetooth Connections (Connext®)
• SiriusXM®–– Satellite Radio Entertainment
• Electronic Checklists
EIS
• SafeTaxi® diagrams
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
SafeTaxi diagrams provide detailed taxiway, runway, and ramp information at more than 700 airports in the
United States. By decreasing range on an airport that has a SafeTaxi diagram available, a close up view of the
airport layout can be seen.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The optional ChartView, FliteCharts and IFR/VFR charts provide on-board electronic terminal procedures charts
along with VFR Sectional amd IFR Low and High enroute charts. Electronic charts offer the convenience of rapid
access to essential information. Either ChartView or FliteCharts may be configured in the system, but not both.
The AOPA and AC-U-KWIK Airport Directories offer detailed information for a selected airport, such as available
services, hours of operation, and lodging options.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The optional SiriusXM Satellite Radio entertainment audio feature of the GDL 69 SXM Data Link Receiver
handles more than 170 channels of music, news, and sports. SiriusXM Satellite Radio offers more entertainment
choices and longer range coverage than commercial broadcast stations.
The Scheduler feature can be used to enter and display short term or long term reminder messages such as
Switch fuel tanks, Change oil, or Altimeter-Transponder Check in the Messages Window on the PFD.
AFCS
The Flight Data Logging feature automatically stores critical flight and engine data on an SD data card.
Approximately 1,000 flight hours can be recorded for each 1GB of available space on the card.
Connext allows for setting up the installed optional Flight Stream device for a Bluetooth connection between
the system and a mobile device running the Garmin Pilot™ application.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Electronic checklists allow a pilot to quickly find the proper procedure for a particular phase of flight.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
383
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.1 SAFETAXI
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SafeTaxi is an enhanced feature that gives greater map detail when viewing airports at close range. The
maximum map ranges for enhanced detail are pilot configurable. When viewing at ranges close enough to
show the airport detail, the map reveals taxiways with identifying letters/numbers, airport Hot Spots, and airport
landmarks including ramps, buildings, control towers, and other prominent features. Resolution is greater at
lower map ranges. When the MFD display is within the SafeTaxi ranges, the airplane symbol on the airport
provides enhanced position awareness.
EIS
Designated Hot Spots are recognized at airports with many intersecting taxiways and runways, and/or complex
ramp areas. Airport Hot Spots are outlined to caution pilots of areas on an airport surface where positional
awareness confusion or runway incursions happen most often. Hot Spots are defined with a magenta circle or
outline around the region of possible confusion.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Any map page that displays the navigation view can also show the SafeTaxi airport layout within the maximum
configured range. The following is a list of pages where the SafeTaxi feature can be seen:
• Navigation Map Page
• VOR Information Page
• PFD Maps
• User Waypoint Information Page
• Weather Datalink Page
• Trip Planning Page
• Airport Information Page
• Nearest Pages
• Intersection Information Page
• Active and Stored Flight Plan Pages
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• NDB Information Page
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
During ground operations the aircraft’s position is displayed in reference to taxiways, runways, and airport
features. In the example shown, the aircraft is on taxiway Bravo inside the High Alert Intersection boundary
on KSFO airport. Airport Hot Spots are outlined in magenta. When panning over the airport, features such as
runway holding lines and taxiways are shown at the cursor.
384
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Airport
Features
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Taxiway
Identification
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Aircraft
Position
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-1 SafeTaxi Depiction on the Navigation Map Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
The Detail Softkey (declutter) label advances to Detail All, Detail 3, Detail 2 and Detail 1 each time the
softkey is selected for easy recognition of decluttering level. Pressing the Detail All Softkey removes the taxiway
markings and airport feature labels. Pressing the Detail 3 Softkey removes VOR station ID, the VOR symbol,
and intersection names if within the airport plan view. Pressing the Detail 2 Softkey removes the airport runway
layout, unless the airport in view is part of an active route structure. Pressing the Detail 1 Softkey cycles back to
the original map detail. Refer to Map Declutter Levels in the Flight Management Section.
Configuring SafeTaxi range:
1) While viewing the Navigation Map Page, press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Map Settings Menu Option and press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the FMS Knob to select the Aviation Group and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the Aviation Group options to SafeTaxi.
APPENDICES
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the range of distances.
6) Turn either FMS Knob to select the desired distance for maximum SafeTaxi display range.
7) Press the ENT Key to complete the selection.
8) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
385
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.2 CHARTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The preferred charts source can be selected within the system. The active chart source for a particular procedure
is shown on the information pane under Source.
Selecting Preferred Charts Source:
1) While viewing a chart press the MENU Softkey to display the Page Menu options.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Chart Setup menu option and press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move to the Preferred Charts Source option.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to choose between the available options (FliteCharts, ChartView).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Preferred Charts Source Option
Chart Setup Option
AFCS
Figure 8-2 Preferred Charts Source
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Chart Source
Figure 8-3 Chart Source
386
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ChartView resembles the paper version of Jeppesen terminal procedures charts. The charts are displayed
in full color with high-resolution. The MFD depiction shows the aircraft position on the moving map in the
planview of approach charts and on airport diagrams. Airport Hot Spots are outlined in magenta.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The geo-referenced aircraft position is indicated by an aircraft symbol displayed on the chart when the current
position is within the boundaries of the chart. Inset boxes are not considered within the chart boundaries.
Therefore, when the aircraft symbol reaches a chart boundary line, or inset box, the aircraft symbol is removed
from the display.
EIS
The following figure shows examples of off-scale areas, indicated by the grey shading. Note, the grey shading
is for illustrative purposes only and will not appear on the published chart or MFD display. These off-scale
areas appear on the chart to convey supplemental information. However, the depicted geographical position of
this information, as it relates to the chart planview, is not the actual geographic position. Therefore, when the
aircraft symbol appears within one of these areas, the aircraft position indicated is relative to the chart planview,
not to the off-scale area.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Inset Box
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Off-Scale
Area
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Off-Scale
Areas
AFCS
Figure 8-4 Sample Chart Indicating Off-Scale Areas
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NOTE: Do not maneuver the aircraft based solely upon the geo-referenced aircraft symbol.
• Departure Procedures (DP)
APPENDICES
The ChartView database subscription is available from Jeppesen, Inc. Available data includes:
• Arrivals (STAR)
• Airport Diagrams
• NOTAMs
• Approaches
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
387
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
TERMINAL PROCEDURES CHARTS
Selecting Terminal Procedures Charts:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
While viewing the Navigation Map Page, Nearest Airport Page, or Flight Plan Page, the Charts Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the Options Menu to Charts.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
3) Press the ENT Key to display the chart.
Navigation Map Page Options Menu
Waypoint Airport Information Page Options Menu
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-5 Option Menus
On the Waypoint Airport Information Page Options Menu, select the desired chart and press the ENT Key
to display the chart.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
When no terminal procedure chart is available, the banner CHART Not Available appears on the screen.
The CHART Not Available banner does not refer to the FliteCharts subscription, but rather the availability of
a particular airport chart selection or procedure for a selected airport.
Figure 8-6 Chart Not Available Banner
APPENDICES
If there is a problem in rendering the data (such as a data error or a failure of an individual chart), the
banner UNABLE TO DISPLAY CHART is then displayed.
INDEX
Figure 8-7 Unable To Display Chart Banner
388
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
When a chart is not available by pressing the Charts Softkey or selecting a Page Menu Option, charts may
be obtained for other airports from the WPT Pages or Flight Plan Pages.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
If a chart is available for the destination airport, or the airport selected in the active flight plan, the chart
appears on the screen. When no flight plan is active, or when not flying to a direct-to destination, selecting
the Charts Softkey displays the chart for the nearest airport, if available.
The chart shown is one associated with the ‘WPT – Airport Information’ page. Usually this is the airport
runway diagram. Where no runway diagram exists, but Take Off Minimums or Alternate Minimums are
available, that page appears. If Airport Information pages are unavailable, the Approach Chart for the airport
is shown.
EIS
Selecting a chart:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) While viewing the Navigation Map Page, Flight Plan Page, or Nearest Airports Page, press the Charts Softkey.
The airport diagram or approach chart is displayed on the Airport Information Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to select either the Airport Identifier Box or the Approach Box. (Press the APR Softkey
if the Approach Box is not currently shown).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Turn the small and large FMS Knob to enter the desired airport identifier.
5) Press the ENT Key to complete the airport selection.
6) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Approach Box.
7) Turn the small FMS Knob to show the approach chart selection choices.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
8) Turn either FMS Knob to scroll through the available charts.
9) Press the ENT Key to complete the chart selection.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
389
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Select Desired
Approach Chart
from Menu
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Chart Scale
Figure 8-8 Approach Information Page, Chart Selection
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
While the Approaches Box is selected using the FMS Knob, the system softkeys are blank. Once the
desired chart is selected, the chart scale can be changed and the chart page can be scrolled using the Joystick.
Pressing the Joystick centers the chart on the screen.
The aircraft symbol is shown on the chart only if the chart is to scale and the aircraft position is within the
boundaries of the chart. The aircraft symbol is not displayed when the Aircraft Not Shown Icon appears. If
the Chart Scale Box displays a banner NOT TO SCALE, the aircraft symbol is not shown. The Aircraft Not
Shown Icon may appear at certain times, even if the chart is displayed to scale.
AFCS
Pressing the Chart Softkey switches between the ChartView diagram and the associated map in the WPT
page group. In the example shown, the Chart Softkey switches between the Gainesville, FL (KGNV) Airport
Diagram and the navigation map on the ‘WPT – Airport Information’ page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Pressing the Info 1 or Info 2 Softkey returns to the airport diagram when the view is on a different chart. If
the displayed chart is the airport diagram, the Info 1 or Info 2 Softkey has no effect. The aircraft position is
shown in magenta on the ChartView diagrams when the location of the aircraft is within the chart boundaries.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Another source for additional airport information is from the Info Box above the chart for certain airports.
This information source is not related to the Info 1 or Info 2 Softkey. When the Info Box is selected using
the FMS Knob, the system softkeys are blank. The Charlotte, NC airport has five additional charts offering
information; the Airport Diagram, Take-off Minimums, Class B Airspace, Airline Parking Gate Coordinates, and
Airline Parking Gate Location. (The numbers in parentheses after the chart name are Jeppesen designators.)
390
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Aircraft
Current
Position
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-9 Airport Information Page, Info View, Full Screen Width
In the example shown in following figure, the Class B Chart is selected. Pressing the ENT Key displays the
Charlotte Class B Airspace Chart.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 8-10 Airport Information Page, Class B Chart Selected from INFO View
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
391
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
- Pressing the DP Softkey displays the Departure Procedure Chart if available.
- Pressing the STAR Softkey displays the Standard Terminal Arrival Chart if available.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
- Pressing the APR Softkey displays the approach chart for the airport if available.
- Pressing the WX Softkey shows the airport weather frequency information, and includes weather data such
as METAR and TAF from the SiriusXM Data Link Receiver, when available. Weather information is available
only when a SiriusXM Data Link Receiver is installed and the SiriusXM Weather subscription is current.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
- Recent NOTAMS applicable to the current ChartView cycle are included in the ChartView database. Pressing
the NOTAM Softkey shows the local NOTAM information for selected airports, when available. When
NOTAMS are not available, the NOTAM Softkey label appears subdued and is disabled. The NOTAM
Softkey may appear on the Airport Information Page and all of the chart page selections. Pressing the
NOTAM Softkey again removes the NOTAMS information.
NOTE: A subdued softkey label indicates the function is disabled.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
CHART OPTIONS
Pressing the CHRT Opt Softkey displays the next level of softkeys, the chart options level.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Pressing the All Softkey shows the complete approach chart on the screen.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Complete
Chart
Shown
INDEX
Figure 8-11 Approach Information Page, All View
- Pressing the Header Softkey shows the header view (approach chart briefing strip) on the screen.
- Pressing the Plan Softkey shows the approach chart two dimensional plan view.
- Pressing the Profile Softkey displays the approach chart descent profile strip.
392
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
- Pressing the Minimums Softkey displays the minimum descent altitude/visibility strip at the bottom of the
approach chart.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
- If the chart scale has been adjusted to view a small area of the chart, selecting the Fit WDTH Softkey
changes the chart size to fit the available screen width.
- Pressing the Full SCN Softkey alternates between removing and replacing the data window to the right.
Selecting Additional Information:
1) While viewing the Airport Taxi Diagram, press the Full SCN Softkey to display the information windows (Airport,
Info).
EIS
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Airport, Info, Runways, or Frequencies Box.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Info Box choices. If multiple choices are available, scroll to the desired
choice with the large FMS Knob and press the ENT Key to complete the selection.
5) Press the FMS Knob again to deactivate the cursor.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Pressing the Back Softkey, or waiting for 45 seconds reverts to the chart selection softkeys. The full screen
view can also be selected by using the page menu option.
Selecting full screen On or Off:
1) While viewing a terminal chart press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu Options.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Chart Setup Menu Option and press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move between the Full Screen and Color Scheme Options.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to choose between the On and Off Full Screen Options.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Chart Setup Option
Full Screen On/Off Selection
Figure 8-12 Page Menus
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
393
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
DAY/NIGHT VIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ChartView can be displayed on a white or black background for day or night viewing. The Day View offers
a better presentation in a bright environment. The Night View gives a better presentation for viewing in a
dark environment. When the Chart Setup Box is selected the MFD softkeys are blank.
Selecting Day, Night, or Automatic View:
1) While viewing a terminal chart press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu Options.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Chart Setup Menu Option and press the ENT Key.
Figure 8-13 Page Menu Chart Setup
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move to the Color Scheme Option.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to choose between Day, Auto, and Night Options.
AFCS
5) If Auto Mode is selected, turn the large FMS Knob to select the percentage field. Use the small FMS Knob to
change the percentage value. The percentage value is the day/night crossover point based on the percentage of
backlighting intensity. For example, if the value is set to 15%, the day/night display changes when the display
backlight reaches 15% of full brightness.
The display must be changed in order for the new setting to become active. This may be accomplished by
selecting another page or changing the display range.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
6) Press the FMS Knob when finished to remove the Chart Setup Menu.
394
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 8-14 Arrival Information Page, Day View
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 8-15 Arrival Information Page, Night View
FLITECHARTS
APPENDICES
FliteCharts resemble the paper version of AeroNav Services terminal procedures charts. The charts are
displayed with high-resolution and in color for applicable charts.
The geo-referenced aircraft position is indicated by an aircraft symbol displayed on the chart when the current
position is within the boundaries of the chart. Not all charts are geo-referenced. These charts will display an
Aircraft Not Shown Icon in the lower right corner of the MFD.
INDEX
Figure 8-16 Aircraft Not Shown Icon
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
395
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
An aircraft symbol may be displayed within an off-scale area depicted on some charts. Off-scale areas are
indicated by the grey shading. Note, these areas are not shaded on the published chart. These off-scale areas
appear on the chart to convey supplemental information. However, the depicted geographical position of
this information, as it relates to the chart planview, is not the actual geographic position. Therefore, when the
aircraft symbol appears within one of these areas, the aircraft position indicated is relative to the chart planview,
not to the off-scale area.
The FliteCharts database subscription is available from Garmin. Available data includes:
• Arrivals (STAR)
• Approaches
• Airport Diagrams
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
• Departure Procedures (DP)
Off-Scale
Areas
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Off-Scale
Area
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Off-Scale
Areas
APPENDICES
Off-Scale
Area
Figure 8-17 Sample Chart Indicating Off-Scale Areas
INDEX
NOTE: Do not maneuver the aircraft based solely upon the geo-referenced aircraft symbol.
396
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLITECHARTS SOFTKEYS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FliteCharts functions are displayed on three levels of softkeys. While on the Navigation Map Page, Nearest
Airports Page, or Flight Plan Page, pressing the Charts Softkey displays the available terminal chart and
advances to the chart selection level of softkeys: CHRT Opt, Chart, Info, DP, STAR, APR, WX, and Go
Back. The chart selection softkeys appear on the Airport Information Page.
Pressing the Go Back Softkey reverts to the top level softkeys and previous page.
Pressing the CHRT OPT Softkey displays the available terminal chart and advances to the next level of
softkeys: All, Fit WDTH, Full SCN, and Back.
EIS
While viewing the CHRT Opt Softkeys, after 45 seconds of softkey inactivity, the system reverts to the chart
selection softkeys.
NOTAMs are not available with FliteCharts. The NOTAM Softkey label appears subdued and is disabled.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
TERMINAL PROCEDURES CHARTS
Selecting Terminal Procedures Charts:
While viewing the Navigation Map Page, Nearest Airport Page, or Flight Plan Page, press the Charts Softkey.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the Options Menu to Charts.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Press the ENT Key to display the chart.
On the Waypoint Airport Information Page Options Menu, select the desired chart and press the ENT Key
to display the chart.
AFCS
When no terminal procedure chart is available, the banner NO AVAILABLE CHARTS appears on the screen.
The NO AVAILABLE CHARTS banner does not refer to the FliteCharts subscription, but rather the availability
of a particular airport chart selection or procedure for a selected airport.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 8-18 No Available Charts Banner
If there is a problem in rendering the data (such as a data error or a failure of an individual chart), the
banner UNABLE TO DISPLAY CHART is then displayed.
APPENDICES
Figure 8-19 Unable To Display Chart Banner
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
INDEX
When a chart is not available by pressing the Charts Softkey or selecting a Page Menu Option, charts may
be obtained for other airports from the WPT Pages or Flight Plan Pages.
397
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
If a chart is available for the destination airport, or the airport selected in the active flight plan, the chart
appears on the screen. When no flight plan is active, or when not flying to a direct-to destination, pressing
the Charts Softkey displays the chart for the nearest airport, if available.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The chart shown is one associated with the ‘WPT – Airport Information’ page. Usually this is the airport
runway diagram. Where no runway diagram exists, but Take Off Minimums or Alternate Minimums are
available, that page appears. If Airport Information pages are unavailable, the Approach Chart for the airport
is shown.
Selecting a chart:
EIS
1) While viewing the Navigation Map Page, Flight Plan Page, or Nearest Airports Page, press the Charts Softkey.
The airport diagram or approach chart is displayed on the Airport Information Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to select either the Airport Identifier Box or the Approach Box. (Press the APR Softkey
if the Approach Box is not currently shown).
4) Turn the small and large FMS Knob to enter the desired airport identifier.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) Press the ENT Key to complete the airport selection.
6) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Approach Box.
7) Turn the small FMS Knob to show the approach chart selection choices.
8) Turn either FMS Knob to scroll through the available charts.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
9) Press the ENT Key to complete the chart selection.
While the Approach Box is selected using the FMS Knob, the system softkeys are blank. Once the desired
chart is selected, the chart scale can be changed and the chart can be panned using the Joystick. Pressing the
Joystick centers the chart on the screen.
AFCS
The aircraft symbol is not shown on FliteCharts. The Chart Scale Box displays a banner NOT TO SCALE,
and the Aircraft Not Shown Icon is displayed in the lower right corner of the screen.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Pressing the Chart Softkey switches between the FliteCharts diagram and the associated map in the WPT
page group. In the example shown, the Chart Softkey switches between the Gainesville, FL (KGNV) Airport
Diagram and the navigation map on the ‘WPT – Airport Information’ page.
Pressing the Info 1 or Info 2 Softkey returns to the airport diagram when the view is on a different chart.
If the displayed chart is the airport diagram, the Info 1 or Info 2 Softkey has no effect.
APPENDICES
Another source for additional airport information is from the INFO Box above the chart or to the right of the
chart for certain airports. This information source is not related to the Info 1 or Info 2 Softkey. When the
INFO Box is selected using the FMS Knob, the system softkeys are blank.
Pressing the ENT Key displays the IFR Alternate Minimums Chart.
Pressing the DP Softkey displays the Departure Procedure Chart if available.
Pressing the STAR Softkey displays the Standard Terminal Arrival Chart if available.
INDEX
Pressing the APR Softkey displays the approach chart for the airport if available.
Pressing the WX Softkey shows the airport weather frequency information, when available, and includes
weather data if a data link weather receiver is installed.
398
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Selecting Additional Information:
1) While viewing the Airport Taxi Diagram, press the WX Softkey to display the information windows (AIRPORT,
INFO).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the INFO Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the INFO Box choices. When the INFO Box is selected the system softkeys
are blank. If multiple choices are available, scroll to the desired choice with the large FMS Knob and press the
ENT Key to complete the selection.
EIS
5) Press the FMS Knob again to deactivate the cursor.
Pressing the Go Back Softkey reverts to the previous page (Navigation Map Page or Flight Plan Page).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
CHART OPTIONS
Pressing the CHRT OPT Softkey displays the next level of softkeys, the chart options level.
Pressing the All Softkey shows the complete chart on the screen.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Pressing the Fit WIDTH Softkey fits the width of the chart in the display viewing area. In the example
shown, the chart at close range is replaced with the full width chart.
Pressing the Full SCN Softkey alternates between removing and replacing the data window to the right.
Pressing the Back Softkey, or waiting for 45 seconds reverts to the chart selection softkeys.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The full screen view can also be selected by using the page menu option.
Selecting full screen On or Off:
1) While viewing a terminal chart press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu OPTIONS.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Chart Setup Menu Option and press the ENT Key.
AFCS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move between the Full Screen and Color Scheme Options.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to choose between the On and Off Full Screen Options.
DAY/NIGHT VIEW
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
FliteCharts can be displayed on a white or black background for day or night viewing. The Day View offers
a better presentation in a bright environment. The Night View gives a better presentation for viewing in a
dark environment. When the Chart Setup Box is selected the MFD softkeys are blank.
APPENDICES
Selecting Day, Night, or Automatic View:
1) While viewing a terminal chart press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu OPTIONS.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Chart Setup Menu Option and press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move to the Color Scheme Option.
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
INDEX
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to choose between Day, Auto, and Night Options.
399
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
5) If Auto Mode is selected, turn the large FMS Knob to select the percentage field. Use the small FMS Knob to
change the percentage value. The percentage value is the day/night crossover point based on the percentage of
backlighting intensity. For example, if the value is set to 15%, the day/night display changes when the display
backlight reaches 15% of full brightness.
The display must be changed in order for the new setting to become active. This may be accomplished by
selecting another page or changing the display range.
6) Press the FMS Knob when finished to remove the Chart Setup Menu.
IFR/VFR CHARTS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
The system can display GPS navigation information on a VFR chart, a low altitude IFR chart, or a high altitude
IFR chart, if installed. The information overlaid on the IFR/VFR Charts is selected and setup on the Navigation
Map, but the IFR/VFR charts will not display some of the selected items. Only the following items will be
overlaid on the chart:
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Map Pointer (distance and bearing to pointer, location of pointer, name, and other pertinent information)
• Map Range (17 range choices from 1 nm to 150 nm)
• Map Orientation (always North Up for IFR/VFR Charts)
• Aircraft Icon (representing present position)
• Wind Direction and Speed
• Icons for enabled map features (Traffic only)
• Flight Plan Legs
• Track Vector
• Runway Extension
• Missed Approach Preview
• Intersections (only as part of active flight plan)
• Visual Reporting Points
• VNAV Constraints
• Selected Altitude Intercept Arc
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Map panning on the IFR/VFR Charts works the same as on the Navigation Map. Map range selected on either
the Navigation Map or the IFR/VFR Charts applies to both. However, if the range selected on the Navigation
Map it is not a valid chart range, the chart is shown with a range of 7.5 nm.
APPENDICES
When different VFR charts exist for the same area the chart type will automatically display according to the
range chosen. For example, in an area where both a Sectional and a Terminal Area Chart (TAC) are available, a
range of 6 nm or more will show the Sectional chart. Once the range is decreased below 6 nm, the system will
automatically change the displayed chart from the Sectional to the TAC.
INDEX
Due to the potential error involved with the electronic depiction of maps, charts will display a gray ‘circle of
uncertainty’ centered upon the aircraft icon. The aircraft’s actual position can be anywhere within the range of
the gray circle. The range of the circle will change based on the chart displayed and current zoom range.
400
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Map Orientation
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
VFR Chart
Map Range
Active Flight Plan Leg
Aircraft Icon
at Present Position
EIS
Circle of Uncertainty
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-20 GPS Navigation Information on the VFR Chart
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selecting the chart to display:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Map - IFR/VFR Charts’ Page.
2) Press the VFR Softkey, IFR Low Softkey, or IFR High Softkey to display the desired chart.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Or:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Map - IFR/VFR Charts’ Page. Press the MENU Key.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Display VFR’, ‘Display IFR Low’, or ‘Display IFR High’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The selected chart is displayed.
AFCS
Modifying IFR chart settings:
1) Press the MENU Key with the IFR Low / IFR High Chart displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Settings’ option.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the ENT Key. The cursor flashes on the ‘Color Scheme’ setting.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Day’, ‘Auto’, or ‘Night’. The IFR/VFR Chart display changes to reflect the
setting.
APPENDICES
4) If ‘Auto’ was selected, turn the large FMS Knob to select the backlight threshold field (sets value for automatic
day/night switching).
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
401
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Map Orientation
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
IFR Low Altitude
Chart
Map Range
Active Flight Plan Leg
EIS
Aircraft Icon
at Present Position
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Circle of Uncertainty
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-21 GPS Navigation Information on the IFR Low Altitude Chart
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Map Orientation
IFR High Altitude
Chart
Map Range
Active Flight Plan Leg
AFCS
Aircraft Icon
at Present Position
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Circle of Uncertainty
INDEX
Figure 5-22 GPS Navigation Information on the IFR High Altitude Chart
402
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
8.3 AIRPORT DIRECTORY
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Aircraft Owners and Pilots Association (AOPA) and optional AC-U-KWIK Airport Directory databases
offer detailed information regarding services, hours of operation, lodging options, and more. This information is
viewed on the Airport Information Page by pressing the INFO Softkey until Info 2 is displayed.
Both Airport Directories are available for downloading at flygarmin.com. However, copy only one of the
databases to the Supplemental Data Card. The system cannot recognize both databases simultaneously.
Selecting the Airport Directory Page:
EIS
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘WPT’ page group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Airport Information Page. Initially, information for the airport closest to
the aircraft’s present position is displayed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) If necessary, select the Info softkey until Info 2 is displayed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 8-23 AOPA Information on the Airport Information Page
APPENDICES
Airport Directory information appears in blue and yellow text. The Effective date appears in blue when data
is current and in yellow when the current date is before the effective date. The Expires date appears in blue
when data is current and in yellow when expired. Not Available appears in blue in the Region field if Airport
Directory data is not available on the database card. An expired Airport Directory database is not disabled and
will continue to function indefinitely.
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
403
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.4 DATABASE CYCLE NUMBER AND REVISIONS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
CYCLE NUMBER AND REVISION
Databases that may be available include FliteCharts, Obstacle, Terrain, IFR/VFR, Navigation, ChartView,
SafeTaxi, Airport Directory. Data is revised and expiration dates vary. Data is still viewable during a period that
extends from the cycle expiration date to the disables date. When turning on the system, the Power-up Page
displays the current status of the databases. As an example, see the table below for the various FliteCharts
Power-up Page displays and the definition of each. The expiration date and disables date varies for each database.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Example Power-up Page Display Text
Table 8-1 Database Power-up Page Annunciations
AFCS
White text, such as ‘FliteCharts Data Expires’ plus a date, indicates the chart database is current. Yellow text,
such as ‘Chart data is out of date!’ or ‘FliteCharts Data: Disabled”, indicates charts are no longer viewable and
have expired.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Database time critical information can also be found on the ‘Aux - System Status’ page. The database Region,
Cycle number, Effective, Expires, and Disables dates of the subscription appear in either blue or yellow text.
Dates shown in blue are current data. Dates shown in yellow indicate the data is not within the current
subscription period.
NOTE: A subdued softkey label indicates the function is disabled.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Press the MFD1 DB Softkey to place the cursor in the Database window. Scroll through the listed information
by turning the FMS Knob or pressing the ENT Key until the applicable database information is shown.
404
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Database cycle numbers are in a format such as YYTI or YYII, which are deciphered as follows:
YYTI
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
YY – Indicates the last two digits of the year (ex. 18 represents 2018)
T – Indicates the database type (ex. S is for SafeTaxi, D is for Airport Directory)
I – Indicates the numerical issue of the database for the year (ex. 5 is the fifth issue of the year)
YYII
EIS
YY – Indicates the last two digits of the year (ex. 18 represents 2018)
II – Indicates the numerical issue of the database for the year (ex. 05 is the fifth issue of the year)
Refer to Updating Garmin Databases in Appendix for instructions on revising databases.
Not Applicable
YYBI
56 days
YYSI
56 days
YYDI
56 days
YYII
28 days
YYII
14 days
YYII
28 days
APPENDICES
YYTI
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Not Applicable
AFCS
YYMI
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Revision Cycle
28 days
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Database Cycle Number Format
YYII
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Example Power-up Page Display Text
Table 8-2 Database Startup, Format and Cycle
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
405
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.5 SIRIUSXM RADIO ENTERTAINMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Refer to the Hazard Avoidance Section for information about SiriusXM Weather products.
The optional SiriusXM Satellite Radio entertainment feature of the GDL 69A SXM Data Link Receiver is available
for the pilot’s and passengers’ enjoyment. The GDL 69A SXM can receive SiriusXM Satellite Radio entertainment
services at any altitude throughout the Continental U.S.
EIS
SiriusXM Satellite Radio offers a variety of radio programming over long distances without having to constantly
search for new stations. Based on signals from satellites, coverage far exceeds land-based transmissions.
SiriusXM Satellite Radio services are subscription-based. For more information on specific service packages, visit
www.siriusxm.com.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
ACTIVATING SIRIUSXM SATELLITE RADIO SERVICES
The service is activated by providing SiriusXM Satellite Radio with either one or two coded IDs, depending on
the equipment. Either the Audio Radio ID or the Data Radio ID, or both, must be provided to SiriusXM Satellite
Radio to activate the entertainment subscription.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
It is not required to activate both the entertainment and weather service subscriptions with the GDL 69A SXM.
Either or both services can be activated. SiriusXM Satellite Radio uses one or both of the coded IDs to send
an activation signal that, when received by the GDL 69A SXM, allows it to play entertainment programming.
These IDs are located:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• On the label on the back of the Data Link Receiver
• On the XM Information Page on the MFD
• On the XM Satellite Radio Activation Instructions included with the unit (available at www.garmin.com, P/N
190-00355-04)
AFCS
Contact the installer if the Data Radio ID and the Audio Radio ID cannot be located.
Activating the SiriusXM Satellite Radio services:
1) Contact SiriusXM Satellite Radio. Follow the instructions provided by SiriusXM Satellite Radio services.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Select the Auxiliary Page Group.
3) Select the ‘Aux - XM Radio’ page.
4) Press the Info Softkey to display the XM Information Page.
INDEX
APPENDICES
5) Verify that the desired services are activated.
406
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Audio
Radio ID
Data
Radio ID
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Weather
Products
Window
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-24 XM Information Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
If SiriusXM Weather services have not been activated, all the weather product boxes are blank on the XM
Information Page and a yellow Activation Required message is displayed in the center of the Weather Data
Link Page (Map Page Group). The Service Class refers to the groupings of weather products available for
subscription.
USING SIRIUSXM RADIO
AFCS
The XM Radio Page provides information and control of the audio entertainment features of the SiriusXM
Satellite Radio.
Selecting the XM Radio Page:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Auxiliary Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the displayed ‘Aux - XM Information’ Page.
3) Press the Radio Softkey to show the XM Radio Page where audio entertainment is controlled.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
407
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ACTIVE CHANNEL AND CHANNEL LIST
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
The Channels List Box of the XM Radio Page shows a list of the available channels for the selected category.
Channels can be stepped through one at a time or may be selected directly by channel number.
The Active Channel Box on the XM Radio Page displays the currently selected channel that the SiriusXM
Radio is using.
Selecting a channel from the channel list:
1) While on the XM Radio Page, press the Channel Softkey.
EIS
2) Press the CH + Softkey to go up through the list in the Channel Box, or move down the list with the CH – Softkey.
Or:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the ENT Key to activate the selected channel.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Press the FMS Knob to highlight the channel list and turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the channels.
2) Press the Direct CH Softkey. The channel number in the Active Channel Box is highlighted.
Selecting a channel directly:
1) While on the XM Radio Page, press the Channel Softkey.
3) Press the numbered softkeys located on the bottom of the display to directly select the desired channel number.
4) Press the ENT Key to activate the selected channel.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
CATEGORY
The Category Box of the XM Radio Page displays the currently selected category of audio. Categories of
channels such as jazz, rock, or news can be selected to list the available channels for a type of music or other
contents. One of the optional categories is Presets to view channels that have been programmed.
AFCS
Selecting a category:
1) Press the Category Softkey on the XM Radio Page.
2) Press the CAT + and CAT - Softkeys to cycle through the categories.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Or:
INDEX
APPENDICES
Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Categories list. Highlight the desired category with the small FMS Knob
and press the ENT Key. Selecting All Categories places all channels in the list.
408
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
PRESETS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Up to 15 channels from any category can be assigned a preset number. The preset channels are selected by
pressing the Presets and More Softkeys. Then the preset channel can be selected directly and added to the
channel list for the Presets category.
Setting a preset channel number:
1) On the XM Radio Page, while listening to an Active Channel that is wanted for a preset, press the Presets
Softkey to access the first five preset channels (Preset 1 - Preset 5).
EIS
2) Press the More Softkey to access the next five channels (Preset 6 – Preset 10), and again to access the
last five channels (Preset 11 – Preset 15). Pressing the More Softkey repeatedly cycles through the preset
channels.
3) Press any one of the (Preset 1 - Preset 15) softkeys to assign a number to the active channel.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Press the Set Softkey on the desired channel number to save the channel as a preset.
Pressing the Back Softkey, or 45 seconds of softkey inactivity, returns the system to the top level softkeys.
VOLUME
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Radio volume is shown as a percentage. Volume level is controlled by pressing the Volume Softkey, which
brings up the Mute Softkey and the volume increase and decrease softkeys.
Adjusting the volume:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) With the XM Radio Page displayed, press the Volume Softkey.
2) Press the VOL – Softkey to reduce volume or press the VOL + Softkey to increase volume. (Once the VOL
Softkey is pressed, the volume can also be adjusted using the small FMS Knob.)
SiriusXM Radio volume may also be adjusted on each passenger headset.
AFCS
Muting SiriusXM audio:
1) Select the XM Radio Page or XM Information Page.
2) Press the Mute Softkey to mute the audio. Press the Mute Softkey again to unmute the audio.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
409
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.6 SCHEDULER
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Scheduler feature can be used to enter and display reminder messages (e.g., Change oil, Switch fuel tanks,
or Altimeter-Transponder Check) in the Alerts Window on the PFD. Messages can be set to display based on
a specific date and time (event), once the message timer reaches zero (one-time; default setting), or recurrently
whenever the message timer reaches zero (periodic). Message timers set to periodic alerting automatically reset
to the original timer value once the message is displayed. When power is cycled, all messages are retained until
deleted, and message timer countdown is resumed.
Figure 8-33 Scheduler (Utility Page)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Entering a scheduler message:
1) Select the ‘Aux - Utility’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the first empty scheduler message naming field.
AFCS
4) Use the FMS Knob to enter the message text to be displayed in the Messages Window and press the ENT Key.
5) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the field next to Type.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the message type:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Event—Message issued at the specified date/time
• One time—Message issued when the message timer reaches zero (default setting)
• Periodic—Message issued each time the message timer reaches zero
APPENDICES
7) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next field.
8) For periodic and one-time messages, use the FMS Knob to enter the timer value (HHH:MM:SS) from which to
countdown and press the ENT Key.
9) For event-based messages:
a) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired date (DD-MM-YY) and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
b) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next field.
c) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired time (HH:MM) and press the ENT Key.
10) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to enter the next message.
410
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Deleting a scheduler message:
1) Select the ‘Aux - Utility’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the name field of the scheduler message to be deleted.
4) Press the CLR Key to clear the message text. If the CLR Key is pressed again, the message is restored.
5) Press the ENT Key while the message line is cleared to clear the message time.
EIS
Scheduler messages appear in the Messages Window on the PFD. When a scheduler message is waiting,
the Messages Softkey label changes to Advisory. Pressing the Messages Softkey opens the Messages Window
and acknowledges the scheduler message. The softkey label reverts to Messages when pressed. Pressing the
Messages Softkey again removes the Messages Window from the display, and the scheduler message is deleted
from the message queue.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-34 PFD Alerts Window
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
411
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.7 FLIGHT DATA LOGGING
NOTE: Some aircraft installations may not provide all aircraft/engine data capable of being logged by the
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
system.
The Flight Data Logging feature will automatically store critical flight and engine data on an SD data card (up
to 16GB) inserted into the top card slot of the MFD. Approximately 1,000 flight hours can be recorded for each
1GB of available space on the card.
EIS
Data is written to the SD card once each second while the MFD is powered on. All flight data logged on a
specific date is stored in a file named in a format which includes the date, time, and nearest airport identifier. The
file is created automatically each time the system is powered on, provided an SD card has been inserted.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The status of the Flight Data Logging feature can be viewed on the ‘Aux-Utility’ Page. If no SD card has been
inserted, “NO CARD” is displayed. When data is being written to the SD card, “LOGGING DATA” is displayed.
The .csv file may be viewed with Microsoft Excel® or other spreadsheet applications.
The following is a list of data parameters the system is capable of logging.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Date
• Time
• GPS altitude (MSL)
• GPS altitude (WGS84 datum)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Baro-Corrected altitude (feet)
• Baro Correction (in/Hg)
AFCS
• GPS vertical speed (fpm)
• OAT (degrees C)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• True airspeed (knots)
• Pitch Attitude Angle (degrees)
• Roll Attitude Angle (degrees)
• Lateral and Vertical G Force (g)
APPENDICES
• Longitude (degrees; geodetic;
+East)
• AFCS roll/pitch commands
• Magnetic Heading (degrees)
• HSI source
• Com1/Com2 frequency
• Vertical speed (fpm)
• Ground Track (degrees
magnetic)
• Autopilot On/Off
• Selected course
• Indicated airspeed (kts)
• Ground Speed (kts)
• Latitude (degrees; geodetic;
+North)
• Nav1/Nav2 frequency
• AFCS roll/pitch modes
• GPS fix
• GPS horizontal alert limit
• GPS vertical alert limit
• SBAS GPS horizontal protection
level
• CDI deflection
• SBAS GPS vertical protection
level
• VDI/GP/GS deflection
• Fuel Qty (right & left)(gals)
• Wind Direction (degrees)
• Fuel Flow (gph)
• Wind Speed (knots)
• Manifold Pressure
• Active Waypoint Identifier
• Oil Pressure (psi)
• Distance to next waypoint (nm)
• Oil Temperature (deg. F)
• Bearing to next waypoint
(degrees)
• Magnetic variation (degrees)
INDEX
The file containing the recorded data will appear in the format shown in the following figure. This file can be
imported into most computer spreadsheet applications.
412
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Local 24hr Time
HHMMSS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Local Date
YYMMDD
Nearest Airport
(A blank will be
inserted if no
airport is found)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
log_130210_104506_KIXD.csv
Figure 8-35 Log File Format
EIS
Data logging status can be monitored on the ‘Aux-Utility’ Page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
413
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
8.8 CONNEXT SETUP
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
The mobile device must be ‘paired’ with the system in order to use the various functions. Pairing is accomplished
by first placing the system in pairing mode by displaying the Connext Setup Page. The system is ‘discoverable’
whenever this page is displayed. The pairing operation is completed from the mobile device and the Garmin Pilot
application. See the device Bluetooth pairing instructions and the connection instructions in the Garmin Pilot
application.
The Connext Setup Page allows for setting up the installed optional Flight Stream device for a Bluetooth
connection between the system and a mobile device running the Garmin Pilot™ application.
EIS
Viewing the Connext Setup Page
1) Turn the large FMS Knob on the MFD to select the Aux page group.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Connext Setup page.
Changing the Bluetooth Name
1) While viewing the Connext Setup Page, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor in the ‘Bluetooth Name’ field.
3) Enter the desired name by using the large FMS Knob to select the character field, and the small FMS Knob
select the desired alphanumeric character for that field.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is removed and the new name is displayed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Enabling/Disabling Flight Plan Importing from Garmin Pilot
1) While viewing the Connext Setup Page, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor in the ‘Flight Plan Import’ field.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Enabled’ or ‘Disabled’.
AFCS
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
Enabling/Disabling WiFi Database Importing from Garmin Pilot
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) While viewing the Connext Setup Page, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor in the ‘WiFi Database Import’ field.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Enabled’ or ‘Disabled’.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
APPENDICES
Enabling/Disabling Automatic Reconnection of a Specific Paired Device
1) While viewing the Connext Setup Page, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired paired device.
INDEX
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Enabled’ or ‘Disabled’. Selecting ‘Enabled’ allows the system to automatically
connect to a previously paired device when detected.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
414
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Removing a Specific Paired Device from the List of Paired Devices:
1) While viewing the Connext Setup Page, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired paired device.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the Remove Softkey. A confirmation screen is displayed.
4) If necessary, turn the large FMS Knob to select ‘Yes’.
5) Press the ENT Key to remove the device from the list of paired devices.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
415
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.9 ELECTRONIC CHECKLISTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: The optional checklists presented here are for example only and may differ from checklists available
for the airframe. The information described in this section is not intended to replace the checklist information
described in the POH or the Pilot Safety and Warning Supplements document.
NOTE: Garmin is not responsible for the content of checklists. Checklists are created by the aircraft
EIS
manufacturer. Modifications or updates to the checklists are coordinated through the aircraft manufacturer.
The user cannot edit these checklists.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The MFD is able to display optional electronic checklists which allow a pilot to quickly find the proper procedure
on the ground and during each phase of flight. The system accesses the checklists from an SD card inserted into
the bezel slot. If the SD card contains an invalid checklist file or no checklist, the Power-up Page messages display
‘Checklist File: Invalid’ or ‘Checklist File: N/A’ (not available) and the Checklist Softkey is not available.
Accessing and navigating checklists:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) From any page on the MFD (except the EIS Pages), press the Checklist Softkey or turn the large FMS Knob to
select the Checklist Page.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘Group’ field.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired procedure and press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘Checklist’ field.
5) Turn the FMS Knob to select the desired checklist and press the ENT Key. The selected checklist item is
indicated with white text surrounded by a white box.
6) Press the ENT Key or Check Softkey to check the selected checklist item. The line item turns green and a
checkmark is placed in the associated box. The next line item is automatically selected for checking.
AFCS
Either FMS Knob can be used to scroll through the checklist and select the desired checklist item.
Press the CLR Key or Uncheck Softkey to remove a check mark from an item.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
7) When all checklist items have been checked, ‘*Checklist Finished*’ is displayed in green text at the bottom left
of the checklist window. If all items in the checklist have not be checked, ‘*Checklist Not Finished*’ will be
displayed in yellow text.
8) Press the ENT Key. ‘Go To Next Checklist?’ will be highlighted by the cursor.
APPENDICES
9) Press the ENT Key to advance to the next checklist.
INDEX
10) Press the Exit Softkey to exit the Checklist Page and return to the page last viewed.
416
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Accessing emergency procedures:
1) From any page on the MFD (except the EIS Pages), press the Checklist Softkey or turn the large FMS Knob to
select the Checklist Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the EMER Softkey.
3) Turn the FMS Knob to select the desired emergency checklist and press the ENT Key.
4) Press the ENT Key or Check Softkey to check the selected emergency checklist item. The line item turns green
and a checkmark is placed in the box next to it. The next line item is automatically highlighted for checking.
Either FMS Knob can be used to scroll through the checklist and select the desired checklist item.
EIS
Press the CLR Key or Uncheck Softkey to remove a check mark from an item.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) When all checklist items have been checked, ‘*Checklist Finished*’ is displayed in green text at the bottom left
of the checklist window. If all items in the checklist have not be checked, ‘*Checklist Not Finished*’ will be
displayed in yellow text.
6) Press the ENT Key. ‘Go To Next Checklist?’ will be highlighted by the cursor.
7) Press the ENT Key to advance to the next checklist.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
8) Press the Return Softkey to return to the previous checklist.
9) Press the Exit Softkey to exit the Checklist Page and return to the page last viewed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
417
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.10 ABNORMAL OPERATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SIRIUSXM DATA LINK RECEIVER TROUBLESHOOTING
For troubleshooting purposes, check the LRU Information Box on the ‘Aux - System Status’ Page for
GDL 69A SXM status, serial number, and software version number. If a failure has been detected in the
GDL 69A SXM the status is marked with a red X.
Selecting the ‘Aux - System Status’ Page:
EIS
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Aux Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - System Status’ Page.
Some quick troubleshooting steps listed below can be performed to find the possible cause of a failure.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Ensure the installed Data Link Receiver or Iridium Transceiver has an active subscription or account
• Perform a quick check of the circuit breakers to ensure that power is applied to the Data Link Receiver or
Iridium Transceiver
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
GDL 69A SXM
Ensure that nothing is plugged into the MUSIC 1 or MUSIC 2 jacks because that would prevent SiriusXM
radio from being heard
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
If a failure still exists, the following messages may provide insight as to the possible problem:
Message
Message Location
CHECK ANTENNA
XM Information Page (MFD)
UPDATING
XM Information Page (MFD)
XM Information Page Weather Datalink Page Loss of signal; signal strength too low for
(MFD)
receiver
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
NO SIGNAL
APPENDICES
Description
Data Link Receiver antenna error; service
required
Data Link Receiver updating encryption code
LOADING
XM Radio Page (MFD)
Acquiring channel audio or information
OFF AIR
XM Radio Page (MFD)
Channel not in service
--------
XM Radio Page (MFD)
WEATHER DATA LINK FAILED
Weather Datalink Page (MFD)
ACTIVATION REQUIRED
XM Information Page (MFD)
Missing channel information
No communication from Data Link Receiver
within last 5 minutes
SiriusXM subscription is not activated
DETECTING ACTIVATION
Weather Datalink Page (MFD)
INDEX
WAITING FOR DATA...
SiriusXM subscription is activating.
SiriusXM subscription confirmed downloading
Weather Datalink Page (MFD)
weather data.
Table 8-4 GDL 69/69A SXM Data Link Receiver Messages
418
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
APPENDIX A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ANNUNCIATIONS AND ALERTS
The Alerting System conveys alerts using the following:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• CAS Window: The Annunciation Window displays abbreviated annunciation text. Text color is based on alert
levels described in the following section. The CAS Window is located to the right of the Altimeter and Vertical
Speed Indicator. All Crew Alerting System (CAS) annunciations can be displayed simultaneously in the CAS
Window. A white horizontal line separates annunciations that are acknowledged from annunciations that are
not yet acknowledged. Higher priority annunciations are displayed towards the top of the window.
EIS
• Messages Window: The Messages Window displays text messages for up to 64 prioritized alert messages.
Pressing the Messages Softkey displays the Messages Window. Pressing the Messages Softkey a second time
removes the Messages Window from the display. When the Messages Window is displayed, the FMS Knob can
be used to scroll through the alert message list.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Softkey Annunciation: During certain alerts, the Messages Softkey may appear as a flashing annunciation
to accompany an alert. The Messages Softkey assumes a new label consistent with the alert level (Warning,
Caution, or Advisory). By pressing the softkey when flashing an annunciation, the alert is acknowledged. The
softkey label then returns to Messages. If alerts are still present, the Messages label is displayed in white with
black text. Pressing the Messages Softkey a second time views the alert text messages.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• System Annunciations: Typically, a large red or amber ‘X’ appears over instruments whose information is
supplied by a failed Line Replaceable Unit (LRU). See the System Annunciations Section for more information.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
System
Annunciation
(Red ‘X’)
System
Annunciation
(Amber ‘X’)
AFCS
CAS
Window
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Messages
Window
APPENDICES
Softkey
Annunciation
Figure A-1 Alerting System
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
419
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX A
CAS MESSAGE PRIORITIZATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Refer to the Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH) for corrective pilot actions.
NOTE: Any CAS messages that are generated when the system is first powered on are considered already
acknowledged. They do not flash or trigger the Master Warning or Master Caution.
EIS
The Alerting System uses three alert levels. Messages are grouped by criticality (warning, caution, advisory)
and sorted by order of appearance (most recent messages on top). The color of the message is based on its
urgency and on required action:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The Crew Alerting System (CAS) Window is located on the right side of the PFD. Warning messages cannot
be scrolled through and remain at the top of the CAS display. The scroll bar appears if more caution and
advisory messages exist than can be displayed at once or if messages have been scrolled off the display. The
CAS softkeys also become available.
NOTE: Aural alerts associated with abnormal conditions and advisories are managed through the audio
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
panels. Refer to the Audio Panel and CNS Section for more information.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Warning: This level of alert requires immediate attention. When a new warning CAS message appears in the
CAS Window, it flashes (inversely red on white) in conjunction with the Warning Softkey (see Figure A-2) and
is accompanied by a repeating triple chime. Pressing the Warning Softkey acknowledges all flashing warning
messages and extinguishes the softkey. Once acknowledged, warning messages are shown in red text and are
displayed until the issue is corrected. Warning voice alerts repeat continuously until acknowledged by pressing
the Warning Softkey.
AFCS
Caution: This level of alert indicates the existence of abnormal conditions on the aircraft that may require
intervention. When a new caution message appears in the CAS Window, it is shown in black on amber inverse
video in conjunction with the Caution Softkey (see Figure A-2) and is accompanied by a double chime.
Pressing the Caution Softkey Indicator acknowledges all amber messages and extinguishes the softkey. Once
acknowledged, caution messages are displayed until the issue is corrected.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Advisory: This level of alert provides general information. When a new white advisory appears on the CAS
display, it is shown in black on white inverse video in conjunction with the Advisory Softkey (see Figure A-2)
and may be accompanied by a single chime.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Some CAS messages can be display in more than one alert level group. For example, a message might
display as both a warning and a caution, but cannot appear more than once at any given time (unless the CAS
is being tested). If the received signals justify multiple priorities for a certain message, the message is displayed
for the higher priority condition. When graduating to a higher priority, the message flashes and requires
new acknowledgment. When degrading to a lower priority condition, the message moves to the top of the
appropriate grouping, but does not require new acknowledgment.
420
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
APPENDIX A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
CAS
Window
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Softkey
Annunciation
Figure A-2 CAS Message Prioritization
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure A-3 Softkey Annunciation (Message Softkey Labels)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
CAS MESSAGES
Red annunciation window text signifies warnings, amber signifies cautions, and white signifies advisories.
See the POH for a list of CAS annunciations and for recommended pilot action.
DISPLAY INHIBITS
AFCS
Inhibits prevent certain CAS messages from being displayed during the following conditions:
If two alert levels of the same message are active simultaneously (e.g., LOW FUEL LEFT warning and LOW
FUEL LEFT caution) only the higher alert level is displayed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
If a GEA or GIA fails, all CAS messages depending on sensors associated with that LRU are automatically
inhibited. Inhibits cannot be activated by invalid sensor data.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
421
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX A
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING MESSAGES
Message
ALTERNTR FAIL
DOOR OPEN
GEAR UNSAFE
GEAR UNSAFE
LO FUEL LEFT
Alerts Window Message
Alternator has failed
Door Open
Gear in transition (during normal gear transition)
Gear Unsafe (if gear is in transition longer than 15 sec)
Low Fuel Warning
LO FUEL RIGHT
Low Fuel Warning
START POWER
Starter Engaged
Audio Alert
Continuous Chime
Continuous Chime
None
Continuous Chime
Continuous chime after 15
seconds of occurrence
Continuous chime after 15
seconds of occurrence
None
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
CAUTION MESSAGES
Message
ALTERNATE AIR
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
EMERGENCY BUS
HI BOOST PUMP
LO FUEL LEFT
LO FUEL RIGHT
LO MAN PRES
PITOT HEAT FAIL
PROP DEICE FAIL
Alerts Window Message
Alternate Air on
Audio Alert
Continuous Chime
Emergency Bus in use
High Boost Pump on
Low Fuel Caution
Low Fuel Caution
Manifold pressure is below 15 in. (M20V only).
Pitot Heat fail
Prop Deice fail
Single Chime
Single Chime
None
None
Single Chime
Continuous Chime
Continuous Chime
ADVISORY MESSAGES
AFCS
Message
LO BOOST PUMP
SPEED BRAKE
Alerts Window Message
Low Boost Pump on
Speed Brakes deployed
Audio Alert
None
None
Alerts Window Message
Audio Alert
None
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
SAFE MESSAGES
Message
GEAR DOWN
Gear down
APPENDICES
VOICE ALERTS
INDEX
The following voice alerts are announced by the system using a voice of male or female gender (see the
AUX - System Setup Page to change the audio alert voice). If the optional Terrain-SVS or the optional Terrain
Awareness and Warning System is installed, voice alerts are also generated (refer to the Terrain-SVS Alerts or
TAWS Alerts section).
422
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
APPENDIX A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Voice Alert
Description
“Check Gear”
“Vertical track”
EIS
“Stall”
“Traffic”
“TIS Not Available”
“Traffic System Test”
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
“Minimums, minimums”
Played when landing gear remain in the ‘Up’ position, and the pilot retards the throttle to
within 1/4” of idle.
The aircraft has descended below the preset minimum descent altitude or decision
altitude.
The aircraft is one minute from Top of Descent. Issued only when vertical navigation is
enabled.
Played when a stall is detected.
Played when a Traffic Advisory (TA) is issued (TIS system)
The aircraft is outside the Traffic Information Service (TIS) coverage area.
Played when the optional TAS system completes a pilot-initiated self test.
Description
Altitude Alert Chime
When aircraft altitude reaches the reference altitude threshold (+/- 1,000 ft of reference
altitude).
When aircraft altitude reaches or goes beyond the reference altitude deviation limit (+/- 200
ft of reference altitude).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Audio Alert
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
AUDIO ALERTS
SYSTEM MESSAGE ADVISORIES
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NOTE: This section provides information regarding message advisories that may be displayed by the system.
Knowledge of the aircraft, systems, flight conditions, and other existing operational priorities must be
considered when responding to a message.
Abort approach due to loss of GPS navigation.
GDC1 is reporting that the altitude error correction is unavailable.
GDC1 is reporting that the airspeed error correction is unavailable.
APPENDICES
The #1 AHRS calibration version error. The system should be serviced.
The #1 AHRS is using the backup GPS path. Primary GPS path has failed. The system
should be serviced when possible.
The #1 AHRS is not receiving any or any useful GPS information. Check AFMS
limitations. The system should be serviced.
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Comments
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Message Advisory
ABORT APR – Loss of GPS navigation.
Abort approach.
ADC1 ALT EC – ADC1 altitude error
correction is unavailable.
ADC1 AS EC – ADC1 airspeed error
correction is unavailable.
AHRS1 CAL – AHRS1 calibration version
error. Srvc req’d.
AHRS1 GPS – AHRS1 using backup
GPS source.
AHRS1 GPS – AHRS1 not receiving
any GPS information.
AFCS
This section describes various System message advisories. Certain messages are issued due to an LRU or LRU
function failure. Such messages are normally accompanied by a corresponding red ‘X’ annunciation as shown
previously in the System Annunciations section.
423
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX A
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Message Advisory
AHRS1 GPS – AHRS1 not receiving
backup GPS information.
AHRS1 GPS – AHRS1 operating
exclusively in no-GPS mode.
AHRS1 SRVC – AHRS1 Magnetic-field
model needs update.
AHRS1 TAS – AHRS1 not receiving
airspeed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
APR DWNGRADE – Approach
downgraded.
ARSPC AHEAD – Airspace ahead less
than 10 minutes.
ARSPC NEAR – Airspace near – less
than 2 nm.
ARSPC NEAR – Airspace near and
ahead.
APR INACTV – Approach is not active.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AUDIO MANIFEST - Audio software
mismatch, communication halted.
CHECK CRS – Database course for
LOC2 / [LOC ID] is [CRS]°.
CNFG MODULE – PFD1 configuration
module is inoperative.
COM1 CONFIG – COM1 config error.
Config service req’d.
COM1 MANIFEST – COM1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
COM1 PTT – COM1 push-to-talk key
is stuck.
APPENDICES
COM1 RMT XFR – COM1 remote
transfer key is stuck.
INDEX
COM1 SERVICE – COM1 needs
service. Return unit for repair.
COM1 TEMP – COM1 over temp.
Reducing transmitter power.
COM2 CONFIG – COM2 config error.
Config service req’d.
424
Comments
The #1 AHRS is not receiving backup GPS information. The system should be serviced.
The #1 AHRS is operating exclusively in no-GPS mode. The system should be serviced.
The #1 AHRS earth magnetic field model is out of date. Update magnetic field model
when practical.
The #1 AHRS is not receiving true airspeed from the air data computer. The AHRS
relies on GPS information to augment the lack of airspeed. The system should be
serviced.
Use LNAV minima when approach is downgraded.
Special use airspace is ahead of aircraft. The aircraft will penetrate the airspace within
10 minutes.
Special use airspace is within 2 nm of the aircraft position.
Special use airspace is near and ahead of the aircraft position.
The system notifies the pilot that the loaded approach is not active. Activate approach
when required.
The GDC 74B has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
Selected course for LOC2 differs from published localizer course by more than 10
degrees.
The PFD1 configuration module backup memory has failed. The system should be
serviced.
The COM1 configuration settings do not match backup configuration memory. The
system should be serviced
COM1 software mismatch. The system should be serviced.
The COM1 external push-to-talk switch is stuck in the enable (or “pressed”) position.
Press the PTT switch again to cycle its operation.
If the problem persists, the system should be serviced.
The COM1 transfer switch is stuck in the enabled (or “pressed”) position. Press the
transfer switch again to cycle its operation. If the problem persists, the system should
be serviced.
The system has detected a failure in COM1. COM1 may still be usable. The system
should be serviced when possible.
The system has detected an over temperature condition in COM1. The transmitter
operates at reduced power. If the problem persists, the system should be serviced.
The COM2 configuration settings do not match backup configuration memory. The
system should be serviced
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
APPENDIX A
The COM2 external push-to-talk switch is stuck in the enable (or “pressed”) position.
Press the PTT switch again to cycle its operation.
If the problem persists, the system should be serviced.
The COM2 transfer switch is stuck in the enabled (or “pressed”) position. Press the
transfer switch again to cycle its operation. If the problem persists, the system should
be serviced.
The system has detected a failure in COM2. COM2 may still be usable. The system
should be serviced when possible.
The system has detected an over temperature condition in COM2. The transmitter
operates at reduced power. If the problem persists, the system should be serviced.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
COM2 SERVICE – COM2 needs
service. Return unit for repair.
COM2 TEMP – COM2 over temp.
Reducing transmitter power.
COPILOT RADIOS MUTED – Copilot
radios are muted.
DATA LOST – Pilot stored data was
lost. Recheck settings.
DB CHANGE – Database changed.
Verify user modified procedures.
Comments
COM2 software mismatch. The system should be serviced.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
COM2 RMT XFR – COM2 remote
transfer key is stuck.
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Message Advisory
COM2 MANIFEST – COM2 software
mismatch, communication halted.
COM2 PTT – COM2 push-to-talk key
is stuck.
The copilot radios are set on mute.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
190-02284-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The pilot profile data was lost. System reverts to default pilot profile and settings. The
pilot may reconfigure the MFD & PFD with preferred settings, if desired.
This occurs when a stored flight plan contains procedures that have been manually
edited. This alert is issued only after an navigation database update. Verify that the
user-modified procedures in stored flight plans are correct and up to date.
DB CHANGE – Database changed.
This occurs when a stored flight plan contains an airway that is no longer consistent
Verify stored airways.
with the navigation database. This alert is issued only after an navigation database
update. Verify use of airways in stored flight plans and reload airways as needed.
DB MISMATCH – Navigation
The PFD and MFD have different navigation database versions or types installed.
database mismatch. Xtalk is off.
Crossfill is off. Check the AUX-SYSTEM STATUS Page to determine versions or regions.
Also, check the AUX-SYSTEM STATUS Page for a database synchronization function
not completed. After synchronization is complete, power must be turned off, then on.
DB MISMATCH – Obstacle database The PFD and MFD have different obstacle database versions or types installed. Check
mismatch.
the AUX-SYSTEM STATUS Page to determine versions or regions. Also, check the AUXSYSTEM STATUS Page for a database synchronization function not completed. After
synchronization is complete, power must be turned off, then on.
DB MISMATCH – Standby Navigation The PFD and MFD have different standby navigation database versions or types
database mismatch.
installed. Check the AUX-SYSTEM STATUS Page to determine versions or regions.
Also, check the AUX-SYSTEM STATUS Page for a database synchronization function
not completed. After synchronization is complete, power must be turned off, then on.
DB MISMATCH – Terrain database
The PFD and MFD have different terrain database versions or types installed. Check
mismatch.
the AUX-SYSTEM STATUS Page to determine versions or regions. Also, check the AUXSYSTEM STATUS Page for a database synchronization function not completed. After
synchronization is complete, power must be turned off, then on.
DIG GMA1 MANIFEST – DIG GMA1 The difital audio controller has incorrect software installed. The system should be
software mismatch, communication
serviced.
halted.
DME CHECK RANGE – DME range
A failure or disagreement has been detected in a DME receiver. Check position
disagreement. Check position sensors. sensors.
425
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX A
Message Advisory
FAILED PATH – A data path has
failed.
FPL TRUNC – Flight plan has been
truncated.
Comments
A data path connected to the GDU or the GIA 63W has failed.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
This occurs when a newly installed navigation database eliminates an obsolete
approach or arrival used by a stored flight plan. The obsolete procedure is removed
from the flight plan. Update flight plan with current arrival or approach.
FPL WPT LOCK – Flight plan waypoint Upon power-up, the system detects that a stored flight plan waypoint is locked. This
is locked.
occurs when an navigation database update eliminates an obsolete waypoint. The
flight plan cannot find the specified waypoint and flags this message. This can also
occur with user waypoints in a flight plan that is deleted.
Remove the waypoint from the flight plan if it no longer exists in any database,
OR
update the waypoint name/identifier to reflect the new information.
FPL WPT MOVE – Flight plan
The system has detected that a waypoint coordinate has changed due to a new
waypoint moved.
navigation database update. Verify that stored flight plans contain correct waypoint
locations.
G/S1 FAIL – G/S1 is inoperative.
A failure has been detected in glideslope receiver 1. The system should be serviced.
G/S1 SERVICE – G/S1 needs service. A failure has been detected in glideslope receiver 1. The receiver may still be
Return unit for repair.
available. The system should be serviced when possible.
G/S2 FAIL – G/S2 is inoperative.
A failure has been detected in glideslope receiver 2. The system should be serviced.
G/S2 SERVICE – G/S2 needs service. A failure has been detected in glideslope receiver 2. The receiver may still be
Return unit for repair.
available. The system should be serviced when possible.
GDC1 MANIFEST – GDC1 software
The GDC 74A has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
mismatch, communication halted.
GDL69 CONFIG – GDL 69 config
GDL 69/69A or GDL 69/69A SXM configuration settings do not match those of
error. Config service req’d.
backup configuration memory. The system should be serviced.
GDL69 FAIL – GDL 69 has failed.
A failure has been detected in the DL 69/69A or GDL 69/69A SXM. The receiver is
unavailable. The system should be serviced.
GDL69 MANIFEST – GDL software
The GDL 69/69A or GDL 69/69A SXM has incorrect software installed. The system
mismatch, communication halted.
should be serviced.
GEA1 CONFIG – GEA1 config error.
The GEA1 configuration settings do not match those of backup configuration memory.
Config service req’d.
The system should be serviced.
GEA1 MANIFEST – GEA1 software
The #1 GEA 71 has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
mismatch, communication halted.
GEO LIMITS – AHRS1 too far North/ The aircraft is outside geographical limits for approved AHRS operation. Heading is
South, no magnetic compass.
flagged as invalid.
GFC MANIFEST – GFC software
Incorrect servo software is installed, or gain settings are incorrect.
mismatch, communication halted.
GIA1 CONFIG – GIA1 audio config
The GIA1 have an error in the audio configuration. The system should be serviced.
error. Config service req’d.
GIA1 CONFIG – GIA1 config error.
The GIA1 configuration settings do not match backup configuration memory. The
Config service req’d.
system should be serviced.
426
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
APPENDIX A
The GIA1 1 has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
The GIA1 self-test has detected a problem in the unit. The system should be serviced.
The GIA2 have an error in the audio configuration. The system should be serviced.
The GIA2 configuration settings do not match backup configuration memory. The
system should be serviced.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The GIA2 temperature is too high. If problem persists, the system should be serviced.
The GIA2 temperature is too low to operate correctly. Allow units to warm up to
operating temperature.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The GIA 2 has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
The GIA2 self-test has detected a problem in the unit. The system should be serviced.
The digital audio controller has incorrect software installed. The system should be
serviced.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The audio panel configuration settings do not match backup configuration memory.
The system should be serviced.
The audio panel self-test has detected a failure. The audio panel is unavailable. The
system should be serviced.
AFCS
The audio panel has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
The audio panel self-test has detected a problem in the unit. Certain audio functions
may still be available, and the audio panel may still be usable. The system should be
serviced when possible.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The GMU 44 has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
APPENDICES
Loss of GPS navigation due to insufficient satellites.
Loss of GPS navigation due to position error.
Loss of GPS navigation due to GPS failure.
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
The GIA1 temperature is too high. If problem persists, the system should be serviced.
EIS
GMU1 MANIFEST – GMU1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
GPS NAV LOST – Loss of GPS
navigation. Insufficient satellites.
GPS NAV LOST – Loss of GPS
navigation. Position error.
GPS NAV LOST – Loss of GPS
navigation. GPS fail.
Comments
The GIA1 and/or GIA2 temperature is too low to operate correctly. Allow units to
warm up to operating temperature.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
GMA1 MANIFEST – GMA1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
GMA1 SERVICE – GMA1 needs
service. Return unit for repair.
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Message Advisory
GIA1 COOLING – GIA1 temperature
too low.
GIA1 COOLING – GIA1 over
temperature.
GIA1 MANIFEST – GIA1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
GIA1 SERVICE – GIA1 needs service.
Return the unit for repair.
GIA2 CONFIG – GIA2 audio config
error. Config service req’d.
GIA2 CONFIG – GIA2 config error.
Config service req’d.
GIA2 COOLING – GIA2 over
temperature.
GIA2 COOLING – GIA2 temperature
too low.
GIA2 MANIFEST – GIA2 software
mismatch, communication halted.
GIA2 SERVICE – GIA2 needs service.
Return the unit for repair.
GMA1 AUX MANIFEST – GMA1 AUX
software mismatch, communication
halted.
GMA1 CONFIG – GMA1 config error.
Config service req’d.
GMA1 FAIL – GMA1 is inoperative.
427
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX A
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Message Advisory
GPS1 FAIL – GPS1 is inoperative.
GPS2 FAIL – GPS2 is inoperative.
GPS1 SERVICE – GPS1 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
GPS2 SERVICE – GPS2 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
GRS1 MANIFEST – GRS1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
GTX1 MANIFEST – GTX1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
HDG FAULT – AHRS1 magnetometer
fault has occurred.
HOLD EXPIRED – Holding EFC time
expired.
HW MISMATCH – GIA hardware
mismatch. GIA1 communication
halted.
HW MISMATCH – GIA hardware
mismatch. GIA2 communication
halted.
INSIDE ARSPC – Inside airspace.
INVALID ADM – Invalid ADM: ATN
communication halted.
LOCKED FPL – Cannot navigate
locked flight plan.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
LOI – GPS integrity lost. Crosscheck
with other NAVS.
LRG MAG VAR – Verify all course
angles.
INDEX
APPENDICES
LRU REPLACEMENT – LRU
replacement detected.
MANIFEST – MFD1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
MANIFEST – PFD1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
MFD SOFTWARE – MFD mismatch,
communication halted.
MFD TERRAIN DSP – MFD Terrain
awareness display unavailable.
428
Comments
A failure has been detected in the GPS1 and/or GPS2 receiver. The receiver is
available. The system should be serviced.
A failure has been detected in the GPS1 and/or GPS2 receiver. The receiver may still
be available. The system should be serviced.
The #1 AHRS has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
The transponder has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
A fault has occurred in the #1 GMU 44. Heading is flagged as invalid. The AHRS uses
GPS for backup mode operation. The system should be serviced.
Expect Further Clearance (EFC) time has expired for the User Defined Hold.
A GIA mismatch has been detected, where only one is SBAS capable.
The aircraft is inside the airspace.
Data link avionics were not configured correctly and therefore will not be able to
communicate with the ground network.
This occurs when the pilot attempts to activate a stored flight plan that contains
locked waypoint. Remove locked waypoint from flight plan. Update flight plan with
current waypoint.
GPS integrity is insufficient for the current phase of flight.
The GDU’s internal model cannot determine the exact magnetic variance for
geographic locations near the magnetic poles. Displayed magnetic course angles may
differ from the actual magnetic heading by more than 2°.
The system has detected an LRU replacement. Replace LRU software or perform full
configuration loading procedure.
The PFD and/or MFD has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
The specified GDU has different software versions installed. The system should be
serviced.
One of the terrain or obstacles database required for TASW in the specified GDU is
missing or invalid.
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
APPENDIX A
APPENDICES
The terrain database is present on another LRU, but is missing on the specified LRU.
The MFD self-test has detected a problem. The system should be serviced.
A key is stuck on the MFD bezel. Attempt to free the stuck key by pressing it several
times. The system should be serviced if the problem persists.
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
The MFD detected a failure in the Safe Taxi database. Ensure that the data card
is properly inserted. Replace data card. If problem persists, the system should be
serviced.
The MFD detected a failure in the terrain database. Ensure that the terrain card is
properly inserted in display. Replace terrain card. If problem persists, the system
should be serviced.
The MFD detected a failure in the terrain database. Ensure that the terrain card is
properly inserted in display. Replace terrain card. If problem persists, the system
should be serviced.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 terrain
database missing.
MFD1 SERVICE – MFD1 needs
service. Return unit for repair.
MFD1 KEYSTK – MFD1 [key name]
is stuck.
The obstacle database is present on another LRU, but is missing on the specified LRU.
AFCS
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 terrain
database error exists.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 terrain
database error exists.
The MFD detected a failure in the ChartView database (optional feature). Ensure that
the data card is properly inserted. Replace data card. If problem persists, the system
should be serviced.
The MFD detected a failure in the FliteCharts database (optional feature). Ensure that
the data card is properly inserted. Replace data card. If problem persists, the system
should be serviced.
The MFD detected a failure in more than one database. If problem persists, the
system should be serviced.
The MFD detected a failure in the navigation database. Attempt to reload the
navigation database. If problem persists, the system should be serviced.
The MFD detected a failure in the obstacle database. Ensure that the data card
is properly inserted. Replace data card. If problem persists, the system should be
serviced.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 obstacle
database missing.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 Safe Taxi
database error exists.
The MFD detected a failure in the basemap database.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 multiple
database errors exists.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 navigation
database error exists.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 obstacle
database error exists.
EIS
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 FliteCharts
database error exists.
Comments
The specified GDU’s backlight calibration cannot be found or is invalid. The system
should be serviced.
The MFD configuration settings do not match backup configuration memory. The
system should be serviced.
The PFD and/or MFD is overheating and is reducing power consumption by dimming
the display. If problem persists, the system should be serviced.
The MFD detected a failure in the Airport Directory database. Ensure that the data
card is properly inserted. Replace data card. If problem persists, the system should be
serviced.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 basemap
database error exists.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 Chartview
database error exists.
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Message Advisory
MFD1 BACKLIGHT CALIBRATION –
MFD1 calibration. Return for repair.
MFD1 CONFIG – MFD1 config error.
Config service req’d.
MFD1 COOLING – MFD1 has poor
cooling. Reducing power usage.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 Airport
Directory database error exists.
429
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX A
Message Advisory
MFD1 VOLTAGE – MFD1 has low
voltage. Reducing power usage
NAV DB UPDATED – Active
navigation database updated.
NAV1 RMT XFR – NAV1 remote
transfer key is stuck.
Comments
The MFD voltage is low. The system should be serviced.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
System has updated the active navigation database from the standby navigation
database.
The remote NAV1 transfer switch is stuck in the enabled (or “pressed”) state. Press
the transfer switch again to cycle its operation. If the problem persists, the system
should be serviced.
NAV1 SERVICE – NAV1 needs service. A failure has been detected in the NAV1 receiver. The receiver may still be available.
Return unit for repair.
The system should be serviced.
NAV2 RMT XFR – NAV2 remote
The remote NAV2 transfer switch is stuck in the enabled (or “pressed”) state. Press
transfer key is stuck.
the transfer switch again to cycle its operation. If the problem persists, the system
should be serviced.
NAV2 SERVICE – NAV2 needs service. A failure has been detected in the NAV2 receiver. The receiver may still be available.
Return unit for repair.
The system should be serviced.
NON WGS84 WPT – Do not use GPS The position of the selected waypoint [xxxx] is not calculated based on the WGS84
for navigation to [xxxx]
map reference datum and may be positioned in error as displayed. Do not use GPS to
navigateto the selected non-WGS84 waypoint..
PFD1 BACKLIGHT CALIBRATION –
The PFD1 backlight calibration cannot be found or is invalid. The system should be
PFD1 calibration lost. Return for repair. serviced.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 basemap
The PFD detected a failure in the basemap database.
database error exists.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 multiple
The PFD detected a failure in more than one database. If problem persists, the system
database errors exists.
should be serviced.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1
The PFD detected a failure in the navigation database. Attempt to reload the
navigation database error exists.
navigation database. If problem persists, the system should be serviced.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 obstacle
The obstacle database is present on another LRU, but is missing on the specified LRU.
database missing.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 Safe Taxi
The PFD detected a failure in the Safe Taxi database. Ensure that the data card is
database error exists.
properly inserted. Replace data card. If problem persists, the system should be
serviced.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 terrain
The PFD detected a failure in the terrain database. Ensure that the terrain card is
database error exists.
properly inserted in display. Replace terrain card. If problem persists, the system
should be serviced.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 terrain
The terrain database is present on another LRU, but is missing on the specified LRU.
database missing.
PFD1 CONFIG – PFD1 config error.
The PFD configuration settings do not match backup configuration memory. The
Config service req’d.
system should be serviced.
PFD1 COOLING – PFD1 has poor
The PFD is overheating and is reducing power consumption by dimming the display.
cooling. Reducing power usage.
If problem persists, the system should be serviced.
PFD1 KEYSTK – PFD1 [key name] is A key is stuck on the PFD bezel. Attempt to free the stuck key by pressing it several
stuck.
times. The system should be serviced if the problem persists.
430
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
APPENDIX A
Comments
The SD card was removed from the top card slot of the specified PFD or MFD. The SD
card needs to be reinserted.
The SD card was removed from the bottom card slot of the specified PFD or MFD. The
SD card needs to be reinserted.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The SD card in the top card slot of the specified PFD or MFD contains invalid data.
The SD card in the bottom card slot of the specified PFD or MFD contains invalid data.
EIS
The PFD self-test has detected a problem. The system should be serviced.
The PFD1 voltage is low. The system should be serviced.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The pilot radios are set on mute.
Invalid leg type for parallel offset.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
IAF waypoint for parallel offset has been passed.
Bad parallel track geometry.
Message criteria entered by the user.
The system notifies the pilot to load the approach frequency for the appropriate NAV
receiver. Select the correct frequency for the approach.
The system notifies the pilot to set the Nav Angle units on the Avioncs Settings Screen
to Magnetic.
The system notifies the pilot to set the CDI to the correct NAV receiver. Set the CDI to
the correct NAV receiver.
The system notifies the pilot to set the Nav Angle units on the Avioncs Settings Screen
to True.
A steep turn is 15 seconds ahead. Prepare to turn.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Stormscope has failed. The System should be serviced.
Synthetic Vision is disabled because the aircraft is not within the boundaries of the
installed terrain database.
Synthetic Vision is disabled because a terrain database of sufficient resolution (4.9 arcsecond or better) is not currently installed.
The MFD and PFD have different software versions installed. The system should be
serviced.
The system configuration has changed unexpectedly. The system should be serviced.
INDEX
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
APPENDICES
190-02284-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Message Advisory
[PFD1 or MFD1] CARD 1 REM –
Card 1 was removed. Reinsert card.
[PFD1 or MFD1] CARD 2 REM –
Card 2 was removed. Reinsert card.
[PFD1 or MFD1] CARD 1 ERR – Card
1 is invalid.
[PFD1 or MFD1] CARD 2 ERR – Card
2 is invalid.
PFD1 SERVICE – PFD1 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
PFD1 VOLTAGE – PFD1 has low
voltage. Reducing power usage
PILOT RADIOS MUTED – Pilot radios
muted.
PTK FAIL – Parallel track unavailable:
invalid leg type.
PTK FAIL – Parallel track unavailable:
past IAF.
PTK FAIL – Parallel track unavailable:
bad geometry.
SCHEDULER [#] – <message>.
SLCT FREQ – Select appropriate
frequency for approach.
SLCT MAG– Select MAGNETIC NAV
ANGLE display units.
SLCT NAV – Select NAV on CDI for
approach.
SLCT NON-MAG– Select alternate
NAV ANGLE display units.
STEEP TURN – Steep turn ahead.
STRMSCP FAIL – Stormscope has
failed.
SVT DISABLED – Out of available
terrain region.
SVT DISABLED – Terrain DB
resolution too low.
SW MISMATCH – GDU software
version mismatch. Xtalk is off.
SYSTEM CONFIG – SYSTEM config
error. Config service req’d.
431
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX A
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Message Advisory
TCAS FAIL – TCAS system is
inoperative.
TERRAIN AUD CFG – Trn Awareness
audiol config error. Serviced req’d.
TERRAIN DISABLED – Terrain
Awareness DB resolution too low.
TIMER EXPIRD – Timer has expired.
TRAFFIC FAIL – Traffic device has
failed.
TRN AUD FAIL – Trn Awareness audio
source unavailable.
UNABLE V WPT – Can’t reach current
vertical waypoint.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
VNV – Unavailable. Unsupported leg
type in flight plan.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
VNV – Unavailable. Excessive
crosstrack error.
VNV – Unavailable. Excessive track
angle error.
VNV – Unavailable. Parallel course
selected.
WPT ARRIVAL – Arriving at waypoint
-[xxxx]
XPDR1 ADS-B 1090 – Datalinik:
ADS-B 1090 receiver has failed.
XPDR1 ADS-B FAIL – Transponder:
XPDR1 is unable to transmit ADS-B
messages.
XPDR1 ADS-B NO POS –
Transponder: ADS-B is not transmitting
position.
XPDR1 ADS-B TRFC – Transponder:
ADS-B traffic has failed
XPDR1 ADS-B UAT – Datalink:
ADS-B in UAT receiver has failed.
XPDR1 CONFIG – XPDR1 config error.
Config service req’d.
XPDR1 CSA FAIL - Traffic: ADS-B In
traffic alerting has failed.
XPDR1 FAIL – XPDR1 is inoperative.
432
Comments
The TCAS system has failed. The system should be serviced.
TAWS is disabled because the audio configuration is invalid. The system should be
serviced.
TAWS is disabled because a terrain database of sufficient resolution (4.9 arc-second or
better) is not currently installed.
The system notifies the pilot that the timer has expired.
The is no longer receiving data from the traffic system. The traffic device should be
serviced.
Terrain Awareness audio is unavailable. The system should be serviced.
The current vertical waypoint can not be reached within the maximum flight path
angle and vertical speed constraints. The system automatically transitions to the next
vertical waypoint.
The lateral flight plan contains a procedure turn, vector, or other unsupported leg
type prior to the active vertical waypoint. This prevents vertical guidance to the active
vertical waypoint.
The current crosstrack exceeds the limit, causing vertical deviation to go invalid.
The current track angle error exceeds the limit, causing the vertical deviation to go
invalid.
A parallel course has been selected, causing the vertical deviation to go invalid.
Arriving at waypoint [xxxx], where [xxxx] is the waypoint name.
A failure has been detected in the 1090 receiver.
ADS-B is inoperative. The transponder may not be receiving a valid GPS position.
Other transponder functions may be available. Service when possible.
The transponder is not able to receive position information.
The Transponder is incapable of processing traffic information.
A failure has been detected in the UAT receiver.
The transponder configuration settings do not match those of backup configuration
memory. The system should be serviced.
ADS-B Conflict Situational Awareness (CSA) is unavailable.
There is no communication with the #1 or #2 transponder.
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
APPENDIX A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Comments
The transponder is unable to receive ADS-B information.
The transponder is unable to receive FIS-B weather information.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The system has detected an over temperature condition in XPDR1. The transmitter
operates at reduced power. If the problem persists, the system should be serviced.
Unable to provide pressure altitude information.
The #1 transponder should be serviced when possible.
EIS
The system has detected an under temperature condition in XPDR1. The transmitter
operates at reduced power. If the problem persists, the system should be serviced.
The MFD and PFD are not communicating with each other. The system should be
serviced.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Message Advisory
XPDR1 FAULT – Datalink: ADSB-B in
has failed.
XPDR1 FIS-B WX – Datalink: FIS-B
Weather has failed.
XPDR1 OVER TEMP - Transponder:
Transponder over temp.
XPDR1 PRES ALT –Transponder:
ADS-B no pressure altitude.
XPDR1 SRVC – XPDR1 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
XPDR1 UNDER TEMP - Transponder:
Transponder under temp.
XTALK ERROR – A flight display
crosstalk error has occurred.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
433
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX A
Blank Page
434
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
APPENDIX B
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
DATABASE MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Database information is obtained from third party sources. Inaccuracies in the data may be discovered from
time to time. Garmin communicates this information by issuing a Database Alert. These notifications are available
on flygarmin.com.
EIS
Garmin requests the flight crew report any observed discrepancies related to database information. These
discrepancies could come in the form of an incorrect procedure; incorrectly identified terrain, obstacles and
fixes; or any other displayed item used for navigation or communication in the air or on the ground. Go to
flygarmin.com and select Aviation Data Error Report.
The system uses Secure Digital (SD) cards to load various types of data. For basic flight operations, SD cards
are required for database updates. Not all SD cards are compatible with the system.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NOTE: Loading a database in the system prior to its effective date will result in the expiration date on the
power-up screen and the effective date on the Aux – Databases Page being displayed in amber.
LOADING UPDATED DATABASES
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
CAUTION: Never disconnect power to the system when loading a database. Power interruption during the
database loading process could result in maintenance being required to reboot the system.
NOTE: When loading database updates, the ‘DB Mismatch’ system messages will be displayed until
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
database synchronization is complete, followed by turning system power off, then on. Synchronization can
be monitored on the Aux-Database Page.
Databases may be loaded through Garmin Pilot and Flight Stream 510. When loading databases through
Garmin Pilot and the Flight Stream 510, it must be enabled on the system and the multimedia card inserted in
the bottom SD slot of the MFD.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The cycles and dates for both standby and active databases are displayed on the “Aux – Databases” page and
the “Aux - System Status “ page on the MFD. Any active databases with expiration dates in the past will be
highlighted with amber text. When an expired active database has a standby database that is ready to become
effective, a cyan double-sided arrow will be displayed between the database cycles. When this arrow is visible,
it indicates that the standby and active databases in that row will be switched on the next power cycle, activating
the current standby database. Databases can also be manually selected (or deselected) by highlighting a list item
and pressing the ENT key, provided a valid, verified standby database is present.
APPENDICES
In some cases it may be necessary to obtain an unlock code from Garmin in order to make the database
product functional. It may also be necessary to have the system configured by a Garmin authorized service
facility in order to use some database features.
The navigation database contains the aeronautical data used by the system for the flight management and
flight planning functions. Included is detailed data for waypoints, procedures (arrivals, departures, approaches),
and airways. The navigation database is updated every 28 days.
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
435
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX B
The basemap database contains data for the topography and land features, such as rivers, lakes, and towns.
It is updated only periodically, with no set schedule. There is no expiration date.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The terrain database contains the terrain mapping data. These databases are updated periodically and have
no expiration date.
The obstacle database contains data for obstacles, such as towers, that pose a potential hazard to aircraft.
Obstacles 200 feet and higher are included in the obstacle database. It is very important to note that not all
obstacles are necessarily charted and therefore may not be contained in the obstacle database. This database is
updated on a 56-day cycle.
EIS
NOTE: The data contained in the terrain and obstacle databases comes from government agencies. Garmin
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
accurately processes and cross-validates the data, but cannot guarantee the accuracy and completeness of
the data.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The AOPA or AC-U-KWIK Airport Directory provides data on airports and heliports throughout the U.S. or
worldwide, respectively. The AOPA Directory offers detailed information for over 5,300 U. S. airports, along
with the names and phone numbers of thousands of FBOs. These databases are updated every 56 days. The
AC-U-KWIK Directory offers detailed information for more than 8,000 airports with runways longer than 3,000
feet worldwide.
The SafeTaxi database contains detailed airport diagrams for selected airports. These diagrams aid in following
ground control instructions by accurately displaying the aircraft position on the map in relation to taxiways,
ramps, runways, terminals, and services. This database is updated on a 56-day cycle.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The FliteCharts database contains procedure charts for the United States only. This database is updated on a
28-day cycle. If not updated within 180 days of the expiration date, FliteCharts will no longer function.
The ChartView database is updated on a 14-day cycle. If the ChartView database is not updated within 70
days of the expiration date, ChartView will no longer function. The ChartView database must be purchased
directly from Jeppesen, but can be updated at jeppesen.com or flygarmin.com.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
The IFR/VFR charts database contains VFR and IFR raster charts. The VFR Charts are digital representations
of the Sectional Aeronautical Charts and Terminal Area Charts. The IFR Charts include both IFR High (designed
for navigation at or above 18,000 ft) and IFR Low (designed for navigation below 18,000 ft). IFR/VFR Charts
are updated every 28 days except for Canadian IFR/VFR Charts which are updated every 56 days.
Database Updates Using a Supplemental Data Card
APPENDICES
All databases are updated through a single SD card in the top or bottom slot of the MFD. When the card is
inserted, the databases on the card will be copied to standby and synchronized across all powered, configured
units. After update, the card is removed and the databases are stored on the system. When in standby,
databases are not immediately available for use, but stored to be activated at a later time.
INDEX
Database updates can be obtained by following the instructions detailed in the ‘Aviation Databases’ section
of the Garmin website (flygarmin.com). Once the updated files have been downloaded from the website, a
PC equipped with an appropriate SD card reader is used to unpack and program the new databases onto an
existing Supplemental Data Card. Equipment required to perform the update is as follows:
• Windows-compatible PC computer
• SD Card Reader: SanDisk SDDR-93, SanDisk SDDR-99, Verbatim #96504, or equivalent
436
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
APPENDIX B
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
• Updated database obtained from the Garmin website
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Supplemental SD Cards
In some cases it may be necessary to obtain an unlock code from Garmin in order to make the database
product functional. It may also be necessary to have the system configured by a Garmin authorized service
facility in order to use some database features.
Updating Databases using an SD Card:
1) With the system OFF, remove an SD Card from the bottom SD card slot of the MFD.
2) Download the databases and install them on an SD card.
EIS
3) Put the SD Card in the top or bottom SD card slot of the MFD.
4) Turn the system ON.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) Press the ENT Key or the right most softkey on MFD display to acknowledge the startup screen.
6) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Aux page group on the MFD.
7) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Database page group on the MFD.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
8) Monitor the Sync Status on the Database page. Wait for all databases to complete syncing, indicated by ‘Sync
Complete’ being displayed. A cyan double arrow will appear between the Standby and Active columns to show
which Standby databases will be transferred to Active at the next power cycle.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure B-1 Database Page before Activation of Standby Databases
9) Verify the correct database cycle information is shown in the Standby Database column.
10) Remove power from the system.
INDEX
11) Remove the SD card from the bottom slot of the MFD.
12) After restarting the system, turn the large FMS Knob and select the Aux page group on the MFD.
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
437
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX B
13) Turn the small FMS Knob and select the Databases page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
14) Verify that the standby databases transferred and are now in the active database column.
Figure B-2 Aux - Database Page - Updated Databases
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
15) To view database information for an individual display, press and then turn the FMS Knob to select the database,
and then press the Details Softkey. Press the ENT Key or the FMS Knob to exit.
16) To manually activate any databases that did not transfer to the active column:
a) Press the FMS Knob. The first database title on the screen will be selected.
b) Turn the small FMS Knob as necessary to select the database title.
AFCS
c) Press the ENT Key. A cyan double-sided arrow will appear indicating that the standby database will become
active.
d) Remove and reapply power to the system.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
e) Verify that the standby databases transferred and are now in the active database column.
Database Updates Using Flight Stream 510
APPENDICES
In order to load databases through Garmin Pilot and the Flight Stream 510, the Flight Stream 510 must
be enabled on the system with the Multimedia card inserted in the bottom SD slot of the MFD. A mobile
device with Garmin Pilot must be paired with the Flight Stream 510 over Bluetooth (refer to the Additional
Features section). When there is at least one paired device available to connect, the Flight Stream 510 will
automatically connect to the system’s preferred mobile device. The preferred device can be selected on the
Aux – Databases page from a menu list of paired devices.
INDEX
Once a connection to the paired mobile device is made, Garmin Pilot makes available databases that
can be transferred to the Flight Stream 510. If any of these databases is more recent than the respective
standby database on the system, (or if there is no standby database on the system) those databases will be
438
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
APPENDIX B
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
automatically selected to load. The database updates may be initiated from the Aux - Databases page, or from
other pages on the MFD.
Updating Databases from any MFD page (except the Aux - Databases page):
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Insert the Flight Stream Mutimedia Card in the bottom slot of the MFD.
2) Press the Update softkey when the Database Update screen appears.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure B-3 Database Update Available
3) The Flight Stream 510 will enter WI-FI mode. The following screen will appear.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure B-4 Starting Database Transfer
4) Put the mobile device in WI-FI mode (refer to the Additional Features section).
6)
AFCS
5) Connect the mobile device to the Flight Stream 510 WI-FI (refer to the Additional Features section). The ‘WI-FI
Not Connected’ screen will close when the WI-FI connection is established.
When the transfer is complete, the following screen will appear.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure B-5 Database Transfer Complete
7) Press the Close softkey.
8) When an existing database is expired and a new one is ready to become active, a ‘Database Expired’ window
will appear. Continue to the next step to restart the system.
INDEX
9) Remove power from the system.
10) After restarting the system, turn the large FMS Knob and select the Aux page group on the MFD.
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
439
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX B
11) Turn the small FMS Knob and select the Databases page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
12) Verify that the standby databases transferred and are now in the active database column.
Figure B-6 Database Page with Updated Databases
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
13) To view database information for an individual display, press and then turn the FMS Knob to select the database,
and then press the Details Softkey. Press the ENT Key or the FMS Knob to exit.
14) To manually activate any databases that did not transfer to the active column:
a) Press the FMS Knob. The first database title on the screen will be selected.
AFCS
b) Turn the small FMS Knob as necessary to select the database title.
c) Press the ENT Key. A cyan double-sided arrow will appear indicating that the standby database will become
active.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
d) Remove and reapply power to the system.
e) Verify that the standby databases transferred and are now in the active database column.
Updating Databases from the Aux - Databases page:
1) With the system OFF, insert the Flight Stream Mutimedia Card in the bottom slot of the MFD.
APPENDICES
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Aux page group on the MFD.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Database page group on the MFD.
4) Press the Device Softkey.
INDEX
5) The Aux - Databases page will show the databases connected to the mobile device in place of the active
databases on the system. Databases selected to load will be indicated by a cyan arrow.
6) Press the Update softkey. The Flight Stream 510 will enter WI-FI mode.
440
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
APPENDIX B
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
7) Put the mobile device in WI-FI mode (refer to the Additional Features section).
8) Connect the mobile device to the Flight Stream 510 WI-FI (refer to the Additional Features section).
9) The Database Update status will appear in the Status window at the top of the page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
10) Remove power from the system.
11) After restarting the system, turn the large FMS Knob and select the Aux page group on the MFD.
12) Turn the small FMS Knob and select the Databases page.
13) Verify that the standby databases transferred and are now in the active database column.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure B-7 Database Page with Updated Databases
AFCS
14) To view database information for an individual display, press and then turn the FMS Knob to select the database,
and then press the Details Softkey. Press the ENT Key or the FMS Knob to exit.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
15) To manually activate any databases that did not transfer to the active column:
a) Press the FMS Knob. The first database title on the screen will be selected.
b) Turn the small FMS Knob as necessary to select the database title.
APPENDICES
c) Press the ENT Key. A cyan double-sided arrow will appear indicating that the standby database will become
active.
d) Remove and reapply power to the system.
e) Verify that the standby databases transferred and are now in the active database column.
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
441
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX B
MAGNETIC FIELD VARIATION DATABASE UPDATE
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A copy of the current magnetic field variation database (MV DB) is included with the navigation database.
At startup, the system compares this version of the MV DB with that presently being used by the AHRS. If the
system determines the MV DB needs to be updated, a prompt is displayed on the Navigation Map Page.
Figure B-8 Magnetic Field Variation Database Update Prompt
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Loading the magnetic field variation database update:
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
With ‘OK’ highlighted, as seen in Figure B-8, press the ENT Key on the MFD. A progress monitor is displayed
as shown in Figure B-9. When the upload is complete, the system is ready for use.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure B-9 Uploading Database
442
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
APPENDIX C
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
GARMIN AVIATION GLOSSARY
ACARS
APPENDICES
INDEX
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
BOC
BOD
BRG
AFCS
BFO
BKSP
Bluetooth
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Both Runways
Barometric Altitude
Barometer, Barometric
Battery
Backcourse
The compass direction from the present
position to a destination waypoint.
Beat Frequency Oscillator
Backspace
Wireless standard for data exchange over
short distances
Bottom of Climb
Bottom of Descent
see also Bearing
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
B
B ALT
BARO
BATT
BC
Bearing
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Autopilot
Autopilot Disconnect
Approach
Airport, Aerodrome
Airport Signs
Aeronautical Radio Incorporated
Airspace
Air Route Traffic Control Center
Arrival
Airspeed
Aviation Support Branch
Automated Surface Observing System
Auto Throttle
Air Traffic Control
ATC Radar Beacon System
Automatic Terminal Information Service
Along Track
Automatic Sequence
Auxiliary
Average
Aviation VHF Link Control
Automated Weather Observing System
EIS
190-02284-00 Rev. A
AP
AP DISC
APPR, APR
APT
APTSIGNS
ARINC
ARSPC
ARTCC
ARV
AS
ASB
ASOS
AT
ATC
ATCRBS
ATIS
ATK
AUTOSEQ
AUX
AVG
AVLC
AWOS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Airborne Communications Addressing
and Reporting System
ACC
Accuracy
ACT, ACTV
Active, Activate, Altitude Compensated
Tilt
ADAHRS
Air Data, Attitude and Heading Reference
System
ADC
Air Data Computer
ADF
Automatic Direction Finder
ADI
Attitude Direction Indicator
ADIZ
Air Defense Identification Zone
ADS-B
Automatic Dependent SurveillanceBroadcast
ADS-R
Automatic Dependent SurveillanceRebroadcast
AF
Arc to Fix Leg
AFCS
Automatic Flight Control System
AFM
Airplane Flight Manual
AFMS
Airplane Flight Manual Supplement
AFRM
Airframe
AGL
Above Ground Level
AHRS
Attitude and Heading Reference System
AIM
Aeronautical Information Manual
AIRB
Airborne
AIRMET
Airman’s Meteorological Information
AIRREP
Air Reports
ALRT
Alert
ALT
Altitude
ALT, ALTN
Alternator
ALTS
Selected Altitude Capture Mode
ALTV
VNAV Altitude Capture Mode
AMPS
Amperes
ANNUNC/ANN Annunciation/Annunciator
ANT
Antenna
AOA
Angle of Attack, ACARS Over AVLC
AOC
Aeronautical Operational Control
AOG
Aircraft On Ground
AOPA
Aircraft Owners and Pilots Association
443
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX C
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
°C
C
CA
CAL
CALC
Calibrated
Airspeed
CAS
CD
CDI
CDU
CF
CG
CH, CHNL
CHT
CHKLIST
CI
CLD
CLR
CM
CMC
CN
CNS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
CO
COM
CONFIG
COOL
COPLT
Course
APPENDICES
Course to
Steer
INDEX
CPDLC
CPL
CR
CRG
444
Degrees Celsius
Center Runway
Course to Altitude Leg
Calibrated
Calculator
Indicated airspeed corrected for
installation and instrument errors.
Crew Alerting System
Course to DME Distance Leg
Course Deviation Indicator
Control Display Unit
Course to Fix Leg
Center of Gravity
Channel
Cylinder Head Temperature
Checklist
Course to Intercept Leg
Cloud
Clear
Centimeter
Central Maintenance Computer
Canada
Communication, Navigation, &
Surveillance
Carbon Monoxide
Communication Radio
Configuration
Coolant
Copilot
The line between two points to be
followed by the aircraft.
The recommended direction to steer
in order to reduce course error or stay
on course. Provides the most efficient
heading to get back to the desired course
and proceed along the flight plan.
Controller Pilot Datalink Communications
Couple
Course to Radial Leg
Cockpit Reference Guide
CRNT
Crosstrack
Error
CRS
CRSR
CSA
CSC
CTA
CTR
CTRL
Cumulative,
CUM
CVDR
CVR
CVRG
CWS
CYL
Current
The distance the aircraft is off a desired
course in either direction, left or right.
see also Course, Course to Steer
Cursor
Conflict Situational Awareness
Current Speed Control
Control Area
Center
Control
The total of all legs in a flight plan.
D ALT
D-ATIS
DB, DBASE
dBZ
DCL
DCLTR, DECLTR
DEC FUEL
DEG
DEIC, DEICE
DEP
Desired Track
Density Altitude
Digital Automatic Terminal Info Service
Database
Decibels ‘Z’ (Radar Return)
Departure Clearance
Declutter
Decrease Fuel
Degree
De-icing
Departure
The desired course between the active
“from” and “to” waypoints.
Destination
Deviation
Direct to Fix Leg
Default
Directional Gyro
Degrade
Decision Height
DES, DEST
DEV
DF
DFLT
DG
DGRD
DH
Cockpit Voice Data Recorder
Cockpit Voice Recorder
Coverage
Control Wheel Steering
Cylinder
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
APPENDIX C
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Degrees Fahrenheit
Course From Fix to Altitude Leg
Federal Aviation Administration
Full Authority Digital Engine Control
Final Approach Fix
Failure
Future Air Navigation System
Fixed Base Operator
Course From Fix to Distance Leg
Federal Communication Commission
INDEX
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
APPENDICES
190-02284-00 Rev. A
°F
FA
FAA
FADEC
FAF
FAIL
FANS
FBO
FC
FCC
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Empty, East
Engine and Airframe Systems
Engine Control Unit
Emergency Descent Mode
Expected Further Clearance
A measure of fuel consumption,
expressed in distance per unit of fuel.
EGNOS
European Geostationary Navigation
Overlay Service
EGT
Exhaust Gas Temperature
EICAS
Engine Indication and Crew Alerting
System
EIS
Engine Indication System
ELEV
Elevation, Elevator
ELT
Emergency Locator Transmitter
EMER, EMERG, Emergency
EMERGCY
EMI
Electromagnetic Interference
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
E
EAS
ECU
EDM
EFC
Efficiency
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
DTK
DQR
Endurance
Flight endurance, or total possible flight
time based on available fuel on board.
ENG
Engine
ENGD
Engaged
ENR
Enroute; ETE to Final Destination
Enroute Safe Uses Grid MORAs to determine a safe
Altitude (ESA) altitude within ten miles left or right of
the desired course on an active flight
plan or direct-to.
ENT
Enter
EPE
see also Estimated Position Error
EPU
Estimated Position Uncertainty
ERR
Error
ES
Extended Squitter
ESA
see also Enroute Safe Altitude
ESP
Electronic Stability and Protection
Estimated
A measure of horizontal GPS position
Position Error error derived by satellite geometry
(EPE)
conditions and other factors.
Estimated
The estimated time at which the aircraft
Time of Arrival should reach the destination waypoint,
(ETA)
based upon current speed and track.
Estimated
The estimated time it takes to reach
Time Enroute the destination waypoint from the
(ETE)
present position, based upon current
groundspeed.
ETA
see also Estimated Time of Arrival
ETE
see also Estimated Time Enroute
EVS
Enhanced Vision System
EXPIRD
Expired
EIS
DL LTNG
DLS
DME
DN
DOP
DP
DPRT
DR
DSBL
DTG
END, ENDUR
Endurance
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
DIR
DIS
Distance
A measure of GPS satellite geometry
quality on a scale of one to ten (lower
numbers equal better geometry, where
higher numbers equal poorer geometry).
Direction
Distance
The ‘great circle’ distance from the
present position to a destination
waypoint.
Datalink Lightning
Data Link System
Distance Measuring Equipment
Down
see also Dilution of Precision
Departure Procedure
Departure
Dead Reckoning
Disabled
Distance To Go, Remaining distance to
last active FPL waypoint
see also Desired Track
Data Quality Requirements
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Dilution of
Precision
445
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX C
FCST
FD
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Forecast
Flight Director, Course From Fix to DME
Distance Leg
FDE
Fault Detection and Exclusion
FF, FFLOW
see also Fuel Flow
FIS-B
Flight Information Services-Broadcast
FISDL
Flight Information Service Data Link
FL
Flight Level
FLC
Flight Level Change
FLT
Flight Timer
FLTA
Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance
FM
Course From Fix to Manual Termination
Leg
FMS
Flight Management System
FOB
see also Fuel On Board
FOD
see also Fuel Over Destination
FPA
Flight Path Angle
FPL
Flight Plan
FPM
Feet Per Minute, Flight Path Marker
FREQ
Frequency
FRMT
Format
FRZ
Freezing
FSM
Flight System Messages
FSS
Flight Service Station
FT
foot/feet
Fuel Flow
The fuel flow rate, expressed in units of
fuel per hour.
Fuel On Board The total amount of usable fuel on board
the aircraft.
Fuel Over
The estimated fuel remaining when the
Destination
aircraft reaches the destination waypoint,
based upon current fuel flow.
FWD
Forward
INDEX
G/S
GA
GAL, GL
GBOX
GBT
GCU
GCS
446
Glideslope
Go-Around
Gallon(s)
Gearbox
Ground Based Transceiver
Garmin Control Unit
Ground Clutter Suppression
GDC
GDL
GDR
GDU
GEA
GEO
GFC
GIA
GLONASS
Ground Track
GRS
GS
GSA
GSL
GSU
GTS
GTX
Garmin Air Data Computer
Garmin Satellite Data Link
Garmin Data Radio
Garmin Display Unit
Garmin Engine/Airframe Unit
Geographic
Garmin Flight Control
Garmin Integrated Avionics Unit
Global Orbiting Navigation Satellite
Landing System
Global Navigation Satellite Landing
System
Garmin Audio Panel System
Garmin Mode Controller
Greenwich Mean Time
Garmin Magnetometer Unit
Ground
Gallons per Hour
Garmin Part Number
Global Positioning System
Ground Proximity Warning System
One degree latitude by one degree
longitude in size and clears the highest
elevation reference point in the grid by:
a) 1,000 feet where the highest elevation
is <5001MSL or b) 2,000 feet where the
highest elevation is >5000MSL
The velocity that the aircraft is travelling
relative to a ground position.
See Track
Garmin Reference System
Ground Speed, Glideslope
Garmin Servo Adapter
Geodetic Sea Level
Garmin Sensor Unit
Garmin Traffic System
Garmin Transponder
HA
HDG
HDOP
Hold Terminating at Altitude Leg
see also Heading
Horizontal Dilution of Precision
GLS
GMA
GMC
GMT
GMU
GND
GPH
GPN
GPS
GPWS
Grid MORA
(Minimum
Off—Route
Altitude)
Groundspeed
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
APPENDIX C
Key Stuck
Kilogram
Kilohertz
Kilometer
Knot
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
L
LAT
LBL
LB
LCD
LCL
LDA
LDG
LED
Left Over Fuel
On Board
Left, Left Runway
Latitude
Label
Pound
Liquid Crystal Display
Local
Landing Distance Available
ETA at Final Destination
Light Emitting Diode
The amount of fuel remaining on board
after the completion of one or more legs
of a flight plan or direct-to.
Left Over Fuel The amount of flight time remaining,
Reserve
based on the amount of fuel on board
after the completion of one or more legs
of a flight plan or direct-to, and a known
consumption rate.
Leg
The portion of a flight plan between two
waypoints.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
AFCS
Inner Marker
Initial Approach Fix
Indicated Air Speed
Indicated Air Temperature
Integrated Avionics Unit
International Civil Aviation Organization
Intercom System
Identification/Morse Code Identifier
Identification
Institute of Electrical & Electronics Engineers
Initial Fix
Instrument Flight Rules
Imperial Gallon
Instrument Landing System
Instrument Meteorological Conditions
Inch
KEYSTK
KG
kHz
KM
KT
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
190-02284-00 Rev. A
ITT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
I
IAF
IAS
IAT
IAU
ICAO
ICS
ID
IDENT, IDNT
IEEE
IF
IFR
IG
ILS
IMC
IN
Hectopascal
Horizontal Protection Level
Hour
Horizon Heading
High-Speed Data Bus
Horizontal Situation Indicator
Heat
Horizontal Uncertainty Level
Hertz (cycles per second)
INFO
IN Hg
INS
INT
INTEG
IrDA, IRDA
ISA
Inactive
Increase Fuel
Indicator, Indicated
Information provided by properly
calibrated and set instrumentation on the
aircraft panel.
Information
Inches of Mercury
Inertial Navigation System
Intersection(s)
Integrity (RAIM unavailable)
Infrared Data Association
International Standard Atmosphere; ISA
Relative Temperature
Inter-Turbine Temperature, Interstage
Turbine Temperature
EIS
HFOM
Hg
HI
HI SENS
HM
HNS
Horizontal
Figure of
Merit
hPa
HPL
HR
HRZN HDG
HSDB
HSI
HT
HUL
Hz
INACTV
INC FUEL
IND
Indicated
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
HF
The direction an aircraft is pointed,
based upon indications from a magnetic
compass or a properly set directional
gyro.
High Frequency, Hold Terminating at Fix
Leg
see also Horizontal Figure of Merit
Mercury
High
High Sensitivity
Hold with Manual Termination Leg
Hybrid Navigation System
A measure of the uncertainty in the
aircraft’s horizontal position.
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Heading
447
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX C
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
LGND
LIFR
LMM
LNAV
LO
LOA
LOC
LOI
LOM
LON
LP
LPV
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
LRU
LT
LTNG
LVL
Legend
Low Instrument Flight Rules
Location Middle Marker
Lateral Navigation
Low
Letter of Authorization
Localizer
Loss of Integrity (GPS)
Location Outer Marker
Longitude
Localizer Performance
Localizer Performance with Vertical
Guidance
Line Replaceable Unit
Left
Lightning
Level
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
M
Meter, Middle Marker, Mach
MMO (VMO)
Maximum Speed
Mach Number Mach number is the ratio of the true
airspeed to the speed of sound.
MAG
Magnetic
MAG VAR
Magnetic Variation
MAHP
Missed Approach Hold Point
MAN IN
Manifold Pressure (inches Hg)
MAN SQ
Manual Squelch
MANSEQ
Manual Sequence
MAP
Missed Approach Point
MASQ
Master Avionics Squelch
MAX
Maximum
MAXSPD
Maximum Speed (overspeed)
MB
Marker Beacon
MDA
Barometric Minimum Descent Altitude
MEPT
Manual Electric Pitch Trim
MET
Manual Electric Trim
METAR
Aviation Routine Weather Report
MFD
Multi Function Display
MFW
Multi Function Window
MGRS
Military Grid Reference System
MHz
Megahertz
448
MIC
MIN
Minimum Safe
Altitude (MSA)
MKR
MOA
MON
MOV
MORA
MPEL
MPM
MSA
MSAS
MSG
MSL
MT, M
mV
MVFR
N
NAV
NAVAID
NDB
NEXRAD
NM
NoPT
NOTAM
NRST
O
OAT
OBS
OFST
OOOI
Microphone
Minimum
Uses Grid MORAs to determine a safe
altitude within ten miles of the aircraft
present position.
Marker Beacon
Military Operations Area
Monitor
Movement
Minimum Off-Route Altitude
Maximum Permissible Exposure Level
Meters per Minute
see also Minimum Safe Altitude
Multi-functional Satellite Augmentation
System
Message
Mean Sea Level
Meter
Millivolt(s)
Marginal Visual Flight Rules
North
Navigation
Navigation Aid
Non-Directional Beacon
Next Generation Radar
Nautical Mile(s)
No Procedure Turn Required (procedure
shall not be executed without ATC
clearance)
Notice To Airman
Nearest
OXY
Outer Marker
Outside Air Temperature
Omni Bearing Selector
Offset
Out of the gate, Off the ground, On the
ground, and In the gate
Oxygen
P ALT
Pressure Altitude
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
APPENDIX C
APPENDICES
INDEX
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
190-02284-00 Rev. A
SID
SIG/AIR
South
Selective Availability
Search and Rescue
Static Air Temperature
Satellite-Based Augmentation System
Storm Cell Identification and Tracking
Secure Digital
Second(s)
Select
Selective Calling
Sense
Surface
Standard Instrument Approach
Procedures
Standard Instrument Departure
SIGMET/AIRMET
AFCS
RAM
RAT
RCVR
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Right, Right Runway
Resolution Advisory, Radio Altimeter
Radial
Radio Altimeter
Receiver Autonomous Integrity
Monitoring
Random Access Memory
Ram Air Temperature
Receiver
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
R
RA
RAD
RAD ALT
RAIM
S
SA
SAR
SAT
SBAS
SCIT
SD
SEC
SEL, SLCT
SELCAL
SENS
SFC
SIAP
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Field Elevation Pressure
Sea Level Pressure
Quantity
RMI
RMT
RNAV
RNG
RNP
RNWY, RWY
ROL
ROM
RPM
RST FUEL
RSV
RT
RVRSNRY
RVSM
RX
Reference
Remaining (fuel remaining), Reminder
Required
Reserve (fuel reserve entered by pilot)
Reverse, Revision, Revise
Radio Frequency, Constant Radius Turn to
Fix Leg
Radio Magnetic Indicator
Remote
Area Navigation
Range
Required Navigation Performance
Runway
Roll
Read Only Memory
Revolutions Per Minute
Reset Fuel
Reserve (fuel reserve entered by pilot)
Right
Reversionary
Reduced Vertical Separation Minimums
Receive
EIS
QFE
QNH
QTY
REF
REM
REQ
RES
REV
RF
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Passenger Address, Proximity Advisory
Passenger(s)
Personal Computer
Pre-Departure Clearance
Primary Flight Display
Pilot’s Guide
Procedure Turn to Course Intercept Leg
Pilot Report
Pitch
Plain Old ACARS
Pilot’s Operating Handbook
Pilot’s Operating Handbook Supplement
Position
Pounds per Hour
Parts per Million
Present Position
Pressure
Procedure(s), Procedure Turn
Propeller
Proximity
Pounds per Square Inch
Procedure Turn
Parallel Track
Push-to-Talk
Power
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
PA
PASS
PC
PDC
PFD
PG
PI
PIREP
PIT, PTCH
POA
POH
POHS
POS, POSN
PPH
PPM
P. POS
PRES, PRESS
PROC
PROP
PROX
PSI
PT
PTK
PTT
PWR
449
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX C
450
SIGMET
SIM
SLD
SLP/SKD
SMBL
SMS
SNGL
SPC
SPD
SPI
SPKR
SQ
SRVC, SVC
SSID
STAB
STAL
STAR
STATS
STBY
STD
STRMSCP
SUA
SURF
SUSP
SVT
SW
SYNC
SYN TERR
SYN VIS
SYS
Significant Meteorological Information
Simulator
Supercooled Large Droplet
Slip/Skid
Symbol
Short Message System
Single
Space
Speed
Special Position Identification
Speaker
Squelch
Service
Wireless Service Set Identifier
Stabilization
Stall
Standard Terminal Arrival Route
Statistics
Standby
Standard
Stormscope
Special Use Airspace
Surface
Suspend
Synthetic Vision Technology
Software
Synchronize
Synthetic Terrain
Synthetic Vision
System
T
TA
TACAN
TAF
TAS
TAT
TAWS
True
Traffic Advisory
Tactical Air Navigation System
Terminal Aerodrome Forecast
True Airspeed, Traffic Advisory System
Total Air Temperature
Terrain Awareness and Warning System
TCA
TCAS
TEL
TEMP
TERM
TF
TFR
TGT
T HDG
TIS
TIS-B
TIT
TKE
TMA
TMR/REF
TOC
TOD
TOGA, TO/GA
TOLD
TOPO
TORA
TOT
TPA
Track
Track Angle
Error
TRK
TRSA
TRUNC
TTL
TURB
TURN
TWIP
TX
Terminal Control Area
Traffic Alert Collision Avoidance System
Telephone
Temperature
Terminal
Track Between Two Fixes Leg
Temporary Flight Restriction
Target
True Heading
Traffic Information Service
Traffic Information Service-Broadcast
Turbine Inlet Temperature
see also Track Angle Error
Terminal Maneuvering Area
Timer/Reference
Top of Climb
Top of Descent
Take-Off, Go-Around
Takeoff and Landing Data
Topographic
Takeoff Run Available
Total
Traffic Pattern Altitude
Direction of aircraft movement relative to
a ground position; also ‘Ground Track’.
The angle difference between the desired
track and the current track.
see also Track
Terminal Radar Service Area
Truncated
Total
Turbulence
Procedure Turn
Terminal Weather Information for Pilots
Transmit
UAT
UHF
UNAVAIL
Universal Access Transceiver
Ultra-High Frequency
Unavailable
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
APPENDIX C
Watt(s), West
Wide Area Augmentation System
Warning
Weather Attenuated Color Highlight
World Geodetic System - 1984
Wireless Local Area Network based on
IEEE 802.11
Weight on Gear
Weight on Wheels
Waypoint(s)
INDEX
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
APPENDICES
WOG
WOW
WPT
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
W
WAAS
WARN
WATCH
WGS-84
WI-FI, WIFI
AFCS
VPATH, VPTH
VPL
VPROF
VR
VRP
VS
VSD
VSI
VSR, VS REQ
VTF
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
190-02284-00 Rev. A
VMC
VNAV, VNV
VOL
VOR
VORTAC
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
VSB
VSR
VT
VTIRE
VX
VY
VYSE
V DEV
VA
VAC
VAPP
VAR
VD
VDC
VDL
VERT
VFOM
VFR
VHF
VI
VLOC
VM
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Volts
Velocity (airspeed)
Takeoff Decision Speed
Takeoff Safety Speed
Maneuvering Speed
Approach Climb Speed
Maximum Flap Extended Speed
Maximum Landing Gear Extended Speed
Approach Speed (Flaps at x°)
Maximum Landing Gear Operating Speed
Minimum Control Speed
Maximum Operating Speed
Never-Exceed Speed
Takeoff Rotate Speed
Landing Approach Speed, Reference
Landing Speed
Maximum Speedbrake Speed
Stall Speed
Takeoff Flap Retraction Speed
Maximum Tire Speed
Best Angle of Climb Speed
Best Rate of Climb Speed
Best Single-Engine Rate of Climb Speed
Vertical Deviation
Heading Vector to Altitude Leg
Volts Alternating Current
VOR Approach
Variation
Heading Vector to DME Distance Leg
Volts Direct Current
VHF Datalink
Vertical
A measure of the uncertainty in the
aircraft’s vertical position.
The vertical speed necessary to descend/
climb from a current position and altitude
to a defined target position and altitude,
based upon current groundspeed.
see also Vertical Figure of Merit
Visual Flight Rules
Very High Frequency
Heading Vector to Intercept Leg
VOR/Localizer Receiver
Heading Vector to Manual Termination
Leg
Visual Meteorological Conditions
Vertical Navigation
Volume
VHF Omnidirectional Range
VHF Omnidirectional Range Station and
Tactical Air Navigation
Vertical Path
Vertical Protection Level
VNAV Profile, Vertical Profile
Heading Vector to Radial Leg
Visual Reporting Point
Vertical Speed
Vertical Situation Display
Vertical Speed Indicator
see also Vertical Speed Required
Vector to Final
EIS
V
V, Vspeed
V1
V2
VA
VAPP , VAC
VFE
VLE
VLNDx
VLO
VMC
VMO (MMO)
VNE
VR
VREF
Vertical Figure
of Merit
Vertical Speed
Required
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
United States
User
Coordinated Universal Time
Universal Transverse Mercator/ Universal
Polar Stereographic Grid
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
US
USR
UTC
UTM/UPS
451
WT
WW
WX
Weight
World Wide
Weather
XPDR
XTALK
XTK
Transponder
Cross-Talk
Cross-Track, Crosstrack Error
XFER, XFR
XM LTNG
Transfer
SiriusXM Lightning
YD
Yaw Damper
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX C
452
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
APPENDIX D
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
If a particular aspect of system operational capability is not addressed by these commonly asked questions or in
the index, contact Garmin (see the copyright page or back cover for contact information) or a Garmin-authorized
dealer. Garmin is dedicated to supporting its products and customers.
What is SBAS?
EIS
The Satellite Based Augmentation System (SBAS) uses a system of ground stations to correct any GPS signal
errors. These ground stations correct for errors caused by ionospheric disturbances, timing, and satellite
orbit errors. It also provides vital integrity information regarding the health of each GPS satellite. The signal
correction is then broadcast through geostationary satellites. This correction information can then be received
by any SBAS-enabled GPS receiver.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
SBAS is designed to provide the additional accuracy, availability, and integrity necessary to enable users to rely
on GPS for all phases of flight.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
There are several SBAS systems serving different parts of the world. The Wide Area Augmentation System
(WAAS) is currently available in the United States, including Alaska and Hawaii. The European Geostationary
Navigation Overlay Service (EGNOS) offers coverage of Europe, parts of the middle east and northern Africa.
The Multi-functional Satellite Augmentation System (MSAS) covers mainly Japan and parts of northern Australia.
How does SBAS affect approach operations?
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Both LNAV/VNAV and LPV approaches use the accuracy of SBAS to include vertical (glide path) guidance
capability. The additional accuracy and vertical guidance capability allows improved instrument approaches to
an expanded number of airports throughout the U.S.
AFCS
The implementation of LPV approaches further improves precision approach capabilities. LPV approaches
are designed to make full use of the improved GPS signal from the SBAS. This approach combines the LNAV/
VNAV vertical accuracy with lateral guidance similar to the typical Instrument Landing System (ILS). LPV
approaches allow lower approach minimums.
What is RAIM and how does it affect approach operations?
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
RAIM is an acronym for Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring. RAIM is a GPS receiver function that
performs the following functions:
• Monitors and verifies integrity and geometry of tracked GPS satellites
• Notifies the pilot when satellite conditions do not provide the necessary coverage to support a certain phase
of flight
APPENDICES
• Predicts satellite coverage of a destination area to determine whether the number of available satellites is
sufficient to satisfy requirements
NOTE: If RAIM is not predicted to be available for the final approach course, the approach does not become
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
INDEX
active, as indicated by the “RAIM not available from FAF to MAP” message and the LOI annunciation
flagging on the HSI.
453
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX D
For RAIM to work correctly, the GPS receiver must track at least five satellites. A minimum of six satellites is
required to allow RAIM to eliminate a single corrupt satellite from the navigation solution.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
RAIM ensures that satellite geometry allows for a navigation solution calculation within a specified protection
limit (2.0 nm for oceanic and en route, 1.0 nm for terminal, and 0.3 nm for non-precision approaches). The
system monitors RAIM and issues an alert message when RAIM is not available (see Appendix A). Without
RAIM, GPS position accuracy cannot be monitored. If RAIM is not available when crossing the FAF, the pilot
must fly the missed approach procedure.
What is GSL altitude?
EIS
GSL (Geodetic Sea Level) altitude is the height above Mean Sea Level (MSL), as calculated geometrically,
generally using a global positioning system (GPS) as the primary data source. The calculated result may or may
not include a barometric component, but the primary source is geometric.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Why are there not any approaches available for a flight plan?
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Approaches are available for the final destination airport in a flight plan or as a direct-to (keep in mind
that some VOR/VORTAC identifiers are similar to airport identifiers). If a destination airport does not have a
published approach, the system indicates “NONE” for the available procedures.
What happens when an approach is selected? Can a flight plan with an approach, a departure, or an
arrival be stored?
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
When an approach, departure, or arrival is loaded into the active flight plan, a set of approach, departure,
or arrival waypoints is inserted into the flight plan, along with a header line showing the title of the selected
instrument procedure. The original en route portion of the flight plan remains active, unless the instrument
procedure is activated. This may be done either when the procedure is loaded or at a later time.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Flight plans can also be stored with an approach, a departure, or an arrival. Note that the active flight plan
is erased when the system is turned off. Also, the active flight plan is overwritten when another flight plan is
activated. When storing flight plans with an approach, a departure, or an arrival, the system uses the waypoint
information from the current database to define the waypoints. If the database is changed or updated, the
system automatically updates the information, provided the procedure has not been modified. Should an
approach, departure, or arrival procedure no longer be available, the flight plan becomes locked until the
procedure is deleted from the flight plan.
Can “slant Golf” (“/G”) be filed using the G1000?
APPENDICES
“/G” may be filed for a flight plan. The system meets the requirements of TSO-C145a Class 3 and ETSO C145
Class 3 installations. GPS approaches are not to be flown with an expired database. See the approved Pilot’s
Operating Handbook (POH) as well as the Aeronautical Information Manual (AIM) for more information.
What does the OBS Softkey do?
INDEX
The OBS Softkey is used to select manual sequencing of waypoints. Activating OBS mode sets the current
active-to waypoint as the primary navigation reference and prevents the system from sequencing to the next
waypoint in a flight plan. When OBS mode is cancelled, automatic waypoint sequencing is continued, and
the system automatically activates the next waypoint in the flight plan once the aircraft has crossed the present
active waypoint.
454
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
APPENDIX D
OBS
Manual sequencing - ‘holds’ on selected waypoint
Manually select course to waypoint from HSI
Indicates ‘TO’ or ‘FROM’ waypoint
Cannot be set for final approach course or published holding patterns
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
•
•
•
•
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
•
•
•
•
Normal (OBS not activated)
Automatic sequencing of waypoints
Manual course change on HSI not possible
Always navigates ‘TO’ the active waypoint
Must be in this mode for final approach course
When OBS mode is active, the system allows the pilot to set a desired course to/from a waypoint using the
CRS/BARO Knob and HSI (much like a VOR).
EIS
The most common application for using the OBS Softkey is the missed approach. The system suspends
automatic waypoint sequencing (indicated by a ‘SUSP’ annunciation placed on the HSI) when the missed
approach point (MAP) is crossed. This prevents the system from automatically sequencing to the missed
approach holding point (MAHP). During this time, the OBS Softkey designation changes to SUSP. Pressing
the SUSP Softkey reactivates automatic waypoint sequencing. The OBS Softkey then resumes its normal
functionality.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Why might the system not automatically sequence to the next waypoint?
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The system only sequences flight plan waypoints when automatic sequencing is enabled (i.e., no ‘OBS’ or
‘SUSP’ annunciation on the HSI). For automatic sequencing to occur, the aircraft must also cross the bisector of
the turn being navigated. The bisector is a line passing through the waypoint common to two flight plan legs
at an equal angle from each leg.
How can a waypoint be skipped in an approach, a departure, or an arrival?
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The system allows the pilot to manually select any approach, departure, or arrival leg as the active leg of
the flight plan. This procedure is performed on the MFD from the Active Flight Plan Page by highlighting the
desired waypoint and pressing the ACT Leg Softkey then the ENT Key to approve the selection. The GPS then
provides navigation along the selected flight plan leg.
AFCS
When does turn anticipation begin?
The system smooths adjacent leg transitions based on a normal 15° bank angle (with the ability to roll up to
30°) and provides three pilot cues for turn anticipation:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• A waypoint alert (‘Next DTK ###° in # seconds’ or ‘Next HDG ###° in # seconds’) appears on the PFD 10
seconds before the turn point and flashes as it counts down to zero.
APPENDICES
• A flashing turn advisory (‘Turn [right/left] to ###° in # seconds’) appears on the PFD 10 seconds before the
turn and flashes as it counts down to zero. ‘Turn [right/left] to ###° now’ or ‘Next [DTK/HDG] to ###° now’
is displayed when the pilot is to begin the turn and the HSI (GPS mode) automatically sequences to the next
DTK or HDG value.
• The To/From indicator on the HSI flips momentarily to indicate that the midpoint of the turn has been
crossed.
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
455
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX D
When does the CDI scale change?
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Once a departure is activated, the Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) full scale deflection is set to 0.3 nm. The
CDI scale changes to 1.0 nm (terminal mode) then ramps up to 2.0 nm (enroute mode) at 30 nm from the
departure airport. When 31 nm from the destination, the CDI scale smoothly transition from 2.0 nm back
to 1.0 nm (terminal mode). At 2.0 nm before the FAF during an active approach, the CDI scale transitions
down further based on the type of approach activated (LNAV, LNAV/VNAV, LPV). When a missed approach is
activated, the CDI is set to 0.3 nm. See the Flight Instruments Section for more details on CDI scaling.
Why does the HSI not respond like a VOR when OBS mode is active?
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Unlike a VOR, the CDI scale used on GPS equipment is based on the crosstrack distance to the desired
course, not on the angular relationship to the destination. Therefore, the CDI deflection on the GPS is constant
regardless of the distance to the destination and does not become less sensitive when further away from the
destination.
What is the correct missed approach procedure? How is the missed approach holding point selected?
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
To comply with TSO specifications, the system does not automatically sequence past the MAP. The first
waypoint in the missed approach procedure becomes the active waypoint when the SUSP Softkey is selected
after crossing the MAP. All published missed approach procedures must be followed, as indicated on the
approach plate.
To execute the missed approach procedure prior to the MAP (not recommended), select the Active Flight Plan
Page and use the ACT Leg Softkey to activate the missed approach portion of the procedure.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
After a missed approach, how can the same approach be re-selected? How can a new approach be
activated?
NOTE: Do not attempt to reactivate the current approach prior to crossing the missed approach point
AFCS
(MAP). If an attempt to do so is made, an alert message “Are you sure you want to discontinue the current
approach?” appears. The system directs the pilot back to the transition waypoint and does not take into
consideration any missed approach procedures, if the current approach is reactivated.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
After flying the missed approach procedure, the pilot may reactivate the same approach for another attempt by
pressing the PROC Key. Once the clearance is given for another attempt, activate the approach by highlighting
‘Activate Approach’ using the large FMS Knob and pressing the ENT Key. The system provides navigation along
the desired course to the waypoint and rejoins the approach in sequence from that point.
APPENDICES
To activate a new approach for the same airport, select the new procedure by pressing the PROC Key. Choose
‘Select Approach’, select the desired approach from the list shown, and press the ENT Key. Select the desired
transition, then activate the approach using the ENT Key.
INDEX
To activate a new approach to a different airport, press the Direct-to Key and select the desired airport using
the FMS Knobs. Press the ENT Key to accept the selected airport, then follow the steps in the preceding
paragraph to select an approach for the new airport.
456
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
APPENDIX E
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
MAP SYMBOLS
MISCELLANEOUS MAP SYMBOLS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
MISCELLANEOUS
Item
Symbol
ARTCC Frequency or FSS Frequency
EIS
Map Pointer (when panning)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Elevation Pointer
(on Topography Scale when panning)
Measuring Pointer
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Wind Vector
Overzoom Indicator
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
User Waypoint
Vertical Navigation Along Track Waypoint
Parallel Track Waypoint
AFCS
Unanchored Flight Path Waypoint
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Displayed when aircraft GPS location is
valid, but heading is invalid.
Top of Descent (TOD)
APPENDICES
Bottom of Descent (BOD)
Navigating using Dead Reckoning
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
457
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX E
Blank Page
458
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
INDEX
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
B
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Backcourse Mode-------------------------------------------374
Backlighting-------------------------------------------------- 42
Barometric Altimeter Setting---------------------------44, 50
Bearing/distance, measuring------------------------------142
Bearing Information-------------------------------------45, 65
Bearing Pointer----------------------------------------------- 64
Bearing Source----------------------------------------------- 65
Bluetooth---------------------------------------- 192, 383, 414
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
C
Calibrated Airspeed-----------------------------------------248
CAS Messages-----------------------------------------------421
CAUTION-----------------------------------------------------420
Caution Messages------------------------------------------422
Chart Not Available-----------------------------------------388
Chart options----------------------------------------- 392, 399
Chart Setup Box-------------------------------------- 394, 399
ChartView--------------------------------------------- 383, 387
Checklists--------------------------------------------- 416–417
Circle of Uncertainty----------------------------------------400
Clearance Recorder-----------------------------------------125
Closest Point-------------------------------------------------217
COM----------------------------------------------------------125
COM channel spacing--------------------------------------108
COM Frequency Box--------------------------------- 104, 110
Command Bars----------------------------------------------353
COM Tuning Failure-----------------------------------------129
Conflict Situational Awareness (CSA)--------------------335
Controls--------------------------------------------------------- 4
Controls (Softkeys)-------------------------------------- 21–24
Control Wheel Steering (CWS)--------------------- 349, 378
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
AFCS
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Attitude and Heading Reference System (AHRS)------- 15
Attitude Indicator----------------------------------------44, 46
Audio Alerts--------------------------------------------------423
Audio Panel Fail-Safe Operation--------------------------129
Aural Alerts--------------------------------------------------422
Automatic Dependent Surveillance-Rebroadcast
(ADS-R)-------------------------------------------------------334
Automatic Flight Control System (AFCS)--------- 347–382
Alerts and annunciations------------------------ 380–381
Controls-------------------------------------------- 348–349
Status Box-------------------------------------------------352
Automatic squelch------------------------------------------104
Autopilot----------------------------------------347, 377–379
Autopilot disconnect---------------------------------------349
Autopilot Disconnect---------------------------------------379
Auto-tuning--------------------------------------------------114
NAV--------------------------------------------------------112
Auto-tuning, COM------------------------------------------105
Auto Zoom---------------------------------------------------138
Aviation Symbols------------------------------------- 146, 147
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Activate a Flight Plan---------------------------------------207
Active frequency------------------------------- 104, 110, 111
ADF---------------------------------------------------------115
AC-U-KWIK------------------------------------- 383, 403, 436
ADF
ADF mode------------------------------------------ 115, 116
ANT mode-------------------------------------------------116
Volume-----------------------------------------------------115
ADF audio----------------------------------------------------111
ADF/BFO-----------------------------------------------------116
ADF/DME tuning--------------------------------------------117
ADF frequency tuning--------------------------------------116
ADF volume--------------------------------------------------117
ADS-R---------------------------------------------------------334
Advisory Messages-----------------------------------------422
AFCS Status Box--------------------------------------------352
AHRS---------------------------------------423, 424, 426, 428
Airborne Mode (AIRB)-------------------------------------336
Airport Directory------------------------------- 383, 403, 436
Airport Information-----------------------------------------161
Airport Signs-------------------------------------------------- 72
Airspace Alerts--------------------------------------- 178, 252
Airspeed Indicator---------------------------------------44, 47
Airspeed Reference---------------------------------- 359–360
Airways-------------------------------------------------------150
Collapsing/Expanding-----------------------------------217
Alerting system----------------------------------------------419
Alerts
Arrival------------------------------------------------------- 36
Audio voice------------------------------------------ 37, 422
Levels------------------------------------------------------420
Along Track Offset------------------------------------------212
Altimeter--------------------------------------------------44, 49
Altitude Alerting--------------------------------------------- 68
Altitude Constraints----------------------------------------225
Altitude Hold Mode----------------------------------------357
Altitude Reference----------------------------- 356, 357, 368
Annunciations
System------------------------------------------------------ 12
Test tone---------------------------------------------------- 14
Annunciator lights------------------------------------------123
ANT/BFO-----------------------------------------------------116
AOPA-------------------------------------------------- 383, 436
Approach-----------------------------------------------------454
Activating-------------------------------------------------241
Loading--------------------------------------- 204, 239, 240
Removing--------------------------------------------------242
Approach channel----------------------------------- 204, 239
Approach Mode---------------------------------------------370
Approach Mode (GPS, VAPP, LOC)-----------------------364
Arrival procedure------------------------------- 203, 236, 237
Assist, Engine Leaning--------------------------------- 93–95
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
A
I-1
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
INDEX
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Copy a Flight Plan------------------------------------------207
Correlation, Traffic------------------------------------------335
Course Deviation Indicator (CDI)--------------------- 57–61
Changing scale-------------------------------------------456
Crew Alerting System (CAS)
Inhibits-----------------------------------------------------421
Messages------------------------------------------- 420–421
Crew Profiles---------------------------------------------30, 31
Exporting--------------------------------------------------- 33
Importing--------------------------------------------------- 32
Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT °F)--------------------- 89
EIS
D
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Database(s)--------------------------------------------------- 10
Data Link Receiver------------------------------------------418
Data logging-------------------------------------------------413
Date and time------------------------------------------------ 34
Day/Night views-------------------------------------- 394, 399
Day View-----------------------------------------------------395
DB Mismatch------------------------------------------------435
Dead Reckoning------------------------------------------84, 85
DEC FUEL Softkey-------------------------------------------- 92
Decision Height---------------------------------------------- 69
Declutter, Display-------------------------------------------- 85
Delete Flight Plans------------------------------------------207
Deleting
An entire airway----------------------------------- 209, 210
An entire procedure------------------------------ 209, 210
An individual waypoint--------------------------- 208, 209
Flight Plan Items-----------------------------------------208
Density Altitude---------------------------------------------250
Departure
Procedure------------------------------------ 201, 234, 235
Select----------------------------- 234, 236, 239, 241, 244
Dilution of Precision (DOP)--------------------------------- 17
Direct-to----------------155, 180, 181, 182, 183, 184, 224
Display backup----------------------------------------------101
DME
HOLD mode-----------------------------------------------117
NAV1 mode-----------------------------------------------117
NAV2 mode-----------------------------------------------117
Tuning mode--------------------------------------- 115, 117
DME audio---------------------------------------------------111
DME Information Window---------------------------------- 65
E
INDEX
Electronic Checklists--------------------------------- 416, 417
Emergency Checklist---------------------------------------417
Emergency frequency---------------------------------------129
Endurance, Calculated (ENDUR)-----------------------91, 92
Engine Indication System (EIS)------------------------ 87–96
Engine Manifold Pressure (MAN IN HG)-------------89, 91
I-2
Entering Flight ID-------------------------------------------118
Entertainment inputs---------------------------------------126
Estimated Position Error (EPE)----------------------------- 17
Exhaust Gas Temperature (EGT)---------------------- 93–94
F
Fail-safe operation------------------------------------------129
Field of View (SVT)------------------------------------------154
Flight director
Pitch modes---------------------------------------- 354–360
Flight director (FD)-----------------------------347, 351–352
Switching--------------------------------------------------350
Flight ID------------------------------------------------------122
Flight Instruments----------------------------------43, 43–58
Flight Level Change Mode---------------------------------359
Flight Path Marker------------------------------------------- 72
Flight plan
Storing-----------------------------------------------------454
Flight Plan, Active
Creating---------------------------------------------------188
Inverting---------------------------------------------------215
Leg Type---------------------------------------------------185
Procedures------------------------------------------------232
Flight Plan Progress----------------------------------------188
Flight Plan, Stored
Activating-------------------------------------------------207
Adding Procedures---------------------------------------199
Invert and Activate---------------------------------------215
Viewing----------------------------------------------------206
Flight Stream---------------------------------------------2, 383
Flight Stream 510------------------------------------ 192, 414
FliteCharts-------------------------------------- 383, 395, 396
Functions--------------------------------------------------397
FPA------------------------------------------------------------224
Frequency spacing------------------------------------------108
Frequently asked questions--------------------------------453
Fuel
Calculations--------------------------------------------92, 96
Efficiency--------------------------------------------------250
Endurance-------------------------------------------------250
Flow
Gauge------------------------------------------------------- 91
Flow (FFLOW GPH)--------------------------------------- 89
Quantity---------------------------------------------------- 91
Remaining-------------------------------------------------250
Required---------------------------------------------------250
Statistics---------------------------------------------------250
Fuel on Board-----------------------------------------------250
Fuel Range Ring---------------------------------------------153
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Page groups--------------------------------------------- 27–30
Pairing--------------------------------------------------------414
Parallel Track-------------------------------------------------213
Passenger Address (PA) System---------------------------125
Pending flight plan---------------------------- 192, 193, 194
Pitch Hold Mode--------------------------------------------354
Pitch Modes, Flight Director------------------------ 354–360
Power ON settings------------------------------------------123
Power-up Page----------------------------------------------416
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
INDEX
Manual Electric Trim (MET)------------------- 347, 349, 377
Map
Symbols----------------------------------------------------457
Map Panning------------------------------------------------139
Marker Beacon----------------------------------------------114
Marker Beacon Annunciations----------------------------- 69
MASQ processing-------------------------------------------- 97
Measurement units, changing displayed----------------- 35
P
APPENDICES
M
OBS Mode---------------------------------------------------- 62
Obstacles-----------------------------------------------------425
Odometer----------------------------------------------------- 40
Oil Temperature and Pressure (OIL °F PSI)-----------89, 91
Omni Bearing Selector (OBS)----------------------- 454–455
Other Statistics----------------------------------------------250
Outside Air Temperature (OAT)---------------------------- 44
Overview-------------------------------------------------------- 1
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Land Symbols------------------------------------------------145
LO SENS------------------------------------------------------115
Low Altitude Annunciation--------------------------------- 69
O
AFCS
L
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
IDENT function----------------------------------------------119
ID indicator--------------------------------------------------110
IFR/VFR Charts----------------------------------------------400
Imminent Obstacle Impact (IOI)--------------------------314
Import/Export Flight Plan----------------------------------190
Indicated Airspeed------------------------------------------- 47
Indicated Altitude-------------------------------------------248
Intercom------------------------------------------------------123
Intercom system (ICS)--------------------------------------126
Intersection--------------------------------------------------163
Intersection Information---------------------------- 163–164
Inverting a Flight Plan--------------------------------------215
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
I
National Weather Service (NWS)-------------------------290
NAV audio---------------------------------------------------111
Navigation
Mode Selection-------------------------------------------111
Navigation Source-------------------------------------- 57–58
Nav radio selection-----------------------------------------111
NDB-----------------------------------------------------------165
Nearest
Airport---------------------------------------- 160, 161, 162
Airport Minimum Runway Length---------------------162
Airport Surface Matching-------------------------------162
VOR--------------------------------------------------------168
VRP-------------------------------------------------- 169, 170
Nearest airports, frequency tuning-----------------------106
NextGen------------------------------------------------------333
Night view---------------------------------------------------395
No Available Charts----------------------------------------397
Non-path descent-------------------------------------------367
Normal Display Mode--------------------------------------- 11
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Heading------------------------------------------------------- 44
Heading Bug-------------------------------------------------- 44
HI SENS-------------------------------------------------------115
Horizon Heading--------------------------------------------- 72
Horizontal Situation Indicator
(HSI)-------------------------------------- 44, 54–56, 455, 456
HSI double green arrow------------------------------------111
HSI magenta arrow-----------------------------------------111
HSI single green arrow-------------------------------------111
N
EIS
H
Menus--------------------------------------------------------- 26
Minimum Descent Altitude--------------------------------- 69
Minimums----------------------------------------------------423
Missed Approach-------------------------------------------242
MKR/MUTE--------------------------------------------------114
Mode S-------------------------------------------------------118
Mode selection softkeys---------------------------- 118, 119
Morse code identifier---------------------------------------110
Motion Vectors, Traffic--------------------------------------341
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Garmin Pilot-------------------------------------------------414
Garmin SVT--------------------------------------------------- 71
Geodetic Sea Level (GSL)----------------------------------304
GFC 700------------------------------------------------------347
Glidepath Mode (GP)-------------------------- 370, 371, 373
Glideslope Indicator----------------------------------------- 51
Glideslope Mode (GS)--------------------------------------349
Global Positioning System (GPS)
Receiver information--------------------------------- 18–20
Go Around Mode (GA)-------------------------------------349
Groundspeed------------------------------------------------- 40
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
G
I-3
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
INDEX
R
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring
(RAIM)---------------------------------------------- 18–19, 453
Required Obstacle Clearance (ROC)---------------------314
Reversionary Mode---------------------------11, 12, 71, 129
Roll Hold Mode---------------------------------------------360
Roll Hold Mode (ROL)--------------------------------------349
Runway-------------------------------------------------------- 72
Runway Extension------------------------------------------148
RX indicator--------------------------------------------------105
EIS
S
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
SAFE ANNUNCIATION-------------------------------------422
SafeTaxi------------------------------------------------ 383, 384
SBAS----------------------------------------------------------453
Scheduler------------------------------------------- 40–41, 410
Secure Digital (SD) card-------------------------- 9, 416, 435
Selected Altitude------------ 354, 356, 358, 359, 365, 368
Selected Altitude
Capture Mode--------------- 354, 356, 357, 358, 365, 376
Selected Altitude Intercept Arc----------------------------154
Selected Course--------------------------- 45, 363, 371, 375
Selected Heading-------------------------------------- 45, 361
Sequencing waypoints
Automatic-------------------------------------------------455
Servos---------------------------------------------------------377
SIGMET-------------------------------------------------------282
SiriusXM Radio Volume------------------------------------409
SiriusXM Weather
AIREPs-----------------------------------------------------294
AIRMETs---------------------------------------------------282
Cell Movement-------------------------------------------281
Cloud Tops------------------------------------------------278
County Warnings-----------------------------------------290
Cyclones & Hurricanes----------------------------------291
Echo Tops--------------------------------------------------277
Freezing Level---------------------------------------------287
Icing--------------------------------------------------------292
Lightning--------------------------------------------------279
PIREPs-----------------------------------------------------294
SIGMETs---------------------------------------------------282
Surface Analysis------------------------------------------286
Turbulence-------------------------------------------------293
Winds Aloft------------------------------------------------288
Slip/Skid Indicator----------------------------------------44, 46
Softkeys----------------------------------------------21–28, 44
EIS----------------------------------------------------------- 24
MFD--------------------------------------------------------- 24
PFD---------------------------------------------------------- 21
Speaker-------------------------------------------------------123
Split COM operation----------------------------------------126
I-4
Standby frequency-----------------------104, 106, 110, 111
ADF---------------------------------------------------------115
Standby frequency field----------------------------- 104, 110
Standby Navigation Database----------------------------437
Stereo headsets---------------------------------------------123
Stuck microphone-------------------------------------------129
Sunrise / Sunset---------------------------------------------249
Surface Analysis---------------------------------------------286
SURF Mode, ADS-B-----------------------------------------336
Suspend Mode----------------------------------------------- 63
SVT------------------------------------------------------------431
Symbols, map------------------------------------------------457
Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT)------------------------- 71
System
Annunciations--------------------------------------------419
System Alerting----------------------------------------------- 68
System Display (EIS)----------------------------------------- 96
System Message Advisories-------------------------------423
System Status Page------------------------------------------ 14
T
TA-------------------------------------------------------------423
Tachometer (RPM)---------------------------------------89, 91
Takeoff Mode------------------------------------------------376
TAS------------------------------------------------------------424
Terminal Aerodrome Forecast (TAF)----------------------284
Terminal procedures charts------------------- 386, 388, 397
Terrain--------------------------------------------------------425
Terrain Proximity--------------------------------------------304
Timer----------------------------------------------------------- 38
Departure-----------------------------------------------38, 39
Flight----------------------------------------------------38, 39
Generic----------------------------------------------------- 38
TOPO Data---------------------------------------------------144
TOPO Scale---------------------------------------------------145
Track Indicator------------------------------------------------ 55
Track Vector--------------------------------------------------152
Traffic Advisory (TA)----------------------------------------423
Traffic Information Service-Broadcast (TIS-B)-----------334
Transfer from Wireless Connection:----------------------192
Transponder code entry------------------------------------120
Transponder data box--------------------------------------- 97
Transponder standby mode-------------------------------119
Trim adapter-------------------------------------------------377
Trip Planning------------------------------------ 248, 249, 250
Trip statistics-------------------------------------------------- 40
Trip Statistics------------------------------------------ 249, 250
True Airspeed------------------------------------------------- 47
True Airspeed (TAS)------------------------------------------ 44
Turn anticipation--------------------------------------------455
Turn Rate Indicator--------------------------------------44, 64
TX indicator--------------------------------------------------105
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
INDEX
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
U
Unable to display chart----------------------------- 388, 397
User-Defined Holding Pattern-----------------------------218
User Waypoint-----------------------------------------------171
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
V
EIS
Vertical deviation-------------------------------------------367
Vertical Navigation flight control------------------ 365–369
Vertical Navigation (VNAV)------------------ 184, 223, 225
Direct-to---------------------------------------------------224
Vertical Path Tracking Mode------------------------ 365–366
Vertical Situation Display (VSD)-------------- 228, 229, 230
Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI)--------------------------44, 51
Vertical Speed Mode---------------------------------------358
Vertical Speed Reference----------------------------------358
Vertical track-------------------------------------------------423
VFR code-----------------------------------------------------121
VNAV Target Altitude-------------------------------- 365–368
VNAV Target Altitude Capture Mode--------------------368
VNV guidance
Enabling---------------------------------------------------223
VNV Indications---------------------------------------------- 53
VOL annunciation-------------------------------------------124
Volume-------------------------------------------------------409
Volume level
ADF-------------------------------------------------- 115, 117
VOR-----------------------------------------------------------167
VOR selection------------------------------------------------111
VRP---------------------------------------------------- 169, 170
VS TGT--------------------------------------------------------224
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
W
AFCS
WAAS---------------------------------------------------------453
Warning Messages-----------------------------------------422
Waypoint
Automatic sequencing----------------------------------455
Skipping---------------------------------------------------455
Waypoint Selection Submenu---------------------- 181, 196
Wind----------------------------------------------------------153
Wind Information, PFD-------------------------------------- 67
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
X
APPENDICES
XM radio---------------------------------------------- 406, 407
XM radio active channel-----------------------------------408
XM radio entertainment-----------------------------------127
XM radio presets--------------------------------------------409
XM radio service class--------------------------------------407
INDEX
190-02284-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
I-5
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
INDEX
Blank Page
I-6
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Mooney M20U & M20V
190-02284-00 Rev. A
®
G1000
Pilot’s Guide
Garmin (Europe) Ltd.
Liberty House, Hounsdown Business Park
Southampton, Hampshire SO40 9LR U.K.
Garmin AT, Inc.
2345 Turner Road SE
Salem, OR 97302, U.S.A.
Garmin Corporation
No. 68, Zhangshu 2nd Road
Xizhi District, New Taipei City, Taiwan
www.flygarmin.com
Mooney M20U & M20V
Garmin International, Inc.
1200 East 151st Street
Olathe, Kansas 66062, U.S.A.
190-02284-00
Revision A
®
Pilot’s Guide
Mooney M20U & M20V
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising